JP2022132613A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suitably increasing the attention level to a game.

SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine is provided with a main control device that executes main control for a game. In the main control device, holding information is acquired on the basis of a winning to an operation port provided in the game area. The acquired holding information is configured to be stored until a predetermined number is achieved, and a display screen 253a of a symbol display device has a holding display area NE in which the same number of holding icons MP as that of the stored holding information can be displayed. The holding display area NE has a holding number display area Da in which a plurality of unit holding areas are combined and an execution target display area Db in which the holding icon MP to be executed is displayed. As a mode in which the holding icon MP moves from the holding number display area Da to the execution target display area Db, a mode is provided in which the following holding icon MP moves by jumping over the preceding holding icon MP.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 122

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays patterns on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a prize is won in an operation port provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state. Variable display is started. When the lottery is won, a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a special game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-074175 A

In recent years, various efforts have been made to raise the level of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the level of attention paid to games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing attention to games.

The present invention
A starting ball entry section provided in the game area;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section;
Acquired information storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the obtained information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information in a predetermined order;
a pattern display unit having a display unit capable of variably displaying a pattern, the display unit stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the result of determination by the determination unit;
a game state transition means for shifting a game state to a special game state when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information;
A number of pending images corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means are displayed in a pending display area, and the pending images displayed in the pending display area are displayed in accordance with the progress of the game. and holding display control means for moving to the judgment target display area,
The holding display control means is
Under the condition that a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the obtained information storage means and a plurality of reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, the pieces of special information are subject to judgment by the judgment means in the predetermined order. a first moving means for moving the pending images being displayed from the pending display area to the determination target display area in the same order as the predetermined order,
Under the condition that a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the obtained information storage means and a plurality of reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, the pieces of special information are subject to judgment by the judgment means in the predetermined order. and second moving means for moving the pending images being displayed from the pending display area to the determination target display area in an order different from the predetermined order.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention to the game.

1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of an inner frame. It is a front view showing the configuration of the game board unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board unit from the back. It is a rear view which shows the structure of an inner frame. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows a back pack unit. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. It is a schematic diagram showing the winning probability for each setting. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a success/failure table for the low-probability mode; It is a schematic diagram showing a hit/fail table for high probability mode. (a), (b) Schematic diagram showing a distribution table, (c) Schematic diagram showing the relationship between the winning type and the support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows a prize-winning process for operation openings. It is a flow chart which shows information acquisition processing. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by an MPU of a main control device; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing data setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable display time setting process; It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure which concerns on an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus and a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display control process by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. 10 is a flow chart showing a change start process; (a) A schematic diagram showing types of variable display modes, (b) a schematic diagram showing an outline of each variable display mode. It is a block diagram which shows a monitoring apparatus and the structure relevant to it. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a main controller and a configuration related thereto; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by the MPU of the main control unit; 4 is a timing chart showing switching of setting change permission/inhibition; 9A is a flow chart showing initial command output processing in the second embodiment; FIG. 9B is a flow chart showing setting change processing; FIG. (a) A schematic diagram showing codes included in an initial command and a setting change command, (b) a flowchart showing a prize ball command setting process, and (c) a schematic diagram showing information contained in a prize ball command. (a) A flow chart showing a command correspondence process executed by the MPU of the payout control device, (b) a flow chart showing a set value comparison process executed by the monitoring device in the third embodiment. (A) A flowchart showing the abnormality notification setting process executed by the MPU of the notification/production control device in the fourth embodiment, (b) The abnormality notification process executed by the MPU of the notification/production control device It is a flow chart showing. (a) A schematic diagram showing the winning probability to the general winning opening, (b) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the winning probability and the setting. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing differences in normal range for each setting; (a) A schematic diagram showing a monitoring device according to a fifth embodiment, (b) a schematic diagram showing information stored in a temporary storage area of the monitoring device. It is a flowchart which shows the process for abnormality alerting|reporting performed by MPU of alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between settings and reference information; FIG. (a) A schematic diagram showing an electrical configuration in a sixth embodiment, (b) a schematic diagram showing a relationship between a set value and a correction coefficient. It is a flowchart which shows the process for abnormality alerting|reporting performed by MPU of the alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of abnormality alerting|reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the process for abnormality alert cancellation|release performed by MPU of alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a monitoring device; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an abnormality notification canceling process executed by the MPU of the main control unit in the eighth embodiment; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a setting change process; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing; (a) A block diagram showing a configuration related to transmission and reception of information indicating a set value in the ninth embodiment, (b) showing an effect setting process for generating an outlier reach that is executed by the MPU of the notification/effect control device It is a flow chart. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of display effect; It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting value and the symbol combination in the case of performing the off Super Reach C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a setting suggestion propriety determination table; (a) Schematic diagram showing the relationship between the number of pending and the stop display time of the symbol combination in the tenth embodiment, (b) Schematic diagram showing the flow of effects. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process for loss reach generation performed by MPU of the alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the number of games played and the criterion number of times. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable display time setting process executed by the MPU of the main control device in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between variable display time and setting suggestion; It is a flow chart showing the effect setting process for the occurrence of out reach. It is a schematic diagram showing a final stop symbol combination determination table for out reach. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the final stop symbol combination and the content of setting suggestions. (a) A schematic diagram showing an electrical configuration in a thirteenth embodiment, (b) a schematic diagram showing a setting key and a setting key switch. (a) A schematic diagram showing a setting value changing procedure, (b) a schematic diagram showing a setting value confirmation procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU of a monitoring apparatus. 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU of the main control device; 3(a) is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the MPU of the monitoring device, and (b) is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing. 4 is a timing chart showing the flow of changing set values; 4 is a timing chart showing the flow of changing set values; 4 is a timing chart showing the flow of confirmation of set values; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration in a fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU of the main control device; 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing executed by the MPU of the main control unit; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the MPU of the main controller; 9 is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between a main controller and a monitoring device in setting random numbers; It is a perspective view of the game ball shooting handle in the fifteenth embodiment as seen from the front side of the gaming machine. It is a side view of the game ball shooting handle. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation mode determination process performed by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. (a) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the prescribed number of operations and the success/failure result. (b) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting value and setting suggestion. It is a flowchart which shows the process for continuous operation correspondence production|presentation performed by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a game. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the configuration related to setting suggestion; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the configuration related to setting suggestion; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the configuration related to setting suggestion; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing information acquisition processing executed by the MPU of the main control unit in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for reservation advance notices. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command setting processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing for suspension notice production performed by MPU of information / production control device. (a) A schematic diagram showing a non-explicit advance notice effect, (b) A schematic diagram showing an explicit advance notice effect. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the set value and the degree of advantage when the winning probability is within the reference range; (a) Schematic diagram showing setting suggestion, (b) Schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting value and the display probability of the setting suggestion image. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between changes in the number of pending acquisitions that accompany game progress and correction targets; It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for a setting suggestion performed by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting suggestion probability and the number of pending acquisitions; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a modification regarding correction of setting suggestion probabilities; (a) A front view of the game board unit of the seventeenth embodiment, (b) a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the operating port unit, and (c) a front view of the main display unit. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration related to hold display; It is a flowchart which shows the pending|holding command and shift command correspondence process which are performed by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for pending|holding notice effects performed by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting suggestion performed by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing pending display control command handling processing executed by the MPU of the display control device; FIG. (a) A flowchart showing pending display control processing executed by the MPU of the display control device, (b) a flowchart showing display mode switching processing executed by the MPU of the display control processing. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a display form of the number of reservations display area in the normal display mode, (b) is a schematic diagram showing a display form of the number of reservations display area in the special display mode. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing how a normal display mode is switched to a special display mode; It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship of each unit pending display area. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing how a special display mode is switched to a normal display mode; 4 is a flowchart showing pending display processing executed by the MPU of the display control device; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of shifting of pending icons in normal display mode; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing display patterns corresponding to setting suggestions; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an update pattern of pending display in a special display mode; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a modification of setting suggestions in a special display mode; It is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the pending number display area in the special display mode. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram showing an outline of a suspension notice effect according to the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. (a) A schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the first type notice effect, (b) A schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the second type notice effect. It is a schematic diagram showing the types of the first type of notice effect and the second type of notice effect. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a first type notice effect B; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a second type of advance notice effect B; It is a flow chart which shows setting processing for suspension notice production performed by MPU of information / production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the suspension|holding notice pattern determination process performed by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st kind notice production|presentation B setting process performed by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd kind notice production|presentation B setting process performed by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 1st kind notice production|presentation B performed by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 2nd kind notice production|presentation B performed by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus.

<First Embodiment>
A first form of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded state. 2, the configuration within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main section 12 attached to the outer frame 11 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting a long frame material to four sides, and is formed so as to form a rectangular frame shape as a whole. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to have the outer frame 11, and the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with the outer frame 11 on an island facility or the like of the game hall.

The gaming machine main section 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. Specifically, an upper supporting metal fitting 17 is fixed to a connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a lower support bracket 17 is fixed to a connecting portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11. A side support fitting 18 is provided. A support mechanism is constituted by these upper support metal fittings 17 and lower support metal fittings 18, and the main part 12 of the game machine rotates to the outer frame 11 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front. , and can be rotated forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the right side as the tip of rotation (see FIGS. 3 and 4).

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the gaming machine main section 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a door frame 14 arranged behind the inner frame 13. A back pack unit 15 is provided. In addition, the inner frame 13 of the game machine main portion 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the game machine.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base side and the right side as the rotation tip side in the front view of the game machine. In addition, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable backward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the game machine. there is

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a frame body 20 made of synthetic resin whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers substantially the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. there is A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame 20 so that substantially the entire game area PE, which will be described later, can be visually recognized from the front. It is closed from the rear side of the front door frame 14.例文帳に追加

The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23 . A partition portion is formed in the glass holder to partition the holding area of the glass panel 23 in the front and rear direction, and the two glass panels 23 face each other in the front and rear direction with the partition portion interposed therebetween. In other words, by securing a predetermined gap between both glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, and the glass panels 23 doubly cover the game area PE from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加state.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20 . Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, in view of the improvement of safety and security, it is preferable to adopt a plurality of glass panels and to face each glass panel in the front and rear with a predetermined gap therebetween. Incidentally, it is also possible to employ a transparent synthetic resin panel member in place of the glass panel.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, along the periphery of the window portion 21, an annular decorative portion 26 containing light emitting means such as an LED is provided. The annular illumination portion 26 lights up or flashes according to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined reach is reached. Further, an error display lamp portion 27 is provided at the top of the pachinko machine 10 at the center of the annular illumination portion 26, and lights up when a problem such as an error occurs. A prize ball lamp part 28 that lights up is provided. In addition, speaker units 29 for outputting sound effects, BGM, etc. according to the game state are provided at positions close to the left and right winning ball lamp units 28 (see FIG. 3). In the speaker unit 29, the monotony of the game is suppressed by switching the BGM or the like according to the game state.

Below the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32, which bulge forward, are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower plate 34 that similarly opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32 (see FIG. 2). The upper tray 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later, aligning them in a line, and guiding them to a game ball shooting mechanism described later. In addition, the lower plate 34 has a function of storing game balls that have become surplus in the upper plate 33 and a game ball that has not reached the game area PE (see FIG. 3) among the game balls shot by the game ball shooting mechanism. It has a function as a receptacle for storing the ejected game balls when the balls are returned to the player.

An operation button 35 that is operated (more specifically, a pressing operation or a pressing operation) by the player is provided at a portion of the upper bulging portion 31 that is located in front of the upper plate 33 (game ball storage area). The operation button 35 is an operation device for the player to give a predetermined instruction during the course of the game for the purpose of performing a predetermined effect on a display screen of a symbol display device, which will be described later.

A game ball shooting handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower swelling portion 32 so as to protrude forward. By operating the game ball shooting handle 41, a game ball is shot from a game ball shooting mechanism which will be described later. The shooting speed of the game ball increases as the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) of the game ball shooting handle 41 increases. It reaches the area PE. Further, by adjusting this operation amount by the player, it becomes possible to separate the hitting of the game ball into the right route and the left route, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3 , a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the rear surface of the front door frame 14 . The passage forming unit 45 is molded of synthetic resin and has a front door side upper tray passage leading to the upper tray 33 and a front door side lower tray passage leading to the lower tray 34 . In the passage forming unit 45, a receptacle projecting rearward and open upward is formed at an upper corner of the passage forming unit 45, and the receptacle is divided into left and right by a partition wall to form the entrance of the front door side upper tray passage. A section and an entrance section of the front door side lower tray passage are partitioned. The upstream side of the front door side upper tray passage and the front door side lower tray passage communicates with a game ball distribution section to be described later. A game ball entering the plate passage is guided to a lower plate 34. - 特許庁

Projection shafts are provided at the upper end and the lower end of the rear surface of the front door frame 14 on the rotation base end side. These projecting shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13 .

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the inner frame 13. FIG. In FIG. 5, as in FIG. 3, the configuration inside the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

(Inner frame 13)
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 50 having a substantially rectangular outer shape like the outer frame 11 . The height dimension of the inner frame base body 50 is set slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11 . Also, the inner frame base body 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11 , and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base body 50 . A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The curtain board is arranged below the inner frame base body 50 (more specifically, its lower end), and when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base body 50 is placed on the curtain board. It will be posted. A slight clearance may be provided between the curtain plate and the inner frame base body 50 for the purpose of preventing mutual interference.

Support metal fittings 71 and 72 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the front face of the inner frame base body 50 on the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 5). Although not shown, the support metal fittings 71 and 72 have shafts, and by inserting bearings provided on the front door frame 14 into the shafts, the front door frame is attached to the inner frame 13 . 14 is rotatably supported.

A locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is arranged on the rotating tip side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame base body 50 . The locking device 75 extends vertically along the right end of the inner frame base body 50 (vertical frame member to be described later), and front door hook members 76 are scattered in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction). have. Hook receiving members 49 (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 on the inner frame base member 50 have slits for protruding to the front side of the inner frame 13 corresponding to the front door hook members 76 respectively. formed in this way. The front door hook members 76 protruding through the slits are engaged with hook receiving members 49 provided on the front door frame 14 in one-to-one correspondence with the front door hook members 76, whereby the front door is opened. The frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. The locking device 75 also has an inner frame hook member 77 extending rearward of the inner frame 13 . The main part 12 of the game machine is locked with respect to the outer frame 11 in a closed state by hooking these inner frame hook members 77 on the hook receiving member 19 fixed to the outer frame 11 .

A cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75 is installed on the inner frame base body 50 (locking device 75 ). The cylinder lock 78 is provided separately from the locking unit (the hook members 76 and 77, the interlocking rod, etc.) that constitutes the main part of the locking device 75, and is arranged adjacent to the locking unit. When the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned right (clockwise), the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned left (counterclockwise). , and the locking of the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released.

A housing recess 51 for housing the game board unit 80 is formed in the central portion of the inner frame base body 50 . The housing recess is recessed toward the rear of the game machine according to the outer shape of the game board unit 80, and the game board unit 80 is fixed by a manual lock mechanism in a state of being fitted into the housing recess 51 from the front of the game machine. A substantially rectangular window hole 52 is formed in the bottom of the housing recess 51 , and the rear structure of the game board unit 80 (a rear block 80 b described later) protrudes rearward of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 52 . . It should be noted that almost the entire window hole 52 is covered from the front of the game machine by the game board unit 80 attached to the inner frame base body 50 .

(Game board unit 80)
The game board unit 80 includes a game area formation body 80a in which a game area PE is formed on the front side in which game balls flow down, and a game area formation body 80a provided on the back side of the game area formation body 80a. device, movable performance mechanism, decorative member capable of emitting light, etc.) are integrated with the back block 80b in which the base body 251 is mounted. The game area forming body 80a is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the front portion of the back block 80b is visible through the game area forming body 80a.

As already explained, the game area PE is covered with the glass unit 22 (specifically, the glass panel 23 on the rear side). The glass unit 22 is arranged so that the gap between the rear side glass panel 23 and the front surface of the game area forming body 80a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, the game ball flowing down the game area PE are arranged so as not to line up in front and back at the same location. This suppresses ball clogging in the game area PE.

The game board unit 80 (in particular, various configurations arranged in the game area PE of the game area forming body 80a) will be described below with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8. FIG. 6 is a front view of the game board unit 80, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 as seen from the rear.

The game area forming body 80a is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its thickness direction (front-rear direction). As shown in FIG. 6, each opening is provided with a general winning opening 81, a variable winning device 82, operating openings 83a and 83b, a through gate 84, and the like. When a game ball enters the general winning hole 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operation holes 83a, 83b, the game ball is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each ball entry part, and the detection result is obtained. A privilege such as a predetermined number of prize balls (distribution of game balls) is given to the player. In addition, an out port 89 is provided at the bottom of the game area formation body 80a, and game balls that have not entered various ball entry portions are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 89. In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball entering the out hole 89, the game ball entering the general winning hole 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating holes 83a and 83b will be referred to as "winning". express.

In addition, a large number of game nails 93 are planted in the game area forming body 80a in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow-down path of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills 94 are arranged. It is The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations such as the game nail 93 and the windmill 94, and adjustment is made so that the above-described general prize winning opening 81 and the like are won with an appropriate probability.

A central opening 85 is formed in the center of the game area forming body 80a, and a transparent opening cover 86 is attached so as to cover the central opening 85 from the back side of the game area forming body 80a. A variable display unit 252 belonging to the rear block 80b is positioned behind the central opening 85, and the variable display unit 252 and the like are visible from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening 85 (opening cover 86). there is In FIG. 6, for convenience of explanation, the opening cover 86 is indicated by a chain double-dashed line, showing a state in which the variable display unit 252 is visible.

Activation openings 83a and 83b, a through gate 84, and the like are arranged around the central opening 85. As shown in FIG. The operating ports 83a and 83b are composed of an upper operating port 83a provided below the variable display unit 252 and a lower operating port 83b provided immediately below the upper operating port 83a. The (lottery trigger ball entry portion) 83b is provided with an electric accessory 91 as an opening/closing type ball entry assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening/closing member (opening/closing means). The electric accessory 91 has a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit for driving the movable piece. By changing the position of the movable piece by the drive unit, the ball enters the lower operation opening 83b. It is possible to switch between an open state (assisted state) in which it is possible or easy, and a closed state (non-assisted state) in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the same ball.

In the game area PE, the through gate 84 is arranged at a position upstream of the lower operation opening 83b (specifically, on the side of the variable display unit 252), and the passage of the game ball through the through gate 84 is used as a trigger. If the lottery is won, the electric accessory 91 is switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

When a ball enters the upper working port 83a, three game balls are put out, and when a ball enters the lower working port 83b, four game balls are put out. However, the number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, for example, in order to increase the advantage of the lower working port 83b over the upper working port 83a, it is preferable to set the number of payouts related to the lower working port 83b larger than the number of payouts related to the upper working port 83a.

The variable winning device (special ball entry device or special ball entry means) 82 is formed with a large winning opening that leads to the back side of the game area forming body 80a, and an opening/closing member (opening/closing member) that opens and closes the large winning opening. means) is provided. The opening/closing door can be switched between an open state (assisted state) in which entry of a game ball is possible or facilitated, and a closed state (non-assisted state) in which entry of a game ball is impossible or difficult. In addition, the opening and closing door is connected to a variable prize winning driving unit (more specifically, a solenoid) provided on the back side of the game area forming body 80a. In the case of winning the transition to the opening and closing execution mode (opening and closing execution state) (jackpot: when the result is a transition to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state) so that it can be switched to the open state It has become.

Here, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a jackpot is won. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 82 in the open/close execution mode, for example, a plurality of rounds (eg, 4, 8, 16 rounds), where one round is defined as the elapse of a predetermined time (eg, 30 sec) or the winning of a predetermined number (eg, 10). is set so that the opening of the open/close door is repeated.

Here, a supplementary description of the variable display unit 252 will be given. The variable display unit 252 has a symbol display device 253 that variably displays (variably displays) symbols triggered by the winning of the operation ports 83a and 83b. The pattern display device 253 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and its display contents are controlled by a display control device which will be described later. On the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, for example, patterns are displayed side by side in the top, middle, and bottom, and these patterns are variably displayed by being scrolled in the horizontal direction. When a jackpot is won, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset effective line, and the opening/closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot) is entered. The pattern display device 253 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix display device or a 7-segment display device.

A center frame 95 is provided in the game area forming body 80a so as to surround the central opening 85. As shown in FIG. The center frame 95 is fixed to the game area forming body 80a (specifically, a plate) from its front side, and in this fixed state, it stands up from the front of the game area forming body 80a. , the clearance between the center frame 95 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area PE is prevented from colliding with the pattern display device 253, and the flowing path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is set to the right side of the variable display unit 252 (specifically, the center frame 95). It is roughly divided into a route that bypasses from the left side and a route that bypasses from the left side.

A stage portion is formed on the upper surface of the frame portion forming the lower portion of the center frame 95 so that the game ball can roll left and right. Game balls that flow in from inlets formed in the left and right frame portions of the center frame 95 are discharged onto the stage portion through warp passages also formed in the center frame 95 . The stage portion is configured so that the game ball that reaches the stage portion relatively easily flows into the upper operation port 83a, and the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on the stage portion is improved. contributes to

Here, in this embodiment, as described above, the central opening 85 is covered with the transparent opening cover 86 so that the game ball reaching the stage portion does not move toward the rear block 80b (variable display unit 252). regulated by

A first holding lamp portion 98a and a second holding lamp portion 98b are provided on the front surface of the frame portion forming the lower portion of the center frame 95. As shown in FIG. The first holding lamp portion 98a on the left side corresponds to the upper operating port 83a, and the number of times the game ball passes through the upper operating port 83a is held up to four times. It is now displayed. The second holding lamp portion 98b on the right side corresponds to the lower operating port 83b, and the number of times the game ball passes through the lower operating port 83b is held up to four times, and the number of holdings is increased by lighting the second holding lamp portion 98b. is displayed.

The operation openings 83a and 83b are arranged at positions close to the central opening 85 (variable display unit 252). Since the transition to the special game state can be triggered by the winning of the operation ports 83a, 83b, the player pays attention to whether the operation ports 83a, 83b win or not, and grasps whether or not to shift to the special game state. Therefore, it is considered that attention is focused on the pattern display device 253 . The actuation openings 83a and 83b are provided near the variable display unit 252 as a means of concentrating on the periphery of the variable display unit 252 where the player wants to pay attention.

A game area partitioning member 99 that partitions and forms the game area PE together with a guide rail 100, which will be described later, is arranged at the right end of the game area forming body 80a (rotating tip of the game board unit 80, which will be described later). The game area partitioning member 99 is provided with a stopper member against which game balls flying along the main display unit 87 and the guide rail 100 collide. The stopper member is a buffer member arranged near the tip of the guide rail 100, and the game ball that collides with the stopper member is weakened and then flows down the game area PE. In other words, the stopper member is provided with a force reducing function for weakening the force of the game ball that collides with it.

Here, a supplementary description of the main display unit 87 will be given. The main display unit 87 is embedded in the game area partitioning member 99 , and a part thereof is arranged so as to face the glass unit 22 . A main display section on which a predetermined pattern or the like is displayed is provided in the facing portion. The main display unit 87 is electrically connected to a main control device, which will be described later, and the display contents of the main display section are controlled by the main control device.

The main display portion includes an upper working port display portion for displaying the lottery result based on the winning at the upper working port 83a, and a lower working port display portion for displaying the lottery result based on the winning at the lower working port 83b. and a display. In the display unit for the upper working port, the winning of the upper working port 83a triggers the variable display of the pattern, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working port 83a is performed. The results are made explicit. When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the upper operation port 83a is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the display unit for the upper operation port stops the variable display, and the stop result is a predetermined result. is displayed, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

In the display unit for the lower working port, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the lower working port 83b as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working port 83b is performed. The results are made explicit. When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the lower operating port 83b is the winning result corresponding to the big win, the variable display is stopped in the lower operating port display unit, and a predetermined pattern is displayed as the stop result. After that, according to the result, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

Here, based on the winning of any one of the operation openings 83a and 83b, the corresponding operation opening display portion starts the variable display, and after the pattern corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the pattern is stopped. Until a predetermined stop display time (stop display period or fixed display period) elapses while being displayed (until the fixed display ends) corresponds to one game cycle. However, one game round is not limited to the above contents, for example, a single display area is provided, and even if a prize is won in any of the operation openings 83a and 83b, the single display area is displayed. In the configuration where the variable display is performed in the display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, and after the variable display is stopped with the predetermined stop result displayed, until the fixed display is completed. can be set to be one of the game rounds.

In addition to the above two display sections, the main display section of the main display unit 87 is also provided with a through-gate display section for displaying the lottery result based on the winning of the through-gate 84 . In the through-gate display unit, the winning of the through-gate 84 triggers the variable display of the pattern, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through-gate 84 is clearly indicated. be done. When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the through gate 84 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric duty open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display unit and the variable display is not performed. After being stopped, it shifts to the power release state. In the electric operation open state, the electric accessory 91 provided in the lower operation opening 83b is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times the game ball passes through the through gate 84 is retained up to four times, and the number of times the game ball is retained is displayed on the main display portion of the main display unit 87. A pending number display is provided.

The main display section described in detail above is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and game balls are prevented from moving in front of these various display sections. Therefore, its visibility is guaranteed.

Referring again to FIG. 5, the structure of the inner frame 13 will be described. Below the game board unit 80 in the inner frame base body 50, a game ball is shot into the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball shooting handle 41. A game ball shooting mechanism 110 for shooting is provided.

(Game ball launching mechanism 110)
The game ball shooting mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 for shooting a game ball placed at a predetermined shooting standby position, a shooting rail 112 for defining the shooting direction of the game ball shot by the solenoid 111, and a game ball at the shooting standby position. A ball feeding device 113 that supplies balls and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as main components. It is integrated with the inner frame base body 50 .

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an oblique state so as to be inclined upward toward the game area forming body 80a. A groove portion having a substantially V-shaped cross section is formed in the launch rail 112, and a game ball is fitted in the groove portion so that the front and rear positions of the game ball are defined.

At a position near the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the launch rail 112, a ball stopper is arranged to stop the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the launch standby position described above. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

Solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply and launch control device, which will be described later. By reciprocating the output shaft of the solenoid 111 in the expansion and contraction direction based on the output of the electrical signal from the power supply/shooting control device, the game ball placed at the shooting standby position moves to the side of the game area forming body 80a. is launched toward the guide rail 100 attached to the game area forming body 80a.

The guide rail 100 partitions the game area PE together with the game area partitioning member 99 fixed to the game area forming body 80a (specifically, the front surface of the plate) so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. there is In addition, the guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 which are arranged to face each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball. It is The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion 104 opened to the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112 and an exit portion 105 located above the game area PE. A game ball shot based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the shooting rail 112→the guide rail 100 (the entrance portion 104→the exit portion 105). In addition, in the game area forming body 80a, on the front side of the exit portion 105, more specifically, in the vicinity of the tip of the inner rail 101, a return prevention member 106 that prevents the game ball that has reached the game area PE from returning into the guide passage 103. is attached to suppress the following game ball from being hindered by the game ball reaching the game area PE first.

Each of the rails 101 and 102 that constitute the guide rail 100 has an arcuate shape about the center of the game area PE. Therefore, the game ball passing through the guide passage 103 is likely to move (sliding or rolling) along the outer rail 102, that is, while in contact with the outer rail 102 due to the centrifugal force generated by itself. In other words, when the game ball is launched so as to reach the game area PE, the area along the outer rail 102 in the guide path 103 constitutes a passage area (passage route) through which the game ball passes. However, the area along the inner rail 101 is substantially an area through which the game ball does not pass.

As shown in FIG. 5, the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other obliquely across the lower edge of the game area forming body 80a. are placed in In other words, both rails 100 and 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are laterally shifted near the lower edge of the play area forming body 80a. As a result, both rails 100 and 112 are brought closer to the lower edge of the game area forming body 80a, while a gap of a predetermined distance is formed between the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112. As shown in FIG.

A foul ball passage is arranged below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage is formed integrally with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14 . If the game balls shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return in the guide path 103 as foul balls, the foul balls enter the foul ball path through the gap. Become. The foul ball passage communicates with the front door side lower tray passage, and the game ball entering the foul ball passage is discharged to the lower tray 34 shown in FIG. This suppresses interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be launched next.

A rail cover 107 is provided at the left end of the game area forming body 80a so as to cover the outer rail 102 from the side. The game board unit 80 is often handled singly during manufacturing or maintenance work, and at this time, the outer rail 102 may collide with the game table or the like. The rail cover 107 is a member mounted in consideration of such circumstances, and has a protective function to prevent the outer rail 102 from being deformed due to the factors described above.

A through hole is formed in the inner frame base body 50 on the left side of the firing rail 112 (specifically, on the side supporting the front door frame 14) to penetrate the inner frame base body 50 in the front-rear direction. A passage forming member 121 is arranged in the . The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base body 50 and has a main body side upper tray passage 122 and a main body side lower tray passage 123 . The upstream side of the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123 communicates with a game ball distribution section which will be described later. In addition, below the passage forming member 121, the socket portion of the passage forming unit attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted, and below the main body side upper plate passage 122, the front door side upper plate passage is arranged, A front door side upper tray passage is arranged below the main body side lower tray passage 123 .

Below the passage forming member 121 in the inner frame base body 50, an opening/closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123 is attached. The opening/closing member 124 is urged to a front position to close the upper tray passage 122 and the lower tray passage 123 on the main body side. By being in the closed state, game balls are prevented from falling out of the passages 122 and 123.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the open/close member 124 is pushed open by the receptacle provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14 against the urging force. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the front door side upper tray passage communicate with each other, and further, the main body side lower tray passage 123 and the front door side lower tray passage communicate with each other.

Next, the rear configuration of the inner frame 13 (the inner frame base body 50 and the game board unit 80) will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8, a bearing metal fitting 132 is attached to the back surface of the inner frame base body 50 on the rotation base end side (the right side in FIG. 8). Bearing portions 133 are formed on the bearing metal fitting 132 so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction. A plurality of fixing levers 134 are provided on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 50 in a closed state.

As already explained, the bottom portion of the accommodation recess (game board accommodation portion) 51 in the inner frame base body 50 is penetrated in the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50 and opened to the back side of the inner frame base body 50. A window hole 52 is formed, and the window hole 52 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80 housed in the housing recess 51 . Various components such as a control device are mounted on the back surface of the game board unit 80 (back block 80 b ), and these various components are exposed on the back side of the inner frame 13 through the window holes 52 . Here, the configuration of the rear surface of the game board unit 80 will be described.

As already explained, the back block 80b is attached to the back of the game area forming body 80a. The back block 80b has a substantially box-shaped base body 251 opened to the side of the game area forming body 80a, and the base body 251 is fixed to the back side of the game area forming body 80a to form a game area. The body 80a and the back block 80b are integrated.

The front side of the base body 251 serves as an arrangement area for a movable performance mechanism, decorative members capable of emitting light, etc., and the rear side thereof serves as a control device for controlling these various configurations and the variable display unit 252 (a pattern display device). 253).

More specifically, a portion of the base body 251 protrudes toward the back side of the inner frame base body 50, and the above-described pattern display device 253 (see FIG. 6) and its pattern display device are attached to the protruding portion. A display controller for driving H.253 is attached. The pattern display device 253 and the display control device are stacked in the front-rear direction (thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50) so that the pattern display device is on the front side and the display control device is on the rear side. Further, a notification/effect control device 140 is mounted on the rear surface of the base body 251 so as to be positioned behind the display control device.

The notification/effect control device 140 is equipped with a notification/effect control board that controls the output of sound, lamp display, and display control device in accordance with instructions from the main control device described later, and the notification/effect control board is transparent. It is housed in a board box 141 made of resin material or the like.

A main control device unit 160 is provided below the notification/production control device 140 so as to cover the base body 96 from behind. The main controller unit 160 has a synthetic resin mount 161 fixed to the back of the game board unit 80 (specifically, the back block 80b) and a main controller 162 mounted on the mount 161. there is The main control device 162 is provided with a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that governs the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power supply, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a board box 163 made of the like.

The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a box sealing portion 164 as sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of box sealing portions 164 are provided on the short sides of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box sealing portion 164 as long as the box base and the box cover are combined in an unopenable manner. The base and box cover are adapted to be unopenably joined. The sealing process by the box sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and even if unauthorized opening should occur, such a situation can be detected early and easily. It is possible to perform the sealing process again even after the package has been opened. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pin into at least one locking hole of the plurality of box sealing portions 164 . When the circuit board box 163 is to be opened, such as when a problem occurs with the main control circuit board housed therein or when the main control circuit board is inspected, the connecting portion between the box sealing portion into which the locking pin is inserted and the circuit board box 163 body is opened. disconnect. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 163 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, a locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If the history of the opening of the circuit board box 163 is left in the circuit board box 163, it can be easily found that the circuit board box 163 has been illegally opened.

The board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are unopenably connected by a pedestal sealing portion 165 . More specifically, the pedestal sealing portion 165 has locking holes and locking pins in the same manner as the box sealing portion 164 . The mounting base 161 is connected inseparably. As a result, when the board box 163 is illegally removed, the fact can be easily grasped.

A key hole through which a setting change key is inserted is formed in a portion of the front portion of the main controller 162 (the portion facing the rear of the game machine) that avoids overlapping with a back pack 201, which will be described later. A key switch 167, a setting change switch 166, and a set value display section 168 are provided. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of stages (more specifically, three stages) of jackpot probability are provided, and the setting change key inserted into the setting key switch 167 is set to the ON position. The set value is changed by operating the setting change switch 166 in the arranged state (ON state). While the setting change key is placed at the ON position, the currently selected set value is displayed on the set value display section 168, and the operator can change the setting while visually confirming the set value. It has become.

In the front part of the base body 251, the part facing the lower back surface of the game area forming body 80a corresponds to the game board openings of the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operation openings 83a and 83b, and downstream. A collection passage (not shown) is formed to gather at one place on the side. As a result, all the winning game balls such as the general winning opening 81 are gathered under the game board unit 80 through the recovery path. That is, the base body 251 is provided with a function of collecting game balls that have entered various winning holes.

A discharge passage, which will be described later, is arranged below the game board unit 80, and the game balls collected under the game board unit 80 are discharged into the discharge passage by the collection passage. It should be noted that the out port 89 is similarly connected to the discharge passage, and game balls that have not won in any of the prize winning ports are drawn out into the discharge passage through the out port 89 .

Further, the base body 251 constituting the rear block 80b includes, as detection sensors for the respective ball entry portions described above, a detection sensor for a general prize winning opening for detecting a game ball that has entered the general prize winning opening 81, and an operation opening 83a. , 83b, and a detection sensor for an operation port for detecting a game ball that has entered 83b. These various detection sensors constitute a winning detection mechanism. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main controller 162 , and each detection sensor outputs detection information (detection signal) to the main controller 162 .

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from behind by a back pack unit 15. As shown in FIG. The back pack unit 15 has a back pack 201 as a main body of the back pack unit 15. To the back pack 201, a payout mechanism 202, a discharge passage board, and a controller assembly unit 204 are attached. .

The back pack 201 is molded from a synthetic resin having transparency, and as shown in FIG. 10, has a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion protruding to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. 212. The protective cover part 212 has a shape in which left and right sides and an upper surface are closed and only a lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 252 (see FIG. 9).

An external output terminal plate 213 is provided on the upper portion of the base portion 211 . Various output terminals are provided on the external output terminal plate 213, and a wiring WH1 connecting a management control device (hall computer HC) on the game hall side and the pachinko machine 10 is connected to the output terminals. Various signals output from the external output terminal plate 213 (output terminal) of the pachinko machine 10 are transmitted to the hall computer HC through the wiring WH1, and the hall computer HC determines the state of the pachinko machine 10, the game situation, etc. based on these various signals. It is configured to be understood.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower locking pins 214 at the right end as seen from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the locking pins 214 are provided on the inner frame 13. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by inserting it through the portion 133 . The base portion 211 is formed with a plurality of insertion portions through which the fixed levers 134 provided on the inner frame 13 are inserted. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by contact.

A payout mechanism part 202 is arranged on the base part 211 so as to bypass the protective cover part 212 . The payout mechanism unit 202 is provided with a tank 221 arranged on the top of the back pack 201 and opened upward, and the tank 221 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall. be. A tank rail 222 gently sloping downstream is connected to the side of the tank 221 , and a vertically extending case rail 223 is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222 . A dispensing device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223 . The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to the game ball distribution portion 225 provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 224 .

The game ball distribution unit 225 has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 224 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or a discharge passage to be described later, and the inner opening is the main body described above. It is formed so that it communicates with the upper tray 33 via the side upper tray passage 122 and the front door side upper tray passage, and the outer opening communicates with the lower tray 34 via the main body side lower tray passage 123 and the front door side lower tray passage. It is

At the lower end of the base portion 211, the discharge passage board and control device collective unit 204 is attached so as to sandwich the lower end in the front and rear direction. The discharge passage board has a rearwardly open discharge passage formed on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204 , and the opening of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204 . The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game balls to the island facilities of the game hall, etc., and the game balls drawn out from the collection passage or the like to the discharge passage pass through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Ejected.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base 241 on which a payout control device 242 and a power supply/launch control device 243 are mounted. The payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 242 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

In the payout control device 242, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 224 is accommodated in a board box 244, and a state return switch 245 provided on the payout control board protrudes outside the board box 244. For example, when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging occurs in the dispensing device 224, pressing the state return switch 245 clears the ball clogging.

The power/fire control device 243 has a power/fire control board housed in a board box 246 . The power supply/shooting control board generates and outputs a predetermined power supply required by various control devices, etc., and further controls the launching of game balls accompanying the operation of the game ball shooting handle 41 by the player. Specifically, drive control of the solenoid 111 constituting the game ball shooting mechanism 110 and drive control of the ball feeding device 113 are executed.

A power switch 247 is provided in the power/launch control device 243 . By operating the power switch 247, the power of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between an on state (on state) and a cut off state (off state).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a memory holding function of various data, and even in the event of a power failure, it retains the state at the time of the power failure and returns to the state at the time of the power failure when recovering from the power failure. It is possible. For example, when the power supply is cut off according to a normal procedure such as when the game hall is closed, the state before the cutoff is stored and held. On the other hand, when the power is turned on while pressing a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided on the main controller 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These various switches and the above-described setting change switch 166 can be operated from the front side of the game machine by opening the main part 12 (inner frame 13) of the game machine to expose the back part of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, when the locking device 75 restricts the opening of the game machine main section 12, the switches and the like cannot be operated from the front side of the game machine. In other words, the various switches described above are difficult to operate when the main part 12 of the game machine is closed. making it difficult.

(Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the blocks in FIG.

An MPU 402 is mounted on a main control board 401 provided in the main controller 162 . The MPU 402 is a ROM 403 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 402, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 403. It is an element containing a RAM 404, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. A part of the functions of the MPU 402, for example, the functions of the ROM 403 and the functions of the RAM 404 may be provided as separate elements.

The MPU 402 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 402 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 405 provided in the main controller 162, a payout controller 242, various detection sensors, and the like. A power supply/emission control device 243 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 405 , and power is supplied to the MPU 402 via the power failure monitoring board 405 .

As part of the various detection sensors, a winning detection sensor 391a that detects a ball (winning) entering the general winning opening 81, a winning detection sensor 391b that detects a ball (winning) entering the variable winning device 82, and a variable winning device 82. A winning detection sensor 391c that detects a ball (winning) entering the (large winning opening), a winning detection sensor 391d that detects a ball (winning) entering the upper working opening 83a, and a ball entering (winning) the lower working opening 83b. and a winning detection sensor 391f for detecting the entry (winning) of a ball into the through gate 84 are connected. ) is performed. Further, the MPU 402 executes a jackpot generating lottery based on winnings to the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b, and executes a support generating lottery based on winnings to the through gate 84. - 特許庁

The output side of the MPU 402 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 405, a payout control device 242 and a notification/production control device 140. A winning ball command is output to the payout control device 242 based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding ball entering portion such as the operation ports 83a and 83b described above, for example. In this case, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referred to when outputting the prize ball command. When the winning to the general winning opening 81 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 82 is specified, 15 game balls are output. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout is output, and when the winning to the upper operation port 83a is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output, and the winning to the lower operation port 83b is output. When specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, a variation end command, an opening command and an ending command are output from the main control device 162 to the notification/production control device 140 . In this case, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the above commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various types of information are included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

In addition, on the output side of the MPU 402, a variable winning driving unit that opens and closes the opening/closing body (for example, the shutter member 88) of the variable winning device 82, an electric accessory driving unit that opens and closes the electric accessory 91 of the lower operation opening 83b, and A main display unit 87 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 401, and the MPU 402 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

In other words, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 402 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section so that the variable winning device 82 is opened and closed. Further, when the support lottery for the electric accessory 91 is won, the MPU 402 executes drive control of the electric accessory driving unit so that the electric accessory 91 is opened and closed. Further, display control of the main display portion of the main display unit 87 is executed by the MPU 402 .

Furthermore, an external output terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 402. Through this external output terminal board 213, ball entry information to various ball entry sections is sent to the game hall side management control device (hall computer HC). Information about lottery results such as winnings and jackpots is output. This enables the hall computer HC to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10, the game situation, and the like.

The blackout monitoring board 405 relays between the main control board 401 and the power/launch control device 243, and the blackout monitoring board 405 has a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power/launch control device 243. is provided with the ability to monitor The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 224 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162 .

The power supply/launch control device 243 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 401, the payout control device 242, etc., generate the necessary operating power for each, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. do. The power/shooting control device 243 controls the shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 110, and the game ball shooting mechanism 110 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met.

The notification/effect control device 140 is provided with a notification/effect control board on which an MPU is mounted. The MPU has a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM. A RAM and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit are incorporated. It should be noted that it is not an essential configuration that the ROM and the RAM are integrated into one chip for the MPU, and they may be individually integrated into chips. The MPU of the notification/production control device 140 drives and controls the lamp portions 26 to 28 and the speaker portion 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and the display control device 410 is controlled.

The display control device 410 executes display control of the pattern display device 253 based on the command input from the notification/effect control device 140 . In this case, in the notification/effect control device 140, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, the pattern display device 253 fluctuates the display mode of the pattern (for example, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win effect, the content of the ready-to-win effect, etc.) and the pattern (the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed upon completion of the variable display) is determined.

Here, the configuration related to the variable display of symbols in each game cycle and the contents of the same variable display will be described. 12 and 13 will be referred to as needed in the following description. 12 and 13 are schematic diagrams for explaining the contents displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253. FIG.

The display control device 410 is provided with a character ROM. In the character ROM, data of 9 types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" (see FIGS. 12(a) to (i)) and data of sub-symbols without numbers. (see FIG. 12(j)) are stored in advance.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of upper, middle and lower rows are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. On the display screen 253a, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with periodicity.

In the upper pattern row Z1, 9 types of main patterns "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-design is arranged between each main design. In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 kinds of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the upper part, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13(b), the display screen 253a is designed so that 3 symbols are stopped for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3×3 are displayed stopped. It is designed to be Five effective lines are set on the display screen 253a, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a downward-sloping line L4, and an upward-sloping line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols with the same number) is formed on any of the activated lines. When the variable display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in this state, a big win moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal big win result or the probability variable big win result.

Considering that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). 2 pattern row), and the middle pattern row Z2 can be called a third pattern row (or a third pattern row).

Of the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a probability variable jackpot result occurs, for example, the same specific symbol combination is stopped. Also, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a normal jackpot result occurs, for example, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. be done.

It should be noted that the pattern display device 253 is not limited to the one described above and may be arbitrarily selected. can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be arranged horizontally, and the direction of the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows may be set in the vertical direction.

(About various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

During the game, the MPU 402 uses various counter information to set the jackpot generation lottery, the display setting of the main display unit 87 (main display section), the setting of the pattern display of the pattern display device 253, etc. Specifically, As shown in FIG. 14, the hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the occurrence of the big hit, the hit type counter C2 used to determine the jackpot type such as the result of the variable jackpot or the result of the normal jackpot, and the pattern display device 253 are removed. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach lottery when it fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, the operating opening display part of the main display unit 87, and the fluctuation in the pattern display device 253 A variation type counter CS that determines the display time (variation display period) is used. Further, an electric accessory open counter C4 is used for lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b is in the electric role open state.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 431 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 404 . The RAM 404 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 432 consisting of an upper working opening reservation area Ra, a lower working opening reservation area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total reserved number storage area. Then, in this reserved ball storage area 432, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is displayed in time series according to the winning history of the game ball to the upper operation opening 83a or the lower operation opening 83b. It is designed to be stored automatically.

More specifically, the hit random number counter C1 is configured such that it is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper working opening 83a or the lower working opening 83b. More specifically, it is stored in the upper working opening reservation area Ra of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 83a, and the lower working opening reservation area Rb of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower working opening 83b. stored in

Random number values for winning a jackpot are stored as a success/failure table (success/failure information group) in a success/failure table storage area 421 as success/failure information group storage means in the ROM 403 . As the right/wrong table, a right/wrong table for the low-probability mode (low-probability right/wrong information group) and a right/wrong table for the high-probability mode (high-probability right/wrong information group) are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode of the lottery means. The success/failure table for the low-probability mode and the success/failure table for the high-probability mode are provided for each set value, and the probability of a big win differs depending on the set value (see FIG. 15). Specifically, the low-probability mode success/failure table and high-probability mode success/failure table corresponding to setting 1, the low-probability mode success/failure table and high-probability mode success/failure table corresponding to setting 2, and the low-probability mode success/failure table corresponding to setting 3 A success/failure table and a success/failure table for the high-probability mode are provided.

Under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (FIG. 16(a)) corresponding to the setting 1 is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number for winning the jackpot (that is, winning information) is "7". , "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". That is, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from 0 to 599, '7', '107', '207', '307', '407' and '507' correspond to the jackpot results. Values other than random numbers correspond to outlier results. As a result, the jackpot probability is 1/100.

Under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode corresponding to setting 2 (FIG. 16(b)) is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number for winning the jackpot (that is, winning information) is "7". , "107", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results, and the values other than those random numbers corresponds to the outlier result. As a result, the jackpot probability is 1/120.

Under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (FIG. 16(a)) corresponding to setting 3 is referred to at the time of the lottery, the value of the random number for winning the jackpot (that is, winning information) is "7". , "107", "307", and "507". In other words, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "307", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results, and the values other than those random numbers are outliers. Yes. As a result, the jackpot probability is 1/150.

In this way, the difference is provided in the order of setting 3 < setting 2 < setting 1 so as to be advantageous to the player. It is assumed that

In the game state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode (FIG. 17(a)) corresponding to the setting 1 is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number for winning the jackpot (that is, the winning information) is "7". , "36", "107", "207", "307" . . . "407", "507" . It is 19 pieces of "598". That is, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "36", "107", "207", "307", ... "407", "507" . "598" corresponds to the jackpot result, and the values other than those random numbers correspond to the losing result. As a result, the jackpot probability is about 1/32.

In the game state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode (FIG. 17(b)) corresponding to setting 2 is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number for winning the jackpot (that is, winning information) is "7". , "36", "107", "207", "307" . . . "407", "507" . It is 20 of "598". That is, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "36", "107", "207", "307", ... "407", "507" . "598" corresponds to the jackpot result, and the values other than those random numbers correspond to the losing result. As a result, the probability of a big hit is 1/30.

Under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode corresponding to setting 3 (FIG. 17(c)) is referred to at the time of the lottery, the value of the random number for winning the jackpot (that is, winning information) is "7". , "36", "107", "207", "307" . . . "407", "507" . It is 21 pieces of "598". That is, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "36", "107", "207", "307", ... "407", "507" . "598" corresponds to the jackpot result, and the values other than those random numbers correspond to the losing result. As a result, the jackpot probability is about 1/28.

The fact that the advantage/disadvantage relationship in the high-probability mode is reversed from that in the low-probability mode is a device for suppressing excessive bias in the degree of advantage. Even if the difference in the high-probability mode is taken into account, the difference in the low-probability mode, in which the game progresses, is dominant, and in general, the order of setting 3 < setting 2 < setting 1 is advantageous to the player. .

Note that it is also possible to match the advantageous/disadvantageous relationship in the high-probability mode with the advantageous/disadvantageous relationship in the low-probability mode. That is, setting 3<setting 2<setting 1 can be set so that the probability of a big win increases in this order.

Incidentally, as long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers for winning are arbitrary.

The winning type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 29). Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are differentiated in two conditions: (1) a lottery mode in the win/fail lottery means after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and (2) a support mode by the electric accessory 91 after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

As the support mode in the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b, when compared in a situation where the game ball is continued to be shot in the same manner with respect to the game area PE, the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b Low frequency support mode (low frequency support state or low frequency guide state) and high frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) so that the frequency of opening state per unit time is relatively high or low ) are set.

Specifically, in the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric role product opening lottery using the electric role product opening counter C4 is the same, but the high frequency In the support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 91 is in the open state when winning the electric role open state is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time for one time is set longer. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is won and the open state of the electric accessory 91 occurs multiple times, the closing from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory open lottery after one electric accessory open lottery is performed is set shorter than the low-frequency support mode. It is

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the lower operation opening 83b is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the upper working opening 83a is higher than the lower working opening 83b, but in the high-frequency supporting mode, the lower working opening 83b is more likely to be won than the upper working opening 83a. Higher chance of winning. When a prize is awarded to the lower operation opening 83b, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls in his hand too much. be able to.

In addition, the configuration for making the high frequency support mode more frequent than the low frequency support mode to be in the electric role open state per unit time is not limited to the above. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state. Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode may be set by changing any one of the number of times, the opening time, and the probability of winning, or an arbitrary combination of conditions.

The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper working port 83a or the lower working port 83b. More specifically, it is stored in the upper working opening reservation area Ra of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 83a, and the lower working opening reservation area Rb of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower working opening 83b. stored in

The distribution destination of the game result for the win type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 422 as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 403 . Here, the contents of the distribution table will be explained using the schematic diagram of FIG. 18 . The distribution table includes a distribution table (first distribution information group) for the upper working port shown in FIG. 18(a) and a distribution table (second distribution information group) for the lower working port shown in FIG. minute information group) is set.

In the distribution table for the upper working port, the game results are distributed as 8R probability variable jackpot results (high probability special game results), 8R normal jackpot results (low probability special game results), 4R probability variable jackpot results (high probability corresponding game result) and 4R normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding game result) are set. Specifically, in the distribution table for the upper working port, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 8" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot result, and "9 to 14 ” corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot result, “15 to 23” corresponds to the 4R probability variable jackpot result, and “24 to 29” corresponds to the 4R normal jackpot result.

In the distribution table for the lower working port, the game results are distributed as 16R variable jackpot results (high probability special game results), 8R variable jackpot results (high probability special game results), 8R normal jackpot results (low special game result corresponding to probability), 4R variable probability jackpot result (game result corresponding to high probability), and 4R normal jackpot result (game result corresponding to low probability) are set. Specifically, in the distribution table for the lower opening, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 5" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot result, and "6 to 11 ” corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot result, “12 to 17” corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot result, “18 to 23” corresponds to the 4R probability variable jackpot result, “24 to 29” is 4R usually corresponds to the jackpot result.

The 16R probability variable jackpot result, the 8R probability variable jackpot result, and the 4R probability variable jackpot result are the jackpot results in which the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. As shown in FIG. 18(c), this high-frequency support mode continues until the next big win results, and shifts to the low-frequency support mode with the start of the opening/closing execution mode.

The 8R normal jackpot result and the 4R normal jackpot result are jackpot results in which the lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. However, as shown in FIG. 18(c), this high-frequency support mode is executed when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) or When a jackpot result is obtained before the end reference number of times is reached (more specifically, when the opening/closing execution mode is started), the game ends and the low frequency support mode is entered.

The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper working opening 83a or the lower working opening 83b. More specifically, it is stored in the upper working opening reservation area Ra of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 83a, and the lower working opening reservation area Rb of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower working opening 83b. stored in Then, whether or not to generate reach is determined based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 403 .

However, in the game round in which the open/close execution mode is entered, the MPU 402 determines whether or not to generate reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Although the number of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, it may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach indication may be set larger than in the low-frequency support mode.

Here, the ready-to-win display (ready-to-win state) is provided with a pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a) capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of patterns (patterns), and the game results are displayed in the open/close execution mode. In a gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variable display can be the special display result in the game turn resulting in the game result, the stop display result after the start of the variable display (or variable display) of the pattern (picture) in the pattern display device 253. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the above-mentioned special display before being derived and displayed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is established. It is a display state in which combinations of possible ready-to-win symbols are displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a step prior to ending the variable display of symbols, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is established on a preset effective line in the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. To form a ready-to-win line by stop-displaying combinations of possible ready-to-win patterns, and to perform variable display of patterns by a final stop pattern row under the condition that the ready-to-win line is formed.

The contents displayed on the display screen 253a will be described in more detail. First, when the variable display of symbols is terminated in the upper symbol row Z1 and further, when the variable display of symbols is terminated in the lower symbol row Z3, any of the activated lines is hit. A reach line is formed by stop-displaying the main symbols attached with numbers constituting a combination of symbols, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, the variation display of the symbols is performed in the middle symbol row Z2. By doing so, it becomes a reach display. When a big hit occurs, the main patterns forming the reach line and the main patterns attached with the numbers forming the combination of the winning patterns are stopped and displayed on the reach line to change the patterns in the medium pattern row Z2. Display is terminated.

In addition, in the ready-to-win display, while the combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. It includes those that perform effects, and those that perform reach effects by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 253a after reducing or hiding the combination of reach patterns. Also, when the ready-to-win display is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, whether or not to perform the advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. may

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS determines, in the MPU 402, the variation display time in the upper and lower operation port display portions of the main display unit 87 (main display portion) and the variation display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 253. It is used in The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the display unit for the upper operation port and the display unit for the lower operation port and at the start of the variation of the pattern by the pattern display device 253 .

The electric accessary product release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 433 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 84.例文帳に追加Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 91 of the lower operation opening 83b to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 190, the electric accessory 91 is controlled to open state, and if C4=191 to 250, the electric accessory 91 is not controlled to open state.

As already explained, in the MPU 402, at least the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is used to determine the variable display time in the display section for the upper working port and the display section for the lower working port. A variable display time table storage area 423 is used. Also, in the MPU 402, using the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the winning type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the stop result in the upper working opening display section and the lower working opening display section is determined. However, the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403 is used for the determination.

(Regarding various processes executed by the main controller 162)
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162 will be described. The processing executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 includes main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing and normal processing that are executed when the game is progressed in each game round, and NMI terminal processing. It is roughly divided into NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of a power failure signal to (non-maskable terminal). The main processing will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(main processing)
In the main process, first, in step S101, a start-up process accompanying power-on (power-on operation) is executed. Specifically, it waits, for example, about 500 msec in order to wait for various subordinate control base devices (payout control device 242, etc.) to become operable.

In the following step S102, it is determined whether or not 1 sec, which is the permission/prohibition period, has elapsed after the start-up process in step S101. If 1 sec has not passed, the process of step S102 is executed again. This time is measured by counting the number of times of processing in step S102. For example, if the time required from the negative determination in step S102 to the execution of the process of step S102 again is 0.1 msec, the count value becomes 10000 times, and after the start-up process of step S101 It is determined that 1 sec has passed since. Note that the specific configuration for time measurement is arbitrary, and for example, time may be measured using a real-time clock. If it is determined in step S102 that 1 sec has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, access to the RAM 404 is permitted. After that, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 243 is turned on. determine whether In step S106, a RAM determination value is calculated, and in subsequent step S107, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, that is, the validity of the stored data. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 404 . It is also possible to judge the validity of the stored data by checking whether the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 404 is correctly saved.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, such as when the hall starts operating, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch provided in the main control unit. If the RAM erase switch has been pressed, the process proceeds to steps S108 and S109. Also, when the information on the occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality is confirmed in the data stored and held by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the processing of steps S108 and S109 is similarly performed.

At step S108, the used area of the RAM 404 is cleared to 0, and at step S109, the RAM 404 is initialized. Thereafter, in step S110, an initial command setting process is executed to output an initial command to the payout control device 242. In step S111, interrupt permission is set, and the normal process described later is performed. By inputting an initial command from the main control device 162, the MPU of the payout control device 242 recognizes that communication with the main control device 162 is being performed normally.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch is not pressed, on the condition that the power failure flag is stored and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal, the power failure flag storage area is cleared in step S112. Clear the power failure flag stored in After that, in step S110, an initial command is output, and in step S111, interrupt permission is set, and normal processing, which will be described later, is started. As a result, the state before the power shutdown is restored.

(timer interrupt processing)
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started by the MPU 402 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S201, reading processing of various prize detection sensors (for example, the detection sensors 391a to 391f) is executed. That is, the state of various winning detection sensors connected to the main controller 162 is read, the state of the winning detection sensor is determined, and detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

After that, in step S202, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404 .

In the following step S203, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are incremented by 1, respectively, and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM404.

In the subsequent step S204, a prize-winning process for through accompanying the prize-winning to the through gate 84 is executed. In the win-through processing, it is determined whether or not a prize-winning detection flag for through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. On the condition that the number of stored accessory pending memories is less than 4, the value of the electric role product release counter C4 updated in step S203 is stored in the electrical role pending area. Then, when the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 435, the winning detection flag is erased and the winning processing for the through gate is ended.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S204, the process proceeds to step S205, and in this step S205, the winning process for the working openings associated with the winning of the working openings 83a and 83b is executed. Thereafter, after executing the winning process for the special winning opening in step S206 and the winning process for the general winning opening in step S207, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

In the winning processing for the big winning opening, a prize ball command for the big winning opening is transmitted to the payout control device 242 and the notification/production control device 140 . The payout control device 242 performs processing for paying out the number (15) of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the big winning hole based on the reception of the prize ball command for the big winning hole. In this embodiment, during the opening/closing execution mode, the total number of prize balls obtained during the opening/closing execution mode is displayed on the symbol display device 253, and the notification/production control device 140 displays the number of winning balls for the big winning opening. Display processing such as the total number of payouts is performed based on the receipt of the prize ball command.

In the winning processing for the general winning opening, a prize ball command for the general winning opening is transmitted to the payout control device 242 and the notification/production control device 140 . The payout control device 242 performs processing for paying out the number (10) of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the general winning hole 81 based on the reception of the prize ball command for the general winning hole. In this embodiment, during the opening and closing execution mode, the total number of prize balls acquired during the opening and closing execution mode is displayed on the symbol display device 253, and the notification / effect control device 140 displays the general winning mouth. Display processing such as the total number of payouts is performed based on the receipt of the prize ball command.

Although details will be described later, various prize ball commands are output not only to the payout control device 242 and the notification/production control device 140 but also to the monitoring device. It is configured to store the number of prizes won in the division.

(Winning process for working opening)
Here, the prize winning process for the working opening will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG.

In step S301, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (won a prize) into the upper working hole 83a. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the upper operation port 83a, the process proceeds to step S302, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 242 to pay out three game balls (a prize ball command for the upper operation port) ).

In subsequent step S303, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer HC on the game hall side of information indicating that the game ball has entered the upper working hole 83a. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that the ball has entered the upper working hole 83a. After that, in step S304, information acquisition processing for storing the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, etc. is performed, and the winning processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S301 that the game ball has not won the upper operation opening 83a, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (won a prize) into the lower operation opening 83b. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 83b, the process proceeds to step S306, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 242 to pay out four game balls (a prize ball command for the lower operation opening) ). Incidentally, the prize ball commands set in steps S302 and S306 are transmitted to the payout control device 242 in the external output processing S401 of the normal processing to be described later.

In subsequent step S307, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer HC on the game hall side of information indicating that the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 83b. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that the ball has entered the lower opening 83b. After that, information acquisition processing is performed in step S304, and the prize winning processing ends.

If negative determinations are made in both the processes of steps S301 and S305, that is, if there is no ball entering either the upper working opening 83a or the lower working opening 83b, the winning process is terminated.

Here, the information acquisition processing in step S304 will be described with reference to FIG.

(Information acquisition process)
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S401, the number N of operation pending storage stored in the pending number storage area of the pending ball storage area 432, specifically, the trigger for the information acquisition process among the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b It is determined whether or not the operation pending memory number N related to the ball-entering portion that has become is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the present embodiment). When the number N of operation pending memories is the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and when it is less than the upper limit value, the number N of operation pending memories of the corresponding operation port is incremented by 1 in step S402. , the total number of reservations (hereinafter referred to as common number of reservations CRN) stored in the number of reservations storage area in step S403 is incremented by one.

In the following step S404, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS updated in the above step S203 are stored in the free storage area of the reservation area RE for the operating port. It is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the common pending number CRN incremented by one in step S402. After executing the storage process, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S405, display update processing of the first pending lamp portion 98a and the second pending lamp portion 98b as the pending number display portion is executed. In the display update process, if the current ball entry (winning destination) is the upper working opening 83a, the display of the first holding lamp portion 98a is updated, and the current ball entering (winning destination) is the lower working opening 83b. In this case, the display of the second suspension lamp portion 98b is updated.

The first reservation lamp portion 98a is composed of four LEDs, and is configured so that the number of lit LEDs and the number of reservations related to the upper working port 83a match. When the number of reservations related to the upper operation port 83a increases due to the winning of this time, processing is performed to increase the number of lit LEDs accordingly. The second reserve lamp portion 98b is similarly composed of four LEDs, and the number of lit LEDs and the number of reserves related to the lower operation port 83b are the same. When the number of reservations related to the lower operation opening 83b increases due to the winning of this time, processing is performed to increase the number of lit LEDs accordingly.

In the following step S406, a pending command, which is a process for making the notification/production control device 140 and the display control device 410, which are sub-side (secondary side) control devices, recognize that the winning to the operation ports 83a and 83b has occurred. setting processing is executed, and this information acquisition processing ends. In addition, the hold command includes information as to whether it is based on winning a prize in any of the upper working opening 83a and the lower working opening 83b.

The pending command set in the pending command setting process of step S407 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 in the external output process (step S501) of the normal process described later.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing of steps S501 to S507 is executed as regular processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S509 and S510 is executed during the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, an external signal output processing is executed in step S501. In the external signal output process of step S501, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process are transmitted to each sub-side control device and the hall computer HC.

Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 242 and the notification/production control device 140 . In addition, when various commands such as a command for production such as a variation start command, a type command, a variation end command, a hold command, and a shift command to be described later are set, it is transmitted to the notification / production control device 140. . In addition, for example, every time the variable display of the pattern is completed on the display section for the operation port of the main display section, an external signal indicating determination of the pattern is output to the hall computer HC, and during the opening and closing execution mode, it is notified that the opening and closing execution mode is in progress. An external signal indicating that the high frequency support mode is on is output to the hall computer HC when the high frequency support mode is on.

Next, in step S502, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404 .

In the following step S503, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In this game round control processing, big hit determination, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 253, display control of the main display unit 87, and the like are performed.

After executing the game round control process of step S503, it progresses to step S504 and executes a game state transition process. Although the details will be described later, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this game state transition processing. Details of the game round control process in step S503 and the game state transition process in step S504 will be described later.

In the subsequent step S505, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 91 provided in the lower working opening 83b is executed. In this electric role support process, numerical information obtained from the electric role product release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 433 of the RAM 404 is used to determine whether or not the electric role product 91 is placed in the open state. A lottery is carried out, and opening/closing processing of the electric accessory 91 is executed when the electric role open state is won. In addition, display control of the through-gate display section in the main display section is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the power opening lottery.

As already explained, as modes of support by the electric accessory 91, a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set, and transition to either support mode is performed in the game state transition process. After this processing, if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, the high frequency support mode is set, and if the flag is not set, the low frequency support mode is set.

In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 . Then, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 91 is in the open state is set larger than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role open state is won, and one time Set a longer open time. In the case of the high-frequency support mode, when the open state of the electric accessory 91 is won and the open state of the electric accessory 91 occurs multiple times, the next open state is started after the end of one open state. Set so that the closing time up to is shorter than the opening time of one time.

Incidentally, when shifting to the open/close execution mode, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode even if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 .

In the subsequent step S506, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 110 is turned on once in a predetermined interval period (for example, 0.6 sec) on the condition that a shooting permission signal is input from the power source/shooting control device 243. Excite. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

After that, a setting change process is executed in step S507. In the setting change processing, the lottery table to be referenced is switched so that the lottery table corresponding to the setting value selected by the hall manager or the like is referred to. The details of this setting change processing will be described later.

In the subsequent step S508, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process, that is, whether or not one cycle (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process.

That is, in step S509, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 404 . Also, in step S510, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 404 .

Since the execution time of each process of steps S501 to S507 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the hit random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly The variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

(Game round control processing)
Next, the game round control processing in step S503 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 24 to 27 and the like.

In the game round control process, first, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 24, it is determined in step S601 whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is in the open/close execution mode, the process after step S602, that is, the game round start process of steps S603 to S605 and the game round progress process of steps S606 to S609 are not executed. End the control process.

If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined in step S602 whether or not the game is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the operating port display section of the main display unit 87 is performing variable display or fixed display. If it is not during the game round, the process proceeds to the game round start processing of steps S603 to S605. In the game round start processing, first, in step S603, it is determined whether or not the total number of start-reserved balls (common reserved number CRN) is "0". When the common reserved number CRN is “0”, it means that no reserved information is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 . Therefore, this game round control process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the common reserved number CRN is not "0", in step S604 data setting processing for setting the data stored in the reserved area RE of the reserved ball storage area 432 for variable display is executed, Furthermore, in step S605, after performing the variation start processing for starting the variation display of the display portion for the actuation opening in the main display unit 87 and the variation display of the pattern display device 253, this game round control processing is terminated.

Here, the data setting process in step S604 and the variation start process in step S605 will be described in detail. First, the data setting process in step S604 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(data setting processing)
In the data setting process, first, in step S701, of the operation pending storage numbers N stored in the pending number storage area FE, the one targeted for the current setting process and the common pending number CRN are decremented by one. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of reservation information reserved and stored in the lower opening reservation area Rb (see FIG. 14), that is, the operation reservation memory number N (lower opening opening reservation storage number RbN) is "0". do. If the number of reserved memories for the lower opening RbN is "0", the data setting process related to the display section for the upper opening is executed, and if the number of reserved memories for the lower opening RbN is not "0", the lower operation is performed. Data setting processing related to the mouth display unit is executed.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the common pending number is 1 or more, as already described. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the number RbN of reserved storage for the lower working opening is "0". is stored, the number of reservation information reserved and stored in the upper working opening reservation area Ra (see FIG. 14), that is, the number of working reserved memories N (the number of reserved memories for upper working opening RaN) is 1 Irrespective of whether it is the above or not, the data stored in the reservation area Rb for the lower opening is moved to the execution area AE for variable display. That is, in step S702, when the reservation information is stored in both the upper operation opening reservation area Ra and the lower operation opening reservation area Rb, the reservation information corresponding to the lower operation opening 83b is given priority. becomes.

In the following step S703, one of the upper working opening reservation area Ra and the lower working opening reservation area Rb in which the data moved to the execution area AE is stored is stored in the first to fourth areas. Shift the data to the lower area side in order. As a result, for example, as the data in the first area is moved to the execution area AE, the data in each area is changed from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, and the fourth area to the third area. Data is shifted.

In subsequent step S704, a shift command, which is information for making the notification/production control device 140 recognize that the data in the reservation area RE has been shifted, is set. After that, the data setting process is terminated. The shift command set at step S704 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 at step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 23). Then, this shift command is transmitted to the display control device 410 via the notification/effect control device 140 .

(Variation start processing)
Next, the fluctuation start processing of step S605 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S801, a success/failure judgment process for judging whether or not the reservation information referred to in the fluctuation start process of this time corresponds to the winning of the jackpot is executed. Specifically, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for judging the big win, that is, the random number obtained from the winning random number counter C1 is grasped. Then, by referring to the lottery table corresponding to the current set value and the lottery mode, it is specified whether the acquired information is included in the information corresponding to the winning of the jackpot. For example, when the set value is "1" and the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode, the win/fail table for the low probability mode corresponding to setting 1 stored in the win/fail table storage area 421 of the ROM 403 is referred to. It is specified whether the acquired information is included in the information corresponding to the winning of the jackpot, and if the set value is "1" and the winning/failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the winning/failing lottery mode is stored in the winning/failing table storage area 421 of the ROM 403. By referring to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode corresponding to the setting 1, it is specified whether or not the acquired information is included in the information corresponding to winning the jackpot.

In the subsequent step S802, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination process in step S801 is the result corresponding to the jackpot winning. When the result corresponds to the jackpot winning, a type determination process is executed in step S803.

In the type determination process, the information for type determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the random number obtained from the hit type counter C2 is grasped. In addition, by referring to the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area 422 of the ROM 403, it is specified whether or not the grasped information for type determination is included in the information corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result. Specifically, when the hold information corresponds to the ball entering the upper working port 83a, the distribution table for the upper working port 83a is referred to, and the holding information corresponds to the ball entering the lower working port 83b. If so, the sorting table for the lower working port 83b is referenced to determine the type.

In the following step S804, based on the information specified in the type determination process in step S803, whether or not the type of the current jackpot election is the probability variation jackpot result (16R probability variation jackpot result, 8R probability variation jackpot result, 4R probability variation jackpot result) judge. If it is a probability variable jackpot result, stop result setting processing for probability variable jackpot is executed in step S805, and if it is not a probability variable jackpot result, stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed in step S806. Also, if it is determined in step S802 that the jackpot has not been won, in step S807 a stop result setting process for the time of loss is executed.

As described above, the variable probability jackpot results are roughly classified into the 16R variable probability jackpot result, the 8R probability variable jackpot result, and the 4R probability variable jackpot result. In the process of step S805, in the case of the 16R probability variable jackpot result, the stop result setting processing corresponding to the 16R probability variable jackpot result is performed, and in the case of the 8R probability variable jackpot result, the stop result setting processing corresponding to the 8R probability variable jackpot result is performed. In the case of the 4R probability variable jackpot result, the setting processing of the stop result corresponding to the 4R probability variable jackpot result is performed. Also, the normal jackpot results are roughly divided into 8R normal jackpot results and 4R normal jackpot results. In the process of step S806, in the case of the 8R normal jackpot result, the stop result setting process corresponding to the 8R normal jackpot result is performed, and in the case of the 4R normal jackpot result, the stop result setting process corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result is performed. conduct.

In each stop result setting process of steps S805 to S807, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403 is referred to for information on the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 87. and the specified information is stored in the RAM 404 . In addition, in steps S805 and S806, the information for specifying in the MPU 402 that the win/loss determination result of the current game round is the probability variable jackpot result or the normal jackpot result is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Specifically, in step S805, one of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, and 4R probability variable jackpot flag is stored, and in step S806, one of the 8R normal jackpot flag and the 4R normal jackpot flag is stored.

After executing any of the processes of steps S805 to S807, a variable display time setting process is executed in step S808.

(Processing for setting variable display time)
In the variable display time setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 27, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, the 8R probability variable jackpot flag, the 4R probability variable jackpot flag, the 8R normal jackpot flag, and the 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. .

If a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss result, the process proceeds to step S902. In step S902, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur on the symbol display device 253 in the current game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach indication, an affirmative determination is made in step S802 as the occurrence of the reach indication. The reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 403 is referred to when specifying the presence or absence of the reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

If an affirmative determination is made in either step S901 or step S902, the process proceeds to step S903, and the variable display time table for reach generation stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403 is referred to, and the current Variation display time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired, and in step S904, the variation display time information is stored in the variation display time counter area (variation display time measuring means) provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. ). After that, the setting process is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a jackpot winning result or when the result of the same lottery is a losing result and the lottery for the occurrence of the reach is won, the reach display is executed. ing.

Here, the reach display includes a normal reach display (specifically, normal reach A to B) and a super reach display (specifically, super reach A to C) having different variable display modes. Variable display time information corresponding to each normal reach display and super reach display is set in the variable display time table for reach generation, and by referring to the table, variable display time information corresponding to each reach display can be obtained. is obtained. Regarding the determination of the type of reach display, a table is provided in which the type of reach display corresponds to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. A corresponding reach indication is determined.

In more detail, the variable display time table for reach generation corresponds to the type of jackpot. Specifically, in the case of the probability variable jackpot result, the variable display time is set so that the combination of specific symbols can be stopped and displayed, and in the case of the normal jackpot result, the combination of non-specific patterns can be stopped and displayed. , a variable display time is set.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S902, the variable display time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 is referred to in step S905, and the value of the current variation type counter CS is obtained, and in step S906, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area. After that, the setting process is terminated.

The variable display time information at the time of reach non-occurrence is set so that the variable display time becomes shorter as the number of common reservations CRN increases. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured not to depend on the number of common reservations CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of common reservations CRN, the shorter the variable display time. . In addition, in the situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the reach non-reach is selected so that a shorter variable display time is selected. Although the occurrence variable display time table is set, it is not limited to this, and the selected variable display time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time at the occurrence of the ready-to-win, and the variable display time to be easily selected and the variable display time to be difficult to be selected are different between when the jackpot is won and when the winning is reached. may be configured. Also, the variable display time table for probability variable jackpot, the variable display time table for normal jackpot, the variable display time table for loss reach, and the variable display time table for complete loss may be individually set. As described above, the variable display time of each game round is determined using parameters such as the presence or absence of reach occurrence, the type of reach display, the number of pending information, the value of the variable type counter CS, and the like.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 26), after executing the fluctuation display time setting process in step S808, the fluctuation start command and the type command are set in step S809. The variable start command includes information on presence/absence of reach occurrence and information on variable display time. Also, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes, as game result information, 16R probability variable jackpot result information, 8R probability variable jackpot result information, 4R probability variable jackpot result information, 8R normal jackpot result information, 4R normal jackpot result information, and out result. including information on

The variation start command and the type command set at step S809 are transmitted to the notification/production control device 140 at step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 23). The notification/effect control device 140 determines the light emission pattern of the lamp part 26 and the output pattern of the sound from the speaker part 29 in the game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and determines the content of the determined effect. is executed, the lamp unit 26 and the speaker unit 29 are controlled. In addition, the notification/production control device 140 transmits the variation start command and the type command to the display control device 410 while maintaining the information form thereof.

The display control device 410 determines a variable display pattern for the symbol display device 253 in the game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and the symbol display device performs the determined variation display pattern. H.253 is displayed and controlled. After that, in step S810, after starting the variable display of the pattern on the corresponding one of the upper working port display section and the lower working port display section of the main display unit 87, this fluctuation start processing is finished.

Returning to the description of the game round control process (FIG. 24), when the operation port display section of the main display unit 87 is performing the variable display, the game round progressing process of steps S606 to S609 is executed. In the game round progressing process, first, in step S606, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 404 has become "0". The value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 27), as described above. Also, the value of this set variable display time information is decremented (subtracted) by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) is started.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S607. In the variable display process, the display mode of the corresponding one of the upper working opening display section and the lower working opening display section of the main display unit 87 is changed. After that, the game round control process is terminated.

If the variation display time has elapsed, variation end processing is executed in step S608. In the fluctuation ending process, the information stored in the RAM 404 in any one of the above steps S805 to S807 is specified, and the pattern corresponding to the information corresponds to the display area for the upper operation opening and the display area for the lower operation opening. On the other hand, the display unit for operation port is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed.

In the subsequent step S609, a fluctuation end command is set. After that, the game round control process is terminated. The fluctuation end command set at step S609 is transmitted to the notification/production control device 140 at step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 23). The notification/production control device 140 transmits the received fluctuation end command to the display control device 410 while maintaining the information format. Upon receiving the variation end command, the display control device 410 confirms and displays (final stop display) the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round.

(Game state transition processing)
Next, the game state transition processing of step S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game state transition processing, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is being executed. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S902, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the fluctuation display of the pattern in the display section for the upper operation opening or the display section for the lower operation opening of the first game cycle has ended. If it is not the timing at which the variable display ends, the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

If the variable display has ended, more specifically, if a preset stop display time (interval time: fixed display time) has passed since the variable display ended, the process proceeds to step S1003, It is determined whether or not the game result of the current game round (result of the win/loss lottery) corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 4R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, and 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. do. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If any of the above flags is stored, processing for starting the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S1004. By the start processing, the operation regulation of the variable winning device 82 by the locking device is released, and the opening/closing operation of the variable winning device 82 is allowed until the opening/closing execution mode is completed. Also, in the start processing of step S1004, the opening/closing execution mode start flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. FIG. Although the details will be described later, this causes the hall computer HC to start outputting an external signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has been entered.

In the following step S1005, any one of "4", "8" and "16" is set in the open number counter OC provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. FIG. Specifically, when the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, the open number counter OC is set to "16", and the 8R probability variable jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 When the 8R normal jackpot flag is stored, the open number counter OC is set to "8", and when the 4R variable probability jackpot flag or the 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, it is opened. Set the number counter OC to "4". The opening number counter OC functions as means for grasping the number of times the variable winning device 82 has been opened. After executing the process of step S1005, the process advances to step S1006 to set an opening command.

The set opening command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 at step S501 in the normal processing (FIG. 23). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed. The content of this effect includes the display mode in the pattern display device 253, and the determined display mode is output from the notification/effect control device 140 to the display control device 410 as a display content command. In the display control device 410, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification/production control device 140, the display corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode of this time, for example, the display content corresponding to the jackpot The display control of the pattern display device 253 is executed so that the moving image display of the character, etc., and the switching of the background image, etc. are performed. After executing the process of step S1006, this game state transition process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S1001, if it is determined in step S1001 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1007. In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the standby time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. When the waiting time for opening has passed, the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed in step S1008.

In the big winning opening opening/closing process, first, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening of the variable winning device 82 is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning driving section of the variable winning device 82 . When the big winning opening is not open, it is determined whether or not the value of the open number counter OC is "0". If the value of the opening number counter OC is "0", the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If the value of the open number counter OC is not "0", it is determined whether or not the value of the open timer counter TC is "0". The open timer counter TC is a counter that is referred to when ascertaining the opening period and closing period (interval period) of the big winning opening, and its value is "1" each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) is executed. decremented one by one. When the value of the open timer counter TC is not "0", the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

When the value of the opening number counter OC is not "0" and the value of the opening timer counter TC is "0", the opening processing of the big winning opening is executed. Specifically, the variable winning driving unit is brought into a driving state so as to open the big winning opening. After that, the closing condition setting processing (opening setting processing) corresponding to the variable winning device 82 (large winning opening) is performed. Specifically, the open timer counter TC is set to "15000" (corresponding to 30 sec), and the winning counter PC is set to "10". After executing this setting process, an opening command indicating that the variable winning device 82 (large winning opening) has been opened is set, and the main winning opening opening/closing process ends. This set opening command is transmitted to the notification/production control device 140 at step S501 in the normal processing (FIG. 23). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening based on the reception of the opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the large winning opening of the variable winning device 82 is open, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening timer counter TC is "0". If the value of the open timer counter TC is not "0", it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning hole based on the detection signal from the winning detection sensor 391c corresponding to the variable winning device 82 (details are described above). (based on the result of step S206). If no prize has been won, the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

It should be noted that, when the winning to the big winning opening occurs, the prize ball command is output to the payout control device 242 and the notification/effect control device 140 . The payout control device 242 performs processing for paying out a preset number of game balls based on the receipt of the prize ball command. In the notification/effect control device 140, when a prize ball command is issued during the opening/closing execution mode, processing for changing the effect during the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed, for example, on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 in order to teach the occurrence of a winning prize. I do.

When a prize is won in the big prize slot, the value of the prize counter PC is decremented by 1, and then it is determined whether the value of the prize counter PC is "0" or not. The big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. When the value of the prize winning counter PC is "0" or when it is determined that the value of the open timer counter TC is "0", it means that the conditions for closing the big prize winning opening are established. In this case, the variable winning driving section is brought into a non-driving state in order to close the big winning opening.

Subsequently, update processing of the open number counter OC is executed. Specifically, when the value of the open number counter OC is not "0", the open number counter OC is decremented by 1, and when the value of the open number counter OC is "0", the open number counter OC is Keep the value of '0'. After that, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the open number counter OC is "0".
When it is determined that the value of the open number counter OC is not "0", the open timer counter TC is set to "1000" (equivalent to 2.0 sec), and after setting the closing command, the main winning opening opening/closing process is performed. exit. This set closing command is transmitted to the notification/production control device 140 at step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 23). When receiving the closing command, the notification/performance control device 140 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the closing command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the open number counter is "0", the ending start processing is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time is set for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 403 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 .

After that, after setting the ending command, the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification/production control device 140 at step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 23).

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 28), after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening number counter OC is "0" in step S1009. At S1010, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the open number counter OC is not "0" or if the waiting time for the ending has not passed, the game state transition processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the open number counter OC is "0" and the standby time for ending has passed, then in step S1011, transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is any of the 16R probability variable jackpot result, the 8R probability variable jackpot result, and the 4R probability variable jackpot result. . Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, the 8R probability variable jackpot flag, and the 4R probability variable jackpot flag are stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 .

If the jackpot result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is the 16R probability variable jackpot result, the 8R probability variable jackpot result, or the 4R probability variable jackpot result, the flag related to the shift of the game state is erased. After executing the erasing process, the game state setting process is executed. Specifically, first, a high-probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 . Based on the high-probability mode flag set in this way, the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the success/failure lottery in subsequent game rounds.

After that, the high frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 . Based on the high-frequency support mode flag set in this way, the success/failure table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to in the support lottery in the subsequent electric support process, and the fluctuation display time of the pattern at the time of the support lottery. It is shortened (specifically set to 2.0 sec), and furthermore, the period of being in the open state by opening once is extended (specifically set to 5.0 sec).

On the other hand, if the jackpot result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is the 8R normal jackpot result or the 4R normal jackpot result, that is, the 8R normal jackpot flag or the 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If there is, erase the flag associated with the transition of the game state. After executing the erasing process, the game state setting process is executed. Specifically, first, a high frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 . Based on the high-frequency support mode flag set in this way, the success/failure table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to in the support lottery in the subsequent electric support process, and the fluctuation display time of the pattern at the time of the support lottery. It is shortened (specifically set to 2.0 sec), and furthermore, the period of being in the open state by opening once is extended (specifically set to 5.0 sec).

Unlike the above-described probability variable jackpot result, the upper limit is set for the number of times of support for the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the normal jackpot result. Specifically, the number-of-games counter stored in the counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is set to "100". As a result, the high-frequency support mode is maintained until 100 games are played after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the high-frequency support mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode when the number reaches "100". .

After the game state setting process is performed, the opening/closing execution mode end process is performed in step S1012. Specifically, the opening/closing execution mode flag, the jackpot flag, and the like stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the jackpot is stopped.

(Regarding the electrical configuration of the notification/production control device 140 and the display control device 410)
Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 29, a supplementary description will be given of the electrical configuration of the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 410. FIG.

An MPU 442 is mounted on a notification/production control board 441 provided in the notification/production control device 140 . The MPU 442 includes a ROM 443 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 442, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 443. A RAM 444 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 443 and the RAM 444 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 442, and they may be individually integrated into chips. This also applies to MPUs of other control devices.

The MPU 442 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 442, and receives game turn control commands (game turn control information) such as the above-described variation start command, type command and variation end command from the main control device 162. . Also, it receives pending display control commands (holding display control information) such as shift commands and pending commands, and opening/closing execution mode commands (opening/closing execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

The output side of the MPU 442 is connected to the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 and the display control device 410, as already described. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification/production control device 140 are transmitted to the display control device 410 while maintaining the information form.

The display control device 410 includes a display control board 471 on which an MPU 472, which is an element in which a program ROM 473 and a work RAM 474 are integrated, a video display processor (VDP) 475, a character ROM 476, and a video RAM 477 are mounted. It has It is not essential that the program ROM 473 and the work RAM 474 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 472, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/production control device 140 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 475 (specifically to generate an internal command for the VDP 475). More specifically, in the MPU 472, based on the command transmitted from the notification/production control device 140, the pattern display device 253 executes a process of specifying a variation display pattern of each game round, and a process related to a pending notice, which will be described later. is executed, and drawing processing is executed for the VDP 475 in accordance with the processing result. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 253 a of the pattern display device 253 .

The program ROM 473 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 472 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background images. The work RAM 474 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 472 executes various programs. These work data and flags are stored in each area of the work RAM 474 .

The VDP 475 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 253 . Since the VDP 475 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 475 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 472 and the video RAM 477 to intervene in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 476 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 253 . The character ROM 476 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 476 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 476 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 476 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 473 .

The video RAM 477 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 253, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 477, the display content of the pattern display device 253 is changed.

As already described, in the present embodiment, the outline of the variable display mode of the symbols on the display screen 253a is specified by the notification/production control device 140 with reference to the command from the main control device 162, and based on the specified result. The details of the variable display mode are determined by the display control device 410 . Specifically, in the MPU 442 of the notification/production control device 140, a variable display control process is executed as part of a regular process started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). An outline of the mode and the like are specified. Here, the variable display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Variable display control processing)
In the variable display control process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress, that is, whether or not the symbol display device 253 is performing variable display or fixed display of symbols for one game. If it is determined that the game is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined whether or not the variation start command transmitted from the main controller 162 is received.

If a negative determination is made in step S1102, this variable display control process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, this variable display control process is terminated after executing a process for starting variation, which will be described later, in step S1103.

Returning to the description of step S1101, when the determination in step S1101 is affirmative, that is, when it is determined that the game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation end command transmitted from the main controller 162 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S1104, the variable display control process is terminated after executing the variable display process in step S1105. The variation mid-process is a process of executing various effects and changing the determined effect in the game cycle started by the process for starting the variation.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, the process advances to step S1106, and after the fluctuation end processing is executed in step S1106, the fluctuation display control processing ends. In the fluctuation ending process, the fluctuation display of symbols and the effect being executed are ended (determined and stopped) so as to correspond to the reservation information related to the game round. In this process, the driving control of the speaker section 29 and the lamp section 26 is performed to produce an effect corresponding to the definite stop. Then, after outputting the confirmation command to the display control device 410, the process for ending the variation ends. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the design display device 253 to stop the design determination based on the received determination command.

(Processing for start of fluctuation)
Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31, a supplementary description of the fluctuation start processing in step S1103 will be given. The variation start process is a process for starting an effect for a game turn based on receiving a variation start command transmitted from the main controller 162 . In the fluctuation start processing, settings such as ready-to-win display are performed as effects for the game cycle.

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S1201, the fluctuation start command received this time is read, and the information on the occurrence of reach and the information on the fluctuation display time are specified from the command. Further, as already explained, when the variation start command is transmitted from the main controller 162, the type command is also transmitted. In step S1101, the type command received together with the variation start command received this time is read out, and game result information such as probability variable jackpot result information, normal jackpot result information, or loss result information is specified from the command. Then, in step S1201, from the specified information, information on the presence or absence of jackpot winning, information on the type of jackpot in the case of winning the jackpot, information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence in the case of non-winning in the jackpot, and variable display time information is grasped, and the grasped information is stored in the register of the MPU 442 .

In the following step S1202, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game cycle to be started this time is a game result corresponding to the big win result based on the information grasped in step S1201. In the case of a jackpot result, that is, in the case of a variable probability jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, in the subsequent step S1203, the effect setting process for the jackpot is executed.

In the effect setting process for big win, the stop result of the symbol for big win is determined (stop result determination process is performed). In the stop result determination process, in the case of a probability variable jackpot result, the stop result that the combination of the same specific symbols (main symbols with odd numbers) is established on one activated line L1 to L5 is determined in this game round. Decide as a stop result. In the case of a normal jackpot result, a stop result in which a combination of the same non-specific symbols (main symbols with an even number) is established on one activated line L1 to L5 is regarded as the stop result of the game round. decide.

The type of the main symbol to be stop-displayed and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by a lottery or the like when a big win results. The final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 443 stores the valid lines L1 to L5 and address information. It is stored as address information in the line address storage area. Also, at this time, a process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed. In the following explanation, the stop result address information determined by various stop result determination processes is also stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 444 .

Also, in the effect setting process for the big win, the variable display mode of the symbol for the big win is determined (performs the variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process)). As already explained, when a jackpot result is obtained, the result is notified through the ready-to-win display. In the variable display mode determination processing for reach display, the variable display pattern table for reach display stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443 is acquired, and the game at the variable display time and type command of the variable start command received this time is determined. A production pattern of normal ready-to-win display or super ready-to-win display corresponding to the result is determined. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed. Also in the variable display mode determination processing described below, the corresponding variable display pattern table is acquired from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 443 to determine the effect pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result. Then, the address information of the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM444.

If it is determined in step S1202 that the result is not a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether reach will occur in the current game round. When reach occurs, it advances to step S1205, effect setting processing for reach occurrence is executed. In the effect setting process for generating ready-to-win, the outline of the effect and the combination of symbols to be finally stopped are determined. The former is the same as the processing in step S1203, so the description is incorporated. Since this processing corresponds to the loss reach, the stop symbols are determined so as not to result in a combination of symbols corresponding to the big hit result. That is, the stop result in which a combination of outlier reach symbols is established on one of the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the types of combination of winning reach symbols and effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In addition, in this determination, the same pattern combination is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the same pattern of the medium pattern row Z2 as the pattern forming the reach line is placed on the reach line. The stop result on the effective line is determined so as to make the final stop at a forward or backward stop position. After that, a process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed.

If it is determined in step S1204 that reach has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S1206. In step S1206, the outline of the performance for complete failure and the combination of symbols to be finally stopped are determined. Since this processing corresponds to a complete loss, the stop symbols are determined so as not to form a symbol combination corresponding to the result of a big win.

After executing any one of steps S1203, S1205, and S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, a process of outputting to the display control device 410 commands including the stop result and effect pattern information determined in steps S1203, S1205, and S1206 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively, is executed. Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU 472 of the display control device 410 performs display control of the pattern display device 253 to execute the effect in the current game round.

After executing the process of step S1207, in the following step S1208, after executing the process of starting the effect for the game cycle, the process for starting the variation is finished. Specifically, based on the performance patterns determined in steps S1203, S1205, and S1206, drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started, and the performance for the game round is started.

Here, based on FIG. 32, a supplementary description will be given of the variable display mode of the symbols displayed on the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a). FIG. 32(a) is a schematic diagram showing types of variable display modes, and FIG. 32(b) group is a schematic diagram showing an outline of each variable display mode.

(Variable display mode)
As shown in FIG. 32(a), there are 5 types of variable display modes of symbols to be executed on the display screen 253a: complete failure, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C. separated. For each of these variable display modes, the variable display time is set to be different, and an outline of the variable display mode for each round of the game is grasped based on the information relating to the variable display time given to the command from the main controller 162. It is possible.

Specifically, the variable display time for complete deviation is "3 sec to 8 sec" (the difference is set according to the number of holds), the variable display time for normal reach A is "10 sec", and the variable display time for normal reach B "15 sec" longer than the variable display time of normal reach A, "16 sec" longer than the variable display time of normal reach A and B for the variable display time of super reach A, Super reach for the variable display time of super reach B The variable display time of super reach C is "17 sec", which is longer than the variable display time of A, and the variable display time of super reach C is "18 sec", which is longer than the variable display time of other super reach A and B. For example, when the information regarding the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162 is "15 sec", the notification/effect control device 140 will grasp that the normal reach B should be executed. .

In addition, in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, Super Reach C > Super Reach B
＞ Super Reach A ＞ Normal Reach B ＞ Normal Reach A are more likely to be selected in this order, and in the game round corresponding to the result of being out, Complete Loss ＞ Normal Reach A ＞ Normal Reach B ＞ Super Reach A ＞ Super Reach B ＞
It has a configuration that is likely to be selected in order of super reach C . In other words, the longer the variable display time is, the higher the expectation for winning the jackpot is set.

Here, with reference to FIG. 32(b1), the variable display modes of normal reach A and B will be described. When the normal reach A or B is selected, the variable display (scroll display) of all the symbol rows that are stopped and displayed is first started, and then the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row (upper symbol row Z1). is terminated (stopped display), and the variable display of symbols in the lower symbol row (lower symbol row Z3) is terminated (stopped display). While the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped and displayed in this way, the main symbols with the same number attached to any of the activated lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 13(a)) are stopped and displayed. to form a reach line. Then, under the condition that the reach line is formed, the variation display of the middle symbol row (middle symbol row Z2) is performed, so that the reach display (reach variation display) is performed. After reaching the ready-to-win display, the variable display ends by stopping the middle symbol row Z2. Then, when the same pattern as the pattern forming the ready-to-win display stops on the reach line, the fact that the jackpot has been won is reported, and when other patterns stop on the same reach line, the big win is won. You will be notified that you have not done so. In this manner, the combination of symbols that are finally stopped and displayed is maintained as it is for a predetermined period. That is, the current game cycle continues until the stop display period elapses, and when the stop display period elapses, the transition to the next game cycle is allowed.

In this embodiment, by setting a difference in the variable display time of the middle symbol row Z2 after the ready-to-win line is formed, the difference in the variable display time between the normal reach A and the normal reach B is ensured. The method of setting the difference between is arbitrary. For example, by setting a difference in the time from the start of the variable display to the formation of the reach line, it is possible to secure the difference in the variable display time.

Next, based on the variable display modes of the normal reach A and B described above, the variable display modes of the super reach A, B and C will be described. As shown in FIGS. 32(b2) to (b4), for super reach lines A, B, and C, the same process as for normal reach lines A and B is performed to form the above-described reach lines. After the ready-to-win line is formed, the ready-to-win effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character as a moving image in conjunction with the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, in super reach A, after the reach line is formed, a character resembling a fairy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME), and in super reach B, After the reach line is formed, a character imitating a boy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME), and in super reach C, after the reach line is formed, A character modeled after a girl is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle pattern row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME).

(monitoring device 600)
The pachinko machine 10 shown in this embodiment is provided with a monitoring device 600 that monitors the movement of the main controller 162 . As shown in FIG. 33, the input port of the monitoring device 600 is connected to the main control device 162, the payout control device 242 and the notification/effect control device 140. As shown in FIG. As already explained, the main control device 162 is connected to various winning detection sensors 391a to 391d for the upper operating port 83a, the lower operating port 83b, the general winning port 81, and the variable winning device 82 (big winning port). , When the main control device 162 confirms the winning of the upper operating port 83a, the lower operating port 83b, the general winning port 81, and the variable winning device 82 (large winning port), the main control device 162 indicates that. A prize ball command is output to the monitoring device 600 as information (signal).

The MPU 602 of the monitoring device 600 is provided with a storage unit 604 that stores information input from the main control device 162 . The storage unit 604 is composed of a first storage area 605 that mainly stores game information such as the number of wins and the number of jackpots, and a second storage area 606 that mainly stores the number of occurrences of abnormalities in the gaming machine.

For example, when a prize ball command indicating a prize is received from the main controller 162, among various prize number counters 621 to 624 arranged in the first storage area 605, those corresponding to the received signal are updated (added). . That is, the monitoring device 600 monitors the number of winnings to the operation ports 83a and 83b, the general winnings port 81, and the variable winnings device 82 (large winnings port).

Further, when a game round is executed by the main control device 162, information (signal) for confirmation is output from the main control device 162 to the monitoring device 600 at the timing of the above-described confirmation display (end timing of the variable display). be done. When the monitoring device 600 receives this signal, it updates (adds) the number-of-games counter 625 provided in the first storage area 605 . In other words, the number of games played is monitored by the monitoring device 600 .

Furthermore, in the event that a game turn results in a big win and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, information (signal) for the big win is output from the main controller 162 to the monitoring device 600 at the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode. When the monitoring device 600 receives this signal, it updates (adds) the number-of-wins counter 626 provided in the first storage area 605 . In other words, the number of hits is monitored by the monitoring device 600 .

Further, when the game ball is paid out, a payout command is output from the payout control device 242 to the monitoring device 600 as a signal indicating that effect. When receiving this signal, the monitoring device 600 updates (adds) the number-of-balls counter 627 provided in the first storage area 605 . That is, the monitoring device 600 monitors the number of prize balls (the number of game balls paid out).

Various types of information stored in the first storage area 605 and the second storage area 606 are stored in association with setting values. For example, when winning to the operation ports 83a and 83b occurs at setting 1 and the winning information is stored, the winning information is stored with information indicating setting 1 at the time of winning. Become. As a result, it is possible to identify at which set value each winning occurred when checking the winning status or the like after the fact.

An output port of the monitoring device 600 is connected to the notification/production control device 140, and the information stored in the monitoring device 600 can be acquired by the notification/production control device 140 as appropriate. Further, the notification/production control device 140 has a function of displaying information stored in the monitoring device 600 on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 based on a predetermined request operation by the hall manager or the like. .

(setting change function)
As described above, the pachinko machine 10 shown in the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of stages of setting values, and is configured such that the probability of occurrence of a big win can be changed by changing the setting values (setting changes). . The setting value is not always changeable, and permission/prohibition is switched depending on the situation. This embodiment is characterized by a configuration relating to switching between permission/prohibition of setting changes. A supplementary description of the configuration related to the setting change will be given below with reference to FIGS. 5 and 34. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the pachinko machine 10, game balls shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 110 are guided to the game area PE by the guide rails 100. As shown in FIG. The game balls flowing down the game area PE are discharged from the game area PE through various ball entry portions such as the general prize winning opening 81 or the exit opening 89, and are discharged from the game area PE through the recovery passage provided on the back portion of the game area forming body 80a. returned to the facility. In addition, among the game balls fired from the game ball shooting mechanism 110, those that did not reach the game area PE pass through the foul passage formed from the guide passage 103 to the front door frame 14 (passage forming unit 45). returned to.

As shown in FIG. 34, the main controller 162 includes a shooting detection sensor 701 provided in the game ball shooting mechanism 110, a foul detection sensor 702 provided in the foul ball passage of the passage forming unit 45, and a game sensor. A recovery detection sensor 703 provided in the recovery passage on the back side of the board unit 80 is connected.

The shooting detection sensor 701 detects the game ball shot by the solenoid 111, and the main controller 162 specifies that the game ball has been shot based on the information (detection signal) from the shooting detection sensor 701. It is possible. The foul detection sensor 702 detects a game ball passing through the foul ball passage, and the main controller 162 detects that the game ball has passed through the foul ball passage based on the information (detection signal) from the foul detection sensor 702. It is possible to identify The recovery detection sensor 703 detects game balls passing through the recovery passage, and the main controller 162 detects that the game ball has passed through the recovery passage based on the information (detection signal) from the recovery detection sensor 703. It is identifiable. The main controller 162 can specify whether or not the game ball remains in the game area PE based on the information from each of these detection sensors 701-703.

In addition, when the payout control device 242 pays out the game balls, information (payout command) indicating that the payout has been executed is output to the main control device 162, and the main control device 162 Based on the prize ball command transmitted to the payout control device 242 and the payout information acquired from the payout control device 242, it is possible to specify whether or not the payout of game balls has been completed.

An open detection sensor 706 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 13 is connected to the pachinko machine 10, and the main controller 162 determines whether the inner frame 13 is open based on information (detection signal) from the open detection sensor 706. It is possible to specify whether or not

Here, the setting change process (step S507) executed as part of the normal process by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Setting change processing)
In the setting change process, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 . If a negative determination is made in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1302. In step S1302, it is determined whether or not the setting change key is inserted into the setting key switch 167 and is switched to the ON state. If a negative determination is made in step S1302, this setting change processing ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1303. In step S1303, based on information from the detection sensors 701 to 703, it is determined whether or not game balls remain in the game area PE. If a negative determination is made in step S1302, this setting change processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, based on the payout information from the payout control device 242, it is determined whether or not there are prize balls waiting to be paid out. If a negative determination is made in step S1304, this setting change processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1304, the process proceeds to step S1305. In step S1305, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when a predetermined waiting time has elapsed after the payout is completed.

The game balls put out from the putout device 224 pass through the putout passage and go to the upper tray 33 or the lower tray 34. - 特許庁At this time, it takes a certain amount of time (approximately 2 seconds in this embodiment) for the game ball to reach the player's hand. The standby time is a time determined to be slightly longer than the required time, and in step S1305, it is estimated whether or not the game ball put out has reached the player's hand.

If a negative determination is made in step S1305, this setting change processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, the process proceeds to step S1306. In step S1306, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress. In other words, it is determined whether or not the variable display or fixed display of the pattern is being executed on the operation opening display section. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1306, this setting change processing ends. If a negative determination is made in step S1306, the process proceeds to step S1307.

In step S1307, it is determined whether or not suspension information is stored, that is, whether or not the next game round is coming up. If a negative determination is made in step S1307, that is, if the next game round is coming up, this setting change processing is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1307, the process proceeds to step S1308.

In step S1308, based on detection information from the open detection sensor 706, it is determined whether or not the inner frame 13 is open. If a negative determination is made in step S1308, this setting change processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1308, the process proceeds to step S1309.

In step S1309, setting change mode start processing is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, (1) there are no game balls remaining in the game area PE, (2) there are no game balls waiting to be paid out, and (3) the waiting time after the end of payout has passed. (4) the game is not in progress, (5) there is no subsequent hold information, (6) the inner frame 13 is open, and (7) the setting change key is ON. It is a configuration in which setting changes are permitted on the condition that

In the setting change mode start process, the currently selected setting value is displayed on setting value display portion 168, and acceptance of the setting change operation is permitted. Then, various processing related to the progress of the game (for example, processing such as game round control processing, game state transition processing, electric support processing, game ball launch control processing, etc. in normal processing) is prohibited, and various flag storage areas 435 of RAM 404 Stores the setting change mode flag. Since the setting change mode flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1301 thereafter. By erasing the setting change mode flag, various processes related to the progress of the game are restarted.

Returning to the description of step S1301, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, that is, if the setting change mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1310. In step S1310, it is determined whether or not the setting change switch 166 has been operated (setting change operation). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1310, the process advances to step S1311 to execute change operation handling processing. Specifically, the setting value newly selected by the setting change operation is stored, and the display contents are updated so that the stored setting value is displayed on the setting value display portion 168 .

If a negative determination is made in step S1310, that is, if no setting change operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S1312. In step S1312, it is determined whether or not the setting change key has been switched to the OFF state. If a negative determination is made in step S1312, the setting change process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1312, the process proceeds to step S1313. In step S1313, setting change processing is executed. Specifically, a flag corresponding to the setting value selected when the setting change key is turned off is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 . Specifically, when the setting 1 is selected, the setting 1 corresponding flag is stored, when the setting 2 is selected, the setting 2 corresponding flag is stored, and when the setting 3 is selected, stores the setting 3 corresponding flag. In the subsequent processing, for example, if the flag corresponding to setting 1 is stored, the win/fail lottery table corresponding to setting 1 is referred to, and if the flag corresponding to setting 2 is stored, the win/fail lottery table corresponding to setting 2 is referred to. When the setting 3 correspondence flag is stored, the success/fail lottery table corresponding to setting 3 is referred to.

After the setting change mode ending process is executed in subsequent step S1314, this setting change process is ended. In the setting change mode ending process, the setting change mode flags stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 are erased, the display of the setting value display section 168 is ended, and the prohibited various processes are resumed. Let

Now, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 36, the flow up to the setting change will be described.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), when the winning to the general winning opening 81 is detected by the winning detection sensor 391a for the general winning opening at the timing of ta1, the game ball is detected at the timing of subsequent ta2. Payout is executed. Ten prize balls are put out based on the winning to the general winning hole 81, and it takes a certain amount of time until the payout is completed. Execution conditions (2) and (3) for setting change are established at timing ta4 after the waiting time has elapsed from timing ta3 when the payout of prize balls is completed. At the same time, when other execution conditions (1), (4) to (7) are satisfied, the setting change is permitted.

As already described, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, game ball payout information is transmitted from the payout control device 242 to the monitoring device 600, and the payout information is accumulated. Then, whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally is monitored based on the payout information. When performing such monitoring, it is important to determine under which set value the game ball is put out. For example, when the setting value is changed at the timing of taX between ta1 and ta2, the setting value corresponding to the winning information transmitted from the main controller 162 to the monitoring device 600 and the setting value monitored by the payout control device 242 A discrepancy occurs between the payout information transmitted to the device 600 and the corresponding set value. Such a deviation can be a hindrance to improving the certainty of monitoring. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, setting change is prohibited at least until the payout is completed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably avoid the above-described deviation of information and contribute to strengthening of the monitoring function.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36(b), the relationship between the presence/absence of pending information and setting changes will be described.

At the timing of tb1, the winning detection sensors 391b to 391c for the operating openings detect the winning of the operating openings 83a and 83b, and the variable display of the pattern on the display unit for the operating opening and the pattern display on the pattern display device 253 are performed. Variable display is started. At this time, since the number of subsequent pending information is 0, a relatively long variable display time is set. When a winning to the operation ports 83a and 83b occurs at each timing of tb2 and tb3 during the variable display, the hold information acquired based on the winning is held as it is stored, and the game cycle being executed is terminated. It will wait until After the current game round is over, the game rounds corresponding to the subsequent hold information are executed in order at timings tb4 and tb5, and the setting change execution condition ( 4) and (5) are established. At the same time, when the other execution conditions (1) to (3) and (6) to (7) are established, the setting change is permitted.

In the present embodiment, the hold function is used to facilitate the progress of the game. However, in such a configuration, there is a difference between the timing of winning and the timing of lottery. For this reason, if the setting is changed between the acquisition timing of the hold information and the start timing of the game round (lottery timing) (for example, refer to the timing of tbX) under the situation where the subsequent hold information is waiting However, there is a concern that a game round that should normally result in a big win results in a losing result, or a game round in which a game cycle that should normally result in a losing result may result in a big win. This is not preferable because it becomes a factor that reduces the reliability of the behavior of the gaming machine. In this respect, in the present embodiment, such a problem is suppressed by prohibiting the setting change not only during the game but also when subsequent hold information is waiting.

According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

If the game-related information is suddenly deleted during the game, it is assumed that the behavior of the gaming machine will suddenly change. For example, if a game ball that should have been paid out to the player is not paid out, or if a game turn related to the acquired special information is not executed, the player may be confused and the game machine may It is feared that it will become a factor to reduce the reliability of In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the change of the setting value (setting change) is restricted when the situation is not suitable for changing the setting. can. This can contribute to improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

Specifically, under the condition that game balls remain in the game area PE, setting change is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent a game ball that should have been shot under a certain set value from entering a ball entry section such as the general winning hole 81 under a different set value. In particular, since the detection sensor is used to monitor the remaining balls, the regulation is quickly lifted after the remaining balls are discharged, so no wasteful waiting time occurs. This is advantageous in improving the convenience of the gaming machine when changing settings.

When a payout request is generated due to the occurrence of a prize, there is a certain amount of time lag between the entry of the ball and the payout. If the set value is changed during this period, it becomes unclear which set value the current payout corresponds to. Therefore, by continuing the change regulation until the waiting time elapses even after the payout operation is completed as shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience.

In a gaming machine, it may be difficult to immediately pay out game balls due to factors such as a shortage of game balls. In such a situation, the payout operation may be temporarily interrupted, but the payout operation is resumed when the situation becomes possible. In such a case, by restricting the change of the set value at least until the payout is completed, it is possible to suppress the difficulty in understanding which set value the put-out game ball corresponds to.

If the pending information is stored, setting changes are restricted. As a result, for example, special information that normally corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g. winning information) will result in a determination result that does not correspond to predetermined determination information, or special information that does not correspond to predetermined determination information It is possible to suitably suppress the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information.

The opening of the inner frame 13, which is the door body, is required to satisfy the conditions for executing the setting change. Since such an action is conspicuous, it is possible to suppress the action of illegally changing the set value and contribute to the improvement of the security function of the gaming machine.

In a configuration in which the monitoring device 600 monitors winnings and the like, a slight time lag may occur between confirmation of the occurrence of winnings and transmission of information to the monitoring device 600 . If the setting is changed in such a time gap, there is a possibility that the information will be inconsistent. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if a configuration is adopted in which setting changes are restricted while a game is in progress, such inconsistency of information can be preferably suppressed.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above-described first embodiment, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each configuration below may be applied to the first embodiment individually, or may be applied to the first embodiment in combination with a part or all of them. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described first embodiment, the presence or absence of a remaining ball in the game area PE is specified based on each information from the shooting detection sensor 701, the foul detection sensor 702, and the collection detection sensor 703, and the game is played in the game area PE. Although it has been configured to avoid the setting change under the situation where the ball remains, in order to avoid the setting change under the situation where the game ball remains in the game area PE , the following configuration is also possible. That is, the waiting time is set based on the required time from when the game ball is shot until it is discharged from the game area PE, and the setting change is prohibited until the waiting time elapses after the game ball is shot. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the execution condition (1) is established based on the elapse of the standby time. In addition, in view of the fact that the shooting of the game ball is executed based on the player's shooting operation, the execution condition (1) is satisfied when the waiting time has passed since the shooting operation of the game ball is completed. It is also possible to As shown in these modifications, in the configuration in which it is assumed that there are no remaining balls due to the passage of the waiting time, additional components such as sensors can be reduced as much as possible, so that the structure of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified. is advantageous.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment described above, it is determined whether or not the payout of the game balls is due later based on the information from the payout control device 242, and the setting change is permitted on the condition that the payout of the game balls is not due. However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the substantial time from the occurrence of a prize to the completion of the payout of game balls is fixed to some extent, the standby time is set based on this time, and the ball corresponding to the prize balls such as the general prize winning port 81 is entered. When a prize is won for a part, the fact that the standby time has passed since the win may be set as one of the execution conditions for the setting change.

<Modification 3>
A configuration may be adopted in which whether or not the dispensing device 224 is in operation is specified, and the fact that the dispensing device 224 is not in operation is added to one of the execution conditions.

<Modification 4>
The information stored in the monitoring device 600 may be used to monitor the occurrence of an abnormality, and if an abnormality occurs, setting changes may be prohibited. In addition, in a configuration in which an abnormality is notified when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to set the fact that the abnormality notification has been canceled as one of the conditions for executing the setting change.

<Modification 5>
When the setting is changed, as in the case where the RAM erase switch is operated, it is also possible to configure such that various game information such as hold information and payout information stored in the RAM 404 are erased. . Even with such a configuration, since setting changes are restricted while a game is being played, it is possible to preferably prevent the loss of privileges that should be obtained due to setting changes during a game. can.

<Modification 6>
Before the winning lottery and the distribution lottery are performed in the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 (that is, before the corresponding game round is started), the content of the pending information is specified in advance, and the destination is specified. It is also possible to have a configuration in which a notice effect (for example, a suspended notice effect) corresponding to the result of (1) is executed before the corresponding game time (for example, a game time that is being executed in advance). In the configuration that suggests the lottery result in the corresponding game round by the notice effect, the setting change is executed in the middle, so the notice effect that should have corresponded to the jackpot result may be cut off midway. It is assumed that the game result of is inconsistent with the content of the advance notice effect. In this respect, when the pending information is stored, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be preferably suppressed by adopting a configuration in which the setting change is restricted.

<Second Embodiment>
One of the features of this embodiment is that the cooperation between the main control device 162 and the payout control device 242 is devised to improve the security function of the gaming machine. In the following, the configuration related to this ingenuity will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. Note that descriptions of various configurations that are common to the first embodiment will be omitted.

In the main control device 162, information indicating the set value being selected is transmitted to the payout control device 242 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (at startup) and when the setting is changed. The payout control device 242 can identify the set value being selected based on these pieces of information. First, with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38(a), the processing related to transmission of setting values executed by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162 will be described. FIG. 37(a) is a flowchart showing the initial command output process (S110) executed as part of the main process (see FIG. 19), and FIG. 37(b) shows settings executed as part of the normal process (see FIG. 23). FIG. 38A is a flowchart showing the change processing (S1313), and FIG. 38A is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between set values and initial commands.

(Initial command output processing)
As shown in FIG. 37(a), in the initial command output process, first, the current set value is confirmed in step S1401. That is, the setting value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is confirmed. In the following step S1402, a code (identification information of set value) to be given to the initial command to be output to the payout control device 242 is determined.

The following information is stored in the ROM 403 of the main controller 162 as a set value identification information group. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38(a), four codes "BAAA", "ABAA", "AAABA", and "AAAB" are provided as codes corresponding to setting 1, and corresponding to setting 2. Four codes "BBAA", "BABA", "BAAB" and "ABAB" are provided as codes. There are 4 codes. In the process of step S1402, one code is randomly determined from among a plurality of codes corresponding to the current set value.

In step S1403, the code determined in step S1402 is stored in the code storage area of RAM404. After that, the code will be referred to in the prize ball command setting process, which will be described later, until the setting is changed. In the subsequent step S1404, the initial command is output to the sub-side control device such as the payout control device 242, and the initial command output processing is terminated.

The code set in the initial command output process will be reset when the setting is changed. Here, the setting change processing will be described with reference to FIG. 37(b).

(setting change processing)
In the setting change process, first, in step S1501, the setting selected by the current setting change operation is specified. In the subsequent step S1502, reference table switching processing is performed. This prohibits access to other lottery tables that do not correspond to the current set values. In the following step S1503, a code (identification information of setting value) is determined. The details of the code determination are the same as those in step S1402, so description thereof will be omitted.

In the subsequent step S1504, the code determined in step S1503 is stored (overwritten) in the code storage area of the RAM 404. FIG. After that, a setting change command is set in step S1505, and this setting change processing ends. The setting change command set in step S1505 is transmitted to the payout control device 242 in the external output process (step S501) of the normal process.

When the MPU of the payout control device 242 receives the initial command and the setting change command, it specifies the setting value from the code included in those commands and stores it in the RAM of the payout control device 242 .

Next, the prize ball command setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 38(b). The prize ball command setting process is a process executed to instruct the payout control device 242 to pay out the prize balls in each winning process of steps S205 to S207.

(Prize ball command setting process)
In the prize ball command setting process, first, in step S1601, the winning destination is specified. Next, in step S1602, the code stored in the code storage area of the RAM 404 is read. Then, in the following step S1603, a prize ball command is generated including the read code. The prize ball command generated in this manner includes information indicating the number of prize balls, information indicating the winning destination, and various types of code information (see FIG. 38(c)), and external output processing of normal processing (step S501). to the payout control device 242.

Here, with reference to FIG. 39(a), command correspondence processing executed as a part of regular processing by the MPU of the payout control device 242 will be described.

(Command response processing)
In the command handling process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is an initial command or a setting change command. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, the set value is specified from the code included in those commands, and stored in the set value storage area provided in the RAM of the payout control device 242. Similar to the main control device 162, the ROM of the payout control device 242 pre-stores a conversion table (see the schematic diagram of FIG. 38) showing the relationship between the code and the setting value. Setting values are specified.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1703. In step S1703, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a prize ball command. If a negative determination is made in step S1703, the command processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1703, the process proceeds to step S1704.

In step S1704, the conversion table is referred to, and the set value is specified and stored from the code included in the prize command received this time.

In the subsequent step S1705, it is confirmed whether or not the set value identified in step S1704 matches the set value stored in the code storage area of the RAM. If a negative determination is made in step S1705, the process proceeds to step S1709. In step S1709, the value of the reservation counter provided in the various counter areas of the RAM is added according to the number of winning balls of the winning ball command received this time. The value of the reservation counter is cleared to 0 by executing conversion to a payout counter, which will be described later.

In the process of step S1705 described above, each set value basically matches. On the other hand, if the set values do not match, there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in either the main controller 162 or the payout controller 242 . In such a case, instead of paying out the prize balls immediately, the payout of the prize balls is withheld (delayed) at least until the above-mentioned abnormality is resolved.

After the abnormality notification process is executed in the following step S1710, the command handling process is terminated. In the abnormality notification process, an abnormality notification command is transmitted to the notification/production control device 140 . The notification/effect control device 140 executes abnormality notification on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 or the like based on the reception of this abnormality notification command.

Returning to the description of step S1705, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1705, that is, if the set values match, the process proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, the value of the payout counter provided in various counter areas of the RAM is added according to the number of winning balls of the winning ball command received this time. The value of the payout counter is decremented each time a prize ball is paid out, and when the value of the payout counter becomes 0, the number of prize balls waiting to be paid out becomes 0.

After executing the process of step S1706, the process proceeds to step S1707. In step S1707, it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball whose payout is reserved by referring to the values of reservation counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM. If a negative determination is made in step S1707, the command processing ends. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1707, the process proceeds to step S1708, and the value of the reservation counter is added as the value of the payout counter. As a result, the payout of prize balls, which has been reserved until then, will be paid out.

According to the second embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A prize ball command (corresponding to "payout instruction information") output from the main controller 162 includes information corresponding to the set value. In the payout control device 242, the setting value set in the main control device 162 can be specified from the prize ball command. In this way, by sharing the setting values between the main controller 162 and the payout controller 242, the cooperation between the two controllers 162 and 242 can be strengthened. Since the prize ball command is information that is output to the payout control device 242 fairly frequently as the game progresses, by adding information indicating the set value to such an existing command, it is possible to confirm the set value. You can increase your chances. This is a preferable configuration for improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

When the setting is changed, the setting value information determined by the main controller 162 is input to the payout control device 242, and the payout control device 242 stores the setting value information. After that, when a prize ball command is received from the main controller 162, it is determined whether or not the set value specified from the prize ball command matches the set value stored when the setting is changed. As a result, even if an illegal act such as replacing the main controller 162 with an illegal one is performed, it is possible to see through it.

When the set value stored in advance and the set value specified this time do not match, etc., an abnormality occurs and the payout of the game ball is avoided. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally acquire game balls, and to strengthen the crime prevention function of the game machine.

In a configuration in which it is determined whether or not game balls are to be paid out based on the comparison result of the set values, there is a possibility that fraud such as clearing the set value information will be performed. When the set value information is cleared in this manner, the security function can be strengthened by regulating the payout of game balls even if a winning command is input.

There is a certain amount of time lag between when the prize ball command is input to the payout control device 242 and when the game is actually paid out. Such a time lag becomes large when the payout of the game balls does not catch up with, for example, the prize ball commands are continuously input. Here, when it is confirmed that an abnormality has occurred based on the set value, while continuing to pay out those that have already been decided to be paid out, a new prize ball command that is determined to be abnormal is regulated. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably avoid the inconvenience that the player cannot even receive a payout that should have been originally obtained due to the enhancement of the crime prevention function or the like.

When the set values do not match, the game ball payout based on the prize ball command is reserved, and the reservation is canceled when it is confirmed that the set values match with the subsequent prize ball command. It will happen. For example, since the possibility of accidental occurrence of the above-mentioned abnormality due to contamination of noise etc. cannot be denied, if it is confirmed that there is no abnormality in the subsequent prize ball command as described above, the pending payout will be performed. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the enhancement of the crime prevention function or the like.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above-described second embodiment, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the second embodiment, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to the second embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured.

<Modification 1>
In the second embodiment, the configuration is such that the identification information of the setting values included in the initial command, the setting change command, and the prize ball command is encrypted. At least the main control device 162 and the payout control device 242 share the set values, and each time a prize ball command is received, it is sufficient if the set values are configured to be able to check whether the set values are different. is not necessarily encrypted.

<Modification 2>
In the above-described second embodiment, the prize ball command includes the identification information of the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient if the setting values can be appropriately collated between the main control device 162 and the payout control device 242, and the confirmation command including the identification information of the setting value is sent from the main control device 162 to the payout control device separately from the prize ball command. H.242 may also be used. For example, it may be configured to periodically transmit the confirmation command, or if a state in which the game has not been played for a certain period of time (non-operating state) continues, at the timing when the game is restarted The configuration may be such that the confirmation command is transmitted.

However, when a confirmation command different from the prize ball command is provided as a command transmitted from the main control device 162 to the payout control device 242, it is not preferable that the output timings of both commands overlap. When both the prize ball command and the confirmation command are transmitted to the payout control device 242, it is preferable that the former is prioritized over the latter. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably prevent the responsiveness of the payout of prize balls from deteriorating even when the commands to be used are diversified.

<Modification 3>
In the second embodiment, the configuration is such that the identification information of the set value is included in the winning ball command for all the balls entering the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating openings 83a and 83b. not to be When the deviation of the frequency of entering balls is set to decrease in the order of variable winning device 82 > general winning port 81 > lower operating port 83b > upper operating port 83a, at least the bias of the frequency of entering balls is the highest. It suffices if identification information of the set value is added to the winning ball command for the small ball entering portion. In view of the fact that the ball-entering portion of the variable type is more biased in the frequency of entering the ball, it may be configured such that identification information of the set value is added to the prize command for the ball-entering portion that is not of the variable type.

<Modification 4>
In the second embodiment, the set values are compared, but instead or in addition, the codes may be directly compared.

<Third Embodiment>
In the second embodiment, the crime prevention function is improved by strengthening the cooperation between the main control device 162 and the payout control device 242, but in the present embodiment, the main control device 162 and the payout control device One of the features is that the crime prevention function is further improved by strengthening the cooperation among the three parties, ie, the monitoring device 600 in addition to the H.242. In addition, in this embodiment, since the main configuration is common to the second embodiment, the configuration related to the above cooperation will be mainly described, and the description of the configuration common to the second embodiment will be omitted. do.

As described above, the winning ball command transmitted from the main control device 162 to the payout control device 242 includes the above-mentioned code, which is the identification information of the setting value. This code is diverted to a payout command transmitted from the payout control device 242 to the monitoring device 600 . That is, the information transmitted from the payout control device 242 to the monitoring device 600 also includes the code, which is the identification information of the set value.

In the monitoring device 600, similarly to the main control device 162 and the payout control device 242, a conversion table (see the schematic diagram of FIG. 38) indicating the relationship between the code and the setting value is stored in advance, and this conversion table is referred to. The set value is specified by In addition, in the second storage area 606 of the monitoring device 600, the setting value storage area corresponding to the main control device for storing the setting value specified from the code acquired from the main control device 162, and the code acquired from the payout control device 242 A setting value storage area corresponding to the payout control device for storing the specified setting value is provided. In the monitoring device 600, by comparing the setting values stored in the setting value storage areas, it is possible to identify whether the main control device 162 and the payout control device 242 are normally linked. The setting value comparing process executed by the monitoring device 600 will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39(b). The set value comparison process is a process periodically executed by the control unit of the monitoring device 600 .

In the setting value comparison process, first, in step S1721, it is determined whether or not a prize ball command from the main controller 162 or a payout command from the payout control device 242 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S1721, this set value comparing process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1721, the process proceeds to step S1722. In step S1722, the code is read from the command received this time, and the setting value specified from the code is overwritten (updated) in the corresponding one of the setting value storage areas.

After that, in step S1723, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a payout command from the payout control device 242. If a negative determination is made in step S1723, this set value comparing process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1723, the process proceeds to step S1724. In step S1724, the set value stored in the set value storage area corresponding to the main controller is compared with the set value stored in the set value storage area corresponding to the payout control device. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1724, that is, if both set values match, this set value comparing process ends. When both the main control device 162 and the payout control device 242 are operating normally, affirmative determination is basically made in step S1724.

If a negative determination is made in step S1724, that is, if the code is not included in the received command, or if the set value is different even if the code is included, the process proceeds to step S1725. For example, when the setting values do not match because the payout control device 242 is replaced with an illegal one, a negative determination is made in step S1724.

In step S1725, an abnormality occurrence process is executed. Specifically, it stores the occurrence of abnormality in the second storage area 606 and outputs an abnormality notification command to the notification/production control device 140 . The notification/effect control device 140 drives the speaker section 29 and the error display lamp section 27 of the front door frame 14 on the basis of the command to execute abnormality notification.

In a game machine having a setting change function, setting values may be changed illegally for the purpose of illegal acquisition of benefits. At this time, it cannot be denied that the fact of fraud may be concealed by falsifying the information input to the monitoring device 600 . Here, as shown in the present embodiment, the information indicating the set value is not only input directly from the main controller 162 to the monitoring device 600, but also input to the monitoring device 600 via the payout control device 242. be done. By comparing these pieces of information in the monitoring device 600, it is possible to find out whether the information has been falsified or the like. As a result, the security function of the game machine can be improved.

When the information indicating the setting values is compared, if the timing is greatly deviated, there is a possibility that an erroneous determination is made when the setting is changed normally. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which information indicating a set value is input/output in accordance with a series of movements from occurrence of a prize to payout, the deviation of the above timing is suppressed, and the determination result is confirmed. Likeness can be suitably improved.

For example, when a prize is awarded to the general prize winning port 81, a prize ball command relating to the prize is immediately output to the payout control device 242, and the payout control device 242 receives the prize ball command. will be paid out. In other words, the timing at which the payout command is input to the monitoring device 600 is later than the timing at which the prize ball command is input. As shown in the first embodiment, in the situation where game balls are about to be paid out, it is impossible to change the setting value. Basically, the set values match. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid occurrence of a difference in the set value even though the game machine is operating normally due to an interrupt of setting change operation or the like. This is a preferred configuration for improving the reliability of the monitoring function.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above-described third embodiment, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the above-described third embodiment, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to the third embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured.

<Modification 1>
In the third embodiment, the above comparison is performed when a payout command is received from the payout control device 242, but instead of or in addition to this, a prize ball command is received from the main control device 162. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the above comparison is performed when Even in such a configuration, since the code included in the prize ball command from the main control device 162 is inherited for the payout command, it is possible to avoid failure of abnormality determination. In addition, when the main controller 162 is illegally replaced, it becomes possible to identify it, which contributes to further enhancement of the crime prevention function.

<Modification 2>
In the third embodiment, the configuration is such that the identification information (code) of the set value is given to the payout command transmitted from the payout control device 242 to the monitoring device 600, but the main control device 162, the monitoring device 600, the payout In order to strengthen the cooperation of the three controllers 242, it is sufficient if the monitoring device 600 can compare each information from the main controller 162 and the payout controller 242. For example, in addition to the payout command, the command transmitted from the payout control device 242 to the monitoring device 600 may be provided with the identification information of the set value.

<Modification 3>
In the above-described third embodiment, the payout command generated by the payout control device 242 takes over the code of the prize ball command that triggered the payout command, but is not limited to this. . It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM of the payout control device 242 is given to the payout command.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the winning information (monitoring information) stored in the monitoring device 600 is acquired by the notification/production control device 140, and an abnormality notification is executed based on the acquired winning information. ing. At this time, one of the features is that the set value is taken into consideration when determining whether an abnormality has occurred. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 40, various processes related to abnormality notification (abnormality notification setting process and abnormality notification process) executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/production control device 140 will be described. FIG. 40(a) is a flowchart showing the abnormality notification setting process, and FIG. 40(b) is a flowchart showing the abnormality notification process.

(Setting processing for anomaly notification)
The abnormality notification setting process is a process executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/production control device 140 as part of regular processing. As shown in FIG. 40A, in the abnormality notification setting process, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether an initial command or a setting change command has been received from the main controller 162 . If a negative determination is made in step S1801, the abnormality notification setting process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, the process proceeds to step S1802.

In step S1802, it is determined whether or not the setting value has been changed based on the setting value information included in the initial command or the setting change command. If a negative determination is made in step S1802, that is, if the setting value is left unchanged without being changed, the abnormality notification setting process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1802, the process proceeds to step S1803.

In step S1803, processing for erasing accumulated data (winning information) is executed. In this embodiment, when the setting value is changed, information is acquired from the monitoring device 600 and then stored. Acquire information → Start memory.

In the following step S1804, a process of setting a threshold used for abnormality determination is executed. In the present embodiment, a threshold value is provided for each set value, and the threshold value corresponding to the current set value is used in subsequent abnormality determinations. The threshold value is defined in consideration of design errors, game conditions, etc., and is provided with a certain range. If the actual winnings occur within this threshold, it is determined (estimated) that the gaming machine is operating normally. Determine (estimate) that an abnormality has occurred.

The abnormality determination executed based on the prize winning information targets each of the general prize winning port 81, the variable prize winning device 82, and the operation ports 83a and 83b, but the outline thereof is the same. Therefore, in the following description, the outline of the abnormality determination will be described by taking the general winning hole 81 as an example, and the description of the outline of the abnormality determination related to other ball-entering portions will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 6 and 41, a supplementary explanation will be given as to why the threshold value is set individually for each set value. FIG. 41(a) is a schematic diagram showing the winning probability to the general winning opening 81 for each route, and FIG. 41(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between set values and thresholds.

As shown in FIG. 6, for the game area PE, a left route bypassing the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 from the left side and a right route bypassing from the right side of the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 are provided by the center frame 95 arranged in the center of the game area PE. and The left route is provided with an upper operating port 83a, and in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball to the left route than to the right route. progresses. That is, in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, the game proceeds mainly by shooting game balls to the left route. On the other hand, the right route is provided with a lower operation port 83b accompanied by an electric accessory 91, a variable prize winning device 82, and a through gate 84, and a normal game state and opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode. In , the game progresses more advantageously for the player when the game ball is shot in the right route than in the left route. That is, in the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode and the open/close execution mode, the game proceeds mainly by shooting the game balls to the right route.

Here, for the three general winning holes 81a to 81c arranged on the left route, the winning probability becomes 1/300 regardless of the game state when the game ball is shot toward the left route. ing. In other words, the probability of winning when the three general winning openings 81a to 81c are integrated is 1/100 (see FIG. 41(a)). This probability is constant without being affected by the game state.

One general winning hole 81d arranged on the right route has a different winning probability depending on the game state when the game ball is shot toward the right route.

Specifically, the general prize winning port 81d is arranged at the most downstream portion of the right route, and the variable prize winning device 82 is arranged at a position upstream of the general prize winning port 81d on the right route. Therefore, during the open/close execution mode, some of the game balls heading for the general winning opening 81d flow into the variable winning device 82, and an event occurs in which winning to the general winning opening 81d is avoided. Due to such circumstances, the winning probability is 1/100 in the normal game state, while the winning probability drops to 1/500 in the opening/closing execution mode.

Therefore, in the normal game state, even if the game ball is shot toward either the right route or the left route, the winning probability of the general winning hole 81 as a whole is the same at 1/100. On the other hand, in the open/close execution mode, when the game ball is shot toward the right route and when the game ball is shot toward the left route, the general winning hole 81 as a whole is different. Winning probability will be different.

And, as already explained, in settings 1 to 3, the probability of a big hit result is set 3
< Setting 2 < Setting 1 is differentiated so that it becomes higher in order. Due to the difference in the opportunities to shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the winning probability of the general winning opening 81 as a whole increases in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3. In view of such circumstances, the threshold corresponding to setting 1, the threshold corresponding to setting 2, and the threshold corresponding to setting 3 are provided with a stepwise difference. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41(b), the threshold corresponding to setting 3 is the highest, the threshold corresponding to setting 2 is lower than the threshold corresponding to setting 3, and the threshold corresponding to setting 1 is It is lower than the threshold corresponding to setting 2. The upper limit of each threshold is mainly set based on the winning probability when the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode continues, and the lower limit is mainly set according to the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode and opening and closing execution. It is set based on the winning probability when the modes are repeated (so-called consecutive wins).

The notification/effect control device 140 is configured to determine whether or not the winning probability is normal by referring to the threshold value selected based on the current set value. Here, the abnormality notification process executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/production control device 140 will be described with reference to FIG. 40(b).

(Abnormality notification processing)
In the abnormality notification process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not abnormality notification is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the process advances to step S1902 to execute information acquisition processing. In the information acquisition process, information on the number of winnings to the general winnings opening 81 and information on the number of shots of game balls are acquired from the monitoring device 600 .

In the subsequent step S1903, it is determined whether or not a determination condition for abnormality determination is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls shot after the previous abnormality determination or after the setting change has reached a specified number in step S1903. In the present embodiment, the specified number is 30,000, and considering that the shooting cycle of the game balls is 0.6 sec, it takes about 6 hours if the game balls are continuously shot. Reach the specified number by passing.

If a negative determination is made in step S1903, that is, if sufficient data cannot be secured, the abnormality notification process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1903, the process proceeds to step S1904. In step S1904, the winning probability of the general winning opening 81 is calculated from the number of winning winning openings to the general winning opening 81 after the change to the current settings and the number of shots of game balls. Determine whether or not

If it is within the range of the threshold value, a negative determination is made in step S1905, and the abnormality notification process ends. If it is out of the threshold range, an affirmative determination is made in step S1905, and the process proceeds to step S1906. In step S1906, the value of the abnormality notification counter provided in the various counter areas 465 of the RAM 444 of the notification/production control device 140 is updated (1 is added).

In the subsequent step S1907, it is determined whether or not the value of the abnormality notification counter has reached the maximum (five times in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S1907, the abnormality notification process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1907, the process advances to step S1908 to execute abnormality notification start processing. By executing the abnormality notification start process, the abnormality notification is performed by the speaker portion 29 and the error display lamp portion 27 of the front door frame 14 .

Returning to the description of step S1901, if the determination in step S1901 is affirmative, that is, if the abnormality is being reported, the process proceeds to step S1909. In step S1909, it is determined whether or not an operation to cancel the anomaly notification has been performed. If a negative determination is made in step S1909, the abnormality notification process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1909, the process proceeds to step S1910. In step S1910, an abnormality notification cancellation process is executed. As a result, the abnormality notification being executed by the speaker unit 29 and the error display lamp unit 27 is cancelled, and the value of the abnormality notification counter is cleared to "0".

When a threshold is used for abnormality determination, the following effects can be expected by providing a threshold for each set value as shown in the present embodiment. For example, if the calculated winning probability falls within any threshold range of any setting 1 to setting 3 as shown in winning probability Y1 in FIG. If not, there is no effect on the certainty of the decision. However, in a configuration in which the determination result differs depending on the threshold value as shown by the winning probability Y2 and the winning probability Y3, there is a possibility that the certainty of the abnormality determination will be affected. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, if the threshold is switched for each set value, it may be determined that a value outside the range of the threshold is within the range of the threshold, It is possible to suppress the determination that an object within the range of the threshold is out of the range of the threshold. As a result, the certainty of abnormality monitoring can be improved, and the reliability of the monitoring function can be improved.

In a gaming machine having a setting change function, the behavior of a game ball may differ for each set value, and the probability of a ball entering a ball entry section may vary depending on the set value. For this reason, in a configuration in which a game situation is monitored and a predetermined process (for example, abnormality notification) is performed based on the monitoring result (judgment result), when an attempt is made to make a unique judgment for any set value, the judgment It becomes difficult to improve the certainty of the result. For example, if the reference information is set so as to correspond to all setting values, the range of the reference information becomes large, and it is assumed that it becomes difficult to improve the probability. In this respect, as shown in this feature, if the reference information is provided for each set value, the certainty of the determination result can be improved, and the reliability of the game machine (especially the monitoring device) can be preferably improved. can.

Realize simplification of judgment processing by adopting a configuration in which judgment is limited to the current set values instead of judging all the setting values (Setting 1 to Setting 3) given to the game machine. be able to. This is a preferred configuration for reducing the control load accompanying the addition of the monitoring function.

It is also possible to unify the thresholds used for abnormality determination so that they are common to all set values. However, in such a configuration, it is assumed that the abnormality determination is excessively strict, resulting in frequent abnormality reporting, or the abnormality determination is excessively lenient, making it easy for the abnormality to be overlooked. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the threshold is selectively used depending on the set value, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconveniences.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the content described in the fourth embodiment described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied to the fourth embodiment individually, or may be applied in combination with a part or all of them to the fourth embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured.

<Modification 1>
In the fourth embodiment, the case where the variable winning device 82 is arranged on the flow path toward the general winning opening 81 is exemplified. Also in the configuration in which the operation opening 83b is arranged, there may be a difference in the winning probability to the general winning opening 81 depending on the setting value. That is, the support mode by the electric accessory 91 is switched from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode when a jackpot result is obtained. Regarding the jackpot result that triggers the switching of the support mode, the occurrence rate differs depending on the set value. Therefore, the winning probability to the general winning opening 81 also varies depending on the set value. In such a configuration, similarly to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, by providing a difference in the threshold value according to the set value, it is possible to preferably improve the certainty of the abnormality determination.

<Modification 2>
In the above-described fourth embodiment, a configuration has been described in which the more advantageous the set value is to the player, the lower the winning rate to the general winning opening 81 . For example, the probability of winning the general prize-winning port 81 is higher for the general prize-winning port 81 on the right route than the general prize-winning port 81 on the left route. If it is configured to increase, the threshold is set according to the difference in such winning probability, and the threshold for setting 3 < threshold for setting 2 < threshold for setting 1 By setting the threshold for setting 1, the abnormality determination The certainty can be preferably improved.

<Modification 3>
In the configuration in which the game state can be grasped by the notification/production control device 140, the threshold value may be changed according to the game state. For example, the threshold in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the threshold in the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and the threshold corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode may be set individually for each of the settings 1 to 3.

<Fifth Embodiment>
As shown in the above-described fourth embodiment, in the configuration for monitoring the probability of winning, by securing a large number of samples, it is expected that the certainty of abnormality monitoring will be further improved. In this embodiment, the main configuration is similar to that of the fourth embodiment, but the configuration is different from that of the fourth embodiment in that the number of samples is increased to further improve the probability. are different. A characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. FIG. FIG. 43(a) is a block diagram showing the monitoring device 600, FIG. 43(b) is a schematic diagram showing information stored in the monitoring device 600, and FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing for anomaly information.

As shown in FIG. 43( a ), the storage unit 604 of the monitoring device 600 is provided with a temporary storage area 607 in addition to the first storage area 605 and second storage area 606 . In the temporary storage area 607, 100 addresses are provided for each of the upper operation opening 83a, the lower operation opening 83b, the general winning opening 81, and the variable winning device 82, and each address is a target. The number of winning prizes to the entering ball section is stored each time a specified number (10,000 in this embodiment) of game balls are shot. These winning numbers are stored in association with the set values at that time. When new information is acquired under the condition that all the addresses are filled, the information is overwritten in order from the old information.

FIG. 43(b) exemplifies a group of information for a general winning slot. Each address stores the number of wins for each predetermined number of shots, information on set values, and information on whether or not settings have been changed. For example, at address 9, information is stored indicating that the set value has changed from "1" to "2" in the middle.

Next, referring to FIG. 44, the abnormality notification process will be described. Note that the abnormality notification process is configured to be executed for each of the various ball-entering sections in which the set value may cause a difference in the winning probability. The abnormality notification process will be described, and the description of the abnormality notification process related to the winning of the other ball-entering section will be omitted because it is the same as that.

(Abnormality notification processing)
In the abnormality notification process in this embodiment, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not abnormality notification is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the process advances to step S2002 to execute information acquisition processing. In the information acquisition process, information on the number of shots of game balls is acquired from the monitoring device 600 .

In the subsequent step S2003, it is determined whether or not the determination condition for abnormality determination is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of shots has reached the specified number and the information in the temporary storage area 607 has been updated. In the present embodiment, the specified number is 10,000, which corresponds to approximately 100 minutes in view of the fact that the shooting cycle of game balls is 0.6 sec.

If a negative determination is made in step S2003, that is, if the data has not been updated, the abnormality notification process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, the process proceeds to step S2004. In step S2004, a predetermined number of pieces of information corresponding to the same setting value as the current setting value are read from the information stored in each address of the temporary storage area 607 in order from the newest one. For example, as shown in FIG. 45, when the current set value is "1", five pieces of information corresponding to the same set value are read in order from the youngest address (new information). In this case, those whose set values have been changed in the middle (for example, information stored at the fifth address) are excluded from the read targets.

After executing the process of step S2004, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, the winning probability is calculated from the read information. By securing a large number of samples for calculating the winning probability in this way, the certainty of the determination result in the determination processing in step S2006 is improved. If the winning probability to the general winning opening 81 is within the range of the threshold value, a negative determination is made in step S2007, and the abnormality notification process ends. If it is out of the threshold range, an affirmative determination is made in step S2007, and the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, the value of the abnormality notification counter provided in the various counter areas 465 of the RAM 444 of the notification/production control device 140 is updated (1 is added).

In the subsequent step S2009, it is determined whether or not the value of the abnormality notification counter has reached the maximum (five times in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S2009, the abnormality notification process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2009, the process advances to step S2010 to execute abnormality notification start processing. By executing the abnormality notification start process, the abnormality notification is performed by the speaker portion 29 and the error display lamp portion 27 of the front door frame 14 .

Returning to the description of step S2001, if the determination in step S2001 is affirmative, that is, if the abnormality is being reported, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether or not an operation to cancel the anomaly notification has been performed. If a negative determination is made in step S2011, the abnormality notification process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2011, the process proceeds to step S2012. In step S2012, an abnormality notification cancellation process is executed. As a result, the abnormality notification being executed by the speaker unit 29 and the error display lamp unit 27 is cancelled, and the value of the abnormality notification counter is cleared to "0".

A set value is associated with the information on the number of wins stored in the monitoring device 600 . Therefore, information corresponding to the same setting value as the current setting value can be read from information (results) stored in the past and used. As a result, even if a winning mode occurs that falls outside the range of the threshold value, it is possible to prevent such an accidental event from being determined as abnormal. Here, when using past information, if information with other set values is read, the certainty of abnormality determination decreases. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to execute abnormality determination by ignoring past information and focusing on current information, there is a high possibility that variations due to accidental circumstances as described above will be determined to be abnormal. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to narrow down to the same set value even when past information is used, so that the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the certainty of abnormality determination.

If the monitoring device 600 is configured to monitor the ball-entering state, for example, when an event occurs in which the ball-entering frequency greatly deviates from the design value due to deformation of a game nail or the like, it can be detected at an early stage. can. This is preferable in terms of suppressing disadvantages for the game hall and the players and improving the reliability of the game machine. Here, in a gaming machine having a setting change function, there is a possibility that the behavior of a game ball may differ depending on the set value, and the winning probability to various ball entry portions such as the general winning hole 81 may differ. In monitoring device 600 of the present embodiment, winning information is stored in association with set values. In such a configuration, the entering ball information can be sorted according to the set value, so that it is possible to improve the determination accuracy when determining whether or not the above-described threshold value is exceeded. This can increase the certainty of the monitoring results in winning monitoring and contribute to improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

In order to monitor the winning status, it is important to deal with temporary variation in winning frequency. For example, if the bias in prize winning increases temporarily, it is difficult to identify whether or not it is due to an accidental factor. Variation can be reduced. In other words, it is preferable to secure a certain amount of data (samples) to be referred to when performing determination. However, as described above, the stored data includes data with different corresponding set values, so if they are collectively referred to, the certainty of the data is reduced. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, if winning information corresponding to the same setting value as the current setting value is selected from among the winning information stored in the past and used for determination, the above-described The effect can be exhibited favorably.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the content described in the above-described fifth embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the above fifth embodiment, or may be applied to the above fifth embodiment by combining a part or all of them. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured.

<Modification 1>
In the fifth embodiment, the information is stored in the temporary storage area 607 even if the setting value is changed in the middle. It is also possible to employ a configuration in which the information is erased when the By avoiding the address from being filled with information that is not substantially used, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the number of information that can be referred to is insufficient.

<Modification 2>
If the set value is changed before the number of shots of game balls reaches the specified number, the information may be newly accumulated from the time the set value is changed. As a result, information corresponding to a plurality of setting values (information that is substantially difficult to use) can be avoided.

<Modification 3>
It is also possible to set a storage upper limit number for each set value for the winning number information stored in the temporary storage area 607 . Even in a gaming machine having a setting change function, setting changes are not always made frequently, and the same setting values may be maintained for a certain period of time. In such a case, there is a concern that if the stored winning number information is biased due to the set values, the effect of improving the certainty of abnormality determination cannot be exhibited satisfactorily. For example, even though setting 1 to setting 3 are provided as setting values, if the information in setting 1 is excessively small, when the determination in setting 1 is executed under the situation It is assumed that there will be a shortage of samples (data) that can be referred to, and the probability of abnormality determination will decrease. In this respect, if an upper limit is defined for the winning number information that can be stored for each set value as shown in this modified example, it is possible to preferably suppress the decrease in the certainty of determination due to lack of samples.

<Modification 4>
The addresses in the temporary storage area 607 may be divided for each set value. For example, if the temporary storage area consists of 99 addresses, assign 33 addresses for setting 1, 33 addresses for setting 2, and 33 addresses for setting 3. Good.

<Modification 5>
In the fifth embodiment, when new winning information is stored under the condition that the winning number information is stored in all the addresses constituting the temporary storage area 607, the oldest winning number information is stored. Although the information is overwritten on the stored address (#100 address in the fifth embodiment), the configuration is not limited to this. When newly storing winning number information, the number of winning number information stored for each set value is specified, and the winning number corresponding to the setting value for which the winning number information is relatively small is determined. It is also possible to overwrite the oldest information among the number information. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in bias in the number of winning prize number information stored for each set value.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment described above, the number of prizes won is stored in association with the set value, and past information corresponding to the same set value as the current set value is used to increase the likelihood of abnormality determination. It is configured to improve. This embodiment is similar to the fifth embodiment in terms of improving the certainty of abnormality determination, but the specific configuration for exhibiting such an effect is different from that of the fifth embodiment. are different. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 46, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, centering on the differences from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 46(a) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of information processing in the monitoring device 600, and FIG. 46(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between set values and correction coefficients.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), the prize ball command input from the main controller 162 to the monitoring device 600 includes information indicating the occurrence of a prize and information on the set value at the time when the prize occurred. ing. The information acquisition unit 603 of the monitoring device 600 that has received the prize ball command creates prize determination information from these pieces of information. Specifically, the winning determination information is created by multiplying the number of winnings by a correction coefficient. The generated prize determination information is cumulatively stored in the youngest address (#1 address). When the number of shots reaches the specified number, the stored information is shifted and the newly acquired information is stored in the #1 address.

Here, the correction coefficient will be described with reference to FIG. 46(b). A correction coefficient is provided for each set value, and in the present embodiment, the correction coefficient for setting 1 is "1.02", the correction coefficient for setting 2 is "1", and the correction coefficient for setting 3 is It is "0.97".

For example, when setting 1 and setting 2 are compared, the actual winning probability to the general winning opening 81 when shooting game balls to the left and right routes according to the progress of the game is taken into account. deviation occurs. Specifically, in setting 1, the winning probability to the general winning opening 81 is slightly lower than in setting 2. The correction coefficient for setting 1 is a value obtained by dividing the winning probability in setting 2 by the winning probability in setting 1 . If there are wins with setting 1, the number of wins is estimated by multiplying the number of wins by the correction coefficient "1.02" for setting 1, assuming that the current setting is setting 2. do. In other words, the winning that occurred in setting 1 is actually converted into the winning that occurred in setting 2.

Even when setting 2 and setting 3 are compared, there is a slight difference in the actual winning probability to the general winning hole 81 when shooting game balls to the left and right routes according to the progress of the game. occur. Specifically, in setting 3, the winning probability to the general winning opening 81 is slightly higher than in setting 2. Therefore, the correction coefficient for setting 3 is a value obtained by dividing the substantial winning probability in setting 2 by the substantial winning probability in setting 3. FIG. If there are wins with setting 3, the number of wins is estimated by multiplying the number of wins by the correction coefficient "0.97" for setting 3, assuming that the current setting is setting 2. do. In other words, the winning that occurred in setting 3 is actually converted into the winning that occurred in setting 2.

Further, in the present embodiment, the threshold value is not set for each set value, but is common to each setting 1-3. Specifically, the threshold for setting 2 shown in the fourth embodiment is a common threshold for settings 1 to 3. FIG.

In the abnormality determination process, when determining whether or not the winning probability is within the range of the threshold value, the information stored in each address of the temporary storage area 607 of the monitoring device 600 is acquired. Become. In this embodiment, it is not necessary to select information according to set values. Due to such circumstances, the number of addresses is also smaller than that of the fifth embodiment.

In a gaming machine having a setting change function, there are various types of setting values to be selected, and the setting value used when determining an abnormality does not always match the setting value of winning information stored in the past. Here, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, even if a setting value different from the current setting value is associated with the stored samples, the correction is performed so as to match the current setting value. be done. Therefore, it is possible to secure winning information that can be used as a sample for abnormality determination regardless of differences in set values. This can contribute to improving the certainty of the determination result.

In the configuration in which the variable winning device 82 is arranged upstream of the general winning opening 81d, the movement of the variable winning device 82 may cause a difference in the winning frequency to the general winning opening 81d. Therefore, in monitoring the winning status of the general winning opening 81d, as shown in the present embodiment, by determining a correction value according to the frequency of winning to the general winning opening 81d, the stored winning information is converted into information corresponding to the current set value using the correction value, the conversion accuracy can be preferably improved.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the sixth embodiment described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the sixth embodiment, or may be applied in combination with a part or all of them to the sixth embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured.

<Modification 1>
In the sixth embodiment, the value obtained by multiplying the winning number by the correction coefficient is stored in the address, but the timing of correction is arbitrary. For example, it may be configured to perform correction at the timing when the number of shots of game balls reaches a specified number or at the timing when a setting change occurs, or it may be configured to perform correction at the timing immediately before making a determination using a threshold value. good. By the way, when the correction is performed immediately before the determination, it is not always necessary that the monitoring device 600 performs the correction. However, when correction is performed immediately before determination, it is necessary to store the setting value together with the information indicating the number of wins in the monitoring device 600 . Therefore, the amount of information to be stored tends to increase. In view of such circumstances, it is technically significant to configure the monitoring device 600 to store the corrected information.

<Modification 2>
In the sixth embodiment, the correction coefficient for setting 1 and the correction coefficient for setting 3 are determined based on setting 2, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the correction coefficient for setting 2 and the correction coefficient for setting 3 may be determined based on setting 1, or the correction coefficient for setting 1 and the correction coefficient for setting 2 may be determined based on setting 3. .

<Seventh Embodiment>
As shown in each of the above-described embodiments, it is preferable to use the monitoring device 600 to monitor the main control device 162 and the like in order to improve the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 and strengthen the crime prevention function. . One of the features of the present embodiment is that it is devised to exhibit these various effects more favorably. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50, the configuration according to the above contrivance will be described, focusing on the differences from the fourth embodiment. 47 is a flowchart showing the abnormality notification process, FIG. 48 is a timing chart showing the flow of abnormality notification cancellation, FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the abnormality notification cancellation process, and FIG. In addition, since the main configuration of this embodiment is common to that of the fourth embodiment, description of these common configurations will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 47, the abnormality notification process executed as part of the regular process by the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140 in the present embodiment will be described.

(Abnormality notification processing)
In the abnormality notification process, information acquisition processing is first executed in step S2101. In the information acquisition process, information on the number of winnings to the general winnings opening 81 and information on the number of shots of game balls are acquired from the monitoring device 600 .

In subsequent step S2102, it is determined whether or not the determination condition for abnormality determination is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls shot to the game area PE after the previous abnormality determination or the number of game balls shot to the game area PE after the setting change has reached a specified number. Note that the specified number is 30,000 in this embodiment. As described above, since the shooting cycle of the game ball is 0.6 sec, the number of shots reaches the prescribed number by continuing the shooting of the game ball for about 6 hours.

If a negative determination is made in step S2102, that is, if sufficient data cannot be secured, the abnormality notification process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, the winning probability of the general winning opening 81 is calculated from the number of winning winning openings to the general winning opening 81 after being changed to the current set value and the number of shots of the game balls, and the probability is out of the range of the threshold value. Determine whether or not

If it is out of the threshold range, an affirmative determination is made in step S2104, and the process proceeds to step S2105. In step S2105, "1" is added to the abnormality notification counter provided in the various counter areas 465 of the RAM 444. FIG. If it is within the range of the threshold, a negative determination is made in step S2104, and the process proceeds to step S2106. In step S2106, "1" is subtracted from the abnormality notification counter provided in the various counter areas 465 of the RAM 444. FIG.

After executing the process of step S2105 or step S2106, the process proceeds to step S2107. In step S2107, it is determined whether or not the value of the abnormality notification counter has reached a reference value. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, it is determined whether or not an abnormality is being reported. If a negative determination is made in step S2108, the abnormality notification process is terminated after the abnormality notification start process is executed in step S2109. By executing the abnormality notification start process, an abnormality notification (specifically, a warning that an abnormality may have occurred) is performed by the speaker portion 29 and the error display lamp portion 27 of the front door frame 14. be.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2108, the abnormality notification process is terminated after the abnormality notification continuation process is executed in step S2110. When the abnormality notification continuation process is executed, the abnormality notification level is raised by one step. Specifically, the volume of the warning sound output from the speaker unit 29 and the light amount of the error display lamp unit 27 are increased.

Returning to the description of step S2107, when a negative determination is made in step S2107, that is, when the value of the abnormality notification counter is below the reference value, the process proceeds to step S2111. In step S2111, it is determined whether or not an abnormality is being reported. If the abnormality notification is not in progress, the abnormality notification process is terminated. If the abnormality notification is in progress, the process advances to step S2112 to execute abnormality notification end processing. As a result, the anomaly notification that has been executed up to that point is canceled.

Here, referring to FIG. 48, the flow of canceling the anomaly notification will be described. In the present embodiment, (1) the value of the abnormality notification counter is less than the reference value, and (2) the execution of the abnormality notification cancellation operation serves as the trigger for canceling the abnormality notification.

When the probability of winning a prize exceeds the threshold, the value of the abnormality notification counter is incremented, and when the probability of winning falls within the threshold, the value of the abnormality notification counter is decremented. At the timing tc1 when the value of the abnormality notification counter is added and reaches the reference value, which is a criterion for starting abnormality notification, the speaker unit 29 and the error display lamp unit 27 start abnormality notification. Since the value of the abnormality notification counter continues to exceed the reference value thereafter, the abnormality notification level is raised. By raising the level of the abnormality notification, the sound volume output from the speaker section 29 is increased and the light amount of the error display lamp section 27 is increased. As a result, the player's attention is more likely to be directed to the anomaly notification.

At the timing of tc2, when the hall manager performs an operation to cancel the abnormality notification, the abnormality notification is temporarily canceled. However, at this time, the value of the abnormality notification counter is still above the reference value, and at the subsequent timing tc3, when the value of the abnormality notification counter increases within the range exceeding the reference value, the abnormality notification is started again. It will be done. In other words, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, although the abnormality notification can be temporarily stopped only by the cancellation operation of the abnormality notification, it is necessary to eliminate the cause of the abnormality in the winning probability in order to completely terminate the abnormality notification. There is

After the cause of the anomaly notification is resolved, the winning probability tends to fall within the range of the threshold, and it is assumed that the value of the anomaly notification counter is decremented each time the winning probability is confirmed. At the timing tc4 when the value of the abnormality notification counter is below the reference value, the continued abnormality notification is cancelled.

The fact that the abnormality notification is being executed causes the player to hesitate to play the game on the gaming machine. Therefore, as a game hall, regardless of whether or not the fundamental cause is being resolved, by performing a temporary response by canceling the abnormality notification, the chance that the abnormality notification will be noticed by the player is reduced. assumed to be Here, different threshold values are used for each set value in determining the winning probability. For example, when the calculated winning probability is below the threshold, the threshold can be lowered by temporarily switching the set value to the side that is advantageous to the player.

For example, assuming that the winning probability is the winning probability Y2 shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. Then, the winning probability Y2 is within the range of the threshold. That is, if the value of the abnormality notification counter increases and exceeds the reference value at setting 3, the value of the abnormality notification counter can be lowered by changing the setting value to setting 2 or setting 1. In other words, even if the cause of the anomaly notification is not resolved, the occurrence of the anomaly notification can be suppressed.

In such a configuration, there is a concern that the cause of the anomaly notification may be concealed by intentionally switching the set values as described above. One of the features of the present embodiment is that the reliability of the monitoring function is improved by devising ways to detect such behavior. The device will be described below with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. FIG. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the abnormality notification canceling process executed as part of the regular process by the MPU 442 of the notification/production control device 140, and FIG.

(Processing for cancellation of anomaly notification)
In the abnormality notification cancellation process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the abnormality notification canceling process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2202.

In step S2202, it is determined whether or not an abnormality is being reported. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, an abnormality notification cancellation process is executed in step S2203. As a result, the annunciation of the abnormality in the speaker section 29 and the error display lamp section 27 is cancelled. In the following step S2204, it is determined whether or not the current setting change operation will change the setting so that the threshold is changed to the same side as the deviation of the winning probability.

For example, if the winning probability falls below the lower limit of the threshold corresponding to setting 2 under the condition of setting 2 and is out of the range of the threshold, when the setting is changed to setting 3 , a negative determination is made in step S2204. In the following description, such a setting change operation will be referred to as a type 1 release operation.

On the other hand, for example, if the winning probability falls below the lower limit of the threshold value corresponding to setting 2 and is out of the range of the threshold value under the condition of setting 2, setting 1 is changed by changing the setting When changed, an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. Similarly, for example, if the winning probability falls below the lower limit of the threshold value corresponding to setting 3 and is out of the range of the threshold value under the situation of setting 3, setting 2 or setting 1 by changing the setting , an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. In the following description, such a setting change operation is referred to as a type 2 release operation.

If a negative determination is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, the first type cancellation operation information transmission processing is executed, and then the abnormality notification cancellation processing is terminated. In the type 1 release operation information transmission process, information indicating that the type 1 release operation has been performed is transmitted from the notification/production control device 140 to the monitoring device 600 . The second storage area 606 of the monitoring device 600 is provided with a type 1 release operation count storage area 635 for storing the number of times the type 1 release operation has been performed (see FIG. 50). The information in the type 1 release operation count storage area 635 is updated. Specifically, "1" is added to the value of the type 1 release operation number counter provided in the type 1 release operation number storage area 635 .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2206. In step S2206, the second type cancellation operation information transmission processing is executed, and then the abnormality notification cancellation processing is ended. In the second type release operation information transmission process, information indicating that the second type release operation has been performed is transmitted from the notification/production control device 140 to the monitoring device 600 . The second storage area 606 of the monitoring device 600 is provided with a second type release operation number storage area 636 for storing the number of times the second type release operation has been performed (see FIG. 50). The information in the type 2 release operation count storage area 636 is updated. Specifically, "1" is added to the value of the type 2 release operation number counter provided in the type 2 release operation number storage area 636 .

The monitoring device 600 performs a notification process for notifying the number of times the type 1 release operation has been performed and the number of times the type 2 release operation has been performed when an operation requesting disclosure of information on the number of times of release has been performed. As a result, the number of executions of each release operation is displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, for example.

When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring information, an abnormality notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to promptly take measures against the abnormality, and it is possible to prevent the players, the game hall, and the like from being disadvantaged. However, if the cause of the anomaly is not eliminated even if the countermeasures are taken, the anomaly notification will be repeated. If the replacement of players, hall managers, etc. is taken into account, it becomes difficult to specify how often the abnormality is repeated. In this respect, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the abnormality notification is canceled based on the cancellation operation, and the number of times the cancellation operation is performed is stored. Therefore, it is possible to know after the fact how many release operations have been performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the oversight of repeated abnormalities and contribute to the improvement of the reliability of the gaming machine.

It should be noted that even if the fraudulent act intentionally cancels the anomaly notification to conceal the fraud, the number of cancellations is stored. As a result, it is possible to infer that there is a possibility that an intentional attempt was made to conceal fraud based on the number of cancellations that have been stored. Incidentally, for example, in a configuration that stores the number of times an abnormality has occurred or the number of notifications, although it is possible to identify the fact that an abnormality has occurred, it is difficult to identify whether it is due to an accidental factor or an artificial factor. Become. In view of such circumstances, storing the number of cancellations has clear technical significance.

If the state of the gaming machine is taken into consideration when storing the number of cancellations, it is possible to improve the accuracy of estimating whether or not the cancellation operation is fraudulent. For example, when a release operation is being performed in a situation where the release operation is difficult or impossible, it is possible to see that the release operation is likely to be illegal. .

For example, assuming a configuration in which the threshold value for abnormality determination differs depending on the set value, it cannot be denied that such a difference may be used to cheat the occurrence of an abnormality. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when the set value is changed in accordance with the release operation, the release count is stored. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a release operation suspected of being fraudulent from being mixed with other release operations. This is a preferable configuration for improving the security function of the gaming machine.

In a configuration in which the winning frequency to the ball-entering portion such as the general winning opening 81d differs depending on the set value, the certainty of the determination result can be improved by switching the threshold value for each set value. However, with such a configuration, there is a possibility that an act of deceiving the fact by exploiting the threshold switching function despite the fact that it should be determined that an abnormality has actually occurred. cannot be denied. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, when the set value (threshold value) is switched along with the cancellation of the abnormality notification, such a cancellation operation should be stored separately from other cancellation operations. Thus, it is possible to suppress oversight of the release operation for the purpose of fraud.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the content described in the above-described seventh embodiment, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the above seventh embodiment, or may be applied in combination with a part or all of them to the above seventh embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described seventh embodiment, a setting change operation that changes the threshold to the same side as the side on which the winning probability is off the threshold is stored as a second type release operation. and the previously determined winning probability falls within the threshold range corresponding to the new set value, the setting change operation may be stored as the second type release operation.

<Modification 2>
In the above-described seventh embodiment, the configuration is such that the abnormality notification is canceled by the setting change operation, that is, the configuration is such that the setting change operation also serves as the abnormality notification cancellation operation. It is also possible to change this and separate the cancellation operation for anomaly notification from the setting change operation.

<Modification 3>
The specific mode of anomaly notification is arbitrary. When an abnormality occurs, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which setting suggestions, which will be described later, are likely to occur as part of the abnormality notification. This configuration can also be applied to the first to sixth embodiments.

<Eighth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described embodiments in the configuration for canceling the anomaly notification. Specifically, the main controller 162 is configured to identify whether or not the abnormality is being reported, and the MPU 402 of the main controller 162 determines whether or not to cancel the abnormality notification. It's becoming Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53, a description will be given of a configuration related to cancellation of anomaly notification in the present embodiment, and descriptions of configurations common to other embodiments will be omitted.

First, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 51, the abnormality notification canceling process executed by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162 will be described. The abnormality notification canceling process is a process executed as part of the normal process.

(Processing for cancellation of anomaly notification)
In the abnormality notification canceling process, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not abnormality notification is in progress. If it is determined that the abnormality notification is not in progress, the abnormality notification canceling process is terminated. If it is determined in step S2301 that the abnormality is being reported, an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, and the process proceeds to step S2302. In step S2302, it is determined whether or not the setting change key has been switched to the ON state. If a negative determination is made in step S2302, the abnormality notification canceling process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2302, the process proceeds to step S2303.

In step S2303, a special operation flag indicating that the setting change key has been switched to the ON state during the abnormality notification is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. FIG. After that, in step S2304, an abnormality notification cancellation process is executed. In the abnormality notification cancellation process, an abnormality notification cancellation command is set to cause the notification/production control device 140 to cancel the abnormality notification. This abnormality notification cancellation command is output to the notification/production control device 140 in the external output process (step S501) of the normal process. In the notification/production control device 140, the abnormality notification is canceled based on the reception of this abnormality notification cancellation command.

The MPU 402 of the main controller 162 has a function of forcibly changing the initial setting value to a predetermined setting value when the setting change key is switched to the ON state during the abnormality notification. ing. The setting change processing executed by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162 as part of the normal processing will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Setting change processing)
In the setting change process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode is on. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a setting change mode flag is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 404 . If a negative determination is made in step S2401, the process advances to step S2402 to determine whether or not the setting change key is ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2402, this setting change processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2402, the process proceeds to step S2403. In step S2403, it is determined whether or not conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. As for the condition for shifting to the setting change mode, in addition to the same condition as the setting change process shown in FIG. 35, the setting change switch 166 is operated. That is, when the setting change switch 166 is operated once under the condition that the various conditions shown in FIG. 35 are satisfied, the setting change mode is entered.

If a negative determination is made in step S2403, this setting change processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, the process proceeds to step S2404. In step S2404, it is determined whether or not a special operation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. FIG. If a negative determination is made in step S2404, the process proceeds to step S2405.

In step S2405, the setting value before shifting to the setting change mode is specified, and the specified setting value is set as the setting value when shifting to the setting change mode. That is, when shifting to the setting change mode under the condition that the special operation flag is not stored, the setting value before shifting to the setting change mode is inherited as the initial setting value in the setting change mode. Become.

Returning to the description of step S2404, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2404, the process proceeds to step S2406. In step S2406, setting 1, which is most advantageous to the player, is set as the set value when shifting to the setting change mode regardless of the set value before shifting to the setting change mode. In the following step S2407, the special operation flag stored in various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 is erased.

After executing the process of step S2407 or step S2405, the process proceeds to step S2408. In step S2408, setting change mode transition processing is executed. In the setting change mode transition processing, the setting change mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, the setting value display unit 168 is controlled to display the current setting value, and the setting change switch 166 is operated. Start accepting operations.

Returning to the description of step S2401, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, that is, if the setting change mode flag is stored in various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, the process proceeds to step S2409. In step S2409, it is determined whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2409, the process proceeds to step S2410. In step S2410, a setting change operation handling process is executed. In the setting change operation handling process, display control of the setting value display unit 168 is performed so that the setting value currently selected by the setting change operation is displayed on the setting value display unit 168 .

Returning to the description of step S2409, if a negative determination is made in step S2409, the process proceeds to step S2411. In step S2411, it is determined whether or not the setting change key is turned off. If a negative determination is made in step S2411, this setting change processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2411, the process proceeds to step S2412. In step S2412, setting change processing is executed. In the setting change process, the selected set value is specified and set as the set value in subsequent games. For example, when the setting 1 is selected, the setting 1 flag is stored in the various flags storage area 435 of the RAM 404, and when the setting 2 is selected, the setting 2 flag is stored in the various flags storage area 435 of the RAM 404. is stored, and when the setting 3 is selected, the setting 3 flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 . As a result, the winning lottery table to be referred to in subsequent lottery processing is switched.

After executing the process of step S2412, after executing the setting change mode end process in step S2413, the setting change process is ended. In the setting change mode termination process, the setting change mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 is erased, and display control is performed so that the setting value display section 168 is hidden.

Next, the main processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(main processing)
In the main process, first, in step S2501, start-up processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, it waits, for example, about 500 msec in order to wait for the subordinate control board (payout control device 242, etc.) to become operable.

In the subsequent step S2502, it is determined whether or not 1 sec, which is the permission/prohibition period, has elapsed after the start-up process in step S2501. If 1 sec has not passed, the process of step S2502 is executed again. This time is measured by counting the number of times of processing in step S2502. For example, if the time required from the negative determination in step S2502 to the execution of the process in step S2502 again is 0.1 msec, the count value becomes 10000 times, so that after the start-up process in step S2501 It is determined that 1 sec has passed since. Note that the specific configuration for time measurement is arbitrary, and for example, time may be measured using a real-time clock. If it is determined in step S2502 that 1 sec has elapsed, the process advances to step S2503.

In step S2503, access to the RAM 404 is permitted. After that, in step S2504, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 243 is turned on, and in subsequent step S2505 whether or not the power failure flag is stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 404. determine whether In step S2506, a RAM determination value is calculated, and in subsequent step S2507, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, that is, the validity of the stored data. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 404 . It is also possible to judge the validity of the stored data by checking whether the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 404 is correctly saved.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, at the opening of the hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. If the RAM erase switch has been pressed, the process proceeds to steps S2508 and S2509. Also, if the power-off occurrence information is not set, or if an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the process similarly proceeds to steps S2508 and S2509. At step S2508, the used area of the RAM 404 is cleared to 0, and at step S2509, the RAM 404 is initialized.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch is not pressed, on the condition that the power failure flag is stored and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal, in step S2515, the power failure flag storage area Clear the power failure flag stored in

After executing the process of step S2515 or step S2509, the process proceeds to step S2510. In step S2510, it is determined whether or not a special operation flag is stored in various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, and whether or not the RAM erase switch has been operated. If the special operation flag is stored or if the RAM erase switch is operated, an affirmative determination is made in step S2510 and the process proceeds to step S2511. In step S2511, setting 1, which is most advantageous to the player, is set as the set value when the power is turned on. If the special operation flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 and the RAM erase switch is not operated, the process proceeds to step S2512. In step S2512, the same set value as the set value when the power is turned off is set as the set value when the power is turned on. For example, if the setting is 2 when the power is turned off, the setting is set to 2.

After executing the process of step S2511 or step S2512, the process proceeds to step S2513. In step S2513, an initial command setting process is executed to output an initial command to the payout control device 242. FIG. After that, in step S2514, the interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later. By inputting an initial command from the main control device 162, the MPU of the payout control device 242 recognizes that communication with the main control device 162 is being performed normally.

If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring results, that effect is notified. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prompt the manager of the game hall or the like to take measures against the abnormality. It is preferable to be able to perform a release operation without eliminating the cause of the abnormality, in order to improve convenience in the game hall. However, with such a configuration, there is a possibility that the player or the game hall may suffer a disadvantage if the game is played again with the notification canceled without resolving the cause of the occurrence of the abnormality. This is not preferable because it becomes a factor that reduces the reliability of the game machine. The set value is managed in the game hall, and since it is a configuration directly linked to profit, it is easy for the hall manager to pay attention to it. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, when the release operation is performed, the initial set value at the time of setting change may be forcibly changed to a predetermined set value. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the hall manager that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cause of the abnormality from being left as it is, thereby contributing to the improvement of the reliability of the gaming machine.

In the case of forcibly changing the initial setting value, if the setting value is a setting value that is frequently used in the game hall, it is likely that confusion will occur in identifying whether or not the forced change has occurred. Concerned. Here, in the game hall, the chances of using the set values advantageous to the player are less than the chances of using the set values unfavorable to the player. In the configuration shown in this feature, in consideration of such circumstances, setting 1, which is most advantageous to the player, is set as the initial setting value. Thereby, the confusion mentioned above can be suppressed.

Settings are not necessarily changed every day, and the set values once determined may be maintained for a certain number of days. If such a situation is taken into consideration, such a situation can be suitably dealt with by carrying out inheritance/forcible change of the set value in the determination of the set value at the time of power-on shown in the present embodiment. .

In a game machine in which a game ball flows down the game area PE, there is a possibility that the game nail or the like arranged in the game area PE is deformed by contacting the game nail or the like during cleaning or maintenance. When the flow path of the game ball changes due to such deformation, ball entry occurs at a frequency higher than the original design value, or ball entry occurs at a frequency lower than the original design value. This causes a disadvantage to the game hall and the players. Therefore, by configuring the monitoring device 600 to store winning information, it is possible to identify the occurrence of the above-described inconvenience (abnormality). However, prize winning does not always occur at a constant frequency, and if the monitoring period is short, there will be some variation. On the other hand, if the monitoring period is set long, it is possible to suppress the variation, but it takes time to identify the occurrence of the inconvenience. In view of such circumstances, a configuration in which notification based on the result of abnormality determination can be arbitrarily canceled has the advantage of being able to take into consideration the certainty of the determination result and the improvement of responsiveness. However, in such a configuration, since it is difficult to visually identify the abnormality itself, there is a possibility that the fact may be forgotten after a certain amount of time has passed since the notification was cancelled. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the content described in the above-described eighth embodiment, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied to the eighth embodiment individually, or may be applied to the eighth embodiment by combining a part or all of them. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured.

<Modification 1>
In the eighth embodiment, when the abnormality notification is canceled, the initial set value at the time of shifting to the setting change mode is set to the setting 1, which is most advantageous to the player. It is sufficient that the setting value is switched to a setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the setting value before shifting to the change mode or at the time of cancellation of the abnormality notification. For example, setting 3 may be set to setting 2, setting 2 to setting 1, and setting 1 to setting 1 may be maintained.

Further, when the abnormality notification is canceled, the initial set value at the time of shifting to the setting change mode may be configured to be different from the set value before the setting change.

<Modification 2>
It is optional whether or not to consider the cancellation operation of the abnormality notification when resetting the set value in the main process. That is, the initial value when the setting change operation is performed is changed to a predetermined setting value (for example, setting 1), while the setting value is maintained in the main process even when the cancellation operation is performed. It is also possible to In such a configuration, it is preferable that the special operation flag is excluded from being erased by the RAM erase switch.

<Modification 3>
In the eighth embodiment described above, the configuration in which the abnormality notification is canceled by turning the setting key ON has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the abnormality notification is canceled by operating the setting change switch 166 after turning the setting key to the ON state. In this case, the setting change switch 166 may be operated to directly shift to the setting change mode, or another operation such as long pressing of the setting change switch 166 may be used to shift to the setting change mode. good too. Further, an operation unit for canceling an abnormality notification may be provided separately from various operation units for changing settings.

<Ninth Embodiment>
One of the features of the present embodiment is that a set value is suggested to the player when a predetermined suggestion condition is met during the progress of the game. Specifically, it is the same as the first embodiment in that the setting value suggestion (hereinafter referred to as setting suggestion) is executed in a part of the game round in which the ready-to-win effect corresponding to the losing result occurs. are different. The configuration related to the setting suggestions will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the configuration common to the first embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 54( a ), when the power is turned on and when the settings are changed, information indicating the set values is output from the main control device 162 to the notification/effect control device 140 . The RAM 444 of the notification/production control device 140 is provided with a setting value storage area 468 for storing setting values, and by referring to this information, the notification/production control device 140 can specify the setting values in the main control device 162. It has become.

The MPU 442 of the notification/production control device 140 determines whether or not to suggest setting based on the set value. Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54(b), a part of the setting suggestion processing executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/production control device 140, specifically the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 31) A description will be given of the effect setting processing for generating out-of-reach reach.

(Production setting processing for occurrence of outreach reach)
In the effect setting process for occurrence of the out reach, first, in step S2601, determination process of the variable display mode is executed. Specifically, the current variable display mode is determined based on the variable display time information included in the variable start command received from main controller 162 . For example, normal reach A when the variable display time is "10 sec", normal reach B when the variable display time is "15 sec", super reach A when the variable display time is "16 sec", variable display If the time is "17 sec", it is decided to execute super reach B, and if the variable display time is "18 sec", it is decided to execute super reach C (see FIG. 32).

In the following step S2602, final stop symbol combination determination processing is executed. More specifically, the symbol combination to be displayed on the activated line on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 is determined. Since the main effect setting process corresponds to the losing reach, the same symbols are stopped in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, and the same symbols are displayed on the active line where the symbols are stopped. , a different middle symbol is displayed.

After executing the process of step S2602, the process advances to step S2603. In step S2603, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the current game cycle corresponds to Super Reach C. If a negative determination is made in step S2602, the process for setting the effect is directly terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2602, the process proceeds to step S2604.

In step S2604, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win symbol stopped and displayed on the active line is the "7" symbol. That is, it is determined whether or not the reach line is formed by the "7" symbols forming the upper pattern row Z1 and the "7" symbols forming the lower symbol row Z3. If a negative determination is made in step S2604, the effect setting process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2604, the process proceeds to step S2605. In step S2605, setting suggestion approval/disapproval determination processing is performed. Specifically, it is decided by lottery whether or not to suggest setting. If it is determined in step S2605 that the setting suggestion is not performed, a negative determination is made in step S2606, and the present effect setting processing ends. If it is determined in step S2605 that setting suggestion is to be performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, and the process proceeds to step S2607.

In step S2607, rewrite processing of the final stop symbol combination is executed. Specifically, for the middle symbol row Z2, a process of rewriting the symbols stopped and displayed on the active line from the symbols not corresponding to the setting suggestion to the symbols corresponding to the setting suggestion is performed. In this embodiment, upper pattern: "7" pattern, middle pattern: "1" pattern, lower pattern: "7" pattern, upper pattern: "7" pattern, middle pattern: "2" pattern, The symbol combination of the lower symbol: "7" symbol, the upper symbol: "7" symbol, the medium symbol: "4" symbol, and the lower symbol: "7" symbol correspond to the setting suggestion.

For example, as shown in FIG. 55(a), in the setting suggestion non-corresponding off super reach C, the setting suggestion non-corresponding pattern "5" pattern is on the reach line formed by the "7" pattern. Stop is displayed. Therefore, even if one sees the final stop symbol combination, it is difficult to guess the setting value from the contents thereof. On the other hand, in the off super ready-to-win C corresponding to the setting suggestion, the "1" symbol corresponding to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed on the ready-to-reach line formed by the "7" symbols. In other words, even if the final result is an outlier, the set value is suggested, and the player can guess the set value from the content of the suggestion. By providing an opportunity to obtain information useful for estimating set values even in the event of a false result in this way, it is possible to prevent a rapid decline in the sense of expectation for the game due to the notification of the false result. is doing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 56, a supplementary description will be given of the setting suggestion generation pattern. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram showing the relation between medium symbols stopped and displayed when the super-reach-out C occurs and the probability thereof.

As shown in FIG. 56(a), in the low-frequency support mode, when a single-line deviation super reach C occurs due to a "7" symbol, in the setting 1, a "1" symbol stops in the middle symbol row Z2. The probability is 0.1%, and in setting 2 and setting 3, the probability that the "1" symbol stops in the middle symbol row Z2 is 0%. That is, when the "1" symbol is stop-displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, it is determined that the setting value is the setting 1 which is most advantageous to the player.

The probability that the “2” symbol corresponding to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 is 3.4% for setting 1, 3% for setting 2, and 4% for setting 3, and there is a slight difference. It is When the "2" symbol is stop-displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the possibility of setting 2 is slightly lower than setting 1 and setting 3.

The probability that the "3" symbol that does not correspond to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 is 2% in any of the settings 1 to 3, and there is no difference between the settings. .

The probability that the "4" symbol corresponding to the suggested setting is stop-displayed in the medium symbol row Z2 is 0.5% for the setting 1, 1% for the setting 2, and 0% for the setting 3. In other words, when the "4" symbol is stop-displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, it is confirmed that the setting value is not the setting 3 which is the most disadvantageous to the player, that is, the setting 1 or setting 2. .

The probability that the "5" symbol, which does not correspond to the setting suggestion, is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 is 2% in any of the settings 1 to 3. The probability that the "6" symbol, which does not correspond to the setting suggestion, is stopped and displayed in the medium symbol row Z2 is 40% in any of the settings 1 to 3. The probability that the "8" symbol that does not correspond to setting suggestions is stopped and displayed in the medium symbol row Z2 is 50% for any of the settings 1 to 3. The probability that the "9" symbol, which does not correspond to the setting suggestion, is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 is 2% in any of the settings 1 to 3. In other words, even if any of the symbols "5", "6", "8" and "9" are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the set value cannot be guessed from them. .

In the gaming machine shown in the present embodiment, the degree of expectation of a big win is set differently depending on the number of reach lines. Specifically, it is set so that the degree of expectation for a big hit result is higher for the double line (reach line x 2) super reach C than for the single line (reach line x 1) super reach C. Also, a difference is provided so that the probability of setting suggestions is slightly higher for the double line than for the single line.

As shown in FIG. 56(b), in the low-frequency support mode, when the double-line deviation super reach C occurs due to the "7" symbol and the "8" symbol, in the setting 1, "1" is placed in the middle symbol row Z2. The probability that the "" symbol stops is 1.1%, and in setting 2 and setting 3, the probability that the "1" symbol stops in the middle symbol row Z2 is 0%. That is, when the "1" symbol is stop-displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, it is determined that the setting value is the setting 1 which is most advantageous to the player.

The probability that the "2" symbol corresponding to the suggested setting is stop-displayed in the medium symbol row Z2 is 1.4% for the setting 1, 1% for the setting 2, and 4% for the setting 3. When the "2" symbol is stop-displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the possibility of setting 2 is slightly lower than setting 1 and setting 3.

The probability that the "3" symbol that does not correspond to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 is 2% in any of the settings 1 to 3, and there is no difference between the settings. .

The probability that the "4" symbol corresponding to the suggested setting is stop-displayed in the medium symbol row Z2 is 1.5% for the setting 1, 3% for the setting 2, and 0% for the setting 3. In other words, when the "4" symbol is stop-displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, it is confirmed that the setting value is not the setting 3 which is the most disadvantageous to the player, that is, the setting 1 or setting 2. .

The probability that the "5" symbol, which does not correspond to the setting suggestion, is stopped and displayed in the medium symbol row Z2 is 3% in any of the settings 1 to 3. The probability that the "6" symbol, which does not correspond to the setting suggestion, is stopped and displayed in the medium symbol row Z2 is 40% in any of the settings 1 to 3. The probability that the "9" symbol, which does not correspond to the setting suggestion, is stopped and displayed in the medium symbol row Z2 is 50% for any of the settings 1 to 3. In other words, even if any of the symbols "5", "6" and "9" are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the setting value cannot be guessed from them.

As shown in FIG. 56(c), in the low-frequency support mode, when a double-line deviation super reach C occurs due to "6" symbols and "7" symbols, in the setting 1, "1" is placed in the middle symbol row Z2. The probability that the "" symbol stops is 1.1%, and in setting 2 and setting 3, the probability that the "1" symbol stops in the middle symbol row Z2 is 0%. That is, when the "1" symbol is stop-displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, it is determined that the setting value is the setting 1 which is most advantageous to the player.

The probability that the "2" symbol corresponding to the suggested setting is stop-displayed in the medium symbol row Z2 is 1.4% for the setting 1, 1% for the setting 2, and 4% for the setting 3. When the "2" symbol is stop-displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the possibility of setting 2 is slightly lower than setting 1 and setting 3.

The probability that the "3" symbol that does not correspond to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 is 2% in any of the settings 1 to 3, and there is no difference between the settings. .

The probability that the "4" symbol corresponding to the suggested setting is stop-displayed in the medium symbol row Z2 is 1.5% for the setting 1, 3% for the setting 2, and 0% for the setting 3. In other words, when the "4" symbol is stop-displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, it is confirmed that the setting value is not the setting 3 which is the most disadvantageous to the player, that is, the setting 1 or setting 2. .

The probability that the "5" symbol that does not correspond to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the medium symbol row Z2 is 40% in any of the settings 1 to 3. The probability that the "8" symbol that does not correspond to setting suggestions is stopped and displayed in the medium symbol row Z2 is 50% for any of the settings 1 to 3. The probability that the "9" symbol, which does not correspond to setting suggestion, is stopped and displayed in the medium symbol row Z2 is 30% in any of setting 1 to setting 3. In other words, even if any of the symbols "5", "8" and "9" are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the set value cannot be guessed from them.

In the present embodiment, the frequency of occurrence of Super Reach C and the probability of setting suggestions are higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode. Setting suggestions are given preferential treatment. In other words, the high-frequency support mode is a chance to suggest settings.

According to the ninth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a game machine having a setting change function, the degree of advantage changes depending on the set value, so playing a game while guessing the set value is one of the pleasures. Here, when the ready-to-win display is executed, the player's attention to the game tends to be high. By adopting a configuration in which a setting value is suggested (setting suggestion) when the player's attention is high, it is possible to reduce the chances that the setting suggestion is overlooked.

In addition, when the ready-to-win display is executed, there is a possibility that the winning result will be notified through the ready-to-win display, so the degree of attention to the effect increases. However, when it is reported that the result is a deviation from the state in which the degree of attention is high in this way, there is a possibility that the degree of attention to the game will greatly decrease as the sense of expectation decreases. In this regard, by adopting a configuration in which setting suggestion is performed along with the reach display as shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress a large decrease in the degree of attention at the time of the failure result.

In the configuration in which the lottery result is clearly indicated by the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen 253a, the player's attention is focused on the game area PE (specifically, the game ball flowing down the game area PE) when the ready-to-win display is executed. It is easy to move to the display screen 253a. Therefore, if the setting suggestion described above is executed on the display screen 253a, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the setting suggestion is overlooked.

In a configuration in which the winning result is reported via the ready-to-win display, shifting to the ready-to-win display increases the degree of attention to the variable display of symbols. In this way, if the configuration is such that setting suggestions are made under a situation where the degree of attention is high, it is possible to suitably reduce the above-mentioned chances of overlooking.

If a setting suggestion is executed by using a symbol combination for a losing result, the information of the setting suggestion may be included when the losing result is specified, so that the player pays attention to the symbol combination. It is assumed that According to this configuration, it is possible to preferably exhibit the effect of improving the attention level described above.

The more the player's expectations grow, the greater the disappointment when the player is informed that the result is a failure. This is not preferable because it causes a decrease in motivation to play. In view of such circumstances, as shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to establish a setting suggestion in the reach display in which there is a possibility that the symbol combination corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result may be established. It is preferable in terms of alleviating the decrease in the desire to play when it becomes.

The higher the reach display that is expected to be a hit result, the greater the disappointment when the notification that the result is an off result is made (so-called intense heat removal). This is not preferable because it causes a decrease in motivation to play. In view of such circumstances, as shown in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the setting suggestion is executed in the super reach (super reach C) with a high degree of expectation is effective for the game when the result is out. It is preferable for alleviating a decrease in motivation.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the content described in the above-described ninth embodiment, but may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the ninth embodiment, or may be applied to the ninth embodiment by combining a part or all of them. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured.

<Modification 1>
In the ninth embodiment described above, setting suggestions are made based on the final stop symbol combination, but specific aspects of setting suggestions are arbitrary. For example, a setting suggestion may be performed by using a background image that does not support setting suggestion and a background image that supports setting suggestion. may be used together to suggest settings. It is also possible to provide a lighting mode that does not correspond to the setting suggestion and a lighting mode that corresponds to the setting suggestion as the lighting modes of the lamp unit 26, and use these together to provide a configuration for suggesting the setting.

<Modification 2>
In the ninth embodiment, the configuration is such that the setting suggestion is made during the confirmation display, but the setting suggestion is made at any timing. For example, in a configuration in which the player's attention level increases when the ready-to-win display is started, setting suggestions are performed after the ready-to-win display is displayed, thereby preventing the setting suggestions from being overlooked. Further, when branching to a plurality of kinds of ready-to-win displays occurs after transition to the ready-to-win display, it is assumed that this branch will attract more attention from the player. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the setting suggestion is made after the occurrence of the branch, it is possible to more preferably prevent the setting suggestion from being overlooked.

<Modification 3>
In the ninth embodiment, the configuration is such that setting suggestions are more likely to be executed during the high-frequency support mode than during the low-frequency support mode, but such preferential treatment is not essential. do not have. It is also possible to make the setting suggestion occurrence probability the same during the low-frequency support mode and during the high-frequency support mode. Moreover, it does not deny the configuration in which the setting suggestion is more likely to be executed during the low-frequency support mode than during the high-frequency support mode.

<Modification 4>
A difference may be provided in the setting suggestion occurrence probability between the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode and the high probability mode and the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode and the low probability mode. Unlike the former, the latter has a limit on the number of games maintained in the high-frequency support mode. It is also possible to differentiate so that setting suggestions occur more frequently during the high-frequency support mode with restrictions than during the high-frequency support mode without restrictions.

<Modification 5>
There may be provided the number of games in which setting suggestions are likely to occur and the number of games in which setting suggestions are unlikely to occur. It is also possible to individually set the number of games in which setting suggestions are likely to occur and the number of games in which setting suggestions are less likely to occur according to set values. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 57, in the range of 0 to 100 for the number of games to be executed after the big win, the occurrence probability of setting suggestions is the same for any set value, and the number of games to be executed after the big win is the same. In the range of 101 to 150, the probability of occurrence of setting suggestions in setting 1 and setting 3 is higher than in setting 2, and in the range of 151 to 200, the number of games executed after the big win is set 1 and setting It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of occurrence of setting suggestions in setting 2 is higher than in setting 3.

<Modification 6>
It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the occurrence probability of setting suggestions increases when the number of games executed after a big win reaches a preset number.

<Modification 7>
In the ninth embodiment, the configuration is such that the setting suggestion can be executed at the time of the lost super reach C, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to this, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the setting suggestion is executed at other super reach or normal reach set so as to have a lower degree of expectation than super reach C. By the way, a configuration may be adopted in which setting suggestions are executed in a plurality of types of reach.

<Tenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the ninth embodiment in that the setting suggestion execution time is differentiated according to the number of subsequent pending information (holding number). Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 58, the configuration related to the change in the setting suggestion execution time will be described. FIG. 58(a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the fixed display time (final stop time) of symbols and the number of pending symbols in the high-frequency support mode. Note that the description of the configuration common to the ninth embodiment is omitted.

The fixed display time is 1.5 sec in the low-frequency support mode, and is shortened to 1 sec in the high-frequency support mode. In other words, in the high-frequency support mode, the fixed display time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode, so there is a high possibility that setting suggestions will be overlooked. In this embodiment, in both the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, when the setting suggestion is executed, the setting suggestion execution time is extended by the number of subsequent pending information stored. It has become. In the following description, the extension mode in the high-frequency support mode will be described, but the same extension is executed in the low-frequency support mode as well.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 58(a), the symbol stop display time is 1 sec when the setting suggestion is not executed. On the other hand, when the number of subsequent pending information is 0, it is the same as the stop display time when the setting suggestion is not executed, and when the number of subsequent pending information is 1, 0 The time is longer than in the case of (for example, 1.5 sec), and when the number of subsequent pending information is two, the time is longer than in the case of one (for example, 2.0 sec). When the number of pending information is 3, the time is longer than when it is 2 (for example, 2.5 sec), and when the number of subsequent pending information is 4, it is longer than when it is 3. It is a long time (for example, 3.0 sec). That is, as the number of subsequent pending information increases, the setting suggestion execution time is extended. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances of overlooking setting suggestions.

Here, in the configuration in which setting suggestion is performed by stopping display of the symbol combination corresponding to the game result, the execution time of setting suggestion is extended before the fixed display timing, that is, the start timing of setting suggestion is brought forward. is not preferred. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion end timing is delayed. A configuration for extending the setting suggestion execution time will be described below with reference to FIG. 58(b).

As shown in FIG. 58(b1), in a game cycle in which the setting suggestion is not executed, the game related to the subsequent hold information is played at the timing when the fixed display time has elapsed after the symbol combination corresponding to the game result is finally stopped and displayed. Move to times. As a result, the variable display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 which had been stopped and displayed is resumed.

On the other hand, when the setting suggestion is executed, the setting suggestion may continue even after the fixed display time has elapsed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58(b2), the pattern stopped on the effective line is swung in the same direction as the scroll direction (next) while remaining on the effective line at the timing when the fixed display time has passed. (predictive action for starting the game round) is started. Then, at the timing when the set suggested time has passed, the swinging is terminated and the variable display is resumed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the appearance of the pattern display even when the setting suggestion time is extended beyond the fixed display time.

If the setting suggestion execution time is short, there is a high possibility that an oversight or the like will occur. If a player who dislikes such an oversight plays a game in such a way as to earn an interval time between game rounds, there is a concern that the operating rate of the gaming machine will drop significantly. In this respect, as shown in this modified example, if the setting suggestion time is lengthened according to the number of pending information, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be preferably suppressed.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the tenth embodiment described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied to the tenth embodiment individually, or may be applied to the tenth embodiment by combining a part or all of them. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured.

<Modification 1>
In the tenth embodiment described above, in both the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the setting suggestion execution time is extended according to the number of subsequent pending information. not a thing Considering that the confirmation display time is longer in the low-frequency support mode than in the high-frequency support mode, it is sufficient if the above extension is executed in the high-frequency support mode, and the extension in the low-frequency support mode Functions can be omitted.

<Modification 2>
In the tenth embodiment, the increase in the number of subsequent pending information and the degree of extension of setting suggestions are fixed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The degree of extension may be increased as the number of subsequent pending information increases, or the degree of extension may be decreased as the number of subsequent pending information increases.

<Modification 3>
In the tenth embodiment, the symbols are swayed to gain time for visually confirming the symbol combination corresponding to the suggested setting. The specific configuration for earning is arbitrary. For example, each symbol stopped and displayed on the activated line may be slightly enlarged/reduced repeatedly to gain time until the start of scroll display.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, setting suggestions can be executed for any of the losing super reach A to the losing super reach C, and the number of times the losing super reach is executed without resulting in a big hit (continuous number of times) One of the features is that the setting suggestion occurrence probability changes depending on the setting suggestion. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the ninth embodiment. Note that the description of the configuration common to the ninth embodiment is omitted. First, with reference to the floor chart of FIG. 59, the effect setting process for occurrence of outlier reach in the present embodiment will be described.

(Production setting processing for occurrence of outreach reach)
In the effect setting process for occurrence of the out reach, first, in step S2701, the determination process of the variable display mode is executed. Specifically, the current variable display mode is determined based on the variable display time information included in the variable start command received from main controller 162 . For example, normal reach A when the variable display time is "10 sec", normal reach B when the variable display time is "15 sec", super reach A when the variable display time is "16 sec", variable display If the time is "17 sec", it is decided to execute super reach B, and if the variable display time is "18 sec", it is decided to execute super reach C (see FIG. 32).

In the subsequent step S2702, it is determined whether or not the current variable display mode determined in step S2701 is one of the off super reach A to the off super reach C. If a negative determination is made in step S2702, the production setting process for generating the off-beat reach is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, the process proceeds to step S2703.

In step S2703, the number of games executed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is specified. In this embodiment, the number of games played is stored in the monitoring device 600, and the number of games after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is specified based on the number of games played.

In the subsequent step S2704, the determination reference number of times for setting suggestion is determined. In this embodiment, the reference number of times for suggesting setting changes according to the number of games played after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. When the number of games is 200 to 299, the criterion number of times is 18. When the number of games is 300 to 399, the criterion number of times is 17. When the number of games is 400 to 499, the criterion number of times is 16. is 500 to 599 times, the criterion number of times is 15; when the number of games is 600 to 699, the criterion number of times is 14; When the number of games is 800 or more, the reference number of times is set to 12, and as the number of games increases, the reference number of times of judgment decreases.

In subsequent step S2705, setting suggestion availability determination processing is executed. Specifically, the total execution count (consecutive count) of the deviating super reach A to deviating super reach C executed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode including the current deviating super reach is compared with the judgment reference count.

If the total number of executions (consecutive number) of Loss Super Reach A to Loss Super Reach C has not reached the criterion number of times, a negative determination is made in step S2706, and the process proceeds to step S2707. In step S2707, determination processing of the final stop symbol combination that does not correspond to setting suggestion is performed. As a result, the final stop symbol combination that does not correspond to the setting suggestion is displayed as the final stop in the game round. Note that the final stop symbol combination that does not correspond to setting suggestion is the same as in the ninth embodiment, so the explanation is omitted.

If the total number of executions (consecutive number) of Loss Super Reach A to Loss Super Reach C has reached the criterion number of times, an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, and the process proceeds to step S2708. In step S2708, determination processing of the final stop symbol combination corresponding to setting suggestion is performed. As a result, the final stop symbol combination corresponding to the setting suggestion is displayed at the final stop in the game round. Note that the final stop symbol combination corresponding to the setting suggestion is the same as in the ninth embodiment, so the explanation is omitted.

Note that the probability of occurrence of the lost super reach A to the lost super reach C is about 1/45. For this reason, in many cases, the number of games after the opening/closing execution mode ends exceeds 600 times, so that the reference judgment number and the total number of executions (consecutive number) of Super Reach A to Super Reach C are different. In agreement, configuration suggestions are executed.

Execution of the reach display increases expectations for the winning result. However, even if the ready-to-win display is executed, it does not always result in a hit result, and may result in a miss result. The continuation of such an event (ready-to-win display→loss result) is a factor that lowers the player's willingness to play. In this respect, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the setting value suggestion (setting suggestion) is executed based on the number of times the deviation result is notified through the reach display. Therefore, even if the ready-to-win display does not occur, it is possible to give the player the impression that the suggestion of the setting is approaching, thereby suppressing a decrease in motivation for playing the game. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

In the case of reach display→off result, the setting suggestion is more likely to be executed as the number increases. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play even when the normal game state continues.

In a configuration in which expectations for setting suggestions increase due to the result of ready-to-win display→off, the player's willingness to play may decrease as the game progresses without executing the ready-to-win display. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, if the setting suggestion threshold becomes lower as the number of games executed after the open/close execution mode increases, the decrease in the willingness to play when the ready-to-win display does not occur is alleviated. can.

In addition, it is not limited to the contents described in the above-described eleventh embodiment, and for example, it may be carried out as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the eleventh embodiment, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to the eleventh embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured.

<Modification 1>
In the eleventh embodiment, the setting suggestion is more likely to be executed as the number of games played after the opening/closing execution mode increases, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the end of the high-frequency support mode, a setting suggestion high probability zone may be provided in which the occurrence probability of setting suggestions increases over a predetermined number of game rounds.

<Modification 2>
In the eleventh embodiment, the cumulative number of times of the lost super reach A to the lost super reach C is reset by shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, but it is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to determine whether or not to suggest a setting based on the cumulative number of times of failure super reach A to failure super reach C executed after the power is turned on or when the setting is changed. In this case, it is preferable that the determination reference count is also reset when the power is turned on or when the settings are changed.

<Modification 3>
In the eleventh embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not the setting suggestion is possible based on the total number of executions (consecutive times) of the lost super reach A to the lost super reach C, but this is changed and the lost normal reach A .

<Modification 4>
It is also possible to have a configuration in which the probability of occurrence of failure super reach A to failure super reach C varies depending on the set value. For example, the probability of occurrence of loss super reach A to loss super reach C may increase in the order of setting 3<setting 2<setting 1. FIG.

<Modification 5>
In the eleventh embodiment, the determination reference count table (FIG. 60) for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion for each setting value of setting 1 to setting 3 is common, but it is not limited to this. do not have. A determination reference count table for setting 1, a determination reference count table for setting 2, and a determination reference count table for setting 3 may be separately provided. In this case, for example, setting 1
<Setting 2><Setting3> It is preferable to configure the determination reference count to decrease in the order of <Setting 3>, and to provide a difference such that the setting value more advantageous to the player has a lower setting suggestion occurrence probability.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In the pachinko machine 10 having a setting change function, if the setting value can be seen through, it can be used advantageously. For example, if the set value is unfavorable to the player, the player moves to another gaming machine earlier, and if the set value is advantageous to the player, the player is allowed to play the game for as long as possible to make the game advantageous. can proceed. In such a configuration, although an effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be expected by performing the setting suggestion, if the setting value is stored in another control device other than the main control device 162, the main control device 162 There is a concern that these other control devices, which have a lower crime prevention function than the control device 162, are more likely to be targeted for unauthorized acquisition of setting values. In the present embodiment, in view of such circumstances, the sub-side control device is configured not to always grasp the setting information, and the main control device 162 controls whether or not to suggest setting, so that the game machine can be operated. It strengthens the anti-theft function. Hereinafter, setting processing of the variable display time executed by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162 will be described first with reference to FIG. The variable display time setting process is a process executed as part of the variable start process (see FIG. 26).

(Processing for setting variable display time)
In the variable display time setting process, first, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the current game cycle corresponds to the big win result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, the process proceeds to step S2802, and the variable display time table for big win stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403 is referenced to determine the variable display time. After executing the determination processing of step S2802, the process proceeds to step S2803, and the variable display time of the current game round is set to the variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404, and the variable display time setting processing is executed. finish.

Returning to the description of step S2801, if a negative determination is made in step S2801, the process proceeds to step S2804. In step S2804, it is determined whether or not the current game cycle corresponds to the reach occurrence. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2804, the process proceeds to step S2805. In step S2805, it is determined whether or not the current game cycle corresponds to super reach. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2805, the process proceeds to step S2806.

In step S2806, the variable display time table for losing super reach stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403 is referenced to determine the variable display time. After executing the determination process of step S2806, the process proceeds to step S2803, and the variable display time of the current game round is set to the variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404, and this variable display time setting process is executed. finish.

Returning to the description of step S2805, if a negative determination is made in step S2805, that is, if the current game cycle does not correspond to super reach, the process proceeds to step S2807. In step S2807, the fluctuation display time is determined by referring to the fluctuation display time table for loss normal reach stored in the fluctuation display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403. FIG. After executing the decision processing of step S2807, the process proceeds to step S2803, and the variable display time of the current game round is set to the variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404, and the setting processing of this variable display time is executed. finish.

Returning to the description of step S2804, if a negative determination is made in step S2804, that is, if the current game cycle corresponds to complete loss, the process proceeds to step S2808. In step S2808, the variable display time table for complete failure stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403 is referenced to determine the variable display time. After executing the decision processing of step S2808, the process proceeds to step S2803, and the variable display time of the current game round is set to the variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404, and this variable display time setting processing is executed. finish.

Information indicating the variable display time determined in steps S2802, S2806, S2807, and S2808 is included in the variable start command output to the notification/production control device 140. FIG. The notification/production control device 140 is configured to specify the variable display time from this variable start command.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation display time may differ for each set value for some of the outlier super reach. Here, the relationship between the set value and the variable display time will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

If the current game round corresponds to a complete loss, the variable display time set by the main controller 162 will be any one of 3 sec, 4 sec, 6 sec and 8 sec for any set value. When the variable display time designated by the main controller 162 is any one of 3 sec, 4 sec, 6 sec, and 8 sec, the notification/effect control device 140 sets the variable display mode to completely off. Although the details of the variable display time are affected by the number of subsequent pending information, there is no difference in the selection probability depending on the set value. Therefore, in the notification/production control device 140, it is impossible to specify which setting value is from the variable display time specified in the game round corresponding to the complete loss.

When the current game cycle corresponds to normal reach A, the variable display time to be set is 10 seconds regardless of the set value. When the variable display time specified by the main controller 162 is 10 sec, the notification/production control device 140 sets normal reach A as the variable display mode. Since the variable display time is not provided with a difference due to the set value, the notification/production control device 140 specifies which set value is the variable display time specified in the game round corresponding to the normal reach A. is not possible.

When the current game cycle corresponds to normal reach B, the variable display time to be set is 15 seconds regardless of the set value. When the variable display time designated by the main controller 162 is 15 sec, the notification/production control device 140 sets the normal reach B as the variable display mode. Since the variable display time is not provided with a difference due to the set value, the notification/production control device 140 specifies which set value is from the variable display time designated in the game round corresponding to the normal reach B. is not possible.

When the current game round corresponds to winning super reach A, the variable display time to be set is 16 sec for any set value. When the variable display time specified by the main controller 162 is 15 sec, the notification/production control device 140 sets Super Reach A as the variable display mode. Since the variable display time does not have a difference due to the set value, the notification/production control device 140 determines which set value from the variable display time specified in the game round corresponding to the winning super reach A. Impossible to specify.

When the current game round is lost and corresponds to Super Reach A, the variable display time to be set is 16 sec or 16.2 sec regardless of the set value. When the variable display time specified by the main controller 162 is 16 sec or 16.2 sec, the notification/production control device 140 sets Super Reach A as the variable display mode. However, if the variable display time is 16 sec, the setting suggestion is not executed, and if the variable display time is 16.2 sec, the setting suggestion is executed. The final stop symbol combination is also used for setting suggestion in the present embodiment. Although the details will be described later, in the super reach A, which corresponds to setting suggestions, the corresponding special symbol combination is finally displayed.

For these variable display times, a difference is provided in the distribution probability for each set value. Specifically, in the case of setting 1, the distribution probability of 16 sec is 99.8%, and the distribution probability of 16.2 sec is 0.2%. In setting 2, the distribution probability for 16 sec is 99.8%, and the distribution probability for 16.2 sec is 0.2%. In the case of setting 3, the allocation probability of 16 sec is 99.9%, and the allocation probability of 16.2 sec is 0.1%. Therefore, the probability that the special symbol combination corresponding to the suggested setting is displayed differs depending on the set value. That is, the more the special symbol combination is displayed, the higher the expectation of setting 1 or setting 2 is.

When the current game round corresponds to winning super reach B, the variable display time to be set is 17 sec for any set value. When the variable display time specified by the main controller 162 is 17 sec, the notification/production control device 140 sets Super Reach B as the variable display mode. Since the variable display time does not have a difference due to the set value, the notification/production control device 140 determines which set value from the variable display time specified in the game round corresponding to the winning super reach B. Impossible to specify.

When the current game round is lost and corresponds to Super Reach B, the set variable display time is 17 sec or 17.2 sec for setting 1 and setting 2, and 17 sec for setting 3. When the variable display time specified by the main controller 162 is 17 sec or 17.2 sec, the notification/production control device 140 sets Super Reach B as the variable display mode. However, if the variable display time is 17 sec, the setting suggestion is not executed, and if the variable display time is 17.2 sec, the setting suggestion is executed. The final stop symbol combination is also used for setting suggestion in the present embodiment. Although the details will be described later, in the super reach B that is out of correspondence with the setting suggestion, the special symbol combination corresponding to it is finally stopped and displayed.

For these variable display times, a difference is provided in the distribution probability for each set value. Specifically, in the case of setting 1, the distribution probability of 17 sec is 99.8%, and the distribution probability of 17.2 sec is 0.2%. In setting 2, the allocation probability of 17 sec is 99.8%, and the allocation probability of 17.2 sec is 0.2%. In setting 3, the distribution probability of 17 sec is 100%, and the distribution probability of 17.2 sec is 0%. Therefore, the probability that the special symbol combination corresponding to the suggested setting is displayed differs depending on the set value. That is, when a special symbol combination is displayed, setting 3 is denied, and setting 1 or setting 2 is determined.

If the current game round corresponds to Win Super Reach C, the variable display time to be set is 18 sec for any set value. When the variable display time specified by the main controller 162 is 18 sec, the notification/production control device 140 sets Super Reach C as the variable display mode. Since the variable display time does not have a difference due to the set value, the notification/production control device 140 determines which set value from the variable display time specified in the game round corresponding to the winning super reach C. Impossible to specify.

When the current game round is lost and corresponds to Super Reach C, the variable display time to be set is 18 sec or 18.2 sec for setting 1 and setting 2, and 18 sec for setting 3. When the variable display time specified by the main controller 162 is 18 sec or 18.2 sec, the notification/production control device 140 sets Super Reach C as the variable display mode. However, if the variable display time is 18 sec, the setting suggestion is not executed, and if the variable display time is 18.2 sec, the setting suggestion is executed. The final stop symbol combination is also used for setting suggestion in the present embodiment. Although the details will be described later, in the super reach C that is out of correspondence with the setting suggestion, the special symbol combination corresponding to it is finally stopped and displayed.

For these variable display times, a difference is provided in the distribution probability for each set value. Specifically, in the case of setting 1, the distribution probability of 18 sec is 99.6%, and the distribution probability of 18.2 sec is 0.4%. In setting 2, the distribution probability for 18 sec is 99.9% and the distribution probability for 18.2 sec is 0.1%. In setting 3, the allocation probability of 18 sec is 100%, and the allocation probability of 18.2 sec is 0%. Therefore, the probability that the special symbol combination corresponding to the suggested setting is displayed differs depending on the set value. That is, when a special symbol combination is displayed, setting 3 is denied, and setting 1 or setting 2 is determined. Also, when the special symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the expectation that the setting 1 is the most advantageous to the player increases.

In the following description, various variable display times (16.2 sec, 17.2 sec, 18.2 sec) corresponding to setting suggestions are referred to as special variable display times.

Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 63, the effect setting process (step S1205 of FIG. 31) for the generation of the off reach performed by the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140 will be described. The effect setting process for occurrence of the out reach is a process executed as a part of regular processing by the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140 .

(Production setting processing for occurrence of outreach reach)
In the effect setting process for occurrence of out reach, first, in step S2901, determination process of the variable display mode is executed. Specifically, based on the variable display time designated by the main controller 162, the outline of the presentation mode is specified, and the details of the presentation mode (for example, whether or not effects or cut-ins occur) are determined. After determining the variable display mode, the final stop symbol is determined in steps S2902 to S2905.

Specifically, first, in step S2902, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the current game cycle is off and corresponds to super reach. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2902, the process proceeds to step S2903. In step S2903, it is determined whether or not the current game cycle corresponds to the above-described special variation display time.

If a negative determination is made in either step S2902 or S2903, the process proceeds to step S2904. In step S2904, final stop symbol combination determination processing not corresponding to setting suggestion is executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2903, the process advances to step S2905. In step S2905, final stop symbol combination determination processing corresponding to setting suggestions is executed.

Here, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 64, a supplementary explanation of the final stop symbol combination corresponding to the result of losing will be given.

When 16 sec is specified as the variable display time in the game round corresponding to the result of the loss, the loss super reach A is executed. In this case, as the final stop symbol combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the big hit result and the symbol combination other than the special symbol combination are set as the final stop symbol combination. On the other hand, when 16.2 sec is designated as the variable display time, Super Reach A is similarly executed. In this case, as the final stop symbol combination, the "7" symbol constituting the upper symbol row Z1, the "3" symbol constituting the middle symbol row Z2, and the "7" symbol constituting the lower symbol row Z3 are set on the activated line. (first special symbol combination). As described above, the probability that 16.2 sec is set as the variable display time is set such that when setting 3 is compared with setting 1 and setting 2, the latter is twice the former. Therefore, when the first special symbol combination is displayed in the final stop state, it is likely that the setting is 1 or 2 (see FIG. 65).

When 17 sec is designated as the variable display time in the game round corresponding to the result of the loss, the loss super reach B is executed. In this case, as the final stop symbol combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the big hit result and the symbol combination other than the special symbol combination are set as the final stop symbol combination. On the other hand, when 17.2 sec is specified as the variable display time, Super Reach B is similarly executed. In this case, as the final stop symbol combination, the "7" symbol constituting the upper symbol row Z1, the "4" symbol constituting the middle symbol row Z2, and the "7" symbol constituting the lower symbol row Z3 are set on the activated line. (second special symbol combination). As described above, the probability that 17.2 sec is set as the variable display time is 0% at setting 3. Therefore, when the second special symbol combination is displayed in the final stop, setting 3 is denied, and setting 1 or setting 2 is confirmed (see FIG. 65).

When 18 sec is specified as the variable display time in the game round corresponding to the result of the loss, the loss super reach C is executed. In this case, as the final stop symbol combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the big hit result and the symbol combination other than the special symbol combination are set as the final stop symbol combination. When 18.2 sec is specified as the variable display time, Super Reach C is also executed. In this case, as the final stop symbol combination, the "7" symbol forming the upper symbol row Z1 on the activated line, the "2" symbol forming the middle symbol row Z2, and the "7" symbol forming the lower symbol row Z3 ( 3rd special symbol combination) is set. As described above, the probability that 18.2 sec is set as the variable display time is 0% at setting 3. Therefore, when the second special symbol combination is displayed in the final stop, setting 3 is denied, and setting 1 or setting 2 is confirmed (see FIG. 65). When 18.1 sec is designated as the variable display time, Super Reach C is also executed. In this case, as the final stop symbol combination, the "7" symbol forming the upper symbol row Z1 on the activated line, the "1" symbol forming the middle symbol row Z2, and the "7" symbol forming the lower symbol row Z3 ( 4th special symbol combination) is set. As described above, the probability that 18.1 sec is set as the variable display time is 0% for setting 2 and setting 3. FIG. Therefore, when the fourth special symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed, the setting 1 is determined (see FIG. 65).

After executing the processing of steps S2904 and S2905 in the effect setting processing for occurrence of outreach, the variable display time information received from the main controller 162 is erased. Then, the information indicating the current set value and the like are erased at the timing when the game cycle ends.

According to the twelfth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The variable display time information transmitted from the main controller 162 with the start of the game cycle includes information indicating the set value. According to this configuration, the main controller 162 can instruct whether or not to suggest a set value (suggest setting), and the notification/production control device 140, which has a lower defense function than the main controller 162, is illegally operated. It is possible to suppress illegal execution of the setting suggestion.

In addition, since the variable display time information transmitted from the main controller 162 is the basis for setting suggestion, there is no need to store and hold the information indicating the set value on the notification/effect control device 140 side. The configuration in which the setting value does not need to be stored in the notification/production control device 140 having a low defense function is advantageous in suppressing the outflow of information indicating the setting value.

Furthermore, since the variable display time information, which can be expected to be transmitted from the main controller 162 periodically to some extent, also serves as information indicating the set value, compared to a configuration in which information indicating the set value is separately transmitted, It is possible to make it difficult to target the information and illegally acquire the information.

When the variable display time information indicating the special variable display time is received from the main control device 162, the suggestion is executed in the game round executed during the special variable display time. In such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally read the set value from the notification/production control device 140 as compared with the configuration in which the suggestion is carried over to the next game cycle.

Since the variable display mode related to the normal variable display time and the variable display mode related to the special variable display time are common, it becomes difficult to specify the set value from the difference in the appearance of the variable display mode.

In addition, since the difference is provided so that the special variation display time is slightly longer, the configuration in which the setting suggestion is executed only in the corresponding game round makes it easier to earn the execution period of the setting suggestion.

It is not preferable that the set value is estimated from a slight difference in period when super reach AC is performed. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, if a configuration is adopted in which the difference between the normal variable display time and the special variable display time is recognized as being the same, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be preferably avoided. can be suppressed.

By counting the fluctuation display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 253, it is possible to specify the presence or absence of setting suggestions. However, as shown in the present embodiment, if the beginning of the variable display is made common, it is possible to make it difficult to count the execution period aiming at the game times in which setting suggestions may occur.

Super reach, which is the base of setting suggestions, has a longer fluctuation display time than normal reach. By setting the special variable display time based on super reach, which has a relatively long variable display time, it is possible to make it difficult to visually identify the difference between the normal variable display time and the special variable display time. can.

When the ready-to-win display is executed, the player's expectation for the win result increases, so the player's attention tends to turn to the ready-to-win display. By executing the setting suggestion under a situation where the degree of attention of the player is high, it is possible to reduce the chance that the setting suggestion is overlooked.

In addition, it is not limited to the contents described in the above-described twelfth embodiment, and for example, it may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the twelfth embodiment, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to the twelfth embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured.

<Modification 1>
In the twelfth embodiment, when the special variation display time is specified from the main control device 162, the setting suggestion is executed in the corresponding game round, but it is not limited to this. . For example, when the special variable display time is received, if there is subsequent hold information, it is possible to configure a setting suggestion to be executed in any of the game rounds related to the subsequent hold information. be. For example, if all of the subsequent pending information is subject to setting suggestions, the more pending information that is stored, the more chances (execution time) to execute setting suggestions. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage a player who expects setting suggestions to actively participate in the game.

<Modification 2>
In the twelfth embodiment, the main controller 162 determines whether or not there is a setting suggestion. For example, when a predetermined regulation condition is established, even if the special variation display time is designated, it is possible to regulate the stoppage of the special symbol combination corresponding to the suggested setting.

In the above type of game machine, the symbol combination that was stopped and displayed in the last game round will not start the next game round, except when the display screen is turned off in power saving mode etc. or a demonstration screen etc. is displayed. maintained up to In such a configuration, even if the special variable display time is specified, if the subsequent hold information is not stored, the special symbol combination is restricted from stopping, and instead of the special symbol combination It is also possible to have a configuration in which normal outlier symbol combinations are stopped.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
The present embodiment differs from the above-described embodiments in the configuration for changing the set values (setting change). Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 66, the configuration related to the setting change in this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. FIG. 66(a) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for setting change, and FIG. 66(b) is a schematic diagram showing a setting key switch.

In the first embodiment, the setting change switch 166, the setting key switch 167, and the set value display section 168 are arranged on the main control board 401 of the main control device 162 (see FIG. 8, etc.). On the other hand, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 608, the setting change switch 609, and the set value display section 610 are arranged on the monitoring board 601 of the monitoring device 600 (see FIG. 66(a)).

Here, the setting key K and the setting key switch 608 will be additionally explained with reference to FIG. 66(b). The setting key switch 608 is formed with a key hole through which the setting key K is inserted. is switched to the ON state. The setting key switch 608 is configured such that when the setting key K is placed at the ON position, the setting key K remains at the ON position even if the user removes the hand (finger) from the setting key K. FIG.

When the setting key K is placed at the ON position, the setting key K cannot be removed. The setting key K can be removed by turning it to the OFF state. As in the ON position, when the setting key switch 608 is placed at the OFF position, the setting key K remains at the OFF position even if the setting key K is released.

Regarding the setting key switch 608, when the setting key K is moved to the ON position/OFF position, an event (so-called chattering) may occur in which the state of the setting key switch 608 repeats the ON state/OFF state in a short period of time. have a nature. Such an event hinders the stabilization of the operation of the game machine and the improvement of its reliability. One of the features of the present embodiment is that it is devised to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. Hereinafter, first, the procedure for changing the setting value (setting change) and the procedure for checking the setting value (setting confirmation) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67(a) is a schematic diagram showing a procedure for changing settings, and FIG. 67(b) is a schematic diagram showing a procedure for confirming settings.

When changing the set value, as shown in FIG. 67(a), first, the power switch 247 (see FIG. 66) provided in the power/launch control device 243 is turned off. By inserting the setting key K into the key hole of the setting key switch 608 and turning the setting key K clockwise while the power is off, the setting key switch 608 is switched to the ON state. By turning on the power switch 247 while maintaining the setting key switch 608 in the ON state, the control state of the monitoring device 600 is switched to a state in which the setting can be changed (hereinafter referred to as a setting change mode). After shifting to the setting change mode, by pressing the setting change switch 609, the setting values are switched in a predetermined order. At this time, the currently selected set value is flashed on the set value display section 610 so that the operator can visually confirm the currently selected set value. After setting the desired setting value by operating the setting change switch 609, the setting key K is turned counterclockwise to switch the setting key switch 608 to the OFF state. As a result, the setting value being selected is determined as a new setting value to be referred to in the transition game, and the setting change mode ends.

As described above, the setting change is limited to when the pachinko machine 10 is activated (started up). In other words, the operation of the power switch 247 is indispensable for changing the settings. On the other hand, confirmation of the setting value can be executed under the condition that the pachinko machine 10 has been started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67(b), under the condition that the power switch 247 is ON, the setting key K is inserted into the key hole of the setting key switch 608, and the setting key K is turned clockwise. By turning in the direction, the setting key switch 608 is switched to the ON state. As a result, the setting value display section 610 lights up and displays the setting value (setting confirmation mode). After confirming the setting value, the setting key switch 608 is turned off by turning the setting key K counterclockwise. This ends the setting confirmation mode.

Next, specific control processing related to the setting change and setting confirmation performed by the monitoring device 600 and the main control device 162 will be described. First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 68, the start-up process (start-up process) executed by the MPU 602 of the monitoring apparatus 600 when power is turned on (when the power switch 247 is turned on) will be described.

(Start process)
In the activation process, first, access to the storage unit 604 is permitted in step S3001. As a result, the information stored in the storage unit 604 can be updated (changed). After executing the process of step S3001, the process proceeds to step S3002. In step S3002, a signal from the setting key switch 608 is read to determine whether the setting key switch 608 is ON. If a negative determination is made in step S3002, the process proceeds to step S3003.

The storage unit 604 has a non-volatile memory, and is configured to be able to hold data even when the power supply is interrupted. The held data includes setting value information stored in the third storage area 607 (specifically, the setting value storage area 641) of the third storage area 607. FIG. In step S3003, the same set value as the set value at power OFF, that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area 641 is set as the set value at power ON. For example, if the setting value when the power is turned off is setting 2, the setting value when the power is turned on is set to setting 2.

Returning to the description of step S3002, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, that is, if the setting key switch 608 is ON, the process proceeds to step S3004. In step S3004, setting change mode transition processing is executed. Specifically, the setting change mode flag is stored in the third storage area 607 of the storage unit 604 and the setting value before the power is turned off is displayed in the setting value display unit 610 . When shifting to the setting change mode, the shift from the boot process to the normal process is avoided until the setting change is completed.

In subsequent step S3005, an invalid period is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to the invalid period is set in the invalid period timer counter provided in the third storage area 607 . The value of this timer counter is updated (decremented) each time a setting change process, which will be described later, is executed, and the invalid period ends when the value of the timer counter becomes "0". When the invalid period is set in this manner, reading of the signal from the setting key switch 608 is prohibited until the invalid period ends (elapses). Even if it is switched, the setting change mode continues until the invalid period elapses.

After executing the processing of step S3005, the process advances to step S3006 to execute setting change processing. Here, the setting change processing in step S3006 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(setting change processing)
In the setting change process, first, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode is on. If a negative determination is made in step S3101, this setting change processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3101, the process proceeds to step S3102. In step S3102, based on a signal from the setting change switch 609, it is determined whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3103. In step S3103, change operation handling processing is executed.

In the change operation handling process, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area 641 are rewritten to those corresponding to the current operation, and the display of the setting value display section 610 is updated to correspond to the current setting values. (change. As a result, the currently selected setting value is clearly shown to the operator. Note that the set value display unit 610 shown in the present embodiment is a so-called segment display device, and in the selection change mode, the currently selected set value is displayed blinking, and the confirmed set value is lit. It's becoming

Returning to the description of step S3102, if a negative determination is made in step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not it is in the invalid period. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3104, that is, if it is during the invalid period, this change processing ends. If a negative determination is made in step S3104, the process proceeds to step S3105. In step S3105, it is determined whether or not it is waiting for setting confirmation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined standby period has elapsed after the setting key switch 608 was turned off. If a negative determination is made in step S3015, the process proceeds to step S3106.

In step S3106, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 608 is in the OFF state. If a negative determination is made in step S3106, this setting change processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3106, the process proceeds to step S3107. In step S3107, a standby period is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to the standby period is set in the standby period timer counter provided in the third storage area 607 . The timer counter value is updated (decremented) each time the setting change process (details, the determination process in step S3101) is executed, and the waiting period ends when the timer counter value becomes "0". When the waiting period is set in this way, reading of the signal from the setting key switch 608 is prohibited until the waiting period ends (elapses). , the setting change mode continues.

After the standby period is set in step S3106, the setting change process is terminated after the setting value determination process is executed in step S3107. In the setting value confirmation process, rewriting of the setting value storage area 641 is prohibited, and the display mode in the setting value display section 610 is switched to one corresponding to the confirmation result. Specifically, the display mode in the setting value display section 610 is switched from blinking display to lighting display. As a result, the operator is clearly informed that the set values have been determined.

Returning to the description of step S3105, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3105, the process proceeds to step S3109. In step S3109, the standby period timer counter is referenced to determine whether or not it is time to end the standby period. If a negative determination is made in step S3019, this setting change process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3109, the process proceeds to step S3110. In step S3110, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 608 is in the OFF state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3110, the process proceeds to step S3111. In step S3111, setting change mode end processing is executed. In the setting change mode end processing, the setting change mode flag stored in the third storage area 607 is erased, and the setting values displayed in the setting value display portion 610 are hidden. Since the setting change mode flag is cleared, a negative determination is made in step S3101 in subsequent setting change processing, and the process shifts from startup processing to normal processing.

Here, if chattering occurs in the setting key switch 608, the degree of chattering increases, and a negative determination can be made in step S3109. In such a case, the process advances to step S3112 to execute extension processing. In the extension process, the value of the timer counter for the standby period is added (reset) to extend the standby period. Although the details will be described later, turning on the setting key switch 608 after shifting to normal processing triggers shifting to the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, it is not preferable to shift from startup processing to normal processing in a situation where the influence of chattering remains. Therefore, when it is assumed that the influence of chattering remains, the waiting period is extended to continue the setting change mode, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

In the pachinko machine 10 shown in this embodiment, setting values are read from the monitoring device 600 in main processing executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when power supply is started. The main processing executed by the MPU 402 will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(main processing)
The processing in steps S3210 to S3209 and S3214 in the main processing is the same as the processing in steps S101 to S109 and S112 in the main processing described in the first embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of step S3209 or step S3214, the process proceeds to step S3210. In step S3210, it is determined whether or not activation of the monitoring device 600 has been completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a notification of activation completion has been received from the monitoring device 600 . If a negative determination is made in step S3210, the process waits until the notification is received.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3210, the process proceeds to step S3211. In step S3211, setting values are read from the monitoring device 600. FIG. Specifically, the set value set in step S3003 or S3006 is read. Thereafter, initial command output processing is executed in step S3212, and interrupts are permitted in step S3213. The processing of steps S3212 and S3213 is the same as the processing of steps S110 and S111. After executing the process of step S3213, the main process is ended and the normal process is started.

Next, normal processing that is periodically executed by the MPU 602 of the monitoring device 600 after the monitoring device 600 is started will be described. The execution cycle of normal processing is 10 msec, which is longer than the cycle of regular processing (timer interrupt processing and normal processing) executed by MPU 402 of main controller 162 .

As shown in FIG. 71(a), normal processing includes monitoring processing in step S3301 and setting confirmation processing in step S3302. In the monitoring process of step S3301, the number of games played, the number of wins, the number of jackpots, etc. are stored based on the information from the main controller 162 and the like. The details of this monitoring content are the same as those in the first embodiment and the like, so the description is omitted (see FIG. 33 and the like). Here, the setting confirmation processing in step S3302 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 71(b).

(Setting confirmation process)
In the setting confirmation process, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation mode is on. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a setting confirmation mode flag, which will be described later, is stored in the third storage area 607 . If a negative determination is made in step S3401, the process proceeds to step S3402. In step S3402, the signal from the setting key switch 608 is read, and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 608 is in the ON state. If a negative determination is made in step S3402, this setting confirmation processing ends. If the determination in step S3402 is affirmative, setting confirmation start processing in steps S3403 to S3406 is executed.

Specifically, first, setting display start processing is executed in step S3403. As a result, the current set value is displayed on the set value display section 610 . In the setting value confirmation mode, the setting values before confirmation are displayed blinking, while the setting values that have been confirmed are lit and displayed, thereby making it possible to distinguish between the two.

In subsequent step S3404, setting confirmation mode transition processing is executed. In the setting confirmation mode transition processing, a setting confirmation mode flag is stored in the third storage area 607 . As a result, in subsequent setting confirmation processing, affirmative determination is made in step S3401 until the setting confirmation mode flag is cleared.

In step S3405, an invalid period is set during which the setting key switch 608 is invalid (more specifically, signal reading is disabled). Specifically, a value corresponding to the invalid period is set in the invalid period timer counter provided in the third storage area 607 . This value is decremented each time the normal process (see FIG. 71(a)) is executed. In this embodiment, the invalid period is specified to be a multiple of the execution cycle of normal processing (specifically, 20 msec).

After executing the game progress control process in step S3406, the setting confirmation process is terminated. In the game progress regulation process, the monitoring device 600 outputs information for regulating the game progress to the main controller 162 . When the main controller 162 receives this information, it avoids various processes related to the progress of the game until it receives the information about the release of the regulation from the monitoring device 600 .

Returning to the description of step S3401, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3401, the process proceeds to step S3407. In step S3407, it is determined whether or not it is in the invalid period. If a negative determination is made in step S3407, the process proceeds to step S3408. In step S3408, it is determined whether or not it is in the waiting period. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a standby flag is stored in the third storage area 607 . Details of the waiting period will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S3408, the process proceeds to step S3409. In step S3409, the signal from the setting key switch 608 is read, and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 608 is in the OFF state. If a negative determination is made in step S3409, this setting confirmation processing is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3409, the process proceeds to step S3410. In step S3410, a waiting period is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to the waiting period is set in a waiting period timer counter provided in the third storage area 607 , and a waiting flag is stored in the third storage area 607 . This timer counter is updated (decremented) each time the normal process (see FIG. 71(a)) is executed.

In this embodiment, when the setting key switch 608 is turned off, the setting change mode is not terminated immediately, but the off state is turned off after a predetermined waiting period has passed since the setting key switch 608 was turned off. It is configured to end the setting change mode when it is confirmed that it is maintained.

Returning to the description of step S3408, if the determination in step S3408 is affirmative, that is, if it is during the standby period, the process proceeds to step S3411. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a standby flag is stored in the third storage area 607 . In step S3411, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the waiting period. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the waiting period timer counter provided in the third storage area 607 is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S3411, the setting confirmation process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3411, the process proceeds to step S3412.

In step S3412, a signal from the setting key switch 608 is read to determine whether or not the setting key switch 608 is in the OFF state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3412, processing for ending the setting confirmation mode is executed in steps S3413 to S3415.

Specifically, first, in step S3413, processing for ending the display of the setting value display section 610 is executed. As a result, the setting values displayed in the setting value display section 610 are hidden. In the subsequent step S3414, the setting confirmation mode flag stored in the third storage area 607 is erased. After executing the game progress regulation cancellation process in step S3415, the setting confirmation process is terminated. In the game progress regulation release process, the monitoring device 600 outputs information for releasing the regulation of the game progress to the main controller 162 . Upon receipt of this signal, the main controller 162 releases the regulation of various processes relating to the progress of the game.

Returning to the description of step S3412, if a negative determination is made in step S3412, the process proceeds to step S3416. Extension processing is executed in step S3416. In other words, when the setting key switch 608 is in the ON state even though the waiting end timing has come, processing for extending the waiting period is performed. Specifically, the above value is reset to the timer counter for the standby period in the third storage area 607 . This extends the waiting period.

Next, the flow of setting change will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 72 and 73, and then the flow of setting confirmation will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

As already explained, in order to change the settings, it is necessary to turn on the setting key switch 608 before turning on the power switch 247 . That is, the operation of the setting key switch 608 precedes the operation of the power switch 247 . In particular, a setting key switch 608 is located on the monitor 600 attached to the main controller 162 and a power switch 247 is located on the power and launch control 243 . As shown in FIG. 9 and the like, the main controller 162 and the power/launch controller 243 are arranged vertically. They are placed close together. As a result, the setting key switch 608 and the power switch 247 are far apart. Considering that the two switches 247 and 608 are far apart, the time lag required from the operation of the setting key switch 608 to the operation of the power switch 247 tends to increase. Therefore, as illustrated in FIG. 72A, even if chattering occurs when the setting key switch 608 is switched to the ON state, there is no possibility that the power switch 247 will be operated during the chattering. lower.

However, if both the power switch 247 and the setting key switch 608 have a simple structure that can be operated with one hand, each switch 247, 608 can be operated with another hand. Therefore, it cannot be denied that the operation timing of the setting key switch 608 and the operation timing of the power switch 247 are extremely close, as shown in FIG. 72(b). In this case, the temporary OFF state due to chattering may be used as a trigger to terminate the setting change mode or to shift to the setting confirmation mode, which necessitates redoing the operation. There is a concern that this will hinder the smoothness and efficiency of the work.

Here, in the activation process of the MPU 602 of the monitoring apparatus 600, by shifting to the setting change mode, the setting change process (step S3006) is repeated at a predetermined cycle. This cycle is 10 msec, which is longer than the cycle (2 msec or 4 msec) in which the MPU 402 of the main controller 162 executes the process. Since the monitoring device 600 does not control the progress of the game, the cycle is set long, and the control load on the MPU 602 is reduced. In this way, by arranging the setting key switch 608 and the like in the monitoring device 600 having the longer cycle among the two devices having different cycles, it is possible to suppress an excessive reaction to chattering when it occurs. can do.

The chattering may occur at different times each time, and if the chattering continues for an excessively long time, it may not be possible to absorb the influence of the chattering in the above period. In this regard, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72(b), after confirming that the setting key switch 608 is in the ON state at the timing te2 when the power switch 247 is turned ON, , an invalid period for invalidating the reading of the signal from the setting key switch 608 is set. At the timing te3 after the invalid period has passed, reading of the signal from the setting key switch 608 is permitted, and thereafter the setting key switch 608 is switched to the OFF state to confirm the setting value and terminate the setting change mode. can be done. Thereby, even if chattering continues for an excessively long time, its influence can be suppressed.

After changing the setting value by operating the setting change switch 609, the setting value is confirmed by switching the setting key switch 608 to the OFF state, and the setting change mode ends. Here, as shown in FIG. 73, even if the setting key switch 608 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode does not end immediately. First, at the timing of tf1 when the setting key switch 608 is switched to the OFF state, the display mode of the setting value display section 610 is switched from blinking to lighting in order to clearly indicate to the player that the setting value has been determined. At timing tf2 after a predetermined standby period has elapsed from timing , the setting value display unit 610 is turned off and the setting change mode ends.

This waiting period is also set to be longer than the cycle in which the activation process (setting change process) is executed. In other words, when the chattering cannot be completely absorbed in the period, the influence thereof is suppressed by the standby period.

Next, the flow of setting confirmation will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

As already described, the setting can be confirmed by switching the setting key switch 608 to the ON state while the power switch 247 is ON. In the example of FIG. 74(a), the setting key switch 608 is switched to the ON state at the timing tg1, so that the setting value display section 610 starts displaying the setting value (blinking display).

Here, in the MPU 602 of the monitoring device 600, the setting confirmation process (step S3302) is repeated at a predetermined cycle. This cycle is 10 msec, which is longer than the cycle (2 msec or 4 msec) in which the MPU 402 of the main controller 162 executes the process. Since the monitoring device 600 does not control the progress of the game, the cycle is set long, and the control load on the MPU 602 is reduced. In this way, by arranging the setting key switch 608 and the like in the monitoring device 600 having the longer cycle among the two devices having different cycles, it is possible to suppress an excessive reaction to chattering when it occurs. can do.

The chattering may occur at different times each time, and if the chattering continues for an excessively long time, it may not be possible to absorb the influence of the chattering in the above period. In this regard, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74A, at the timing tg1 when the setting key switch 608 is switched to the ON state, an invalid period for invalidating the reading of the signal of the setting key switch 608 is provided. is set. At timing tg2 after the invalid period has elapsed, reading of the signal from the setting key switch 608 is permitted, and thereafter the setting confirmation mode can be terminated by switching the setting key switch 608 to the OFF state. Thereby, even if chattering continues for an excessively long time, its influence can be suppressed.

When the setting key switch 608 is finely switched between the ON state and the OFF state due to chattering, the repetition of the ON/OFF of the setting confirmation mode following the change not only causes confusion for the operator, but also impairs the performance of the game machine. There is a concern that it will hinder the stabilization of behavior. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the effect of chattering can be suppressed, and it is possible to suitably suppress the repetition of ON/OFF of the setting confirmation mode.

In a game machine having a setting value changing function, diversification of the behavior of the game machine can contribute to an increase in attention to the game. However, in this type of game machine, an event (chattering) may occur in which the setting key switch 608 is jerked or the like, and when operated, the setting key switch 608 is finely switched between the ON state and the OFF state. It is feared that such an event will reduce the operational stability of the game machine and reduce the reliability of the game machine. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when the setting key switch 608 is switched between the OFF state and the ON state, the setting key switch is held until a predetermined period (standby period or invalid period) elapses from the switching. 608 loading is avoided. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress malfunction of the gaming machine and contribute to improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

In a game machine having two functions of changing the setting value (setting change) and confirming the setting value (setting confirmation), by unifying the operation system with the setting key switch 608, the complexity of the configuration of the game machine is suppressed. can. However, in such a configuration, due to the chattering of the setting key switch 608, the switch to the setting change mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode against the operator's intention. obtain. Occurrence of such a malfunction is undesirable because it causes confusion for the operator. In this respect, according to the configuration of this embodiment, when switching from the OFF state to the ON state, reading of the setting key switch 608 is avoided until at least the invalid period elapses. Even if the switch 608 is repeatedly turned ON/OFF temporarily, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being terminated or the setting confirmation mode from being shifted to. Similarly, when the setting key switch 608 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting change mode is maintained until the standby period elapses. Even if the setting key switch 608 is repeatedly turned on and off during this standby period, the transition to the setting confirmation mode is avoided. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of malfunction due to chattering.

In the configuration shown in this embodiment, the setting value is confirmed by switching the setting key switch 608 to the OFF state. , the fact that the set value has been determined is notified immediately. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the setting key switch 608 has been switched to the OFF state, but it is not accepted normally.

In a game machine having a setting value changing function, diversification of the behavior of the game machine can contribute to an increase in attention to the game. However, in this type of game machine, an event (so-called chattering) may occur in which the operating state/non-operating state is finely switched at the time of operation due to rattling of the change operation means. It is feared that such an event will reduce the operational stability of the game machine and reduce the reliability of the game machine. In particular, shortening the execution cycle of various game processes is effective in realizing smooth game progress and improved responsiveness. easier to pick up. In other words, when the execution cycle is long, there is concern that an event that is not so problematic may become a cause of malfunction. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, various configurations related to setting changes are provided in the monitoring device 600 which is set so that the execution cycle of the periodic processing is longer than that of the main control device 162 . Therefore, it is possible to suitably reduce the occurrence of malfunction due to the influence of chattering. This can contribute to improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

When the main configuration related to the setting change is arranged in the monitoring device 600, by the setting value being changed in the monitoring device 600 during the progress of the game, it is reflected in the main control device 162. A time lag occurs. Therefore, when the setting key switch 608 is being operated, by regulating the process for progressing the game in the main controller 162, the influence of such timing deviation can be avoided.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the thirteenth embodiment described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the thirteenth embodiment, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to the thirteenth embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured.

<Modification 1>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the configuration is such that the set value is determined at the timing when the setting key switch 608 is switched to the OFF state during the setting change mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the setting value is determined at the timing when the setting change mode ends after the waiting period has elapsed after the setting key switch 608 is switched to the OFF state.

<Modification 2>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the setting value is confirmed by switching the setting key switch 608 to the OFF state (arranging the setting key K to the OFF position). section may be provided separately from the setting key switch 608, and the setting value may be confirmed by operating the confirmation operation section under the condition that the setting key K is placed at the ON position. It should be noted that it is also possible to configure an operation unit other than the setting key switch 608, such as a reset switch, to also function as the confirmation operation unit.

<Modification 3>
Although the MPU 602 of the monitoring device 600 is configured so that the ON/OFF determination cycle of the setting key switch 608 is longer than the periodic processing cycle of the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, it is not limited to this. When suppressing the influence of chattering by setting an invalid period and a standby period, each period may be the same, or the latter period may be shorter.

<Modification 4>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the monitoring device 600 is provided with various components (setting key switch, setting change switch, setting display section) for changing the set values. may be set. Alternatively, it may be provided in another control device such as the power supply/launch control device 243 or the like.

<Modification 5>
In the thirteenth embodiment, when it is determined that the setting key switch 608 is in the ON state at the timing when the predetermined standby period has passed since the setting key switch 608 was switched to the OFF state, the setting key switch 608 is turned OFF. It is configured to extend the change mode. If such an event occurs, the cause may be chattering occurring in the setting key switch 608 . Therefore, in addition to or in place of the extension described above, a configuration may be adopted in which the setting key switch 608 is notified that there is a possibility that chattering is occurring.

<Modification 6>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the monitoring device 600 is provided separately from the main control device 162, but the main control board 401 and the monitoring device 600 (specifically, the monitoring board 601) are installed in the board box 163 constituting the main control device 162. ) may be enclosed.

<Modification 7>
In a configuration in which the main part 12 of the game machine is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 fixed to the island equipment of the game hall, there is a possibility that the main part 12 of the game machine will rattle. The backlash can cause chattering in the setting key switch 608 .

Here, when a pachinko machine (for example, the game machine main unit 12) is provided with a vibration detection sensor for crime prevention, chattering is likely to occur by referring to detection information from the vibration detection sensor. It may be configured such that whether or not the setting key switch 608 can be read is determined based on the determination result. Specifically, when the setting key switch 608 is switched to ON/OFF while vibration is being detected by the vibration detection sensor, the operation result is held, and after that, a new operation is performed until the vibration subsides. A configuration in which the setting key switch 608 is not read is also possible. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in waiting time due to dealing with chattering, and contribute to improvement in responsiveness when changing settings or checking settings.

<Modification 8>
A structure may be adopted in which a cushioning member is used in the mounting portion for mounting the device to which the setting key switch 608 is to be arranged, to suppress shaking or the like. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of chattering.

<Modification 9>
If at least one of the power switch 247 and the setting key switch 608 provided in the power/firing control device 243 is configured to be difficult or impossible to operate with one hand, the setting key switch 608 can be operated when changing settings. A period (time lag) from the operation to the operation of the power switch 247 can be increased. For example, the setting key switch 608 may be provided with a movable (openable) cover. When the setting key switch 608 is operated, the power switch 247 is operated while the cover is moved from the cover position to the non-cover position and then held in the non-cover position. and the setting key switch 608 are preferably prevented from being operated at the same time.

<Fourteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment is characterized by the configuration related to the setting of the random number when the setting value is changed (setting change) and the setting value is confirmed (setting confirmation). Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 75, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for setting random numbers.

The monitoring board 601 of the monitoring device 600 is provided with a hard random number circuit 650 that operates independently from the MPU 602 . The hardware random number circuit 650 is for updating and acquiring numerical value information (random number information) used for success/failure determination and the like. The hard random number circuit 650 updates the numerical information at a timing asynchronous to the periodic processing (normal processing) of the MPU 602, acquires the numerical information based on the instruction from the MPU 602, and transmits the acquired numerical information to the main control unit through the MPU 602. Transmit to device 162 .

The hard random number circuit 650 includes an updating circuit 651 as random number generating means for updating the winning random number counter CX used for the win/fail judgment. The update circuit 651 includes a clock circuit 652 that outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency (eg, 16 MHz), and an update buffer 653 that stores a winning random number counter CX. The update buffer 653 has a 2-byte storage area, and the numerical range of the winning random number counter CX is set to "0 to 65535". The update circuit 651 increments the hit random number counter CX stored in the update buffer 653 by 1 in synchronization with the rise or fall of the clock signal of the clock circuit 652 . After the winning random number counter CX reaches the maximum value, it is reset to "0". As a result, the winning random number counter CX is updated asynchronously with the periodic processing (normal processing) of the MPU 602 .

The update interval of the hit random number counter CX is the period of the clock signal of the clock circuit 652, specifically 62.5 nsec. As already explained, the execution cycle of the regular processing (normal processing) executed by the MPU 602 is 10 msec, so the update interval of the hit random number counter CX is sufficiently shorter than the execution cycle of the regular processing. there is

The hard random number circuit 650 comprises a winning random number register 654 for latching the winning random number counter CX being updated by the updating circuit 651 . The hit random number register 654 has the same storage area as the update buffer 653, and more specifically has a 2-byte storage area. The winning random number register 654 is connected to the update buffer 653. Specifically, each storage area of the updating buffer 653 and each storage area of the winning random number register 654 are connected one-to-one.

Hard random number circuit 650 includes a control circuit 655 that controls the latch signal. The control circuit 655 has an input terminal to which the MPU 602 is connected and an output terminal to which the winning random number register 654 is connected. A latch signal is input from the MPU 602 to the control circuit 655, and the control circuit 655 outputs the latch signal to the hit random number register 654 in synchronization with the rise of the latch signal. The hit random number register 654 writes the data stored in each storage area of the update buffer 653 at that time into its own storage area in synchronization with the input of the latch signal. As a result, the value of the random number counter CX at the input timing of the latch signal is acquired.

In the pachinko machine 10 shown in the present embodiment, the initial value of the winning random number counter C1 and the random number One of the features is that the initial value of the initial value counter CINI is set. The main processing executed by the MPU 402 will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(main processing)
The processing in steps S3501 to S3509 and S3517 in the main processing is the same as the processing in steps S101 to S109 and S112 in the main processing described in the first embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of step S3509 or step S3517, the process proceeds to step S3510. A setting key switch 167 is arranged on the main control board 401 of the main controller 162, and it is determined in step S3510 whether or not the setting key switch 167 is in the ON state. If a negative determination is made in step S3510, the process proceeds to step S3511. In step S3511, the set value when the power is turned off is set as the current set value. In the following step S3512, initial value setting processing of the random number counter is executed. Specifically, the initial value setting table stored in the various table storage areas of the ROM 403 is referred to determine the initial values of various counters such as the winning random number counter C1, and the initial values are set in the winning random number counter C1 and the like. .

Returning to the description of step S3510, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3510, the process proceeds to step S3513. In step S3513, processing for shifting to the setting change mode is executed. In the setting change mode transition processing, the setting change mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 404, and the setting value display unit 168 displays a display corresponding to setting 1, which is the initial setting value (specifically, "1"). . Note that the set value display unit 610 shown in the present embodiment is a so-called segment display device, and in the selection change mode, the currently selected set value is displayed blinking, and the confirmed set value is lit. It's becoming

After executing setting change mode transition processing in step S3513, setting change processing is executed in step S3514. After executing the processing of steps S3512 and S3514, the initial command output processing is executed in step S3515, and the interrupt is permitted in step S3516. The processing of steps S3515 and S3516 is the same as the processing of steps S110 and S111. After executing the process of step S3516, the main process is ended and the normal process is started.

Here, the setting change processing in step S3514 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(setting change processing)
In the setting change process, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode is on. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the above-described setting change mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 . If a negative determination is made in step S3601, this setting change processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3601, the process proceeds to step S3602.

In step S3602, based on a signal from the setting change switch 166, it is determined whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3602, the process proceeds to step S3603. In step S3603, change operation handling processing is executed.

In the change operation handling process, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area 436 (see FIG. 75) of the RAM 404 are rewritten to those corresponding to the current operation, and the display of the setting value display section 168 is changed to the current setting. Update (change) to correspond to the value. As a result, the currently selected setting value is clearly shown to the operator.

Returning to the description of step S3602, if a negative determination is made in step S3602, the process proceeds to step S3604. In step S3604, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 167 is in the OFF state. If a negative determination is made in step S3604, this setting change processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3604, the process proceeds to step S3605.

In step S3605, setting value confirmation processing (setting confirmation processing) is executed. In the setting confirmation process, rewriting of the setting value storage area 436 is prohibited, and the display mode in the setting value display section 168 is switched to one corresponding to the confirmation result. Specifically, the display mode in the setting value display section 168 is switched from blinking display to lighting display. As a result, the operator is clearly informed that the set values have been determined.

In subsequent step S3606, setting change mode end processing is executed. In the setting change mode end processing, the setting change mode flags stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 are erased, and a timer counter is used to define the timing at which the setting values displayed in the setting value display section 610 are hidden. to set. This timer counter is decremented every time the normal process that shifts after the setting change mode (main process) ends is executed. 0”. When the timer counter reaches "0", the set value display section 168 is turned off and the set value is not displayed.

After executing the setting change mode end processing in step S3606, the process advances to step S3607. In step S3607, a hard random number (random value) is acquired from the hard random number circuit 650 (more specifically, the winning random number register 654) of the monitoring device 600. FIG. Then, in subsequent step S3608, the random number obtained in step S3607 is set as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI. For example, if the obtained hard random number is "120", the initial value of the winning random number counter C1 is set to "120", and the initial value of the random number initial value counter CINI is set to "120". Although the winning random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI have the same maximum value, they are updated at different timings. Therefore, as the game progresses, the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the random number initial value counter CINI deviate, and the function of realizing diversification of update patterns using the random number initial value counter CINI is ensured. .

After executing the initial value setting process in step S3608, this setting change process ends. As a result, the main processing is shifted to the normal processing. Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 78, normal processing executed by MPU 402 of main controller 162 in this embodiment will be described, focusing on differences from the first embodiment.

(Normal processing)
In normal processing, first, external signal output processing is executed in step S3701. In the external signal output process, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process are sent to each sub-side control device and the hall computer HC. After executing the external signal output process in step S3701, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated in step S3702. In the following step S3703, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed, and in step S3704, game state transition processing is executed. After that, in step S3705, processing for electric support is executed, and in step S3706, game ball launch control processing is executed.

The processing of steps S3701 to S3706 is the same as the processing of steps S501 to S506 (see FIG. 23), so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the processing of step S3706, the process advances to step S3707 to execute setting confirmation processing. Here, the setting confirmation process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Setting confirmation process)
In the setting confirmation process, first, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation mode is on. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 . If a negative determination is made in step S3801, the process proceeds to step S3802.

In step S3802, based on the signal from the setting key switch 167, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 167 is in the ON state. If a negative determination is made in step S3802, this setting confirmation processing ends. If the determination in step S3802 is affirmative, setting confirmation start processing in steps S3803 to S3805 is executed.

Specifically, first, setting display start processing is executed in step S3803. As a result, the current set value is displayed (more specifically, lit display) on the set value display section 168 . In subsequent step S3804, setting confirmation mode transition processing is executed. In the setting confirmation mode transition processing, the setting confirmation mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 . As a result, in subsequent setting confirmation processing, affirmative determination is made in step S3801 until the setting confirmation mode flag is cleared. After executing the transition processing in step S3804, the flow advances to step S3805 to execute update stop processing of the random number counter. Specifically, interruption of timer interruption processing, which is another periodical processing, is prohibited. As a result, updating of the winning random number counter C1 and the like is temporarily stopped. After executing the process of step S3805, the process returns to step S3801. That is, when the setting display start process is executed, the transition to the next step is temporarily suspended in the normal process, and the setting confirmation process is repeated until the setting confirmation mode is canceled.

Returning to the description of step S3801, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3801, the process proceeds to step S3806. In step S3806, based on the signal from the setting key switch 167, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 167 is in the OFF state. If a negative determination is made in step S3806, the process returns to step S3801. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3806, setting confirmation end processing is executed in steps S3807 to S3811.

Specifically, first, setting display end processing is executed in step S3807. As a result, the setting value display section 168 is turned off and the setting value is hidden. In the subsequent step S3808, setting confirmation mode end processing is executed. In the setting confirmation mode end processing, the setting confirmation mode flag stored in the various flags storage area 435 of the RAM 404 is erased. After executing the migration process in step S3808, the process advances to step S3809.

In step S3809, a hard random number (random value) is acquired from the hard random number circuit 650 (more specifically, the winning random number register 654) of the monitoring device 600. FIG. Then, in subsequent step S3810, the random number obtained in step S3809 is set as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI. For example, if the obtained hard random number is "120", the initial value of the winning random number counter C1 is set to "120", and the initial value of the random number initial value counter CINI is set to "120". Although the winning random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI have the same maximum value, they are updated at different timings. Therefore, as the game progresses, the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the random number initial value counter CINI deviate, and the function of realizing diversification of update patterns using the random number initial value counter CINI is ensured. .

After executing the initial value setting process in step S3810, the random number counter update restarting process is executed in step S3811, and then this setting confirmation process ends. In the random number counter update restart processing, the interrupt of the timer interrupt processing prohibited in step S3805 is permitted. As a result, updating of the winning random number counter C1 and the like is resumed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 78, after the setting confirmation process in step S3707 is completed, the process advances to step S3708 to determine whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, one cycle (this embodiment) from the start of the previous normal process. 4 msec) has elapsed. If the determination in step S3708 is affirmative, the process returns to step S3701, and if the determination in step S3708 is negative, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variable Repeatedly update the type counter CS.

Here, setting of values of the winning random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key switch 167 is in the OFF state, the initial value determination table stored in the various table storage areas of the ROM 403 is referred to, and the winning random number counter C1 and The value of the random number initial value counter CINI is determined.

On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the setting key switch 167 is in the ON state, the setting change mode is entered. When shifting to the setting change mode, a random number value is obtained from the hard random number circuit 650 (hit random number counter CX) of the monitoring device 600 at the timing when the setting change is completed, and is set to the same value as the obtained random number value. , the values of the random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI are determined.

When the setting key switch 167 is turned on while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the setting confirmation mode is entered. When shifting to the setting confirmation mode, a random number is obtained from the hardware random number circuit 650 (hit random number counter CX) of the monitoring device 600 at the timing when the setting confirmation is completed, and the random number is set to the same value as the obtained random number. , the values of the random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI are determined.

According to the fourteenth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the administrator of the game hall changes the numerical information group to be referred to (setting change) or confirms the numerical information group to be referred to (setting confirmation), it is executed by the main controller 162. By suspending the processing for progressing the game (for example, main processing, normal processing, and timer interrupt processing), it is possible to suppress malfunction of the gaming machine. However, in view of the fact that the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the like are updated in the processing for progressing the game, updating of the first numerical information is stopped during setting change or setting confirmation. In this case, there is a concern that the update pattern of the winning random number counter C1 is likely to be predicted from the timing of the setting change operation and setting confirmation operation. In other words, when the update function of the random number counter C1 is incorporated in the process for progressing the game, the update pattern can be diversified when the process is progressing as usual, but when the progress of the process stops, can cause the above problems. As described above, there is still room for improvement in the configuration related to the update of numerical information in order to improve the security function of the gaming machine. In particular, in the configuration in which the winning random number counter C1 is updated as part of the regular processing as shown in the present embodiment, the updating of the winning random number counter C1 is also interrupted when the regular processing is stopped, and the setting change or setting confirmation ends. will be resumed based on With such a configuration, there is a concern that prediction of the random number update period and the like is likely to be performed from the end timing of the change operation. This is not preferable in terms of suppressing cheating, such as playing a game aiming at a predetermined random number value.

Here, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when a setting change operation or a setting confirmation operation is performed, the winning random number counter C1 of the main control device 162 based on the winning random number counter CX of the monitoring device 600 value is set. In this way, by using the winning random number counter CX provided separately from the winning random number counter C1, it is possible to make the update pattern of the winning random number counter C1 difficult to understand, and to suitably suppress the deterioration of the crime prevention function of the game.

The winning random number counter C1 and the winning random number counter CX have the same count number (the upper limit and the lower limit of the counter value), and the value obtained from the winning random number counter CX is directly input to the winning random number counter C1. It has become. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the control load due to the strengthening of the crime prevention function.

The winning random number counter CX provided in the monitoring device 600 has a clock circuit 652 capable of outputting a pulse signal that is switched on and off at a predetermined cycle when the power is supplied to the monitoring device 600. For example, the value of the winning random number counter CX can be updated before the activation of the MPU 602 is completed. In other words, when changing work, the value of the hit random number counter CX is quickly updated by starting power supply. The value of the random number counter CX can be updated. As a result, when applying the value of the winning random number counter CX to the winning random number counter C1, it is possible to make it difficult to specify or predict the applied value.

Even if the setting is changed at the start of power supply, the value of the winning random number counter CX can be updated without going through various processes such as startup. It is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the counter CX cannot be updated in time.

When performing change work or confirmation work, the work time varies to some extent. In the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the period is used to update the value of the winning random number counter CX, so it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value acquired from the winning random number counter CX.

As described above, it is technically significant to update the random number counter CX during change work or confirmation work. By updating the winning random number counter CX in a short cycle, the prediction becomes more difficult. Therefore, in a configuration in which the random number counter CX is updated separately from the regular processing in the main controller 162, updating at a shorter cycle than the regular processing can contribute to further improvement of the crime prevention function. It should be noted that shortening the update cycle in the regular processing relating to the progress of the game is a factor of increasing the processing load of the regular processing. By separating, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

When the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed, not only the winning random number counter C1 but also the random number initial value counter CINI is changed according to the value of the winning random number counter CX. This makes it difficult to predict the value of the random number initial value counter CINI, and contributes to further improvement of the crime prevention function.

In a configuration in which a monitoring device 600 provided separately from the main control device 162 monitors the state of ball entry into various ball-entering sections, the monitoring device 600 is provided with a hard random number circuit 650, and the monitoring device 600 detects whether or not the ball is hit. By adopting a configuration in which information for determining the value of the random number counter C1 is transmitted to the main controller 162, an increase in the control load on the main controller 162 can be suppressed. This is a preferable configuration in terms of smoothing the progress of the game. It should be noted that the monitoring device 600 does not execute processing related to game progress. Therefore, even if the processing load increases, it will not become a factor that hinders the progress of the game.

The monitoring device 600 has means for confirming a request from the main controller 162 at a predetermined cycle, and the update cycle of the winning random number counter CX in the hard random number circuit 650 is shorter than the predetermined cycle. With such a configuration, the timing of the actual request from the main controller 162 and the timing of acquiring the winning random number counter CX will deviate. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to adjust the operation timing (request generation timing) aiming at the timing when the winning random number counter CX reaches a specific value.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the fourteenth embodiment described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the above fourteenth embodiment, or may be applied to the above fourteenth embodiment by combining a part or all of them. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured.

<Modification 1>
In the fourteenth embodiment, the value obtained from the hard random number circuit 650 of the monitoring device 600 is used to initialize the winning random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI. It is also possible to apply the same technical idea to other lottery counters (for example, winning type counter C2, etc.).

<Modification 2>
In the fourteenth embodiment, the winning random number counter C1 and the like are not updated during setting change and setting confirmation. It does not negate the configuration in which updates are made.

<Modification 3>
In the fourteenth embodiment, the configuration is such that the random value is read from the monitoring device 600 at the completion timing of setting change and setting confirmation. is optional. For example, the configuration may be such that the random value is read at the start timing of setting change and setting confirmation, or the random value is read during setting change and setting confirmation.

<Modification 4>
In the fourteenth embodiment, when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 refers to the monitoring device 600 to set the random number value, it is stored in the winning random number register 654 via the MPU 602 of the monitoring device 600. Although the configuration is such that a random number value is obtained, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible for the main control device 162 to obtain a random value from the random number register 654 without going through the MPU 602 of the monitoring device 600 .

<Modification 5>
In the fourteenth embodiment, the initial values of the winning random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI are set by referring to the random number value of the hard random number circuit 650 when the setting is changed and the setting is confirmed. However, it can be changed as follows. That is, the initial value may be set using both the value obtained from the initial value setting table stored in the various table storage areas of the ROM 403 and the value obtained from the hard random number circuit 650 . For example, a value obtained by adding the two values (a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit if the count exceeds the upper limit) may be set as the initial value.

<Modification 6>
In the fourteenth embodiment, the MPU 602 of the monitoring device 600 monitors the operation of the hard random number circuit 650, but this monitoring function can be omitted.

Further, when the hardware random number circuit 650 does not operate normally, the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 determines an alternative value, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an alternative value may be provided from monitoring device 600 to main controller 162 .

<Modification 7>
In the fourteenth embodiment described above, the periodic processing execution cycle in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 and the update cycle of the hit random number counter CX in the hard random number circuit 650 of the monitoring device 600 are configured to be inconsistent. It is good also as a structure which makes each period match.

<Modification 8>
In the fourteenth embodiment, the monitoring device 600 is provided separately from the main control device 162. However, the main control board 401 and the monitoring device 600 (specifically, the monitoring board 601) are installed in the board box 163 constituting the main control device 162. ) may be enclosed.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment is the same as the ninth embodiment and the like in terms of suggesting setting values (setting suggestions) to the player, but the specific configuration related to the setting suggestions is the same as that of the ninth embodiment. etc. In the following, the configuration related to setting suggestions in the present embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the ninth embodiment, and the description of the same configuration as in the ninth embodiment will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82, a supplementary description will be given of the configuration of the game ball shooting handle 41 in this embodiment. 81 is a perspective view of the game ball shooting handle 41 viewed from the front side of the game machine, and FIG. 82 is a side view of the game ball shooting handle 41. FIG. In FIG. 81, the right hand H of the player operating the game ball shooting handle 41 is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line.

The game ball shooting handle 41 includes a substantially cylindrical handle base 42 projecting forward from the frame 20 of the front door frame 14 to the front of the game machine, a cover member 43 covering the open portion on the front side of the handle base 42, and a game ball. and a rotating operation member 44 that is rotated during the shooting operation. Since the cover member 43 is fixed to the handle base 42, the rotary operation member 44 is sandwiched between the handle base 42 and the cover member 43, thereby preventing the rotary operation member 44 from falling off.

Inside the handle base 42, a gear component and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the rotation operation member 44 are installed. The variable resistor is electrically connected to the power supply/firing control device 243, and when the rotary operation member 44 is rotated, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation of the gear parts. will change. By outputting the resistance value to the power supply/firing control device 243, the power supply/firing control device 243 is configured to grasp the rotation operation amount.

The handle base 42 also has a firing stop switch for stopping the shooting of game balls when the rotary operation member 44 is operated, and a touch sensor for detecting that the rotary operation member 44 is actually touched by a hand. and are arranged. These firing stop switches and touch sensors are electrically connected to the power/fire control device 243 . The power/launch control device 243 can determine whether or not the launch stop switch is operated based on information (detection signal) from the launch stop switch, and based on information (detection signal) from the touch sensor. It is possible to grasp whether or not a hand is in contact with the rotating operation member 44.

Next, operation of the game ball shooting handle 41 when playing a game will be briefly described. The player rotates the rotating operation member 44 to adjust the shooting speed of the game ball. Specifically, the rotating operation member 44 is rotated (clockwise when viewed from the front of the game machine) against the biasing force of the biasing member built into the game ball shooting handle 41, thereby releasing the game ball. The shooting speed increases, and by returning to the urging direction (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front of the game machine), the shooting speed of the game ball decreases. After the desired firing speed is achieved by adjusting the amount of rotation operation of the rotation operation member 44, the rotation operation member 44 is adjusted so that the rotation operation member 44 does not deviate from the rotation position (operation position). hold. As a result, the game can be continued while maintaining the desired shooting speed. If, for example, the hand is released from the game ball shooting handle 41 during a game, the rotating operation member 44 returns to the initial position due to the biasing force of the biasing member. Therefore, when the game is played again, the above-described operation of the rotating operation member 44 (adjustment of the shooting speed) is performed again.

A blower 750 is arranged behind the handle base 42, and the handle base 42 is formed with an air passage 42a for guiding the wind from the blower 750 to the front portion (cover member 43) of the game ball shooting handle 41. It is The cover member 43 has a substantially hemispherical shape that protrudes toward the front of the game machine, and has a central portion formed with a plurality of holes 43a communicating with the air blowing passage 42a. The hole 43a penetrates in the thickness direction of the cover member 43, and the wind that has passed through the blowing passage 42a is ejected forward of the game machine through the hole 43a. That is, the pores 43a function as air blowing ports or vents.

The blower device 750 is connected to the notification/effect control device 140, and the notification/effect control device 140 drives the blower device to eject air from the hole 43a when the setting suggestion condition described later is satisfied. More specifically, the blower device 750 is composed of a loudspeaker for deep bass, and performs output control so that non-audible sound is output from the loudspeaker. Thereby, a tactile change can be transmitted to the hand (for example, palm) operating the game ball shooting handle 41 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, blower device 750 is configured by a speaker, but it is not limited to this. The specific configuration is arbitrary as long as it can generate a tactile change by blowing air, and for example, it is possible to configure the air blowing device with a fan or the like.

The handle base 42 and the cover member 43 described above are colored and opaque, and the blower device 750 is covered with the handle base 42 and the cover member 43 from the front of the game machine. As a result, it is difficult (substantially impossible) for the player to directly confirm the movement of the blower device 750 visually. Here, if the setting value is suggested to the player by generating a tactile change, there is a high possibility that the setting indication will be overlooked. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the action that triggers the setting suggestion is limited, and the setting suggestion can be executed when the action is performed. Specifically, one of the features is that setting suggestions are incorporated into the operation corresponding presentation. A supplementary description of the configuration related to setting suggestions will be given below.

As described in the first embodiment, the upper bulging portion 31 of the front door frame 14 is provided with an operation button 35 that is operated by the player when an effect corresponding to the operation is executed. (See Figure 1, etc.). The operation button 35 is connected to the notification/effect control device 140 , and the notification/effect control device 140 can specify whether or not there is an operation based on a signal from the operation button 35 .

The effect corresponding to the operation of the operation button 35 (hereinafter referred to as the operation corresponding effect) includes a one-shot operation corresponding effect in which an effect corresponding to the single operation is executed when the operation button 35 is operated once, and the operation button 35 A continuous operation corresponding effect is included in which an effect corresponding to the continuous operation is executed when is continuously operated a plurality of times. When an effect corresponding to continuous operation is executed among the effects corresponding to various operations, the current set value may be suggested with the continuous operation as a trigger.

Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 83, a part of the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 31) executed as part of the regular processing by the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140 is configured, and the effect A description will be given of the effect mode determination process that is executed to determine the mode. Note that the effect mode determination process corresponds to the processes of steps S1202 to S1206 in the variation start process shown in the first embodiment.

(Production Mode Determination Processing)
In the effect mode determination process, first, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not a variation start command corresponding to the big hit or a variation start command corresponding to the losing reach is received from the main control device 162 . If an affirmative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3902. In step S3902, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command received this time corresponds to super reach. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3902, the process proceeds to step S3903.

In step S3903, processing for judging whether or not a continuous operation corresponding effect is possible is executed. Specifically, a lottery table for continuous operation corresponding performance stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of the ROM 443 is referred to, and it is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the continuous operation corresponding performance in the current super ready-to-win. If the lottery is won, an affirmative determination is made in step S3904 and the process proceeds to step S3905.

In subsequent step S3905, setting suggestion availability determination processing is executed. Specifically, the lottery table for setting suggestion stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of the ROM 443 is referred to, and it is decided by lottery whether or not to execute the setting suggestion in the current super reach. The occurrence probability of setting suggestions is configured to increase in the order of setting 3<setting 2<setting 1. FIG.

If it is determined in step S3905 that setting suggestion is to be performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S3906, and the process proceeds to step S3907. In step S3907, setting suggestion flags are set in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. FIG. After that, in step S3908, after executing the setting process for continuous operation super ready-to-win, the main effect mode determination process is ended.

In the super reach corresponding to continuous operation shown in the present embodiment, a predetermined display is executed based on the fact that the number of times the operation button 35 has been operated during the operation acceptance period reaches a preset specified number of operations, and the operation is performed. A predetermined display is avoided based on the end of the operation reception period without the number of operations reaching the specified number of operations. In the continuous operation super reach setting process, the specified number of operations is determined by referring to the specified number of operations determination table shown in FIG. 84(a). Three patterns of 5 times, 10 times, and 15 times are provided for the specified number of times of operation. It is likely to be selected in order, and if it corresponds to the outlier result, it is likely to be selected in the order of 15 times < 10 times < 5 times.

Further, in the setting suggestion in this embodiment, the blower device 750 built in the game ball shooting handle 41 is driven to generate a tactile change in the hand of the player operating the game ball shooting handle 41 . At this time, the blower 750 is switched between the blowing state and the non-blowing state. When the super reach this time corresponds to the setting suggestion, the number of times of switching is determined by referring to the number of times of switching determination table stored in the ROM 443 .

The number of times of switching is also different for each set value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 84(b), in setting 1, the probability that the number of times of switching is 3 is 30%, the probability that it is 5 is 30%, and the probability that it is 7 is 40%. With setting 2, the probability of switching 3 times is 30%, the probability of 5 times is 40%, and the probability of 7 times is 30%. is 40%, 5 times is 30%, and 7 times is 30%. That is, the number of times of switching at the time of setting suggestion increases in the order of setting 3 < setting 2 < setting 1 .

Returning to the description of step S3904, if a negative determination is made in step S3904, that is, if the current super reach does not support continuous manipulation, the process advances to step S3909 to perform setting processing for super reach that does not support continuous manipulation. is executed, the present effect mode determination processing is terminated. Returning to the description of step S3902, if a negative determination is made at step S3902, that is, if the current game round does not support super reach, the process proceeds to step S3910, and after executing normal reach setting processing, this effect End mode determination processing. Returning to the description of step S3901, if a negative determination is made in step S3901, that is, if the current game round corresponds to complete loss, the process proceeds to step S3911, and after executing complete loss setting processing, This production mode determination processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 85, the continuous operation corresponding effect processing executed as a part of the change medium processing (step S1105) of the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140 will be described.

(Continuous operation corresponding production processing)
In the continuous operation corresponding effect processing, first, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is a game round related to the continuous operation corresponding effect, that is, a game cycle related to the continuous operation corresponding super reach. If a negative determination is made in step S4001, this continuous operation corresponding effect processing is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4001, the process proceeds to step S4002.

In step S4002, it is determined whether or not a repeated operation has been suggested. In the pachinko machine 10, when the continuous operation corresponding effect is started, a continuous operation suggesting image (continuous operation prompting image) prompting the player to repeatedly operate the operation button 35 a plurality of times is displayed on the display screen of the pattern display device 253. 253a. For example, as the image for suggesting continuous operation, a moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character corresponds to the suggestion, and text such as "Press the button repeatedly." is displayed. It should be noted that the indication of the repeated operation is not limited to the one on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, and in addition to or instead of the indication on the display screen 253a, the indication of the repeated operation may be performed by outputting the sound from the speaker section 29. good too.

If it is determined in step S4002 that the continuous operation has not been suggested, the process advances to step S4003. In step S4003, it is determined whether or not it is time to start suggesting a continuous operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is a predetermined timing after the pattern variation display mode on the display screen 253a is switched from the normal variation display to the ready-to-win display.

If it is not the time to start suggesting a continuous operation, the continuous operation corresponding effect processing is terminated. When it is time to start suggesting a continuous maneuver, in step S4004, a process of setting an image for suggesting a continuous maneuver is executed. As a result, the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 displays the continuous operation suggestion image. In addition, the display of the image is continued over a predetermined suggestion period.

In subsequent step S4005, processing for setting the continuous operation waiting state is executed. Specifically, the continuous operation wait flag is stored in the continuous operation wait flag storage area of the various flag storage area 466 in the RAM 444 . After that, the continuous operation corresponding effect processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S4002, if it is determined in step S4002 that the continuous operation has been suggested, the process proceeds to step S4006. In step S4006, it is determined whether or not a continuous operation waiting flag is stored in the continuous operation waiting flag storage area of the RAM 444, thereby determining whether or not the continuous operation waiting state is set.

In the case of waiting for repeated operation, the process proceeds to step S4007. In step S4007, it is determined whether or not the operation button 35 has been operated. Whether or not the operation button 35 is operated is monitored by sensor monitoring processing of timer interrupt processing in the MPU 442 . In step S4007, if the processing result of the monitoring processing indicates that the operation button 35 has been operated (specifically, if the operation presence flag storage area of the various flag storage area 466 in the RAM 444 is flag is stored), the process advances to step S4008 to execute the setting processing of the image for operation acceptance. As a result, the operation acceptance image is displayed on the display screen 253 a of the pattern display device 253 . As the display of the image, for example, a moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character corresponds to the occurrence of the operation.

After executing the processing of step S4008, the process proceeds to step S4009, and it is determined whether or not the number of repeated operations has reached the specified number of operations determined in the effect mode determination process. Specifically, the counter value in the continuous operation counter area of the RAM 444 is configured to be incremented by "1" each time an affirmative determination is made in step S4007, and this counter value is compared with the specified number of operations. and make a decision. Note that the value of the consecutive operation counter area is initialized when the repeated operation waiting flag is cleared.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4009, the process advances to step S4010 to perform setting processing of a continuous operation completion image. As a result, the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 displays an image prompting the end of the continuous operation.

After executing the process of step S4010, the process proceeds to step S4011, and the process for continuous operation corresponding effect is performed. Although the details will be described later, in the effect corresponding to continuous operation, a display is made to the effect that the character displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 has successfully transformed.

In the subsequent step S4012, it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. FIG. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4012, the first air blowing process is executed in step S4013.

In the first blowing process, the blower device 750 is driven to blow air to the hands of the player. This will suggest the set value. After executing the process of step S4013, or when a negative determination is made in step S4012, the process proceeds to step S4017. In step S4017, after the continuous operation waiting state cancellation processing is executed, the continuous operation corresponding effect processing is ended. In the continuous operation waiting state cancellation processing, the continuous operation waiting flag stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444 is erased.

If a negative determination is made in either step S4007 or step S4009, that is, if the operation button 35 has not been operated, or if the number of consecutive operations is less than the prescribed number of operations even if the operation button 35 has been operated, step Proceed to S4014. In step S4014, it is determined whether or not it is time to finish accepting continuous operations. Specifically, by referring to the value of the continuous operation acceptance period counter provided in the timing counter area of the RAM 444, it is determined whether or not the acceptance end timing has come. If a negative determination is made in step S4014, this continuous operation corresponding effect processing is terminated.

A predetermined value is input to the continuous operation reception period counter when the continuous operation waiting state setting process is performed, and is updated each time a negative determination is made in step S4014. Then, when the value of the continuous operation acceptance period counter reaches a predetermined value, an affirmative determination is made in step S4014, and the process proceeds to step S4015. In step S4015, processing for setting an image for suggesting end of reception is performed. As a result, an image indicating that the acceptance period for repeated operations has ended is displayed on the display screen 253a.

After that, the process advances to step S4016 to execute an operation non-corresponding effect process. In the operation non-corresponding effect processing, a display is made to the effect that the character displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 has failed to transform, and the game is played via a different effect than when the above-described operation conditions are satisfied. Notify the results.

After the process of step S4016 is executed, the continuous operation waiting state canceling process is executed in step S4017, and then this continuous operation corresponding effect process is ended.

Returning to the description of step S4006 again, if a negative determination is made in step S4006, that is, if it is determined that the continuous operation waiting state is not set, the process proceeds to step S4018. In step S4018, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the chance-up effect. Specifically, in the present embodiment, in a game round corresponding to Super Reach, a chance-up effect may be executed as an effect suggesting that there is a high degree of expectation of a big win result in the middle of the game round. be. In this chance-up effect, by driving the blower device 750, a tactile change is transmitted to the player's hand operating the game ball shooting handle 41. FIG.

Here, the flow of the display effect when the continuous operation corresponding effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG.

When the game cycle in which the effect corresponding to continuous operation is executed is started at the timing of tc1, the variable display of each symbol row which has been stop-displayed until then is started. After that, the upper symbol row is stopped and displayed first, and then the lower symbol row is stopped and displayed at the timing of tc2. At this time, the ready-to-win display is started by stop-displaying the same symbol (symbol "3" in FIG. 18) on the above-described activated line. After the ready-to-win display is started, the ready-to-win pattern is reduced and displayed in the upper part of the display screen 253a, and a character image imitating a girl is displayed in the central part of the display screen 253a. After that, at the timing tc3, a message (for example, "Press repeatedly!") is displayed on the display screen 253a to prompt the operation button 35 to be repeatedly pressed, and the state is switched to the continuous operation waiting state.

After that, the player repeatedly presses the operation button 35 to change the display of the number of times of operation acceptance corresponding to the continuous operation provided on the display screen 253a. Specifically, according to the number of operations, the number of operations is indicated to the player by switching the light-emitting body (LED), which has been in the off state until then, to the lighting state. In accordance with this, an effect is displayed on the character image imitating a girl displayed on the display screen 253a so as to enclose the character image, and the effect is displayed to increase as the number of operations increases.

Here, in the present embodiment, it is set so that the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot increases as the number of operations from the suggestion of the continuous operation to the completion of the operation increases. For this reason, it is assumed that the player performs the operation while expecting to be able to perform the pressing operation as many times as possible, and an attempt is made to increase the degree of attention to the pressing operation.

At the timing of tc5 when the number of operations by repeated pressing operations reaches a predetermined number of operations, an image indicating that the consecutive operations are completed is displayed on the display screen 253a. In the example of FIG. 86, the current super reach corresponds to the setting suggestion, and at the timing of tc5 when the number of operations reaches the specified number of operations, a message indicating that the girl's image has been successfully transformed is displayed and air is blown. Blowing by the device 750, ie setting suggestion, is started.

After that, at timing tc6 before the confirmation display that clearly indicates the game result, the blower device 750 is driven again as a chance-up effect, and after that, at timing tc7, the symbol combination corresponding to the game result is stop-displayed. Specifically, when the current game cycle does not correspond to the big win result, the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of losing is stopped and displayed, and when the current game cycle corresponds to the big win result, a big win is displayed. The combination of corresponding symbols is stopped and displayed.

According to the fifteenth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

A setting value is suggested by transmitting a tactile change to the player's hand or the like touching the game ball shooting handle 41 . According to such a configuration, for example, compared to the case of causing a visual change on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 or causing an auditory change on the speaker unit 29, etc., the game It is possible to reduce the chances that the presence or absence of suggestions and the contents thereof are known to players other than players who are playing games on the machine. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to encourage a player who is trying to guess the setting value to play the game, thereby contributing to an improvement in the operation rate of the gaming machine.

In particular, when the game ball shooting handle 41 is operated by the player, it is expected that the player's hand or the like covers the front portion of the game ball shooting handle 41 . As a result, the above-described concealing effect can be favorably exhibited.

In the present embodiment, the blower device 750 built into the game ball shooting handle 41 is driven to generate a tactile change. It's becoming Therefore, it is difficult to identify the driving state of the blowing device 750 constituting the setting suggesting means from the appearance of the game machine, and the chances of other players knowing whether or not setting values are suggested can be reduced. .

Blowing by the blowing device 750 may be performed as part of the chance-up presentation as well as when setting suggestion is performed. In this way, by making use of the configuration that suggests the degree of expectation for the outcome of the big win, the setting suggestion described above is performed, thereby suppressing the complication of the configuration of the gaming machine. Further, when a tactile change occurs due to the driving of the air blower 750, a game is added in which it is guessed whether it is a suggestion of the degree of expectation that will result in a big win or a suggestion of a set value. As a result, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

In a configuration in which the degree of expectation, which is the result of a big win, and the set value are suggested by tactile changes in the game ball shooting handle 41, if the above-mentioned guessing becomes substantially difficult, the player would be puzzled. However, there is concern that the effect of improving the degree of attention described above may not be exhibited satisfactorily. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the timing of generating a tactile change during the execution of the variable display to the stop display of the pattern (during the game) is made different depending on which suggestion is made. , the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed.

In a configuration in which a set value is suggested by a tactile change, there is a possibility that the suggestion may be overlooked compared to the case where the set value is suggested by the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) or the like, which tends to attract the player's attention. becomes higher. Therefore, when suggesting a set value, by indicating the possibility of occurrence of the suggestion (prompting the user to operate the operation button 35), it is possible to reduce the chance of overlooking. In such a configuration, even if the setting value is not suggested, the same suggestion (operation of the operation button 35) is prompted, so that the setting value of the game machine can be easily specified. can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, setting suggestion is incorporated into the effect corresponding to continuous operation, and continuous operation of the operation button 35 is one of execution conditions for setting suggestion. With such a configuration, active participation in continuous operation of the operation button 35 can be encouraged.

In a game machine having a setting change function, the degree of advantage changes depending on the set value, so playing a game while guessing the set value is one of the pleasures. Here, when the ready-to-win effect is executed, the player's attention to the game tends to increase. By adopting a configuration in which a setting value is suggested (setting suggestion) when the player's attention is high, it is possible to reduce the chances that the setting suggestion is overlooked.

Further, when the ready-to-win effect is executed, there is a possibility that the winning result will be reported through the ready-to-win effect, so the degree of attention to the effect increases. However, if a non-winning result is announced in a state in which the degree of attention is high in this way, there is a possibility that the degree of attention to the game will greatly decrease as the sense of expectation decreases. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by adopting a configuration in which the setting suggestion can be executed in the ready-to-win display effect corresponding to the result of non-winning, it is possible to suppress a large decrease in the degree of attention when the result is non-winning.

As described above, in a configuration in which a set value is suggested by a tactile change, there is a high possibility that the suggestion will be overlooked if the player is not touching the target. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences can be avoided by using the operation means for shooting (the game ball shooting handle 41), which the player has many opportunities to touch during the course of the game, to make a suggestion. It can be suitably suppressed.

In the case where the operation button 35 is provided as the operating means for effect, there is a possibility that the operating means (the game ball shooting handle 41), which causes a tactile change when the operating button 35 is operated, is released. be. This is not preferable because it becomes a factor that lowers the actual operating rate of the game machine. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, if a configuration is adopted in which an operation means other than the operation button 35 (the game ball shooting handle 41) is configured to generate a tactile change, the game expected to suggest setting and effect corresponding to the operation The player can be urged to operate the game ball shooting operation means (game ball shooting handle 419) with a hand other than the hand operating the game ball shooting handle 419.例文帳に追加As a result, the occurrence of the inconvenience described above can be suppressed.

<Modification 1>
In the fifteenth embodiment, the front door frame 14 (game ball shooting handle 41) has a built-in blower 750, and the wind from the blower 750 makes the hand operating the game ball shooting handle 41 tactile. However, a specific configuration for transmitting a tactile change to the hand operating the game ball shooting handle 41 is provided around the game ball shooting handle 41 separately from the game ball shooting handle 41. may be provided. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 87, a speaker 760 whose attitude can be changed is arranged below the game ball shooting handle 41. It is configured to be changed so as to face the ball shooting handle 41 side. By outputting an inaudible sound from the speaker 760 with the speaker 760 facing the game ball shooting handle 41 side, an air flow toward the game ball shooting handle 41 is generated. This air flow is transmitted to the hand H of the player operating the game ball shooting handle 41 through a hole 767 formed in the front portion 766 of the cover member 765 .

<Modification 2>
In the fifteenth embodiment described above, a tactile change is transmitted to the player's hand operating the game ball shooting handle 41. , it is possible to apply a configuration other than the game ball shooting handle 41 as the target. For example, the operation button 35 for effect may be targeted, and setting suggestions may be made by transmitting a tactile change to the hand of the player operating the operation button 35 . For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 88, an air blower 770 is provided on the back side of the operation button 775 in the operation direction, and the wind output from the air blower 770 flows into the partition portion 777 (pore 779) of the operation button 775 and the operation. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the output is output to the outside of the operation button 775 through the surface portion 776 (pore 778).

<Modification 3>
In order to suggest a setting by a tactile change, it is not always necessary to generate a tactile change with the operating means operated by the player. For example, the front door frame 14 may be provided with a configuration capable of generating a tactile change at a predetermined portion other than the operating means. In such a configuration, when a setting suggestion is likely to occur, the setting suggestion is prevented from being overlooked by notifying the player of the situation and prompting the player to touch the predetermined portion.

<Modification 4>
If an insertion portion into which a player can insert his or her hand (fingers) is provided in the front portion (front door frame 14) of the pachinko machine 10, and a configuration is adopted in which a tactile change is transmitted to the hand inserted into the insertion portion, air is blown. It is possible to suppress the movement of the means from being conspicuous. In this way, if a setting is suggested at a place out of sight of the player, etc., it becomes more difficult to identify the change by visual observation, and the function of suggesting the setting value by a tactile change is less unexpected. Decrease can be suitably suppressed.

For example, in the specific example shown in FIG. 89, a concave portion recessed to the rear of the game machine is formed in the back wall portion (the back wall portion of the lower tray 34) between the upper bulging portion 31 and the lower bulging portion 32 in the front door frame 14. 36 are formed. The concave portion 36 is formed by expanding the most downstream portion (outlet portion 37a) of the ball passage 37 leading to the lower plate 34, and is sized so that the player can insert his/her finger F thereinto. A vent hole 39 is formed in the inner wall of the recess 36 (specifically, the ceiling portion 38). If the air from the air blower 750 built in the front door frame 14 is ejected into the recessed portion 36 through the ventilation hole 39, it becomes difficult to visually confirm whether or not the air is being blown from the front of the game machine.

<Modification 5>
In the fifteenth embodiment, the set value is suggested through continuous operation of the operation button 35, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the set value may be indicated through a single operation of operating the operation button 35 only once or a so-called long-press operation of maintaining the pressed state of the operation button 35 for a predetermined time.

In particular, in combination with Modified Example 2 (configuration for suggesting setting with operation button 775), when setting suggestion is performed through the long-pressing operation, the timing before the condition for executing the operation corresponding effect is established, that is, the long By adopting a configuration in which the setting suggestion is performed under the condition that the pressing operation is being performed, it is possible to prevent the change in the tactile sensation due to the setting suggestion from not being well conveyed to the player.

<Modification 6>
In the fifteenth embodiment, the set value is suggested based on the operation of the operation button 35, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the set value is suggested when the game ball shooting handle 41 is operated at a predetermined timing during the game, and the setting suggestion is avoided when the operation is not performed at the predetermined timing. It is also possible to have a configuration that

<Modification 7>
In the fifteenth embodiment, the air from the blower 750 is used to generate a tactile change, but the specific configuration for generating a tactile change is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to cause a tactile change by changing the temperature of the part touched by the player, or to cause a tactile change by vibrating the part touched by the player.

<Modification 8>
In the above fifteenth embodiment, the variable display mode (super reach) when generating a tactile change related to the setting suggestion and the variable display mode (super reach) when generating a tactile change as part of the chance-up effect ( Super reach) is the same, but it is not limited to this. For example, a part of Super Reach A to C may be configured to generate tactile changes related to setting suggestions, and other Super Reach may be configured to generate tactile changes as part of the chance-up effect. It is possible. Even in this case, since at least a part (specifically, the first half) of the variable display mode is common in the game rounds related to Super Reach, the trigger when the tactile change occurs is immediately after the start of the game round. avoiding exposure to

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described ninth embodiment and the like in that the setting value suggestion (setting suggestion) probability is corrected based on the pending status. Specifically, the configuration is different from the ninth embodiment etc. in that the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion is changed depending on the acquisition status of the hold information (the status of the ball entering the operation openings 83a and 83b). is doing. The characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the ninth embodiment, etc., and the description of the configuration common to the ninth embodiment will be omitted.

First, the information acquisition process executed by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162 as part of the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG.

(Information acquisition process)
As shown in FIG. 90, in the information acquisition process, first, in step S4101, the number N of operation pending storage stored in the pending number storage area of the holding ball storage area 432, specifically, the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b. Among them, it is determined whether or not the operation pending memory number N related to the ball-entering portion that triggered the information acquisition process is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). When the number N of operation pending memories is the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and when it is less than the upper limit value, the number N of the operation pending memories of the corresponding operation port is incremented by 1 in step S4102. , the total number of reservations (hereinafter referred to as common number of reservations CRN) stored in the number of reservations storage area in step S4103 is incremented by one.

In the subsequent step S4104, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in the above step S203 is stored in the free storage area of the reservation area RE for the operation port. It is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the common pending number CRN incremented by one in step S4102. After executing the storage process, the process advances to step S4105.

In step S4105, display update processing of the pending number display section is executed. In this embodiment, the number-of-holds display section is arranged in the main display section D of the main display unit 87 . The holding display portion is roughly divided into a holding number display portion for the upper opening and a holding number display portion for the lower opening. , the display of the reserved number display section for the upper working opening is updated, and when the destination (winning destination) of this time is the lower working opening 83b, the display of the reserved number displaying section for the lower working opening is updated.

The reserved number display unit for the upper working opening is composed of four LEDs, and is configured so that the number of lit LEDs and the reserved number related to the upper working opening 83a match. When the number of reservations related to the upper operation port 83a increases due to the winning of this time, processing is performed to increase the number of lit LEDs accordingly. Similarly, the reserved number display portion for the lower working opening is composed of four LEDs, and is configured such that the number of lit LEDs and the reserved number related to the lower working opening 83b match. When the number of reservations related to the lower operation opening 83b increases due to the winning of this time, processing is performed to increase the number of lit LEDs accordingly.

In the present embodiment, the number of reservations is displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 to facilitate confirmation of the number of reservations. Here, a supplementary description will be given of the display contents of the display screen 253a in the present embodiment.

In the display screen 253a, a reserved display area NE is set in a portion below the variable display area ME (see FIG. 94) of the symbol row. In the reservation display area NE, the same number of unit reservation display areas Da1 to Da8 as the maximum number of reservations when the game balls enter the operation openings 83a and 83b are arranged in the left and right direction. A display area Da is provided.

Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls is four when the game ball enters the upper operation opening 83a, and the maximum number of reservations is four when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 83b. In other words, a total of eight pieces of pending information are stored in order of winning to the upper working port 83a and the lower working port 83b. Corresponding to this, the number of pending display areas Da includes a first unit pending display area Da1, a second unit pending display area Da2, a third unit pending display area Da3, a fourth unit pending display area Da4, and a fifth unit pending display. An area Da5, a sixth unit reserved display area Da6, a seventh unit reserved display area Da7, and an eighth unit reserved display area Da8 are set.

For example, when the number of reservations (total number of reservations) when the game ball wins the operation openings 83a and 83b is 1, a predetermined reservation icon MP (image for reservation display) is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area Da1. ) is displayed, and when the number of reservations when the game ball wins the operation openings 83a and 83b is 4, the predetermined reservation icon MP in the first unit reservation display area Da1 to the fourth unit reservation display area Da4 is displayed.

In addition, in the pending display area NE, a pending icon MP corresponding to the game round to be executed (in progress) is arranged horizontally with the pending number display area Da (more specifically, the first unit pending display area Da1). An execution target display area Db to be displayed is provided.

When the game cycle ends and the next game cycle is started, the pending icon MP displayed in the pending number display area Da (first unit pending display area Da1) moves to the execution target display area Db, and the pending number The pending icon MP displayed in the display area Da is shifted downward.

The pending display in the pending display area NE is updated based on the pending command and the shift command output from the main controller 162, and is interlocked with the pending display in the pending number display section.

Returning to the description of FIG. 90, after executing the display update processing of the pending number display section in step S4105, confirmation processing for pending notice is executed in step S4106. Here, confirmation processing for the reservation notice will be described with reference to FIG. 91 .

(Confirmation processing for pending notice)
In the confirmation process for the reservation notice, in step S4201, the operation reservation storage number N and the common reservation number CRN stored in the reservation number storage area of the reservation ball storage area 432 are read, and the information on the reservation number is sent to the register of the MPU 402. memorize to After that, in steps S4202 to S4206, it is confirmed whether or not the reservation information acquired by the winning of this time includes the information of winning the jackpot. Specifically, first, in step S4202, information for judging a big hit among the holding information acquired in step S203 based on the current winning to the operation ports 83a and 83b, that is, the value of the acquired random number counter C1 Grasp.

In subsequent step S4203, it is determined whether or not the mode is the low-probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the low-probability mode by determining whether or not the high-probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 . In the case of the low-probability mode, the process proceeds to step S4204, and the information for judging the jackpot (the value of the hit random number counter C1) grasped in step S4202 by referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (FIG. 16) wins the jackpot. is included in the information group corresponding to . If the high-probability mode is selected, the process proceeds to step S4205, and the high-probability mode success/failure table (FIG. 17) is referred to. ) is included in the information set as jackpot winning.

After step S4204 or step S4205, the process advances to step S4206 to determine whether or not the information for judging the big win (the value of the winning random number counter C1) grasped in step S4202 corresponds to winning the big win. If it corresponds to the jackpot winning, the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 402 in step S4207, and the confirmation process for this reservation notice is terminated.

In addition, in the process of step S4207, the information for judging the jackpot type among the pending information acquired in step S203 based on the winning of this time, that is, the value of the acquired hit type counter C2 is grasped, and the distribution table is changed. Refer to it and determine the type of jackpot. The information stored in the register of the MPU 402 at step S4207 includes information relating to the type of the jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4206, the process proceeds to step S4208. In step S2408, out of the pending information acquired in step S203 based on the current winnings to the operation ports 83a and 83b, information for out-reach determination, that is, the value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

In subsequent step S4209, with reference to the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) of the ROM 403, the reach grasped in step S4208 It is specified whether the information for determination (the value of the reach random number counter C3) is included in the information set as reach winning.

After executing the process of step S4209, the process advances to step S4210 to determine whether or not the reach determination information (the value of the reach random number counter C3) grasped in step S4208 corresponds to the occurrence of reach. If reach occurrence is supported, the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 402 in step S4211, and then this confirmation process ends. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, the confirmation process is terminated as it is.

After execution of confirmation processing for suspension notice in step S4106, the process advances to step S4107 to execute suspension command setting processing. Next, the pending command setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

(Setting process of pending command)
In the hold command setting process, first, in step S4301, by determining whether or not the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 402, the check process for the immediately preceding hold notice (Fig. It is determined whether or not the information is identified as corresponding to winning a jackpot. When the jackpot information is stored, the process advances to step S4302 to set a jackpot corresponding hold command. The setting of the above commands and the setting of various commands to be described later are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in the RAM 404 . It should be noted that the jackpot corresponding hold command includes information about the jackpot type.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4301, that is, if it is determined that the big hit information is not stored in the register of MPU 402, the process proceeds to step S4303, and whether reach occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402 By determining , it is determined whether or not the information for reach determination corresponds to the occurrence of reach in the immediately preceding confirmation processing for reservation notice (FIG. 91). If the reach occurrence information is stored, the off-reach corresponding pending command is set in step S4304, and if the reach occurrence information is not stored, the complete missing corresponding pending command is set in step S4305.

When the pending command is set in steps S4302, S4304, and S4305, the variable display time is determined by referring to the value of the variable type counter CS, etc., and the information on the variable display time is stored in the pending command. . When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table is referenced in the same manner as in the variable display time setting process shown in step S808. The suspension command set in this way is transmitted to the notification/production control device 140, and the notification/production control device 140 can grasp the variable display mode of the pattern based on the suspension command. In addition, as already explained, in the case of a complete miss, the variable display time may change according to the number of reserved information stored when starting the game cycle related to the reserved information. Therefore, when setting the complete-disconnect-response hold command, the variable display time is provisionally set.

After executing the command setting process in any one of steps S4302, S4304, and S4305, in step S4306, the process of setting information on the number of pending commands to the above pending command is executed. Specifically, as this process, the information of the set pending command is configured as multi-byte information, and for some of the bits, information to the effect that it is a pending command and a pending command , and information on the number of pending items can be set.

In step S4306, first, the pending number information stored in the register of the MPU 402 in step S4201 in the immediately preceding pending notice confirmation process (FIG. 91) is read, and then the pending number in the already set pending command is read. The read reservation number information is stored in the information bit by arithmetic processing such as logical sum. As a result, for the pending command set in any one of steps S4302, S4304, and S4305, information for specifying the order of the pending information corresponding to the pending command. will be included. After executing the process of step S4306 detailed above, this pending command setting process ends.

The pending command including the information of the pending number in step S4306 is transmitted to the notification/production control device 140 by the external output process of step S501 in the next normal process (FIG. 23). In the notification/production control device 140, by receiving such a hold command, it is specified that the hold information has increased. In addition, the notification/effect control device 140 adds information for a pending notice, which will be described later, to the pending command and transmits it to the display control device 410 . The display control device 410 executes processing such as pending display and pending notice based on the received pending command.

In addition, the method of setting the pending command is determined by the pending command in the notification/production control device 140, whether or not the jackpot is won, if the jackpot is won, the jackpot type at that time, if the jackpot is not won, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, etc. In other words, it is arbitrary as long as it is possible to specify the variable display mode of the pattern. For example, a combination of a jackpot corresponding hold command, a losing reach corresponding holding command, and a complete loss corresponding holding command is set individually corresponding to each holding number, and in the holding command setting process, confirmation processing for holding notice ( It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one pending command is selected according to the confirmation result in FIG. 91).

Next, the processing related to the suspension notice executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/production control device 140 will be described. The processing related to the pending notice is roughly divided into command response processing for determining a command from the main control device 162 and pending notice effect setting processing for determining the mode of the pending notice.

(Processing for pending commands)
In the pending command handling process, when a pending command transmitted by the main controller 162 is received, a process corresponding to the information contained in the received pending command is executed. Note that the pending command handling process is executed as part of a regular process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

In the pending command handling process, first, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received. The command received by the MPU 442 of the notification/production control device 140 is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the RAM 444 . The command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and read out from the previously stored commands. The processing corresponding to the command can be executed satisfactorily. When determining whether or not a corresponding pending command has been received, it is determined whether or not a jackpot corresponding pending command has been received in the current reading target area in the command storage area 461 . The configuration for reading such commands is the same as for reading other commands such as the command for starting fluctuation.

When a pending command is received, various information included in the pending command is stored in the pending information storage area. The pending information storage area has first to eighth areas, each of which can store one piece of pending information. The hold information stored in each area is sequentially shifted to the lower area side when a shift command is received from the main controller 162, that is, when a game round is started. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the second area→the first area, the third area→the second area, the fourth area→the third area . . . the eighth area→the seventh area. The data in each area is shifted to . In the pending information storage area of the notification/production control device 140, the pending information is collectively stored in chronological order regardless of the destination of the ball, similarly to the pending ball storage area 432 (more specifically, the pending ball storage area RE) of the main control device 162. It is configured to be Specifically, the information on the number of reservations included in the command received this time is specified, and the above various information is stored in the area corresponding to the specified information on the number of reservations among the first to eighth areas.

When the aforementioned pending command is received, a pending command reception flag is set in various flag storage areas of the RAM 444, and when a shift command is received, a shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas. Each of these flags serves as a trigger for setting processing for a pending advance notice effect, which will be described below, and is erased when the setting processing for the pending advance notice effect is completed.

In the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140, setting processing for the pending notice effect is performed based on the information stored in the pending information storage area. Here, the setting processing for the pending notice effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 93 . It should be noted that the pending notice effect setting process is a process that is executed as part of a regular process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle), and on the condition that the above-described hold command or shift command is received. It is the process to be executed. In other words, in the present embodiment, the trigger for executing the pending notice effect is when the pending information is acquired along with the winning of the operation openings 83a and 83b, or when the pending information is digested along with the progress of the game. there is

(Setting processing for pending notice effect)
In the pending notice effect setting process, first, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not the pending notice effect is being performed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4401, the setting processing for this pending notice effect is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S4401, the process proceeds to step S4402.

In step S4402, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from main controller 162. FIG. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4402, lottery processing at the time of receiving the hold command is executed in step S4403, and it is determined whether or not to carry out a hold notice effect. If a negative determination is made in step S4402, the process proceeds to step S4404. In step S4404, it is determined whether a shift command has been received from main controller 162 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S4404, that is, if it is determined that neither the hold command nor the shift command has been received, the setting process for holding notice effect is terminated. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4404, lottery processing at the time of shift command reception is executed in step S4405, and it is determined whether or not to carry out a suspension notice effect.

After executing the process of step S4403 or step S4405, the process proceeds to step S4406. In step S4406, it is determined whether or not the pending notice is won. If a negative determination is made in step S4406, the setting processing for this pending notice effect is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4406, the process proceeds to step S4407. In step S4407, a hold notice flag is set in various flag storage areas of the RAM 444. FIG. The suspension notice flag set in step S4407 is erased when the suspension notice effect is completed. It should be noted that in step S4401, it is determined whether or not the suspension notice is in progress based on whether or not the suspension notice flag is set.

In the subsequent step S4408, the state of the suspension notice effect (suspension notice pattern) is determined. After that, after executing the notice effect start processing in step S4409, the setting processing for this reserved notice effect is ended.

In the present embodiment, two notice effects with different notice modes are provided as the pending notice effects. Specifically, an explicit reservation notice that clearly indicates the game round (hereinafter referred to as the applicable game round) related to the hold information (hereinafter referred to as the applicable hold or applicable hold information) that triggered the hold notice before becoming the applicable game round , and a non-explicit suspension notice that does not specify the relevant suspension and the relevant game round until the relevant game round is reached. In step S4408, one of the single announcement by the non-explicit announcement effect, the single announcement by the explicit announcement effect, and the combined announcement by the non-explicit announcement effect & the explicit announcement effect is selected. Each advance notice effect will be described below with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 94(a), the non-explicit notice effect is executed by displaying a predetermined notice pattern (more specifically, moving image) in the variable display area ME on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253. FIG. Specifically, it is executed by displaying a predetermined notice pattern during the game round that triggered the suspension notice and the game round that is executed before it.

More specifically, a predetermined advance notice pattern is displayed along with the start of the variable display of the symbols (in conjunction with the pending shift). The display of the predetermined notice pattern is continued until the game round (hereinafter referred to as the applicable game round) related to the hold information (hereinafter referred to as the relevant hold or the relevant hold information) that triggered the relevant hold notice. In this way, it is difficult to specify the relevant suspension in the non-explicit announcement effect, because it is not specified, i.e., not specified, which suspension information triggered the start of the suspension notice until at least the relevant game round. By doing so, it can be said that it is a suspension notice effect provided with the function of increasing the attention to the entire remaining suspension.

A plurality of patterns of notice patterns to be displayed are set in the non-explicit notice effect. In the present embodiment, an image of bubbles is displayed (variably displayed) as the notice pattern for the non-explicit notice effect. do. Specifically, level 1 with a small amount and small size of bubbles, level 2 with a larger amount and size of bubbles than level 1, and a larger amount and size of bubbles than level 2. Three patterns of level 3 are set.

The hidden notice effect is a fixed notice effect in which the level selected at the start of the notice effect is maintained until the end of the notice effect, and a step-up in which the above level increases as the game progresses (as the notice continues). It has a foreshadowing of the ceremony. For these distributions, the non-explicit notice effect distribution table stored in the lottery table storage area of the ROM 443 is referred to.

Regarding the non-explicit notice effect distribution table, the corresponding hold corresponds to the jackpot result, corresponds to each off super reach A to C, corresponds to each off normal reach A and B, and corresponds to complete loss It consists of As already explained, in the present embodiment, it is set so that the degree of expectation for a big hit at the time of occurrence of fluctuation display increases in the order of super reach C>super reach B>super reach A>normal reach B>normal reach A>complete failure. there is Then, in each of the above tables, the higher the expected jackpot set in various variable display modes, the higher the final level, so that the ratio of level 1 < level 2 < level 3 increases in the order (selection rate is high is configured so that Therefore, when the non-explicit notice effect corresponding to level 1 is executed, the expectation of a big hit result is higher when the non-explicit notice effect corresponding to level 1 is executed, and the non-explicit notice effect corresponding to level 3 is higher. When the performance is executed, the degree of expectation of a big winning result is further increased.

Regardless of which of the fixed announcement effect and the step-up announcement effect is selected, the higher the final level, the higher the expectation leading to the big win result. When the non-explicit notice effect is executed, it is difficult to see from the appearance whether it is a fixed type or a step-up type at the start of the notice effect, and there is an expectation that the level will rise until the notice effect ends. . When the non-explicit advance notice effect is started, the player expects the level to rise as the non-explicit advance notice effect continues over more game rounds. Therefore, by intentionally not specifying the corresponding game times, it is possible to maintain the above expectations.

Next, the explicit notice effect will be described, focusing on the differences from the non-explicit notice effect. As shown in FIG. 94(b), the explicit notice effect is executed by changing the state of the hold display in the hold display area NE of the pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a) to one corresponding to the hold notice. be. Specifically, among the pending icons MP displayed in the pending number display area Da, those corresponding to the corresponding game round (corresponding pending) are changed (in the present embodiment, the color is changed).

As for the explicit notice effect, there is a fixed notice effect that is maintained until the color of the changed pending icon MP shifts to the execution target display area Db, and a step-up type that the color changes until it shifts to the execution target display area Db. It is roughly divided into the announcement performance of.

Also in the explicit notice effect, a plurality of patterns of colors are set for the displayed pending icon MP. Specifically, three patterns of blue level 1, yellow level 2, and red level 3 are set. Note that the color of the pending icon MP that is not the target of the explicit notice effect is white.

In the explicit notice effect, if the relevant hold corresponds to the jackpot result, level 3
> Level 2 > Level 1 are more likely to be selected in this order, and if the relevant hold is removed and the result corresponds, Level 1 > Level 2 > Level 3 are more likely to be selected in this order. In other words, when the explicit notice effect is selected, the higher the final level, the higher the degree of expectation leading to a big win result.

While the above-mentioned non-explicit notice effect did not specify which hold information triggered the start of the hold notice until the corresponding game round, the explicit notice effect triggered the hold The difference is that it has a configuration that clearly indicates whether the advance notice has started. In this way, by explicitly indicating the relevant hold, it is possible to favorably improve the degree of attention to the relevant game round.

Here, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 95, a supplementary explanation will be given of the relationship between the set value and the advantage. As already explained, the player's advantage is configured to increase in the order of setting 3 < setting 2 < setting 1 . When the winning probability to the operation ports 83a and 83b is within a preset reference range, settings 1 and 2 are more advantageous to the player than the game hall, and setting 3 is more advantageous to the game hall than the player. configured to your advantage. In particular, when setting 1 and setting 2 are compared, setting 1 is more advantageous to the player than setting 2.

The setting suggestions in the present embodiment are configured so that the occurrence probability increases in the order of setting 3 < setting 2 < setting 1, and the player who expects the settings advantageous to himself pays attention to the setting suggestions and plays the game. It is assumed that Here, with reference to FIG. 96, an outline of setting suggestion in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 96(a) is a schematic diagram showing an enlarged variable display area ME of the pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a), and FIG. 96(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting value and the setting suggestion occurrence probability. be.

In the present embodiment, the image for the notice effect (image imitating bubbles) used for the notice effect (non-explicit notice effect) described above is diverted to the setting suggestion. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96(a), setting suggestions are made by displaying an image simulating the bubble under the condition that the symbol combination corresponding to the game result is displayed in a stopped state (confirmed display). executed. In the following description, the image simulating bubbles displayed during the confirmation display will be referred to as a setting suggestion image.

Whether or not to display this setting suggestion image is determined by lottery with reference to the setting suggestion lottery table stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of the ROM 443 . As shown in FIG. 96(b), the probability that the setting suggestion is executed by this lottery is setting 3
< Setting 2 < Setting 1 is set to be higher in order. Therefore, the higher the frequency of displaying the setting suggesting image (the higher the number of times), the greater the player's expectation that the set value will be advantageous.

Specifically, the probability that the setting suggestion image is displayed when setting 3 is about 1%, the probability that the setting suggestion image is displayed when setting 2 is about 1.5%, and setting 1 is about 1.5%. In this case, the probability that the setting suggestion image is displayed is about 2%. Considering that the lottery for setting suggestions is executed for each game round, if the number of game rounds that have been executed is about 500, the setting suggestion image is displayed about 10 times in setting 1, and in setting 2. The number of times the setting suggesting image is displayed at setting 3 is about 7.5 times, and the number of times the setting suggesting image is displayed at setting 3 is about 5 times. On the other hand, when the game has been executed about 2000 times, the setting suggesting image is displayed about 40 times with the setting 1, the setting suggesting image is displayed about 30 times with the setting 2, and so on. The number of times the setting suggestion image is displayed in setting 3 is about 20 times. In other words, it takes a certain amount of time to improve the set value guessing system.

Here, the winning probabilities to the operation ports 83a and 83b may vary for the following various reasons. That is, long-term factors such as the deformation of the game nail 93 due to repeated collisions of the game ball with the game nail 93, individual differences during manufacture of the game machine, and deformation of the game nail 93 during maintenance work such as cleaning. , and short-term factors such as temporary winning biases cause differences in winning probability. Since the setting suggestion lottery is triggered by the execution of the game round (winning at the operation ports 83a and 83b), there is a possibility that the occurrence probability of the setting suggestion may vary due to the variation in the winning probability.

One of the features of the present embodiment is that the suggestion probability of the set value is changed according to the winning state of the game ball into the operating hole 83a. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 97, the above-described reference range is set for the winning probability to the operation opening 83a. The suggestion probability of is changed. In this embodiment, the game ball interval time is 0.6 sec, and about 100 game balls are shot in one minute. The above reference range is a design value that defines the number of game balls that enter the operation opening 83a among the game balls that are shot in one minute.

The set value suggestion setting process executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/production control device 140 will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting suggestion setting process is a process executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/production control device 140 as part of the regular process (variation start process: see FIG. 31).

(setting process for setting value suggestion)
In the set value suggestion setting process, first, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, this setting value suggestion setting process is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, setting suggestions are avoided during the high-frequency support mode. Also during the open/close execution mode, the setting suggestion is avoided as in the high-frequency support mode because the fluctuation start processing is not executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4501, the process advances to step S4502. In step S4502, it is determined whether or not the above-described advance notice effect is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the holding notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444 . If an affirmative determination is made in step S4502, this setting value suggestion setting process is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, when the pending advance notice effect is being executed, the setting suggestion is avoided.

If a negative determination is made in step S4502, the process advances to step S4503. In step S4503, it is determined whether or not the pending information currently stored includes information corresponding to the result of the big win. If a negative determination is made in step S403, the process proceeds to step S4504. In step S4504, the state of winning a prize to the operation opening 83a is specified. In the present embodiment, the number of pending information acquisitions (the number of wins to the operation opening 83a) is stored for each cycle with one minute as one cycle. If it is the timing after the cycle has passed, the number of acquisitions (the number of prizes won) this time is specified, and the number of acquisitions (the number of wins) in the previous cycle is specified at the timing before one cycle has passed. In the following description, one minute is also referred to as "unit time".

In subsequent step S4505, it is determined whether or not the number of acquisitions of pending information per unit time is within a reference range. If a negative determination is made in step S4505, that is, if it is out of the reference range, probability correction processing is executed in step S4506.

In the probability correction process, first, the current set value is confirmed. When the setting value is setting 1 or setting 2, the first correction process is executed, and when the setting value is setting 3, the second correction process is executed.

In the first correction process, among the lottery tables provided for each set value, the lottery table to be referred to in the lottery process to be described later is switched from the lottery table corresponding to the reference range to the lottery table corresponding to the outside of the reference range. Thereby, the winning probability is lowered when the number of acquisitions of the pending information exceeds the upper limit of the reference range, and the winning probability is raised when the number of acquisitions of the holding information is below the lower limit of the reference range.

Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 99, when the number of pending information acquisitions exceeds the upper limit, as the deviation from the upper limit increases, the winning probability reaches the lower limit of the winning probability. When the number of pending information acquisitions is below the lower limit, the winning probability rises to the upper limit of the winning probability as the deviation from the lower limit increases. However, even if the probability is changed like this, the lower limit of the winning probability in setting 1 is higher than the upper limit of winning probability in setting 2, and the lower limit of the winning probability in setting 2 is set to setting 3. is higher than the winning probability (upper limit) in , and a difference in winning probability is ensured for each set value.

On the other hand, in the second correction process, the table to be referred to is unified regardless of the reference range, and the winning probability is constant even if the reference range is not met.

Returning to the description of FIG. 98, when the affirmative determination is made in step S4503, and when the affirmative determination is made in step S4505, after executing the processing of step S4506, the process advances to step S4507 to execute setting suggestion lottery processing.

If the lottery process in step S4507 results in non-winning, this setting suggestion setting process ends. If the lottery is won in step S4507, the process proceeds to step S4509. In step S4509, a setting suggestion flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444, and this setting suggestion setting processing is terminated.

When the setting suggestion flag is set in the setting suggestion setting process (see FIG. 30), the symbol combination corresponding to the game result is stopped and displayed (during confirmation display). display a setting suggestion image.

According to the 16th embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

Generally, a flow path is formed by arranging game parts such as game pegs in the game area. Variation may occur in ball frequency and the like. For example, if the number of balls entering the game is constant to some extent, the game progresses smoothly and dissatisfaction with the game is reduced. There is a concern that dissatisfaction will increase and the willingness to play will likely decrease. A decrease in the player's desire to play in this way is not preferable because it hinders efforts to improve the operation rate of the gaming machine. Here, as shown in the present embodiment, in a gaming machine having a setting change function, it is expected that the degree of attention to the game will be improved by suggesting setting values. By using such a configuration, if the suggestion probability is changed according to the ball entry situation (for example, if the suggestion probability is raised when the ball entry is not successful), the player's motivation to play decreases. can be suitably suppressed, and the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

It is preferable to change the setting suggestion probability in accordance with the state of ball entry in order to suppress the player's desire to play. However, there is a concern that the increase in the control load in monitoring the state of entering a ball hinders the smooth progress of the game when performing such an adjustment. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if a configuration is adopted in which the ball-entering situation is specified based on the number of stored hold information, the ball-entering situation can be easily monitored, resulting in the above-mentioned inconvenience. can be suitably suppressed.

When the number of balls entered into the operation opening 83a is less than the assumption (reference value) under the circumstances where the set values (setting 1 to setting 2 in the present embodiment) are comparatively advantageous to the player. is adjusted so that the suggested probability of the setting value is high. In this way, by increasing the chances that the set value is suggested in a situation where the player's willingness to play tends to decline, the effect of suppressing the decline in the willingness to play can be exhibited favorably.

When the number of balls entered into the operation opening 83a is larger than expected (reference) under the condition that the set values (setting 1 to setting 2 in the present embodiment) are comparatively advantageous to the player. is adjusted so that the suggested probability of the set value is low. In this way, by reducing the chances of suggesting a set value in a situation where the player's desire to play is unlikely to decline, even if the chances of suggesting a set value increase when, for example, the number of balls entered is small, overall Therefore, it is possible to suppress excessive suggestions of set values when the user sees the setting value. It should be noted that, when balls are constantly entered to some extent, the game progresses smoothly, and the player's motivation to play is less likely to decrease. Therefore, in such a situation, it is meaningful to have a configuration that does not increase the occurrence probability of suggestions.

Actively informing the player that the set value is unfavorable is a factor in lowering the player's willingness to play. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, when the set value is set to 3, the correction of the occurrence probability is avoided even if the ball entry situation is below the reference. By doing so, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

When the stored reservation information includes information corresponding to the result of the big win, the player's willingness to play is less likely to decrease even if the setting suggestion probability is not changed. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by specifying the lottery result in advance and determining whether or not to change the occurrence probability based on the result.

For example, when an effect that can be expected to win a jackpot is executed, the degree of attention to the game increases. Under such circumstances, it is assumed that the decline in motivation to play can be suppressed without intentionally changing the occurrence probability. Therefore, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by adopting a configuration in which the occurrence probability of suggestion is not changed when such a presentation is coming up.

In the high-frequency support mode with a high ball-entering frequency, the ball entering the working opening occurs with a certain frequency. For this reason, even if the frequency of hitting the ball decreases due to individual differences, bias, etc., it is assumed that this is unlikely to be a factor that causes a decrease in motivation to play. Therefore, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by adopting a configuration in which the probability of occurrence can be changed in the low-frequency support mode and a configuration in which the probability of occurrence is not changed in the high-frequency support mode.

<Modification 1>
In the sixteenth embodiment, the notification/production control device 140 is configured to store the change in the number of holds over time for each cycle, and to determine the setting suggestion probability based on the change. , the specific configuration for determining the setting suggestion probability in consideration of the winning status is not limited to this. For example, when the monitoring device 600 monitors the winning, the information stored in the monitoring device 600 (the number of game balls shot and the number of balls entered) is read, and based on the winning probability calculated from the information, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which setting suggestion probabilities are determined.

<Modification 2>
In the sixteenth embodiment, the set value suggestion probability is determined based on the state of the ball entering the operating port 83a. A configuration may be adopted in which the suggested probability of the set value is determined based on the state of the ball entering the general winning hole 81 or the variable winning device 82).

<Modification 3>
In the 16th embodiment, the set value suggestion probability (winning probability) is corrected according to the number of pending information acquired within a unit time (1 minute), but this is changed as follows. You may That is, a first correction value for correcting the winning probability according to the number of pending information acquired within a first predetermined time (for example, one minute), and a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time (for example, one hour). The winning probability may be corrected by using a second correction value for correcting the winning probability according to the number of pieces of pending information. That is, the first correction value when the probability of entering the ball is temporarily decreased/increased and the second correction value when the probability of entering the ball is constantly low/high may be used together. The ball-entering probability described above is affected by individual differences and the like of gaming machines and temporary variations. Therefore, by using the above-mentioned two correction values together (for example, actual suggestion probability = standard suggestion probability x first correction value x second correction value), a suggestion probability suitable for each situation can be obtained. .

<Modification 4>
In the sixteenth embodiment described above, the more the number of acquisitions of pending information deviates from the reference range, the greater the deviation of the set value suggestion probability (winning probability) from the reference value. not something. As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 100(a), the number of acquisitions of pending information may be divided into a plurality of ranges, and a correction value may be set for each range.

<Modification 5>
In the sixteenth embodiment described above, each setting value is distinguished so that the suggestion probability (winning probability) of each setting value does not overlap, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 100(b), it is possible to have a configuration in which the winning probabilities partially overlap with a plurality of set values.

<Modification 6>
It is also possible to subdivide the setting suggestion lottery table to be referred to when the number of pending information acquisitions is within the reference range, depending on the number of pending information acquisitions.

<Seventeenth Embodiment>
This embodiment is the same as the ninth embodiment and the like in terms of suggesting setting values (setting suggestions) to the player, but the specific configuration related to the setting suggestion is the same as that of the ninth embodiment. etc. In the following, the configuration related to setting suggestions in the present embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the ninth embodiment. Note that description of the same configuration as in the ninth embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 101(a), this embodiment differs from the ninth embodiment and the like in the configuration of the game board unit 80 (game area forming body 80a). Specifically, an operating port unit 83 having an upper operating port 83a and a lower operating port 83b is provided at the lower center of the game area PE.

As shown in FIG. 101(b), the operation port unit 83 is formed with a guide passage 83c that guides the game balls that have flowed into the upper operation port 83a to a recovery passage provided on the back side of the game area forming body 80a. ing. The guide passage 83c is branched into a first branch passage 83d and a second branch passage 83e at an intermediate position.

A distribution means 83g for alternately distributing game balls reaching the branch position to the first branch passage 83d and the second branch passage 83e is provided at the branch position of the guide passage 83c. The sorting means 83g can be switched between a first guide state in which the game ball that has reached the branch position is guided to the first branch passage 83d and a second guide state in which the game ball is guided to the second branch passage 83e. This sorting means 83g is configured to switch from one guide state to the other guide state based on the guide of the game ball. Therefore, the game balls that have flowed into the upper working port 83a are distributed to the first branch passage 83d/second branch passage 83e in sequence.

The lower working port 83b is connected to the second branch passage 83e through the communication passage 83f, and the game ball flowing into the lower working port 83b directly flows into the second branch passage 83e. In other words, the game ball that has flowed into the upper working port 83a can flow into both branch passages 83d and 83e, while the game ball that has flowed into the lower working port 83b flows only into the second branch passage 83e.

A detection sensor 811c for detecting a game ball is provided in the first branch passage 83d (hereinafter also referred to as the first ball entering portion 83d), and in the second branch passage 83e (hereinafter also referred to as the second ball entering portion 83e) A detection sensor 811d for detecting a game ball is arranged at a position downstream of the communicating portion of the communication passage 83f. These detection sensors 811c, 811d are connected to a main controller, and the main controller determines whether the ball enters the branch passages 83d, 83e, that is, the ball entering section, based on detection information (detection signals) from the detection sensors 811c, 811d. The presence or absence of prizes for 83d and 83e is grasped.

Note that the main controller 162 (more specifically, the reserved ball storage area 432) in this embodiment includes a reserved area Rx formed by integrating the reserved areas Ra and Rb shown in the first embodiment, and an execution area. AE is provided. A first area Rx1 to an eighth area Rx8 are provided in the holding area Rx, and the holding information obtained by winning the first ball entering section 83d and the second ball entering section 83e is stored in the first area Rx1 to the eighth area Rx8. It is configured to be stored in 8 areas Rx8 in order of winning.

Next, the main display portion D of the main display unit 87 will be described with reference to FIG. 101(c). The main display portion D includes a first ball-entering portion display portion 843 for displaying the lottery result based on the winning of the first ball-entering portion 83d, and a lottery performed based on the winning of the second ball-entering portion 83e. and a second ball entering section display section 844 for displaying the result.

In the display section 843 for the first ball-entering section 843, the winning of the first ball-entering section 83d triggers the variable display of the pattern, and the stopping result of the variable display is based on the winning of the first ball-entering section 83d. The results of the internal lottery conducted by When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the first ball-entering section 83d is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the display section 843 for the first ball-entering section stops the variable display. , and after a predetermined picture is displayed as a result of the stoppage, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

In the display section 844 for the second ball-entering section 844, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the second ball-entering section 83e as a trigger, and the result of stopping the variable display is based on the winning of the second ball-entering section 83e. The results of the internal lottery conducted by When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the second ball entering portion 83e is a winning result corresponding to a big win or a special win, the variable display is stopped in the second ball entering portion display portion 844 and stopped. After a predetermined pattern is displayed as a result, the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode according to the result.

Here, based on the winning of one of the ball entry portions 83d and 83e, the corresponding display portions 843 and 844 for the ball entry portion start variable display, display a predetermined stop result, and stop the variable display. (Confirmed display) corresponds to one game cycle. However, one game round is not limited to the above contents. In the configuration where the variable display is performed in the display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, and the variable display is stopped (confirmed display) while the predetermined stop result is displayed. It may be one game time.

In this embodiment, the number of times the game ball passes through the first ball entering portion 83d and the second ball entering portion 83e is held up to four times (total up to eight). The main display portion D of the unit 87 is provided with a first reserved number display portion 845 and a second reserved number display portion 846 for individually displaying the number of reserved balls of the entering portions 83d and 83e.

The main display portion D of the main display unit 87 is also provided with a through-gate display portion 847 for displaying the lottery result based on the winning of the through-gate 84, in addition to the ball-entering portion display portions 843 and 844. . In the through-gate display unit 847, the winning of the through-gate 84 triggers the variable display of the pattern, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through-gate 84 is displayed. clarified. When the result of the internal lottery (support lottery) based on the prize winning to the through gate 84 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the power open state, the through gate display unit 847 displays a predetermined stop result. After the variable display is stopped, the state shifts to the electrical open state. In the electric operation open state, the electric accessory 91 provided in the operation port unit 83 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In this embodiment, by displaying the number of reservations on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 in conjunction with the display of the number of reservations 845 and 846 of the main display section D, when confirming the number of reservations Consideration is given to the convenience of the player. An outline of the pending display on the symbol display device 253 will be described below with reference to FIG.

In the display screen 253a, a reserved display area NE is set in a portion below the variable display area ME having the variable display area of the upper symbol row, the variable display area of the middle symbol, and the variable display area of the lower symbol. ing. In the holding display area NE, the same number of unit holding display areas Da1 to Da8 as the maximum holding number when the game ball wins the operation opening 83a, 83b (more specifically, when entering the ball entering portion 83d, 83e) There is provided a reserved number display area Da that is partitioned so that are aligned in the left and right direction.

Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls is four when a game ball enters the first ball entering section 83d, and the maximum number of reserved balls is four when the game ball enters the second ball entering section 83e. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a total of eight pieces of hold information are stored in the order of winning to the first ball entering portion 83d and the second ball entering portion 83e. . Corresponding to this, the number of pending display areas Da includes a first unit pending display area Da1, a second unit pending display area Da2, a third unit pending display area Da3, a fourth unit pending display area Da4, and a fifth unit pending display. An area Da5, a sixth unit reserved display area Da6, a seventh unit reserved display area Da7, and an eighth unit reserved display area Da8 are set. A pending icon MP is displayed as a predetermined pending display image in these unit pending display areas.

For example, when the number of reservations is 0 when the game ball wins the operation openings 83a and 83b, that is, when the number of reservations (total number of reservations) becomes 1 due to this winning, the first unit reservation display area Da1 Only the hold icon MP is displayed. When the number of reservations is 4 by winning the operation ports 83a and 83b, the reservation icon MP is displayed in the first unit reservation display area Da1 to the fourth unit reservation display area Da4. It's becoming Note that FIG. 102 illustrates a case where the number of pending items is three.

In addition, in the pending display area NE, a pending icon MP corresponding to the game round to be executed (in progress) is arranged horizontally with the pending number display area Da (more specifically, the first unit pending display area Da1). An execution target display area Db to be displayed is provided. In the present embodiment, the execution target display area Db is arranged on the left side of the pending number display area Da, but their positional relationship and the like are arbitrary. For example, the execution target display area Db may be arranged on the right side of the pending number display area Da.

When the game cycle ends and the next game cycle is started, the pending icon MP displayed in the pending number display area Da (more specifically, the first unit pending display area Da1) is shifted to the execution target display area Db ( move). When there are other pending icons MP being displayed in the pending number display area Da, these pending icons MP are displayed in the unit pending display area near (adjacent to) the execution target display area Db along with the shift. shift to For convenience of explanation, the side closer to the execution target display area Db is hereinafter referred to as the "downstream side", and the side opposite to the execution target display area Db is referred to as the "upstream side".

Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 103, a supplementary description will be given of the electrical configuration of the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 410. FIG.

An MPU 442 is mounted on a notification/production control board 441 provided in the notification/production control device 140 . The MPU 442 includes a ROM 443 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 442, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 443. A RAM 444 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 443 and the RAM 444 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 442, and they may be individually integrated into chips. This also applies to MPUs of other control devices.

The MPU 442 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 442, and commands for game round control (information for game round control) such as the variation start command, the type command, and the variation end command, which have already been described, are sent from the main control device 162. receive. Also, it receives pending display control commands (suspended display control information) such as shift commands and pending commands, and open/close execution mode commands (open/close execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

The output side of the MPU 442 is connected to the display lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 and the display control device 410, as already described. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification/production control device 140 are transmitted to the display control device 410 while maintaining the information form.

The display control device 410 includes a display control board 471 on which an MPU 472, which is an element in which a program ROM 473 and a work RAM 474 are integrated, a video display processor (VDP) 475, a character ROM 476, and a video RAM 477 are mounted. It has It is not essential that the program ROM 473 and the work RAM 474 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 472, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/production control device 140 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 475 (specifically to generate an internal command for the VDP 475). More specifically, in the MPU 472, based on the command transmitted from the notification/production control device 140, the pattern display device 253 executes a process of specifying a variation display pattern of each game round, and a process related to a pending notice, which will be described later. is executed, and drawing processing is executed for the VDP 475 in accordance with the processing result. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 253 a of the pattern display device 253 .

The program ROM 473 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 472 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background images. The work RAM 474 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 472 executes various programs. These work data and flags are stored in each area of the work RAM 474 .

The VDP 475 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 253 . Since the VDP 475 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 475 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 472 and the video RAM 477 to intervene in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 476 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 253 . The character ROM 476 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

In the character ROM 476, image data (suspended icon MP) to be displayed in the suspended display area NE of the pattern display device 253 and image data for the division frame to be displayed in the execution target display area Db are stored as part of the above data. and an image data storage area for notice effect 482 for storing image data to be displayed when the notice effect described later is executed are provided. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 476 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 476 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 476 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 473 .

The video RAM 477 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 253, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 477, the display content of the pattern display device 253 is changed. The video RAM 477 is provided with a suspension display area 491 and an execution display area 492 corresponding to the suspension display area NE.

In the reservation display area 491, first to eighth unit areas are set so as to correspond one-to-one with the first area Ra1 to eighth area Ra8 in the reservation area RE for the operating port. In the unit pending display areas Da1 to Da8 of the pending number display area Da on the display screen 253a, the pending icon MP is displayed according to the pending display information (data) written in each unit area. In the unit reserved display areas Da1 to Da8 corresponding to unit areas in which no data is set, no image is displayed or the background image on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 is displayed.

The execution display area 492 corresponds to the execution area AE. In the execution target display area Db on the display screen 253a, the suspension icon MP is displayed according to the data written in the execution display area 492. FIG. When the data is not set, the background image on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 is displayed.

As described above, the pending display on the pattern display device 253 is interlocked with the display of the pending number display portions 845 and 846 of the main display unit 87, and is controlled by the pending command and the shift command transmitted from the main control device 162. there is Here, with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 104 to 106, the pending command and shift command corresponding processing executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140 will be described. The pending command and shift command handling processing are included in the command handling processing executed as part of the regular processing.

(Processing for pending command and shift command)
As shown in FIG. 104, in the pending command and shift command handling processing, a pending notice effect processing is executed in step S4601, a setting suggestion processing is executed in step S4602, and determination is made in steps S4601 and S4602. After adding the received various information to the hold command and shift command in step S4603, the hold command or shift command is transferred to the display control device 410 in step S4604.

(Processing for suspension notice effect)
As shown in FIG. 105, in the suspension notice effect processing in step S4601, first, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not a suspension command has been received from the main controller 162. FIG. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a pending command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444 . If an affirmative determination is made in step S4601, the process advances to step S4602 to determine whether or not the special display mode is being set. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a normal display mode and a special display mode are provided as the display mode of the number of reservations in the pattern display device 253. Among them, when the special display mode is set makes an affirmative determination in step S4702, and terminates this suspension notice effect processing as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S4702, the process proceeds to step S4703.

In step S4703, lottery processing is executed when a hold command is received. In the lottery process related to the hold command, the lottery target of the hold notice is limited to the hold information newly added this time. That is, a holding notice lottery is performed based on the information stored in the area corresponding to the holding command received this time among the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8 provided in the holding information storage area 467 of the RAM 444. . In this lottery, whether or not the game round related to the hold information is a big hit from the stored information, whether or not the ready-to-win display is performed, and if the ready-to-win display is performed, the pattern is grasped, and according to it. It is based on the lottery table and the value of the lottery counter area 463 .

In the lottery table storage area of the ROM 443, a lottery table for big hits, a lottery table for loss normal reach A, a lottery table for loss normal reach B, and a lottery table for loss super reach A are stored in the lottery table storage area of the ROM 443. , a lottery table for losing super reach B, a lottery table for losing super reach C, and a lottery table for complete losing are stored.

These various tables are set so that the winning probability increases in the order of jackpot>super reach C>super reach B>super reach A>normal reach B>normal reach A>complete loss.

Returning to the description of step S4701, if a negative determination is made in step S4701, that is, if it is determined that the hold command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S4704. In step S4704, it is determined whether a shift command has been received from main controller 162 or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444 . If a negative determination is made in step S4704, that is, if neither the hold command nor the shift command has been received, this hold notice effect setting process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4704, lottery processing upon receipt of a shift command is executed in step S4705.

In the lottery process related to the shift command, the lottery target of the pending notice is all the pending information remaining after the shift. That is, lottery for whether or not to hold advance notice is performed based on all the information stored in the first area Rc1 to eighth area Rc8 provided in the holding information storage area 467 of the RAM 444 . This lottery is individually performed for each piece of information stored. The lottery order (priority order) is defined to be the newest order (eighth area Rc8→seventh area Rc7→ . . . first area Rc1). For example, when the common pending number CRN is "2", a lottery is first performed based on the information stored in the second area Rc2, and if the lottery is not won, the information stored in the first area Rc1. A lottery will be held based on

Especially in the present embodiment, by increasing the value of the common pending number CRN, the variable display time in the game round corresponding to the complete loss is shortened. Therefore, by giving priority to the new hold information as a lottery target as described above, it is possible to suitably ensure the period of the notice effect when the hold notice is executed. The variable display time is set to be shorter as the number of pending information stored increases. is configured to increase the degree of time reduction in view of the fact that the hold information is not acquired even if a ball is newly entered into the operating port 83a.

Regarding the lottery method, in the same way as when the hold command is received, whether or not the game round related to the hold information is a jackpot from the stored information, whether or not the ready-to-win display is performed, and when the ready-to-win display is performed Then, the pattern is grasped, and the lottery table and the value of the lottery counter area 463 corresponding to it are used.

In the lottery table storage area of the ROM 443, a lottery table for big hits, a lottery table for loss normal reach A, a lottery table for loss normal reach B, and a lottery table for loss super reach A are stored in the lottery table storage area of the ROM 443 when a shift command is received. , a lottery table for losing super reach B, a lottery table for losing super reach C, and a lottery table for complete losing are stored.

These various tables are set so that the winning probability increases in the order of jackpot>super reach C>super reach B>super reach A>normal reach B>normal reach A>complete loss. However, the lottery table group for receiving the shift command is set so that the probability of winning with a pending notice is low when compared with the group of lottery tables for receiving the hold command. For example, when the lottery tables for big wins are compared, the winning probability when referring to the lottery table for receiving the shift command is set lower than the winning probability when referring to the lottery table for when receiving the hold command.

However, if the value of the common pending number CRN (holding number) is less than a predetermined number ("4" in this embodiment), the overall winning expectation is lower than when the pending command is received, but the common pending When the value of the number CRN (holding number) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the winning expectation as a whole is set to exceed that at the time of receiving the holding command.

In this embodiment, in particular, when the value of the common number of reservations CRN exceeds the predetermined number ("4"), the degree of reduction in the variable display time in the game round corresponding to the complete loss is determined by the value of the common number of reservations CRN. It becomes larger than the case of the predetermined number (“4”) or less. In this case, although it is possible to speed up the progress of the game, there is a concern that the monotony of the progress of the game will become conspicuous. In this respect, with the above configuration, when the number of holds increases and the shortening of the variable display time becomes noticeable, the notice of hold is more likely to occur. This is preferable in terms of speeding up the progress of the game and suppressing a decrease in attention to the game.

After executing the lottery process in step S4703 or step S4705, the process proceeds to step S4706. In step S4706, it is determined whether or not the condition for execution of the pending advance notice effect has been established in those lottery processes. When negative determination is made in step S4706, ie, when non-winning is made in steps S4703 and S4705, this setting processing for reservation notice effect is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S4706, the process of determining the pending notice effect pattern is executed in the following step S4707, and after storing the pending notice effect pattern determined in the following step S4708, the present pending notice effect end the setting process.

If it is determined to perform a pending notice effect, based on the information stored in step S4708, until the game round related to the relevant pending information is executed, the pending information is removed from the lottery target of the pending notice effect. get off. Then, the stored information is erased when the relevant pending information moves to the execution area.

Here, the types of pending notice effects (specifically, notice effects executed in the pending display area NE) will be described.

(Type of suspension notice effect)
All of the suspension notice effects are common in that they are configured to suggest the degree of expectation of a big win result by changing the display mode of the suspension icon MP displayed in the suspension display area NE. Four colors of white, blue, yellow, and red are set for the display mode (color) of the pending icon MP. Among these colors, white is the standard, and when the suspension notice effect is executed, the suspension icon MP becomes other colors (blue, yellow, red).

The colors of the pending icon MP are set so that the degree of expectation of a big win result increases in the order of white<blue<yellow<red. Specifically, when a hold notice is executed with a hold icon MP corresponding to a game round that results in a big hit, there is a high possibility that white < blue < yellow < red will be selected in this order. On the other hand, when the suspension notice is executed with the suspension icon MP corresponding to the game round resulting in the loss, there is a high possibility that red<yellow<blue<white will be selected in this order.

This pending notice effect is roughly classified into a first notice effect, which is a fixed notice effect, and a second notice effect, which is a step-up notice effect, depending on the display mode (color change) of the hold icon MP. be done. In the first kind of notice effect, after the color of the pending icon MP is changed, the color of the pending icon is maintained until the corresponding game round (until the execution target display area Db is reached). On the other hand, in the second kind of notice effect, the color of the pending icon MP changes multiple times as the game progresses. For example, even if the final color to be changed is red, it is first changed to a color with a lower degree of expectation (blue or yellow), and then at the timing when the pending icon MP shifts, the color is changed to a more anticipated color. Step up (promote) to a higher color with a higher degree. By using these two types of pending notice effects together, even if the color has a low degree of expectation, there is a possibility that the color will change to a color with a high degree of expectation by the time the corresponding game cycle is reached. This suppresses an early decrease in the degree of attention to the pending advance notice effect.

The color of the pending icon MP may be changed not only in the pending number display area Da but also when moving to the execution target display area Db. For example, when the yellow pending icon MP in the pending number display area Da moves to the execution target display area Db, the pending icon MP is changed to red, or the pending icon MP is changed to white in the pending number display area Da. It is also possible to change the color of the pending icon MP to another color (blue, yellow, red) when the pending icon MP moves to the execution target display area Db.

In the present embodiment, the information provided to the player in the reserved display area NE includes not only the number of game balls, the degree of expectation such as success or failure, but also information related to suggested setting values. Specifically, the setting suggestion may be performed by switching the pending display mode to the special display mode. Here, the setting suggestion processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting suggestion processing is executed on the condition that the reserved display mode in the reserved display area NE is the normal display mode.

(Setting suggestion processing)
In the setting suggestion process, first, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not a hold child command has been received from the main controller 162. FIG. If the pending command has not been received, a negative determination is made in step S4801, and this setting suggestion processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4801, the process advances to step S4802. In step S4802, it is determined whether or not the number of stored pending information items has reached a predetermined number (seven pieces in this embodiment) as a result of adding the pending information items with the current pending command. If a negative determination is made in step S4802, this setting suggestion processing ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4802, the process proceeds to step S4803. In step S4803, it is determined whether or not the game round currently in progress does not correspond to the ready-to-win display. If a negative determination is made in step S4803, that is, if the ready-to-reach display is supported, this setting suggestion processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4803, that is, if reach display is not supported, the process proceeds to step S4804.

In step S4804, it is determined whether or not the remaining time in the current game cycle, more specifically, the remaining variable display time is longer than a predetermined time. Although the details will be described later, a certain amount of time is required for switching the display mode (more specifically, switching from the normal display mode to the special display mode) in the present embodiment, and the predetermined time is longer than the required time. is also defined to be slightly longer. If a negative determination is made in step S4804, this setting suggestion processing ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4804, the process advances to step S4805. In step S4805, it is determined whether or not the suspension notice effect is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a holding notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444 . If the suspension notice effect is being performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S4805, and the present setting suggestion processing ends. On the other hand, if the suspension notice effect is not being performed, a negative determination is made in step S4805 and the process proceeds to step S4806.

In step S4806, special display mode transition lottery processing is executed to determine by lottery whether or not to shift the above-described suspended display mode from the normal display mode to the special display mode. Specifically, the special display mode transition lottery table stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of the ROM 443 and the value of the special display mode transition lottery counter provided in the lottery counter area 463 of the RAM 444 are referred to. to determine whether to shift to the special display mode. If the lottery process in step S4806 wins the transition to the special display mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S4807 and the process proceeds to step S4808.

In step S4808, setting suggestion lottery processing is executed to determine by lottery whether or not to perform setting suggestion. Specifically, the setting suggestion lottery table stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of the ROM 443 and the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter provided in the lottery counter area 463 of the RAM 444 are referenced. Decide whether or not to do so. If the setting suggestion is won in the lottery process of step S4808, an affirmative determination is made in step S4809, and the process proceeds to step S4810.

In step S4810, display setting processing corresponding to setting suggestions is executed. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, after shifting to the special display mode, a number corresponding to the setting suggestion is displayed by a combination of the pending icons MP displayed in the pending number display area Da. there is In the display setting process corresponding to the setting suggestion, for the pending number display area Da whose form has changed due to the transition to the special display mode, the pending icons MP displayed in the unit pending display areas Da1 to Da7 are sequentially transferred to the execution target display area Db. Whether or not to move is set in the order in which the numbers corresponding to the setting suggestions are formed in the process of decreasing the number of pending icons MP.

On the other hand, if the setting suggestion is not won in the lottery in step S4808, a negative determination is made in step S4809 and the process proceeds to step S4811.

In step S4811, display setting processing for setting suggestion incompatibility is executed. In the display setting process that does not correspond to the setting suggestion, the execution target display area Db The update pattern of the pending display is determined so that the number corresponding to the setting suggestion is not formed in the process of decreasing the pending icon MP.

After executing the display setting processing in steps S4810 and S4811, the process advances to step S4812 to execute processing for shifting to the special display mode. In the transition processing to the special display mode, output of sound effects corresponding to the transition to the special display mode from the speaker section 29 is started, and a special display mode transition flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444 . In the process of step S4603, based on the fact that the special display mode transition flag is stored, information instructing transition to the special display mode is added to the pending command to be transmitted (transferred) to the display control device 410. . Note that the special display mode transition flag is erased when the game cycle related to the hold information that triggered the transition to the special display mode ends.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 performs display control of the pending display area NE and the like based on the pending command and the shift command received from the main control device 162 via the notification/production control device 140 . The pending display control command handling process executed by the MPU 472 of the display control device 410 will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 107 . The pending display control command handling process is a process that is executed as part of a regular process (command handling process) activated at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment).

(Command response processing for hold display control)
In the pending display control command corresponding processing, first, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received from the notification/production control device 140. FIG. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4901, the process advances to step S4902. In step S 4902 , 1 is added to the value of the pending number counter (holding storage number SN) provided in various counter areas of the work RAM 474 .

After executing the counter updating process in step S4902, the process proceeds to step S4903. An additional flag is set in the work RAM 474 in step S4903. In the pending display control process, which will be described later, a process of adding a pending icon MP to the pending number display area Da is performed based on this addition flag.

In the subsequent step S4904, it is determined whether or not the current pending command includes information instructing transition to the special display mode. If a negative determination is made in step S4904, the command response processing for holding display control ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4904, the process advances to step S4905. The hold display update pattern is identified from the information included in the hold command received this time.

After that, in step S4906, a transition flag to the special display mode is set in various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474, and this pending display control command handling process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S4901, if a negative determination is made in step S4901, that is, if a hold command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S4907. In step S4907, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received from the notification/production control device 140. If a negative determination is made in step S4907, the command response processing for holding display control ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4907, the process advances to step S4908. In step S4908, 1 is subtracted from the value of the pending number counter (holding storage number SN) provided in various counter areas of the work RAM 474. FIG.

After executing the counter update process in step S4908, the process advances to step S4909. A shift flag is set in the work RAM 474 in step S4909. In the pending display control process, which will be described later, the process of shifting the pending icon MP based on this shift flag is performed.

In the following step S4910, it is determined whether or not the current shift command includes information instructing a transition to the normal display mode. If a negative determination is made in step S4910, this command handling process for controlling hold display ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4910, the process advances to step S4911 to set a transition flag to the normal display mode in various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474, and terminates this pending display control command handling process.

Next, the pending display control process executed as part of the regular process by the MPU 472 of the display control device 410 will be described. The pending display control process includes display mode switching processing (step S5001) for switching display modes, and pending display processing (step S5002) for moving/adding/deleting pending icons (see FIG. 5). 108(a)). The display mode switching process will be described below with reference to FIG. 108(b).

(Display mode switching process)
In the display mode switching process, first, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the pending display mode is the special display mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special display mode flag is stored in various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474 . If a negative determination is made in step S5101, that is, if the normal display mode is selected, the process proceeds to step S5102.

In step S5102, it is determined whether or not a transition flag to the special display mode is stored in various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474. FIG. If a negative determination is made in step S5102, the present display mode switching process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5102, the process proceeds to step S5103. In step S5103, it is determined whether or not it is time to shift to the special display mode. If a negative determination is made in step S5103, the present display mode switching process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the process proceeds to step S5104.

In step S5104, switching processing to the special display form is executed. Here, the display form of the number-of-holds display area Da in each display mode will be described with reference to FIG. 109 . FIG. 109(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display form (normal display form) of the pending number display area Da in the normal display mode, and FIG. 109(b) is a display form (special display form) of the pending number display area Da in the special display mode ) is a schematic diagram of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 109(a), in the normal display mode, unit suspension display areas Da1 to Da8 in which suspension icons MP are displayed are arranged in a line so as to be horizontally aligned. In the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, the reserved number display area Da is colored with a predetermined color to distinguish it from the surrounding area, and the division lines are drawn so that the individual unit reserved display areas Da1 to Da8 can be identified. is displayed.

As for the unit reserved display areas Da1 to Da8, the first unit reserved display area Da1, the second unit reserved display area Da2, the third unit reserved display area Da3, the fourth unit reserved display area Da3, and the fourth unit reserved display area Da1 are arranged from the side closer to the execution target display area Db to the far side. The unit reservation display area Da4, the fifth unit reservation display area Da5, the sixth unit reservation display area Da6, the seventh unit reservation display area Da7, and the eighth unit reservation display area Da8 are arranged in this order. Accordingly, it is configured to shift to the execution target display area Db side.

On the other hand, in the special display mode, as shown in FIG. 109(b), unit suspension display areas Da1 to Da7 in which suspension icons MP are displayed are arranged in a figure-8 shape. In this special display mode, the number-of-holds display area Da protrudes toward the variable display area ME, and is formed so as to straddle the variable display area ME and the pending display area NE. Even in the special display form, the reserved number display area Da is colored with a predetermined color to distinguish it from the surrounding area, and the division lines are displayed so that the individual unit reserved display areas Da1 to Da8 can be identified. It is the same as the display mode.

In addition, in the special display mode, a spare display area Dc is formed in addition to the reserved number display area Da. In the special display mode, even if new pending information is acquired, the pending icon MP corresponding to the pending information is displayed in the spare display area Dc instead of the pending number display area Da.

Here, as described above, in the special display mode, numbers for suggesting settings may be formed depending on the order in which the pending icons are digested, and the arrangement of the unit pending display areas Da1 to Da7 differs according to the order in which the pending icons are digested. ing. That is, although FIG. 109(b) shows an example of a special display mode, the arrangement pattern of the unit reservation display areas Da1 to Da7 changes depending on the order of execution.

In the process of switching to the special display form, the process of switching the display form of the number-of-holds display area Da from the normal display form shown in FIG. 109(a) to the special display form shown in FIG. 109(b) is executed.

After executing the switching process to the special display mode in step S5104, the transition flag to the special display mode stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474 is erased in step S5105, and the work display mode is displayed in step S5106. A special display mode flag is set in various flag storage areas of the RAM 474 . After that, after executing the process of moving the pending icon corresponding to the special display mode, the present display mode switching process is terminated.

Here, referring to the schematic diagram of FIG. 110, the flow of transition to the special display mode is illustrated.

(Transition to special display mode)
In the example shown in FIG. 110(a), the display mode of the hold is the normal display mode, and the number of hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 432 excluding the hold information corresponding to the game round being executed is the above. The number is six, which is less than the predetermined number. Here, when a prize is won in the operation opening unit 83 (the first ball entry portion 83d or the second ball entry portion 83e), new hold information is acquired accordingly, and the number of hold information stored is increased to the predetermined number. number (7) is reached.

When a decision is made to switch from the normal display mode to the special display mode by a lottery executed on the condition that the time required for switching to the special display mode is secured in the current game round, First, as shown in FIG. 110(b)→FIG. 110(c), the display form of the number-of-holds display area Da is switched from the normal display form to the special display form. At this time, the number-of-holds display area Da is configured to protrude toward the variable display area ME, thereby preventing the player who is watching the movement of the symbols in the variable display area ME from missing the switch to the special display mode. is doing.

When the display mode is switched, the pending icon MP leaves the pending number display area Da slightly prior to the switching of the display mode. Then, even after the display form of the pending number display area Da is changed, the pending icons MP circulate around the pending number display area Da for a certain period of time, and then each pending icon MP is associated with the unit Move to the reserved display areas Da1 to Da8.

More specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 111, the relationship between the pending icon MP and the unit pending display areas Da1 to Da7 is maintained even when the display form is switched. In other words, the reserved icon MP arranged in the first unit reserved display area Da1 in the normal display form is arranged in the first unit reserved display area Da1 even after switching to the special display form, and is displayed in the second unit in the normal display form. The pending icon MP arranged in the pending display area Da2 is arranged in the second unit pending display area Da2 even after switching to the special display mode, and the pending icon MP arranged in the third unit pending display area Da3 in the normal display mode is displayed. The icon MP is arranged in the third unit reserved display area Da3 even after switching to the special display form, and the reserved icon MP arranged in the fourth unit reserved display area Da4 in the normal display form is are also arranged in the fourth unit reserved display area Da4, and the reserved icons MP that were arranged in the fifth unit reserved display area Da5 in the normal display form are also arranged in the fifth unit reserved display area Da5 after switching to the special display form. The reserved icons MP arranged in the sixth unit reserved display area Da6 in the normal display form are arranged in the sixth unit reserved display area Da6 even after switching to the special display form, and are displayed in the seventh unit in the normal display form. The pending icon MP arranged in the pending display area Da7 is arranged in the seventh unit pending display area Da7 even after switching to the special display mode.

Here, even in the special display mode, the unit reserved display areas Da1 to Da7 have the same appearance (external shape, etc.), making it difficult to visually identify the order of the unit reserved display areas Da1 to Da7. In addition, when shifting from the normal display form to the special display form, all the unit reservation display areas Da1 to Da7 are hidden once, and reappear in different positions and shapes. Even if one observes the switching process, it is difficult to identify the order of the unit reserved display areas Da1 to Da7.

As shown in FIG. 110(c)→FIG. 110(d), after all the pending icons MP have completed moving to the pending number display area Da (in some cases, the spare display area Dc), the pending icons MP are arranged. The luminescence level of each unit reserved display area Da1 to Da7 increases. In addition, in FIG. 110(d), this state is represented by dot hatching. As a result, the switching of the display form (transition of the display mode) is completed during one game round (before the final display is performed).

Returning to the description of step S5101 in FIG. 108(b), if the determination in step S5105 is affirmative, that is, if the special display mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S5108. In step S5108, it is determined whether or not a transition flag to the normal display mode is stored in various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474. FIG. If a negative determination is made in step S5108, this display mode switching process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5108, the process proceeds to step S5109. In step S5109, it is determined whether or not it is time to return to the normal display mode. In other words, it is determined whether or not it is a predetermined timing after the last pending icon MP displayed in the pending number display area Da in the special display form moves to the execution target display area Db. If a negative determination is made in step S5109, this display mode switching process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5109, the process proceeds to step S5110.

In step S5110, processing for switching to the normal display mode is executed. After that, in step S5111, the normal display mode shift flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474 is erased, and in the subsequent step S5112, the special display mode flag is erased. After that, in step S5107, after executing the pending icon moving process corresponding to the normal display mode, the present display mode switching process ends.

Here, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 112, the flow of transition to the normal display mode will be illustrated.

(Transition to normal display mode)
In the example shown in FIG. 112(a), it is immediately after the transition to the special display mode shown in FIG. 110(d). When the pending icons MP are sequentially moved to the execution target display area Db and the number of the pending icons MP displayed in the pending number display area Da is decreased, the light emission level of the unit pending icon MP in which the pending icons MP are not arranged is increased. is lowered, and is differentiated from other unit pending display areas in which pending icons MP are arranged.

When new pending information is acquired in the process of digesting the pending icon MP displayed in the pending number display area Da as the game progresses, as shown in FIG. 112(a)→FIG. In addition, a pending icon MP corresponding to the newly acquired pending information is additionally displayed in the preliminary display area Dc, and additional display in the pending number display area Da is avoided. That is, the number of pending icons MP displayed in the single pending number display area Da continues to decrease.

The reserved icons MP additionally displayed in the preliminary display area Dc are arranged in a line from the right side to the left side in the order in which the reserved information is obtained, and the standby icons MP are displayed in the preliminary display area Dc until the normal display mode is restored. Become. Note that, unlike the number-of-holds display area Da, there is no image indicating the preliminary display area Dc, such as a section line, for the preliminary display area Dc.

As shown in FIG. 112 (b) → FIG. 112 (c), when the last pending icon MP displayed in the pending number display area Da moves to the execution target display area Db, and the pending number display area Da becomes empty , the display form of the number-of-holds display area Da is switched from the special display form to the normal display form during the game (more specifically, before the confirmation display) relating to the last hold icon MP. Specifically, the division lines of the pending number display area Da corresponding to the special display form are temporarily hidden, and then the division lines of the pending number display area Da corresponding to the normal display form are displayed. Thereafter, the pending icon MP displayed in the preliminary display area Dc until then shifts to the pending number display area Da (see FIG. 112(d)).

As already explained, one of the features of the present embodiment is that setting suggestions are made by changes in the pending display (changes in the arrangement of the pending icons MP) as the game progresses. The pending display process shown in FIG. 108(a) will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(hold display processing)
In the pending display process, first, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not additional flags are stored in various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474. FIG. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5201, the process proceeds to step S5202. In step S5202, it is determined whether or not the special display mode is on.

If a negative determination is made in step S5202, additional processing corresponding to the normal display mode is performed in step S5203. Specifically, when the execution target display area Db is empty, the pending icon MP is additionally displayed in the execution target display area Db. When the execution target display area Db is filled, the youngest (closest to the execution target display area Db) among the unit pending display areas Da1 to Da8 in which the pending icon MP is not displayed (is vacant) ) Add a pending icon MP to the unit pending display area.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, additional processing corresponding to the special display mode is performed in step S5204. Specifically, the pending icons MP are additionally displayed so as to line up from the left in the preliminary display area Dc (see FIG. 112(c)).

After executing the processing of steps S5203 and S5204, the additional flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474 are erased in step S5405, and this pending display processing ends.

Returning to the description of step S5201, if a negative determination is made in step S5201, the process proceeds to step S5206. In step S5206, it is determined whether shift flags are stored in various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S5206, this pending display process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5206, the process proceeds to step S5207. In step S5207, it is determined whether or not the special display mode is on.

If a negative determination is made in step S5207, that is, if the normal display mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S5208. In step S5208, shift processing corresponding to the normal display mode is executed. In the shift process corresponding to the normal display mode, after hiding the pending icon MP displayed in the execution target display area Db, the pending icon MP displayed in the pending number display area Da is moved to the execution target display area Db side. shift. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 114, the pending icon MP displayed in the first unit pending display area Da1 is moved to the execution target display area Db, and other unit pending display areas Da2 to Da8 are displayed. Each of the pending icons MP displayed in , is moved to the unit pending display area on the left side. By repeating such movements, the displayed pending icons MP are moved to the execution target display area Db in chronological order, and are erased via the execution target display area Db.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5207, that is, if the special display mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S5209. In step S5209, shift processing corresponding to the special display mode is executed. As already explained, when shifting to the special display mode, the update pattern of the pending display is determined at the time when the shift to the special display mode is determined. In the shift process corresponding to the special display mode, the pending icon MP is moved based on the determined update pattern.

After executing the shift processing in steps S5208 and S5209, the shift flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474 are erased in step S5210, and this pending display processing ends.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the update pattern of the pending display in the special display mode. The update patterns are broadly classified into a setting suggestion corresponding update pattern corresponding to the setting suggestion and a setting suggestion non-corresponding update pattern not corresponding to the setting suggestion. In the update pattern corresponding to the setting suggestion, a number corresponding to the set value is displayed in the pending number display area by the unit pending icons MP and the unit pending icons MP in which the pending icons MP are arranged in the process of updating the pending display during the special display mode. Da, and those numbers are not displayed in the update pattern that does not correspond to the setting suggestion.

Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 115, "1" is set as the number corresponding to setting 1, and "2" is set as the number corresponding to setting 2. In FIG. No number is set for setting 2, which is the most disadvantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 116, a plurality of setting-suggested update patterns corresponding to setting 1, setting-suggested update patterns corresponding to setting 2, and setting-suggested non-corresponding update patterns are provided. Until then, it is difficult to identify which update pattern it will be.

According to the seventeenth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The main function of the configuration for displaying the pending icon (holding image) is to clearly indicate to the player the number of stored pending information, that is, the number of remaining pending items. In recent years, there has been proposed a technique of suggesting the degree of expectation of a big win result by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of a pending icon. As a result, the degree of attention to the pending icon (the game to be executed later) is improved.

In the configuration shown in this feature, the display form of the number-of-holds display area Da is switched between the normal display form/special display form depending on the situation. In the normal display mode, the number of stored pending information can be displayed, and in the second display mode, in addition to the number of stored pending information, different game information (for example, set values) is displayed. Become. By adopting a configuration in which information displayed by changing the display form of the number-of-holds display area Da is added, it is possible to contribute to a further improvement in attention to the game.

The unit reserve display areas, which are arranged horizontally in the normal display mode, are arranged in figure 8 in the special display mode. Thus, each display form can be clearly differentiated by differentiating the arrangement pattern of the unit reservation display area in each display form. In particular, the normal display mode has an arrangement that makes it easy to intuitively grasp the number of pieces of pending information and the digestion order, while the special display mode has an arrangement that makes it difficult to intuitively grasp the digestion order. In this embodiment, a plurality of pending display update patterns are provided in the special display mode, and some of the update patterns display numbers suggesting set values. By devising not only the display mode of the pending icon but also the update pattern of the display of the number of pending games in accordance with the progress of the game, the above-described effect of improving the degree of attention can be exhibited more preferably.

In the state of switching to the special display mode, a number is displayed as information corresponding to the set value by combining the pending icons. Even information that cannot be displayed with individual reserved icons can be displayed by using a combination of a plurality of reserved icons, and the expressiveness of the information can be dramatically improved.

In particular, the number of hold information that can be stored is often capped for various reasons. In addition, the number of pieces of pending information acquired may vary to some extent due to individual differences among gaming machines. In view of these circumstances, even if the above information display function is applied, it is feared that the function may not work well. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, if the above information is displayed with numbers, characters, and symbols, it is possible to suppress the number of pending information required to realize the display from becoming excessively large. , it is possible to prevent the function from being properly exhibited due to the above circumstances.

If the display position of the suspended icon changes significantly due to the switching of the display mode, it is assumed that the player will likely lose sight of the suspended icon. This is not preferable because it causes confusion for the player. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, by configuring at least a part of the pending number display area Da in each display form to overlap, even when the display form is switched, the above inconvenience is unlikely to occur can do.

In the configuration in which the shape of the number-of-holds display area Da is changed by switching the display mode, the impact can be enhanced by increasing the difference before and after switching. However, if the difference in appearance becomes large, it becomes difficult to understand the relationship between the normal display mode and the special display mode (that they are the same), which increases the possibility of confusing the player. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, even if the display form is switched, if the reserved icon itself displayed in the reserved number display area Da is the same, only the display form is different from the commonly used reserved icon It can be easily predicted that each display form shows the same pending number display area Da. As a result, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed.

Triggered by the storage of new pending information, the display form of the pending number display area Da may be switched. At this time, a pending icon corresponding to the pending information is additionally displayed first, and then the display form is switched, so that the addition of the pending icon can be prevented from being overlooked due to the switching of the display form. Further, for example, in order to diversify the order of deletion of pending icons, it is technically significant to avoid additional display of pending icons corresponding to newly acquired pending information after switching to the special display mode. There is

Frequent appearance changes in a situation in which the information corresponding to the set value (the above number) cannot be displayed is a factor that gives the player the impression that it is troublesome. There is a concern that such a repetition of such an event may easily cause overlooking when predetermined game information is displayed. In this regard, in the present embodiment, switching to the special display form is performed so that the number of stored pending information is the number necessary to display information (numbers) corresponding to the set value in the special display form. It is executed based on reaching a certain predetermined number. Thereby, the said inconvenience can be suppressed suitably.

In addition, the player who wants to check the information corresponding to the set value can be encouraged to actively play the game so as to obtain the pending information, which contributes to the improvement of the operation rate of the gaming machine.

In order to make it easier to understand that both the normal display form and the special display form are the display forms of the pending number display area Da, and to increase the difference between the normal display form and the special display form, switching the display form The required turnaround time can be long. Therefore, in a situation where a certain amount of time is secured for the variable display time of the pattern (under a situation where the number of pending is the upper limit, that is, the time reduction function is not the maximum), it is configured to switch to the special display mode. Therefore, the time required for switching the display mode can be earned. That is, as shown in the present embodiment, it is technically meaningful to set the number of reservations to 7 instead of the number of reservations to 8 as the transition condition to the special display mode.

Here, these reserved icons generally move in the same manner each time the game round progresses, and the movement manner (operation manner or shift manner) is often extremely monotonous. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, in the special display mode, the additional display pattern when additionally displaying the pending icon in the pending number display area Da and the pending icon displayed in the pending number display area are shifted. By diversifying the shift display patterns of the cases, it is possible to prevent the movement of the pending icon from becoming monotonous. By devising the display of the pending icon in this way, it is possible to realize novel display effects and the like by using the pending icon, and contribute to further improvement in attention to the game.

In the special display mode, even if the number of pending icons is changed from the same number (predetermined number), the update pattern varies. In some update patterns, numbers are displayed as information corresponding to the set values. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to encourage a player who wishes to see through the set values to pay attention to the game.

It is preferable to shorten the variable display time of symbols according to the number of reserved information stored in order to speed up the progress of the game. However, when displaying information (numbers) corresponding to set values by combining pending icons as described above, the display time of the information depends on the variable display time. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the above information is displayed when the number of pending information that triggers the transition to the special display mode is smaller than the number of pending information, for example, the number of pending information that is greater than the number of pending information that triggers the transition Compared to the configuration in which the information corresponding to the set value is displayed when the Coexistence can be suitably realized.

At the time when the pending icon arrangement is changed with the shift to the special display mode, the pending icon arrangement becomes common regardless of whether or not the information corresponding to the setting value is displayed later. Therefore, it is difficult to guess whether or not the information corresponding to the setting value will be displayed later when switching to the display mode.

As shown in the configuration shown in this feature, since the arrangement of the pending images at the time of switching the changed display mode is common, it becomes obvious which special changed display mode is when the switching of the changed display mode occurs. can be avoided.

<Modification 1>
In the above seventeenth embodiment, the combination (arrangement pattern) of a plurality of pending icons MP displayed in the pending number display area Da in the special display mode is configured to form numbers for suggesting settings. is not limited to As long as information for suggesting settings can be formed by combining a plurality of pending icons MP in the special display mode, the specific aspect thereof is arbitrary. may be A specific example thereof will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 117(a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between special arrangement patterns and setting suggestions, and FIG. 117(b) is a schematic diagram showing update patterns corresponding to setting suggestions.

In this modification, as a special arrangement pattern corresponding to setting value suggestions, a first special arrangement pattern that forms the letter "v" by using three unit reserved display areas, and five unit reserved display areas. A second special placement pattern is provided which, when utilized, forms the letter "V". When the setting value is setting 1, the appearance rate of "v" is 10% and the appearance rate of "V" is 10%. If the rate is 5%, setting 3 is differentiated so that the rate of appearance of "v" is 5% and the rate of appearance of "V" is 5%. In other words, the more "v" and "V" appear, the higher the player's expectation for the setting value that is advantageous to the player, and the more "V" appears than "v", the higher the possibility of setting 2. It will happen.

In setting 1, the appearance rate of "V" is treated more favorably than the other settings, while the appearance rate including all settings is set to be lower than "v". As shown in FIG. 117(b), in the process of updating the pending display, the number of displayed pending icons MP decreases in order. , and then branch whether or not the "v" is displayed. A special display mode by first passing through the display presence/absence branch of 'V' whose appearance rate is lower than 'v' and leaving the display presence/absence branch of 'v' with a relatively high appearance rate later. restrains the premature decline in attention to

<Modification 2>
In the above seventeenth embodiment, the setting is suggested by a combination (arrangement pattern) of a plurality of pending icons MP displayed in the pending number display area Da in the special display mode, but instead of this configuration Alternatively, in addition, the combination (arrangement pattern) of a plurality of pending icons MP displayed in the pending number display area Da may be configured to suggest (notify) the degree of expectation for a big hit result or the like. For example, it is possible to have a configuration in which the expectation of a big win is increased by displaying specific letters, numbers, or patterns.

In addition, in Modification 1 and Modification 2, it is assumed that the upper limit number of times that the special arrangement pattern is used in one special display mode is one, but the present invention is not limited to this. When a plurality of special layout patterns with different numbers of reserved icons MP forming numbers, characters, patterns, etc. are provided, a plurality of special layout patterns are passed through during one special display mode. is also possible.

<Modification 3>
In the seventeenth embodiment, when the number of stored pending information increases to seven, the display form of the pending number display area Da is changed from the normal form to the special form. It is not limited to this. For example, when the number of stored pending information reaches the storable upper limit (eight in the present embodiment), the display form of the pending number display area Da is changed from the normal form to the special form. is also possible.

Further, in the seventeenth embodiment, the number of pending information, which is the condition for switching the display mode of the pending number display area Da, is limited to only seven, but this is changed and the display mode of the pending number display area Da may be provided with a plurality of pieces of pending information that are switching conditions. For example, not only when the number of pending information is seven, but also when the number is eight, the display form of the pending number display area Da may be changed to a special form.

Incidentally, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which whether or not to use the special display mode as the display mode is determined on the condition that the number of pending icons MP related to setting suggestions or more pending information is stored.

<Modification 4>
In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the number of pieces of pending information, which is a precondition for making the display form a special display form for all setting values, is unified, but the present invention is not limited to this. In a configuration in which the number of dots required to form characters, numbers, symbols, etc. corresponding to suggested setting values is different, the conditions for switching to the special display mode are individually set according to the number of required dots. good too. For example, if the required number of dots is 3, and the number of pending information stored is 3 (preferably a larger number: for example, 4), the configuration is such that switching to the special display mode is made. , when the number of required dots is 5, the number of stored pending information is 5 (preferably a larger number: for example, 6), as a configuration for switching to a special display form good too.

<Modification 5>
In the seventeenth embodiment, when the number of pieces of pending information stored becomes seven due to the addition of new pending information, the normal display mode is switched to the special display mode. Additionally or additionally, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the normal display mode is shifted to the special display mode when the number of pieces of pending information stored is reduced to seven as the game progresses.

<Modification 6>
In the seventeenth embodiment, the arrangement of the unit reservation display area is changed from a straight line to one imitating the number 8 by shifting to the special display mode, but it is not limited to this. . As long as it is possible to display game-related information such as setting suggestions according to the arrangement pattern of the displayed pending icons MP, the specific arrangement is arbitrary. For example, as shown in FIG. 118(a), the unit reservation display areas may be arranged in a triangle (specifically, an inverted triangle). In this case, for example, a character "v" (see FIG. 118(b)) or a "V" (see FIG. 118(c)) may be formed as characters corresponding to game-related information such as setting suggestions.

<Modification 7>
In the seventeenth embodiment, the unit reserved display area is divided and displayed by a thin frame line or the like to clarify which part is the unit reserved display area, but it is not limited to this. . It is also possible to omit division display etc. in the unit reserved display area and to make it unclear which part is the unit reserved display area.

<Modification 8>
In the seventeenth embodiment, by changing the light emission level of the unit pending display area where the pending icon MP is displayed (adding an effect), the unit pending display area where the pending icon MP is not displayed and However, the specific configuration for achieving differentiation by the presence or absence of the hold icon MP is arbitrary. For example, differentiation may be achieved by changing the color of the unit pending display area.

<Modification 9>
In the seventeenth embodiment, the hold icon MP used in the normal display mode and the hold icon MP used in the special display mode are shared. The icon and the pending icon used in the special display mode may be separately provided. For example, the shape and size of the pending icon may be individually provided according to the display mode.

In particular, in the special display mode, when characters, numbers, patterns, etc. are formed by combining reserved icons, the characters may be difficult to understand due to the shape of the reserved icons. There is concern that this may confuse players or cause them to overlook information. Therefore, by changing the shape of the pending icon itself in accordance with the character or the like, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be preferably suppressed.

<Modification 10>
In the seventeenth embodiment, the normal display mode and the special display mode are switched, but such a switching function is not essential. It is also possible to omit the normal display mode when performing setting suggestions and the like according to the arrangement pattern of the pending icons MP.

<Modification 11>
In the seventeenth embodiment, the number of unit pending display areas that constitute the pending number display area Da in the normal display mode and the number of unit pending display areas that constitute the pending number display area Da in the special display mode Although the configuration is different, it is not limited to this. A configuration in which both are matched may be adopted.

If the shape of the reserved unit display area in the normal display mode and the shape of the reserved unit display area in the special display mode do not match, by aligning the number of them, the size of the reserved unit display area in each display mode will be changed. It is desirable to strengthen the relevance.

<Modification 12>
For example, for a player who is playing a game in anticipation of displaying information corresponding to a set value, shifting to the opening/closing execution mode immediately before displaying the information in the special display mode may cause the information to be displayed. It is easy to leave an impression that you missed the opportunity to confirm. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the setting of the second change display mode is not performed in such a situation, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a problem.

<Eighteenth Embodiment>
Although this embodiment is similar to the sixteenth embodiment in that it is intended to increase the degree of attention to the game by performing a suspension notice effect using the suspension icon MP, this suspension notice effect is partially different from the seventeenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the outline of the suspension notice effect will be first described, and then the details of the suspension notice effect in this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the seventeenth embodiment.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 119, in the present embodiment, for any of the suspension notice effects, the degree of expectation of a big win result is suggested by changing the display mode of the suspension icon MP displayed in the suspension display area NE. It is configured to Four colors of white, blue, yellow, and red are set for the display mode (color) of the pending icon MP. Among these colors, white is the standard, and when the suspension notice effect is executed, the suspension icon MP becomes other colors (blue, yellow, red).

The colors of the pending icon MP are set so that the degree of expectation of a big win result increases in the order of white<blue<yellow<red. Specifically, when a hold notice is executed with a hold icon MP corresponding to a game round that results in a big hit, there is a high possibility that white < blue < yellow < red will be selected in this order. On the other hand, when the suspension notice is executed with the suspension icon MP corresponding to the game round resulting in the loss, there is a high possibility that red<yellow<blue<white will be selected in this order.

This pending notice effect is roughly classified into a first type notice effect and a second type notice effect depending on the display mode (color change) of the pending icon MP. As shown in FIG. 120(a), after the color of the pending icon MP changes in the first type notice effect (details of the first type notice effect A to be described later), the color of the pending icon MP changes to match the game round. (until it moves to the execution target display area Db). On the other hand, in the second kind of notice effect (the second kind of notice effect B described later in detail), as shown in FIG. 120(b), the color of the pending icon MP changes multiple times as the game progresses. For example, even if the final color to be changed is red, it is first changed to a lower color (blue or yellow) with a lower degree of expectation than red, and at the timing when the pending icon MP shifts, the color is changed to a color with a higher degree of expectation. Step up (promote) to a higher color with a higher degree. By using these two types of pending notice effects together, even if the color has a low degree of expectation, there is a possibility that the color will change to a color with a high degree of expectation by the time the corresponding game cycle is reached. This suppresses an early decrease in the degree of attention to the pending advance notice effect.

The color of the pending icon MP may be changed not only in the pending number display area Da but also when moving to the execution target display area Db. For example, when the yellow pending icon MP in the pending number display area Da moves to the execution target display area Db, the pending icon MP is changed to red, or the pending icon MP is changed to white in the pending number display area Da. It is also possible to change the color of the pending icon MP to another color (blue, yellow, red) when the pending icon MP moves to the execution target display area Db.

As shown in FIG. 121, the first notice effect is the first notice effect A that changes the color of the hold icon MP corresponding to the hold information that triggered the notice effect, and the hold that triggered the notice effect. The information is broadly classified into the first type notice effect B in which the color of the hold icon MP corresponding to the subsequent hold information is changed, and the second kind notice effect is the hold icon corresponding to the hold information that triggered the notice effect. It is roughly divided into a second type notice effect A that changes the color of the MP and a second notice effect B that changes the color of the hold icon MP corresponding to the hold information preceding the hold information that triggered the notice effect. be. As for the degree of expectation for the result of the big win, a difference is provided so that the first kind of advance notice effect A<the second kind of notice effect A<the first kind of notice effect B<the second kind of notice effect B.

Here, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 122, the flow of the first type announcement effect B will be described. 122(a) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main controller 162, and FIG. 122(b) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved display area NE of the pattern display device 253. FIG.

As shown in the seventeenth embodiment, the main controller 162 (more specifically, the holding ball storage area 432) is formed by integrating the holding areas Ra and Rb shown in the first embodiment. A reservation area Rx and an execution area AE are provided. A first area Rx1 to an eighth area Rx8 are provided in the holding area Rx, and the holding information obtained by winning the first ball entering section 83d and the second ball entering section 83e is stored in the first area Rx1 to the eighth area Rx8. It is configured to be stored in 8 areas Rx8 in order of winning.

(Type 1 advance notice B)
In the example shown in FIG. 122(1), hold information is stored in the execution area AE and the first area Rx1 to fifth area Rx5 in the hold ball storage area 432 of the main controller 162 . In the following description, the pending information stored in the execution area AE is the pending information I0, the pending information stored in the first area Rx1 is the pending information I1, and the pending information stored in the second area Rx2 is the pending information The hold information stored in the third area Rx3 is called hold information I3, the hold information stored in the fourth area Rx4 is called hold information I4, and the hold information stored in the fifth area Rx5 is called hold information I5. called.

A pending icon MP indicating the pending information I0 is displayed in the execution target display area Db of the display screen 253a (the pending display area NE) of the pattern display device 253, and a pending icon indicating the pending information I1 is displayed in the first unit pending display area Da1. MP is displayed, a pending icon MP indicating pending information I2 is displayed in the second pending display area Da2, a pending icon MP indicating pending information I3 is displayed in the third pending display area Da3, and a fourth unit A pending icon MP indicating the pending information I4 is displayed in the pending display area Da4, and a pending icon MP indicating the pending information I5 is displayed in the fifth unit pending display area Da5.

The hold information I0 corresponds to the result of losing, and when the game round corresponding to the hold information I0 ends and the next game round is started, as shown in FIG. 122(a1)→FIG. 122(a2) Then, the pending information I0 stored in the execution area AE is erased, and the pending information I1 stored in the first area Rx1 moves to the execution area AE. Along with this, the pending icon MP displayed in the first unit pending display area Da1 is shifted to the execution target display area Db, and the pending icon MP displayed in the second unit pending display area Da2 is shifted to the first unit pending display area. The pending icon MP displayed in the third unit pending display area Da3 is shifted to the second unit pending display area Da2, and the pending icon MP displayed in the fourth unit pending display area Da4 is shifted to the display area Da1. The pending icon MP displayed in the fifth unit pending display area Da5 is shifted to the fourth unit pending display area Da4 by shifting to the third unit pending display area Da3. Movement of each pending icon MP is executed in the pending display area NE.

In the example shown in FIG. 122, the holding information I2 moved to the first area Rx1 corresponds to the big hit result, and based on this holding information I2, the lottery for the holding notice effect is won. More specifically, the first type announcement effect B is won. In the first kind of notice effect B, the suspension displayed in the fourth unit suspension display area Da4 is not the suspension icon MP (the suspension icon MP displayed in the first unit suspension display area Da1) corresponding to the suspension information I2. The color of the icon MP is changed from "white" to "red". As a result, it is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility that the game round after four rounds will result in a big win.

Reservation information I1 corresponds to the result of losing, and the game round corresponding to the reservation information I1 is completed, and the next game round is started. At this time, as shown in FIG. 122(a3), the shift mode of the hold icon MP becomes a special mode. Specifically, the pending icon MP displayed in the execution target display area Db is erased, and the movement target of the pending icon MP when the pending icon MP is shifted from the pending number display area Da to the execution target display area Db is It becomes a special mode.

Specifically, each of the pending icons MP displayed in the first unit pending display area Da1 to the third unit pending display area Da3 remains stationary and changes to red in the fourth unit pending display area. The pending icon MP being displayed in Da4 overtakes the preceding pending icons MP and shifts to the execution target display area Db.

Regarding the pending icon MP to be shifted from the fourth unit pending display area Da4 to the execution target display area Db, the pending icon MP moves away from the pending display area NE via the variable display area ME, and more specifically, jumps above the preceding pending icon MP group. and move to the execution target display area Db. This makes it appear as if the order of digestion of the pending information has been changed. Normally, the pending icons MP are shifted to the execution target display area Db in the order of acquisition, but in the above special mode, by making it look as if such a rule has been broken, the impact on the player is enhanced. Although the pending icon MP in the fourth unit pending display area Da4 is apparently moved to the execution target display area Db, the actual execution order of the pending information is not changed. Also, the display of the pending number display section of the main display unit 87 is updated regardless of the special mode (one LED is turned off).

Next, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 123, the flow of the second kind of advance notice effect B will be described. 123(a) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main controller 162, and FIG. 123(b) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved display area NE of the pattern display device 253. FIG.

(Type 2 advance notice B)
In the example shown in FIG. 123 (1), the holding information is stored in the execution area AE and the first area Rx1 to the fourth area Rx4 in the holding ball storage area 432 of the main controller 162. This shows a case where the pending information is stored in the fifth area Rx5. In the following description, the pending information stored in the execution area AE is the pending information I0, the pending information stored in the first area Rx1 is the pending information I1, and the pending information stored in the second area Rx2 is the pending information The hold information stored in the third area Rx3 is called hold information I3, the hold information stored in the fourth area Rx4 is called hold information I4, and the hold information stored in the fifth area Rx5 is called hold information I5. called.

A pending icon MP indicating the pending information I0 is displayed in the execution target display area Db of the display screen 253a (the pending display area NE) of the pattern display device 253, and a pending icon indicating the pending information I1 is displayed in the first unit pending display area Da1. MP is displayed, a pending icon MP indicating pending information I2 is displayed in the second pending display area Da2, a pending icon MP indicating pending information I3 is displayed in the third pending display area Da3, and a fourth unit A pending icon MP indicating the pending information I4 is displayed in the pending display area Da4, and a pending icon indicating the pending information I5 is displayed in the fifth unit pending display area Da5 based on the fact that the pending information I5 is newly acquired→stored. MP is additionally displayed.

The hold information I0 corresponds to the result of losing, and when the game round corresponding to the hold information I0 ends and the next game round is started, as shown in FIG. 123(a1)→FIG. 123(a2) Then, the pending information I0 stored in the execution area AE is erased, and the pending information I1 stored in the first area Rx1 moves to the execution area AE. Along with this, the pending icon MP displayed in the first unit pending display area Da1 is shifted to the execution target display area Db, and the pending icon MP displayed in the second unit pending display area Da2 is shifted to the first unit pending display area. The pending icon MP displayed in the third unit pending display area Da3 is shifted to the second unit pending display area Da2, and the pending icon MP displayed in the fourth unit pending display area Da4 is shifted to the display area Da1. The pending icon MP displayed in the fifth unit pending display area Da5 is shifted to the fourth unit pending display area Da4 by shifting to the third unit pending display area Da3. Movement of each pending icon MP is executed in the pending display area NE.

In the example shown in FIG. 123, the holding information I5 moved to the fourth area Rx4 corresponds to the big hit result, and based on this holding information I5, the lottery for the holding notice effect is won. More specifically, the second kind of advance notice effect B is won. In the second kind of notice effect B, the suspension displayed in the second unit suspension display area Da2 is not the suspension icon MP corresponding to the suspension information I5 (the suspension icon MP displayed in the fourth unit suspension display area Da4). The color of the icon MP is changed from "white" to "blue". As a result, it is suggested to the player that there is a possibility that the second game round will result in a big win.

Here, when the color of the pending icon MP is "blue", there is room for two steps of step-up of "yellow" and "red", and the "blue" pending displayed in the second unit pending display area Da2 By the time the icon MP becomes an object to be executed, it is expected that the color will change to a color with a higher degree of expectation, and the degree of attention to the pending icon MP will increase.

The hold information I2 corresponds to the result of being out, and the game round related to the hold information I2 does not correspond to the ready-to-win display. At the timing when the upper symbol row is stop-displayed and the lower symbol row is stop-displayed in this game round (the timing when the middle symbol row is being variably displayed), the holding icons MP are exchanged. Specifically, the “blue” pending icon displayed in the first unit pending display area Da1 and the “white” pending icon displayed in the third unit pending display area Da3, that is, the color of the pending icon The pending icon corresponding to the pending information I5 that triggered the change is replaced.

In this exchange, the pending icon MP to be replaced is separated from the unit pending display areas Da1 and Da3 and moves to the counterpart unit pending display areas Da1 and Da3 via the variable display area ME. At this time, since the lower symbol row is already stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the moving pending icon MP from being mixed with the lower symbol row and becoming difficult to see.

By moving the “blue” pending icon MP to the third unit pending display area Da3, an opportunity to change the color of this pending icon MP is added. For example, the possibility of changing to “yellow” or “red” is added when shifting to the second unit reserved display area Da2 or the first unit reserved display area Da1. Although the order of the reserved icons is changed in the reserved display area NE of the pattern display device 253, the display in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the main control device 162 and the reserved number display section of the main display unit 87 is not changed. does not occur.

Since the pending information I2 also corresponds to the result of losing, when the game round corresponding to the pending information I2 ends, the next pending information I3 moves to the execution area AE, and the game round corresponding to the pending information I3 is played. executed. The color of the pending icon MP displayed in the third unit pending display area Da3 is changed from "blue" to "yellow" with this shift (see FIG. 123(b6)).

Since the pending information I3 also corresponds to the result of losing, when the game round corresponding to the pending information I3 ends, the next pending information I4 moves to the execution area AE, and the game round corresponding to the pending information I4 is played. executed. The color of the pending icon MP displayed in the second unit pending display area Da2 is changed from "yellow" to "red" with this shift (see FIG. 123(b7)).

Next, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 124, setting processing for reservation notice production performed by MPU442 of information / production control device 140 is explained. The pending notice effect setting process is a process that is executed as part of the command response process that is periodically executed by the MPU 442 .

(Setting processing for pending notice effect)
In the pending notice effect setting processing, first, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the pending notice regulation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. FIG. The suspension notice regulation flag is a flag stored when the above-described suspension notice effect is executed, and avoids duplication of the suspension notice effect. When an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, the setting processing for the reservation notice effect is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S5301, the process proceeds to step S5302.

In step S5302, it is determined whether or not it is time to receive a hold command or a shift command from main controller 162 . If a negative determination is made in step S5302, the setting processing for this pending notice effect is terminated.

If the command received this time is a pending command, an affirmative determination is made in step S5303 and the process proceeds to step S5304. In step S5304, lottery processing is executed when a hold command is received. In the lottery process related to the hold command, a lottery is performed for each of the hold information newly added this time and the hold information acquired before that. In this lottery, whether or not the game round related to the hold information is a big hit from the stored information, whether or not the ready-to-win display is performed, and if the ready-to-win display is performed, the pattern is grasped, and according to it. It is based on the lottery table and the value of the lottery counter area 463 .

In the lottery table storage area 451 of the ROM 443, a lottery table for big hits, a lottery table for loss normal reach A, a lottery table for loss normal reach B, and a lottery for loss super reach A are stored as lottery tables for receiving the pending command. A table, a lottery table for losing super reach B, a lottery table for losing super reach C, and a lottery table for complete losing are stored.

These various tables are set so that the winning probability increases in the order of jackpot>super reach C>super reach B>super reach A>normal reach B>normal reach A>complete loss.

If the command received this time is a shift command, a negative determination is made in step S5303 and the process proceeds to step S5305. In step S5305, lottery processing is executed when a shift command is received. In the lottery process related to the shift command, the lottery target of the pending notice is all the pending information remaining after the shift. That is, lottery for whether or not to hold advance notice is performed based on all the information stored in the first area Rc1 to eighth area Rc8 provided in the holding information storage area 467 of the RAM 444 . This lottery is individually performed for each piece of information stored. The lottery order (priority order) is defined to be the newest order (eighth area Rc8→seventh area Rc7→ . . . first area Rc1). For example, when the common pending number CRN is "2", a lottery is first performed based on the information stored in the second area Rc2, and if the lottery is not won, the information stored in the first area Rc1. A lottery will be held based on

Especially in the present embodiment, by increasing the value of the common pending number CRN, the variable display time in the game round corresponding to the complete loss is shortened. Therefore, by giving priority to the new hold information as a lottery target as described above, it is possible to suitably ensure the period of the notice effect when the hold notice is executed.

Regarding the lottery method, in the same way as when the hold command is received, whether or not the game round related to the hold information is a jackpot from the stored information, whether or not the ready-to-win display is performed, and when the ready-to-win display is performed Then, the pattern is grasped, and the lottery table and the value of the lottery counter area 463 corresponding to it are used.

In the lottery table storage area 451 of the ROM 443, as lottery tables for receiving the shift command, a lottery table for big hits, a lottery table for normal reach A, a lottery table for normal reach B, and a lottery table for super reach A. A table, a lottery table for losing super reach B, a lottery table for losing super reach C, and a lottery table for complete losing are stored.

These various tables are set so that the winning probability increases in the order of jackpot>super reach C>super reach B>super reach A>normal reach B>normal reach A>complete loss. However, the lottery table group for receiving the shift command is set so that the probability of winning with a pending notice is low when compared with the group of lottery tables for receiving the hold command. For example, when the lottery tables for big wins are compared, the winning probability when referring to the lottery table for receiving the shift command is set lower than the winning probability when referring to the lottery table for when receiving the hold command.

However, if the value of the common pending number CRN (holding number) is less than a predetermined number ("4" in this embodiment), the overall winning expectation is lower than when the pending command is received, but the common pending When the value of the number CRN (holding number) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the winning expectation as a whole is set to exceed that at the time of receiving the holding command.

In this embodiment, in particular, when the value of the common number of reservations CRN exceeds the predetermined number ("4"), the degree of reduction in the variable display time in the game round corresponding to the complete loss is determined by the value of the common number of reservations CRN. It becomes larger than the case of the predetermined number (“4”) or less. In this case, although it is possible to speed up the progress of the game, there is a concern that the monotony of the progress of the game will become conspicuous. In this respect, with the above configuration, when the number of holds increases and the shortening of the variable display time becomes noticeable, the notice of hold is more likely to occur. This is preferable in terms of speeding up the progress of the game and suppressing a decrease in attention to the game.

After executing the lottery process in step S5304 or step S5305, the process proceeds to step S5306. In step S5306, it is determined whether or not the condition for execution of the pending advance notice effect has been established in those lottery processes. When a negative determination is made in step S5306, that is, when non-winning is made in steps S5304 and S5305, this setting processing for reservation notice effect is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4706, the process of determining the pending notice effect pattern is executed in the following step S5307, and the pending notice regulation flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444 in the following step S5308. After that, the setting processing for the reservation notice effect is terminated. While the suspension notice regulation flag is stored, other suspension notice effects are regulated. Then, this suspension notice regulation flag is erased when the corresponding suspension notice effect is completed.

Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 125 to 127, a supplementary explanation will be given of the pending notice pattern determination processing in step S5307.

(Holding notice pattern determination process)
In the pending notice pattern determination process, first, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the pending information subsequent to the pending information that triggered the winning of the pending notice effect is stored. When a negative determination is made in step S5401, the process advances to step S5402 to perform processing for removing the first type notice effect B from selection candidates of the pending notice effect. After executing the process of step S5402, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S5401, the process proceeds to step S5403. In step S5403, it is determined whether or not there is any pending information preceding the pending information that triggered the winning of the pending notice effect. When a negative determination is made in step S5403, the process advances to step S5405 to perform processing for excluding the second kind of advance notice effect B from selection candidates of the pending notice effect. After executing the process of step S5404, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S5403, the process proceeds to step S5405.

In step S5405, a holding notice effect selection table stored in the ROM 443 is referred to, and which holding notice effect is to be determined by lottery. The reserved notice effect selection table includes a table in which all of the first kind notice effect A, the first kind notice effect B, the second kind notice effect A, and the second kind notice effect B are candidates for selection, and the first kind notice effect A, a table with the second type of advance notice effect A and the second type notice effect B as selection candidates, and a table with the first type notice effect A, the first type notice effect B and the second type notice effect A as the selection candidates. , the first kind of advance notice effect A, and the second kind of notice effect A are provided as selection candidates, and the table to be referred to this time is determined based on the results of the processes in steps S5401 to S5404. Regarding these various tables, if the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect this time corresponds to the jackpot result, the first notice effect A < the second notice effect A < the first notice effect B < 2nd kind of notice effect B is likely to be selected in the order, and in the case of a failure result, 2nd kind of notice effect B < 1st kind of notice effect B < 2nd kind of notice effect A < 1st kind of notice effect A are more likely to be selected in the order of

After selecting the pending notice effect to be executed this time in step S5404, the process advances to step S5406 to execute the notice effect setting process, and the present notice effect pattern determination process ends. As for the advance notice effect setting process, there are a setting process for the first notice effect A corresponding to the first notice effect A, a setting process for the second notice effect A corresponding to the second notice effect A, and a setting process for the second notice effect A corresponding to the second notice effect A. It is roughly divided into a setting process for the first kind of advance notice effect B corresponding to the notice effect B and a setting process for the second kind of notice effect B. Among these, in the setting process for the first kind of notice effect A, the pending icon MP corresponding to the relevant pending information is specified, and the display mode (color) of the pending icon MP is determined. In the setting processing for the second kind of advance notice effect B, the pending icon MP corresponding to the relevant pending information is specified, and the number of shifts until the pending icon MP moves to the execution target display area Db is referred to, and the step of the display mode is performed. Determine the up pattern.

In the present embodiment, the setting process for the first kind of advance notice effect B and the setting process for the second kind of notice effect B are characteristic. Hereinafter, the setting process for the first kind of advance notice effect B will be explained with reference to FIG. 126, and then the setting process for the second kind of notice effect B will be explained with reference to FIG.

(Setting processing for the first kind of notice effect B)
In the setting processing for the first kind of advance notice effect B, first, in step S5501, among the pending icons MP, those whose display mode is to be changed are determined. Specifically, among the pending information stored after the relevant pending information in the pending area Rx, the pending information whose display mode is to be changed is determined. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 122(1), there are three pieces of pending information stored after the relevant pending information. (Refer to the fifth unit reserved display area Da5) is determined as a change target of the display mode.

In the following step S5502, display mode determination processing is executed. In the display mode determination process, whether or not the relevant pending information is a jackpot result, and in the case of a losing result, a specific variable display mode is specified, and the display mode (color) to be changed based on the specified result is selected. decide. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 122(2), the color of the pending icon MP to be changed is changed from "white" to "red".

After the object to be changed is determined in step S5501 and the display mode is determined in step S5502, processing for changing the display mode is executed in step S5503. Specifically, information for instructing the display control device 410 to change the display mode in order to change the display mode in accordance with the shift of the pending icon MP and information determined in steps S5501 and S5502 (the first type of advance notice effect B is (including information indicating that it has been selected) is given to the shift command. Then, a sound effect output setting process is performed so that the sound effect associated with the change in the display mode is output from the speaker unit 29 .

Based on the information included in the shift command, the display control device 410 identifies the target whose display mode should be changed and the display mode after the change, and matches the display mode of the target pending icon MP to the shift of the pending icon MP. (see FIG. 122(b)).

After that, in step S5506, the first type notice effect B flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444, and the setting process for the first type notice effect B ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the second type notice effect B setting process will be described.

(Second-class advance notice effect B setting process)
In the second kind of notice effect B setting process, first, in step S5601, the final display mode (color after step-up) of the pending icon MP is determined. In subsequent step S5602, the initial display mode (color before step-up) of the pending icon MP is determined. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 123, the display mode of the preceding pending icon MP is changed from "white" to "blue", and the pending icon MP is changed to "red" finally. stepping up.

In step S5603, the number of remaining shifts until the corresponding hold that triggered the second type of notice effect B reaches the execution area AE is grasped. After that, in step S5605, the game round for replacing the pending icon MP, that is, the replacement timing is determined. In subsequent step S5606, a step-up pattern of the display mode of the pending icon MP is determined based on the processing results of steps S5601 to S5605. In the example shown in FIG. 123, when the pending icon MP corresponding to the relevant pending information is shifted from the fifth unit pending display area Da5 to the fourth unit pending display area Da4, it is displayed in the second unit pending display area Da2. The color of the pending icon MP is changed to "blue", and the pending icon is exchanged during the game (during the game related to the pending information I3) in which the pending icon MP is waiting in the first unit pending display area Da1. Is going. The display mode of the pending icon moved from the first unit pending display area Da1 to the third unit pending display area Da3 is changed to "blue" as it moves from the third unit pending display area Da3 to the second unit pending display area Da2. ” to “yellow”, and step up from “yellow” to “red” along with the movement from the second unit reserved display area Da2 to the first unit reserved display area Da1. Then, in the state of "red", which is the display mode with the highest degree of expectation in the present embodiment, it moves from the first unit reserved display area Da1 to the execution target display area Db.

After the details of the second kind of announcement effect B are determined in steps S5601 to S5606, the process proceeds to step S5607 to execute display mode change processing. Specifically, information instructing the display control device 410 to change the display mode to change the display mode in accordance with the shift or addition of the pending icon MP and information determined in steps S5601 to S5606 (second type notice effect (including information indicating that B has been selected) to the hold or shift command. Then, a sound effect output setting process is performed so that the sound effect associated with the change in the display mode is output from the speaker unit 29 .

Based on the information included in the hold command or the shift command, the display control device 410 determines the target whose display mode should be changed, the display mode after the change, the pending icon to be replaced, the timing of replacement of the pending icon, and the step of the display mode. The up pattern is specified, and display control of the pending icon is performed based on the specified information (see FIG. 123(b)). After that, in step S5608, the second type of advance notice effect B flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444, and the second type of notice effect B setting processing ends.

Next, the notice effect execution processing executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140 according to the items set in the notice effect setting process of the pending notice pattern determination process (FIG. 125) will be described. The notice effect execution process is a process executed as part of the regular processing by the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140, and the first notice effect A is executed based on the setting contents in the first notice effect A setting process. a process for the first kind of advance notice effect A that executes the second kind of notice effect A based on the setting contents in the second kind of notice effect A setting process; and a first kind of notice effect B A process for the first kind of notice effect B that executes the first kind of notice effect B based on the contents set in the setting process, and a second kind of notice effect B is executed based on the contents of the setting in the second kind of notice effect B setting process. It is roughly divided into the second kind of advance notice effect B processing.

In the process for the first kind of advance notice effect A, the hold command or shift command updated in the first kind of notice effect A setting process is transferred to the display control device 410, and the change of the display mode of the hold icon MP from the speaker unit 29 is handled. output a sound effect. The display control device 410 changes the display mode of the designated pending icon MP based on the information included in the pending command or shift command, and changes the display mode until the pending icon MP is erased through the execution target display area Db. to maintain

In the process for the second kind of notice effect B, the hold command or the shift command updated in the process of setting the second kind of notice effect B is transferred to the display control device 410 to correspond to the change of the display mode of the hold icon MP from the speaker unit 29. output a sound effect. The display control device 410 changes the display mode of the designated pending icon MP based on the information included in the pending command or shift command. Then, when shifting the pending icon MP, the display mode of the pending icon MP is changed at any time so as to follow the specified step-up pattern.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 128, the processing for the first kind of advance notice effect B will be described.

(Processing for first-class notice effect B)
In the processing for the first kind of advance notice effect B, first, in step S5701, it is determined whether or not the first kind of notice effect B is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S5701, the process proceeds to step S5702. In step S5702, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the first type notice effect B, that is, whether or not the first type notice effect B flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. If a negative determination is made in step S5702, the process for the first type of advance notice effect B is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5702, display mode change processing is executed in step S5703.

In the display mode change process of step S5703, the hold command or shift command to which information is added in the first type notice effect B setting process is transferred to the display control device 410, and the display mode of the hold icon MP is changed from the speaker unit 29. to output the corresponding sound effect. The display control device 410 changes the display mode of the designated pending icon MP based on the information included in the pending command or shift command, and changes the display mode until the pending icon MP is erased through the execution target display area Db. to maintain

Returning to the description of step S5701, if the determination in step S5701 is affirmative, that is, if the first type announcement effect B is being executed, the process proceeds to step S5704. In step S5704, it is determined whether or not partial shift regulation is in progress. Although the details will be described later, it is determined whether or not the shift of some of the pending icons MP is being restricted in the first type announcement effect B. If a negative determination is made in step S5704, the process advances to step S5705.

In step S5705, it is determined whether or not it is time to generate a special shift. That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to move the pending icon MP so as to jump over the preceding pending icon MP. If a negative determination is made in step S5705, the process for the first type of advance notice effect B is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5705, the process advances to step S5706. In step S5706, it is determined whether or not subsequent pending information (suspended icon MP) is stored as a change target of the display mode.

If the subsequent hold information (hold icon MP) is not stored in the change mode of the display mode, a negative determination is made in step S5706 and the process proceeds to step S5707. In step S5707, a first special shift process is executed. In the first special shift process, the shift command to be transmitted to the display control device 410 is added with information to the effect that the first special shift should be performed and information indicating the special movement target, and the shift command is transmitted to the display control device 410. do. Then, a sound effect corresponding to the special movement (special shift) is output from the speaker section 29 . The display control device 410 performs special movement of the pending icon MP based on the reception of this shift command.

After that, in step S5708, the flag for the first type notice effect B stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444 is erased, and in the following step S5706, the hold notice regulation stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444 is canceled. After erasing the flag, the processing for the first kind of advance notice effect B is ended.

Returning to the description of step S5706, if affirmative determination is made in step S5706, that is, if subsequent hold information exists, the process proceeds to step S5702. In step S5702, a second special shift process is executed. In the second special shift process, the shift command to be transmitted to the display control device 410 is added with information indicating that the second special shift should be performed and information indicating the special movement target, and the shift command is transmitted to the display control device 410. do. Then, a sound effect corresponding to the special movement (special shift) is output from the speaker section 29 . The display control device 410 performs special movement of the pending icon MP based on the reception of this shift command. Here, if there is a pending icon MP that follows the pending icon MP that is the target of the special movement, the subsequent pending icon MP is transferred to the unit pending display area that has been vacated by the special move. movement is regulated and stays at the same position. In other words, the shift is restricted until the pending icon MP moved to the execution target display area Db is erased. Incidentally, during this regulation, the ninth unit reserved display area is temporarily added next to the eighth unit reserved display area Da8 (until the shift regulation is lifted), and new reservation information is acquired. When the unit pending display area is insufficient, the pending icon MP corresponding to the pending information is additionally displayed in the ninth unit pending display area.

In the subsequent step S5711, the partial shift regulation flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444, and the processing for the first type notice effect B ends.

Returning to the description of step S5704, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5704, that is, if the partial shift restriction flag is stored in various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444, the process proceeds to step S5712. In step S5712, it is determined whether or not the confirmation display (final stop display of the symbol) is the start timing in the game cycle in which the special movement occurs. If a negative determination is made in step S5712, the processing for the first type of advance notice effect B is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5712, the process proceeds to step S5713. In step S5713, shift processing of the subsequent hold icon MP is executed. Specifically, a partial shift restriction cancellation command is transmitted to the display control device 410 . As a result, the pending icon MP, which has remained in the original position without being shifted, is shifted to the unit pending display area where it should be.

Thereafter, in steps S5714, S5708, and S5709, the partial shift regulation flag, the first type notice effect B flag, and the pending notice regulation flag stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444 are erased, and the first The process for seed announcement effect B is terminated.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 129, the processing for the second type of advance notice effect B will be described.

(Second-class advance notice effect B processing)
In the processing for the second kind of advance notice effect B, first, in step S5801, it is determined whether or not the second kind of notice effect B is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S5801, the process proceeds to step S5802. In step S5802, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the second type of advance notice effect B, that is, whether or not the second type notice effect B flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM444. If a negative determination is made in step S5802, the process for the second kind of advance notice effect B is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5802, display mode change processing is executed in step S5803.

In the display mode change process of step S5803, the hold command or shift command to which information is added in the second type of notice effect B setting process is transferred to the display control device 410, and the display mode of the hold icon MP is changed from the speaker unit 29. to output the corresponding sound effect. The display control device 410 changes the display mode of the designated pending icon MP based on the information included in the pending command or shift command.

Returning to the description of step S5801, if the determination in step S5801 is affirmative, that is, if the second kind of advance notice effect B is being executed, the process proceeds to step S5804. In step S5804, it is determined whether or not it is time to generate a shift. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5804, the process advances to step S5805. In step S5805, it is determined whether or not the current shift corresponds to a change in display mode (step-up).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5805, the process advances to step S5806 to execute display mode change processing. In the display mode change processing in step S5806, after adding information indicating that the display mode should be changed and information indicating the target of the change to the shift command, the shift command is transferred to the display control device 410. FIG. Then, a sound effect corresponding to the change in the display mode of the hold icon MP is output from the speaker section 29 . The display control device 410 changes the display mode of the specified pending icon MP based on the information included in the shift command.
, After the processing of step S5806 is executed, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S5805, the process advances to step S5807. In step S5807, it is determined whether or not it is time for the pending icon to be replaced (the pending icon MP moved away from the execution target display area Db) to reach the determination target display area. If a negative determination is made in step S5807, the process for the second kind of advance notice effect B is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5807, the second type notice effect B flag stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444 is erased in step S5808, and the pending notice regulation flag is erased in step S5809. After that, the processing for the second kind of advance notice effect B is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S5804, if a negative determination is made in step S5804, that is, if it is determined that it is not the shift occurrence timing, the process proceeds to step S5810. In step S5810, it is determined whether or not it is a game cycle in which the pending icon MP is replaced. If a negative determination is made in step S5810, the process for the second kind of advance notice effect B is immediately terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5810, the process proceeds to step S5811. In step S5811, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of the lower symbol row. If a negative determination is made in step S5811, the process for the second kind of advance notice effect B is terminated. When an affirmative determination is made in step S5811, the process proceeds to step S5812, and after executing the pending icon replacement process, the process for the second kind of notice effect B ends.

In the pending icon replacement process, a pending icon replacement command is transmitted to the display control device 410, and a sound effect corresponding to the replacement of the pending icon MP is output from the speaker unit 29. FIG. In the display control device 410, based on the reception of the pending icon replacement command, the preceding pending icon and the subsequent pending icon are replaced.

According to the eighteenth embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

The main function of the pending icon display is to clearly indicate to the player the number of stored pending information, ie, the remaining number of pending items. In recent years, there has been proposed a technique of suggesting the degree of expectation of privilege provision by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of the pending icon. As a result, the degree of attention to the pending icon (for example, a game cycle to be executed later) is improved. Here, it is common knowledge that these reserved icons move in the same manner each time the game round progresses, and the manner of movement (operation manner or shift manner) is extremely monotonous. Therefore, as shown in the embodiment, when a plurality of pending icons are displayed in the pending number display area Da, the pending icons are moved to the execution target display area Db in the order of additional display (order of acquisition of pending information). and a movement mode of moving to the execution target display area Db in a different order, for example, the subsequent pending icon suddenly overtakes the preceding pending icon and moves toward the execution target display area Db. By generating such an event, it is possible to prevent the movement of the pending icon from becoming monotonous. Such diversification of the manner of movement of the reserved icon makes it possible to create novel display effects that have never existed before, which contributes to further increasing the degree of attention paid to the game.

When the predetermined suspension information becomes a determination target, the suspension icon that should be additionally displayed after that, instead of the suspension icon corresponding to the predetermined suspension information, moves to the execution target display area Db. With such a special movement mode, a suspended icon different from the suspended icon expected to move to the execution target display area Db will move to the execution target display area Db. By diversifying the movement mode by such overtaking, the above-described effect of improving the degree of attention can be favorably exhibited.

According to the configuration for changing the display mode (color) of the pending icon, even when a plurality of pending icons are displayed, it is possible to cause a difference in the degree of expectation of the jackpot result for each pending icon. can. Here, the player's attention is more likely to be directed to the suspended icon whose display mode has been changed, as compared with other suspended icons. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the pending icon whose display mode is changed jumps over the other pending icons and moves to the execution target display area Db, it is possible to reduce the chance that the movement is overlooked.

Further, when there is a difference in the degree of expectation, attention tends to be directed to the pending icon with a relatively high degree of expectation, and attention to other pending icons preceding the relevant pending icon is reduced. In this case, a certain kind of waiting occurs until the game cycle associated with the hold icon with a relatively high degree of expectation. In this respect, when a pending icon with a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed, the pending icon can be moved to the execution target display area Db at once. Even in the midst of the process, it is possible to preferably maintain the degree of attention rather than fueling the expectation that overtaking will occur suddenly.

Since the change in the display mode of the pending icon corresponding to the special information that triggered the above-described special movement (overtaking) is restricted, it is possible to prevent the special movement from being buried. In addition, it is possible to suppress the influence of the display mode change remaining after returning to the normal movement mode after the special movement (occurrence of discrepancy between the degree of expectation set for each display mode and reality).

When a special move (passing) is performed, the player's confusion can be suppressed by maintaining (not changing) the display mode of the pending icon at least during the move. Further, for example, in a configuration in which the degree of expectation for winning results is suggested by the display mode of the pending icon, the player's attention is likely to be directed to the change in the display mode. Therefore, by avoiding a change in the display mode of the pending icon during the special move, it is possible to suppress the decrease in attention to the special move.

In a gaming machine of the type in which the lottery result is notified by symbols, the player's attention is likely to be directed to the variable display area ME of the symbols. When the special movement occurs while the player is paying attention to the pattern, the reserved icon passes through the variable display area ME, so that the special movement can be prevented from being overlooked.

When special movement (overtaking) occurs, the hold icons other than the target hold icon remain stationary. In this way, the configuration in which the moving pending icon and the stationary pending icon are displayed together makes it possible to make the moving pending icon stand out.

When a special move (overtaking) occurs, until a predetermined time elapses (until the next game round is played), filling the unit reservation display area of the move source is avoided, so the special move itself is overlooked. However, it is possible to grasp it after the fact.

In the present embodiment, when a plurality of pending icons are displayed in the pending number display area Da, if the preceding pending icon and the subsequent pending icon are replaced, not only the appearance of the pending icon but also its Movement becomes characteristic. Therefore, by diversifying the movement mode of the reserved icon, it is possible to create a novel display effect that has never existed before, which contributes to a further increase in the degree of attention paid to the game.

When moving toward the execution target display area Db, a hold icon (preceding hold icon) closer to the execution target display area Db and a hold icon farther from the execution target display area Db (subsequent hold icon) are displayed. By changing the positional relationship between the execution target display area Db and each reserved icon, it is easy to give the player an impression as if the execution order has been changed.

When applied to a configuration in which the display mode of the pending icon changes (steps up) in the process of moving toward the execution target display area Db, the process of moving to the execution target display area Db is extended, as if an opportunity to step up is provided. You can make it look like it has grown.

By adopting a configuration in which pending icons having different display modes are interchanged, it is possible to favorably emphasize the change in appearance at the time of interchange. In addition, even if the player misses the moment of replacement of the pending icon, the player can grasp the occurrence of the replacement of the pending icon after the fact, so that the effect of improving the degree of attention described above can be suitably exhibited. becomes possible.

In the configuration in which the degree of expectation is suggested by the display mode (for example, color) of the pending icon, it is assumed that the player's attention will be increased for the change in the display mode. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, if a configuration is adopted in which the pending icon whose display mode has been changed to a highly expected one is turned later, it is possible to preferably maintain the state in which the degree of attention is high. . In addition, once the display mode has changed, further changes are likely to be expected, and the player's attention is more likely to be directed. Therefore, if the one whose display mode is changed is passed later, it is possible to prompt the player to expect a further change (step-up) in the display mode. That is, it is possible to make it look as if the step-up restarted from a state in which the step-up was performed to some extent. As a result, the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game can be further enhanced.

When special movement (replacement display) occurs, the pending icon to be replaced passes through the variable display area ME. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to give the impression that the display mode of each of the pending icons to be replaced has only changed at the same time (that is, the impression that replacement has not occurred). can. As a result, the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game by the special movement can be favorably exhibited.

Instead of the pending icon corresponding to the pending information that triggered the change of the display mode, the display mode of the pending icon corresponding to the pending information stored at the earlier timing is changed, and then those pending icons are changed. It is configured to be replaced. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize novel display that has never existed before, and it is possible to exhibit the above-described effect of improving the degree of attention more preferably. In addition, when executing the special movement (replacement display), it is not necessary to add to the execution condition that the display mode of the target pending icon has already been changed, so the condition for generating the special movement is preferably relaxed. can.

In the configuration in which the pending icons displayed in the pending number display area Da are sequentially moved to the execution target display area Db, the player's attention is focused on the execution target display area Db and the area immediately before it (adjacent first unit pending display area It is easy to face Da1). Therefore, when a pending icon whose display mode is changed is arranged in the first unit pending display area Da1, by replacing it with a subsequent pending icon, the impact of the replacement can be strengthened.

By replacing the pending icon while the variable display of the pattern is being performed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, that is, while the pending icon is not moved (shifted), the pending icon is displayed. It is possible to preferably prevent the replacement from being confused with the movement of the shift and becoming difficult to understand.

<Modification 1>
In the first kind of advance notice effect B in the eighteenth embodiment, when overtaking of the suspended icon MP occurs, the destination of the subsequent suspended icon MP that is the target of the special movement is the execution target display area Db. However, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to set the movement destination of the subsequent pending icon that is the target of special movement to be within the pending number display area Da. That is, it may be configured such that the subsequent pending icon MP is moved so as to be interrupted between a plurality of pending icons MP displayed in series in the pending number display area Da.

In such a configuration, instead of or in addition to the configuration for generating the special movement during the shift, it is preferable to adopt the configuration for generating the special movement during the variable display.

<Modification 2>
In the first type notice effect B in the eighteenth embodiment, by regulating the duplication of the reserved notice effect, when the special movement occurs, the first unit reserved display area Da1 immediately before the execution target display area Db is displayed. The display mode of the pending hold icon MP (the hold icon MP that should have been moved to the execution target display area Db under normal conditions) is configured to be "white", but the hold that is the target of special movement It is sufficient if the display mode has a lower expectation of a big win result than the display mode of the icon MP, and it is not necessarily limited to "white". For example, if the display mode of the hold icon MP to be specially moved is "red", any of the less expected colors of "white", "blue", and "yellow" will have an impact. can be strengthened.

<Modification 3>
In the first type notice effect B in the eighteenth embodiment, the display mode of the hold icon MP targeted for the special movement is not changed before and after the special movement. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the display mode of the hold icon MP targeted for the special movement changes. For example, when the “yellow” pending icon MP displayed in the fourth unit pending display area Da4 is specially moved to the execution target display area Db, the display mode of the pending icon MP is changed to “ It is also possible to change from "yellow" to "red" (a display mode with a higher degree of expectation than the original display mode).

<Modification 4>
In the first kind of advance notice effect B in the eighteenth embodiment, the suspended icon MP to be specially moved is moved to the execution target display area Db while the display mode (color) of the suspended icon MP is changed. However, in order to make it appear that the subsequent pending icon MP overtakes the preceding pending icon MP and moves to the execution target display area Db, the display mode of the pending icon MP to be specially moved is changed. You don't necessarily have to.

<Modification 5>
In the first kind of advance notice effect B in the eighteenth embodiment, when there is hold information subsequent to the corresponding hold information that triggered the hold notice effect, the first kind of notice effect B is performed. Although it has been described as a configuration that can be selected, this may be changed as follows. That is, if the change in the display mode by the second type notice effect B is scheduled in advance and the pending information is newly acquired before the relevant pending information moves to the execution area AE, the newly acquired The suspended information is configured to change the display mode of the suspended icon, and when the suspended information moves to the execution area, the suspended icon MP whose display mode has changed in advance overtakes the other suspended icons MP and moves to the execution target display area Db. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

<Modification 6>
In the second type notice effect B in the eighteenth embodiment, the configuration is such that the pending icon is exchanged in the game round immediately before the fake pending icon moves to the execution area. It is good also as a structure which replaces. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the pending icon is replaced after the fake pending icon is moved to the execution area.

<Modification 7>
In the second type notice effect B in the eighteenth embodiment, the case where there is another pending icon between the fake pending icon and the corresponding pending icon was illustrated, but between the fake pending icon and the corresponding pending icon does not negate a configuration in which there are no other pending icons in the

<Modification 8>
In the second type of notice effect B in the eighteenth embodiment, the display mode of the preceding fake pending icon is changed to any one of "blue", "yellow", and "red", and then changed to "white". Although it is configured to be replaced with the subsequent pending icon MP that is set, it is sufficient that at least the subsequent pending icon to be replaced has a display mode with a lower degree of expectation than the preceding fake pending icon, and is not necessarily "white". ” does not have to be.

<Modification 9>
In the second kind of advance notice effect B in the eighteenth embodiment, the configuration is such that the pending icon MP is exchanged during the variable display of the symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which the pending icon MP is exchanged while the symbol is stopped (during confirmation display).

In addition, in the second kind of notice effect, the suspended icon MP is exchanged so that the suspended icon MP passes through the variable display area for the lower symbol row in the variable display area ME, but coexistence with the lower symbol row. In order to achieve this, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the holding icon MP is exchanged in the latter of the state in which the variable display speed of the lower symbol row is low (high identification state) and the state in which it is high (low identification state).

<Modification 10>
In the eighteenth embodiment, the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 is provided with the variable display area ME and the reserved display area NE, and the special movement (overtaking) of the reserved icon MP is performed in the first type notice effect B. and in the case of special movement (replacement) of the pending icon MP in the second kind of notice effect B, the pending icon MP moves within the variable display area ME, but the present invention is not limited to this. . It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the movement area of the pending icon MP is accommodated in the pending display area NE.

<Modification 11>
In the eighteenth embodiment described above, the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 is configured to perform the pending display. may be provided. Moreover, it is also possible to provide an area (second display area) for displaying the number of reservations separately from the number of reservations display area Da (first display area) on the display screen 253a.

<Modification 12>
In the eighteenth embodiment described above, the configuration is such that the number-of-holds display area Da is clearly indicated by a frame line. Similarly, although the execution target display area Db is clearly indicated by the frame line, it does not deny the configuration in which the execution target display area Db is not indicated.

<Modification 13>
In addition to "white", "yellow", and "red" as the display mode of the pending icon, if a "rainbow" that does not cause any further step-up is provided, the pending icon (preceding hold icon) may be configured such that "rainbow" is excluded from the display mode change candidates. As a result, it is possible to leave room for a step-up, and it is possible to favorably improve the degree of attention after the replacement of the pending icon.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out, for example, as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) In each of the embodiments described above, the configuration is such that the game ball launched to the right route in the game area PE is prevented from entering the upper operation opening 83a, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a game ball launched in the right route is also allowed to enter the upper operation port 83a.

(2) A configuration may be adopted in which a game round based on a ball entering the upper operating opening 83a and a game round based on a ball entering the lower operating opening 83b are performed in parallel. For example, when the hold information based on the ball entering the upper working hole 83a and the holding information based on the ball entering the lower working hole 83b coexist, the pattern corresponding to the holding information related to the upper working hole 83a A variable display area and a variable display area with a pattern corresponding to the pending information applied to the lower operation port 83b may be formed in the display screen 253a, respectively, and both variable displays may be performed in parallel in each of the variable display areas. good.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the holding information related to the upper working opening 83a (corresponding to the "ball entering section") and the holding information concerning the lower working opening 83b (corresponding to the "ball entering section") are sequentially transmitted ( alternately), more specifically, it was configured to digest in the order in which the incoming ball occurred. It is also possible to change this as follows. In other words, it is possible to preferentially digest either of the reserved information relating to the upper working port 83a and the reserved information relating to the lower working port 83b. For example, when a difference in the degree of advantage is set between the lottery related to the upper operating port 83a (holding information) and the lottery related to the lower operating port 83b, the operating port set to be advantageous to the player It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which such pending information is preferentially digested.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the structure having the upper working port 83a and the lower working port 83b as the "entrance part" is adopted, but the number of the working ports does not necessarily have to be plural, but only one. good too.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the notification/production control device 140 and the display control device 410 are provided separately, but one control device that integrates the functions of these control devices 140 and 410 may be provided. .

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the monitoring device 600 is provided separately from the main control device 162, but the main control device 162 may have the function of the monitoring device 600. FIG.

(6) It is optional whether the information stored in the RAM 404 or the like of the main controller 162 is erased (reset) by the setting change operation or not.

(7) A configuration may be adopted in which setting suggestions are executed when the player touches the game ball shooting handle 41 while the gaming machine is in a standby state (non-operating state). In addition, as a condition for executing the setting suggestion, if the time elapsed in the standby state (non-operating time) exceeds the predetermined time, it will be compared with the case where the predetermined time has not been exceeded. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the occurrence probability of the setting suggestion is increased.

(8) When the game machine is in a standby state (non-operating state), the configuration may be such that setting suggestions are made each time a preset time elapses. For example, if the pattern combination corresponding to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed and the system shifts to the standby state, the demo screen will temporarily shift to the game screen (a screen where the pattern combination can be confirmed) after the above time elapses. configuration.

(9) A setting suggestion may be executed by an image displayed at the ending of the jackpot.

(10) In the above embodiment, the configuration is such that setting suggestion is made by the combination of symbols that are displayed as the final stop in response to the result of losing. A configuration may be adopted in which setting suggestions are made according to the displayed symbol combination.

(11) Corresponds to the setting suggestion of the final stop symbol combination corresponding to the game round being executed when the winning to the operation hole 83a further occurs under the condition that the number of reservations related to the operation hole 83a reaches the upper limit. It may be configured to rewrite to one that does.

(12) A configuration having a time specifying means such as a real-time clock may be employed, and the configuration may be such that the setting suggestion generation probability is changed according to the time zone.

(13) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that generates a right when a ball enters the machine to give a jackpot, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that provides a player with a privilege such as payout of medals when a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from a display window after the reels are stopped. can be applied.

Furthermore, the gaming machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like are not limited.

<Characteristic group A>
The following characteristic group A is defined as "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays patterns on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, a Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a win state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Various efforts have been made to improve the reliability.However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the construction of the game machine in order to improve the reliability." is.

Feature A1. Storage means (RAM 404 of main controller 162) for storing information about games;
A starting ball entry portion (operation openings 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE),
Information acquisition means (function for acquiring hold information by MPU 402 of main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section,
The storage means has acquired information storage means (a function of storing pending information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Judgment means for sequentially judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information (e.g. winning information). A gaming machine equipped with a function to execute
Set value determination means (lottery by MPU 402 of main control device 162) for determining one set value from a plurality of stages (setting 1 to setting 3) of set values corresponding to the acquisition expected value of the game ball. function to switch tables) and
Setting value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to main controller 162) operated to change the setting value determined by the setting value determining means;
erasing means for erasing information stored in the storage means when the setting value is changed by the setting value changing means;
A game machine characterized by comprising change regulation means (a setting change regulation function in the MPU 402 of the main controller 162) for regulating the change based on the operation of the set value change means in accordance with the game situation.

If the game-related information is suddenly deleted during the game, it is assumed that the behavior of the gaming machine will suddenly change. For example, if a game ball that should have been paid out to the player is not paid out, or if a game turn related to the acquired special information is not executed, the player may be confused and the game machine may It is feared that it will become a factor to reduce the reliability of In this regard, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, since the change of the setting value (setting change) is restricted according to the game situation, it is possible to suppress the behavior of the gaming machine from changing during the game. This can contribute to improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

Feature A2. A starting ball entry portion (operation openings 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE),
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section (function for acquiring holding information by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162);
Obtained information storage means (function for storing pending information in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information obtained by the information obtaining means;
Judgment means for sequentially judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information (e.g. winning information). function to execute), and
Set value determination means (lottery by MPU 402 of main control device 162) for determining one set value from a plurality of stages (setting 1 to setting 3) of set values corresponding to the acquisition expected value of the game ball. function to switch tables) and
Setting value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to main controller 162) operated to change the setting value determined by the setting value determining means;
A game machine characterized by comprising change regulation means (a setting change regulation function in the MPU 402 of the main controller 162) for regulating the change based on the operation of the set value change means in accordance with the game situation.

If the set value is changed during a game, the behavior of the gaming machine suddenly changes, which may confuse the player. In this regard, if a configuration is adopted in which the change of the set value (setting change) is restricted based on the game situation as shown in this feature, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suppressed. This is preferable for improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

Feature A3. A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball into the game area based on the player's operation,
The change restricting means restricts the change when the game ball shooting means is performing a game ball shooting operation, and continues the restriction until a first predetermined period elapses after the shooting operation ends. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, characterized in that it has means for causing the player to play.

A certain amount of time is required from the end of the shooting operation of the game ball until the game ball is discharged from the game area. Therefore, instead of canceling the regulation immediately when the shooting operation of the game ball is completed, the regulation is continued until the first predetermined period elapses, so that the game ball remains in the game area. It is possible to suppress the setting value from being changed.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "equipped with game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball to the game area based on the player's operation, and the change control means is the game ball launching means. The game machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, characterized by having means for regulating the change until a first predetermined period elapses after the game ball shooting operation is completed." is also possible.

Feature A4. The first predetermined period of time is set to be longer than the period required for the game ball shot by the game ball shooting means to reach the game area and be ejected from the game area. The gaming machine according to feature A3.

As shown in feature A4, by making the first predetermined period longer than the period required for ejection of the game ball, it is preferable that the set value is changed while the game ball is flowing down the game area. can be suppressed.

Feature A5. A storage portion (for example, an upper tray 33 or a lower tray 34) provided in the front portion of the game machine (front door frame 14) and capable of storing game balls;
a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls to the storage unit based on a payout request;
The change regulation means is means for regulating the change when a game ball payout action is being performed by the payout means, and continuing the regulation until a second predetermined period elapses after the payout action is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized by having:

When a payout request is generated due to a ball entering the ball-entering portion or the like, there is a certain amount of time lag between the ball entering and the payout. If the set value is changed during this period, it becomes unclear which set value the current payout corresponds to. Therefore, by continuing the regulation until the second predetermined period elapses even after the payout operation is completed as shown in the present feature, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature is defined as a storage unit (for example, the upper tray 33 and the lower tray 34) provided in the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) capable of storing game balls, and the storage unit based on the payout request. and a payout means (payout device 224) for putting out game balls to a part, and the change regulation means regulates the change until a second predetermined period elapses after the game ball payout operation by the payout means is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that it has a means for playing.

Feature A6. a guide passage for guiding the game balls paid out by the paying-out means to the storage section;
The game according to feature A5, wherein the second predetermined period is set to be longer than the period required for the game ball to reach the reservoir from the payout means through the guide passage. machine.

As shown in feature A6, by making the second predetermined period longer than the period required for the game ball to reach the player's hand, it is possible to suitably suppress the setting value from being changed during the payout.

Feature A7. A storage portion (for example, an upper tray 33 or a lower tray 34) provided in the front portion of the game machine (front door frame 14) and capable of storing game balls;
a payout means (payout device 224) for sequentially paying out game balls to the storage unit based on a payout request;
The change restricting means has means for restricting the change at least until the payout of the game balls is completed when there is a game ball waiting to be put out by the payout means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6.

In a gaming machine, it may be difficult to immediately pay out game balls due to factors such as a shortage of game balls. In such a situation, the payout operation may be temporarily interrupted, but the payout operation is resumed when the situation becomes possible. In such a case, by restricting the change of the set value at least until the payout is completed, it is possible to suppress the difficulty in understanding which set value the put-out game ball corresponds to.

Feature A8. Provided with a detection means for detecting the entry of a ball into the ball entry portion provided in the game area,
Characteristic features A1 through A1, characterized in that the change restricting means has means for restricting the change until a third predetermined period elapses from the detection when a ball entry is detected by the detecting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A7.

According to the feature A8, when a ball enters the ball entering section, a game round effect, a game ball payout, and the like are executed based on this. Therefore, when a ball is entered into the ball entering portion, the change of the set value is restricted until the third predetermined period has elapsed after the ball is detected, thereby preventing the game round effect and the payout of the game ball. It is possible to suitably suppress the ambiguity of which setting value corresponds.

Note that the "ball-entering portion" shown in this feature may be the same as the "starting-ball-entering portion" shown in feature A1, or may be different.

Feature A9. According to any one of characteristics A1 to A8, the change regulation means has means for regulating the change when the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. game machine.

According to feature A9, setting changes are restricted when special information is stored. As a result, for example, special information that normally corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g. winning information) will result in a determination result that does not correspond to predetermined determination information, or special information that does not correspond to predetermined determination information It is possible to suitably suppress the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information.

Feature A10. Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to determination by the determination means is stored before the predetermined special information is subject to the determination. a destination identifying means for identifying in timing;
The game according to feature A9, further comprising suggesting means for suggesting a result of the destination identification by the destination identification means at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the determination. machine.

For example, in a situation where special information that becomes a judgment result corresponding to predetermined judgment information is waiting, a setting change occurs while suggesting it, and the special information does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information. When it comes to the determination result, the content of the suggestion and the determination result related to the special information may contradict each other. In the configuration in which the determination result related to the special information is suggested in advance, there is a possibility that the content of the suggestion and the actual determination result contradict each other, giving the player a sense of distrust. In this regard, by combining with the configuration in which the setting change is restricted when the special information is stored as shown in feature A9, it is possible to avoid the contradiction described above. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the reliability of the gaming machine.

Feature A11. A specifying means for specifying the number of game balls supplied to the game area and the number of game balls discharged from the game area,
The change restricting means has means for restricting the change when the number of game balls specified by the specifying means corresponds to the number of game balls remaining in the game area. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, characterized in that

According to the feature A11, setting change is restricted under the condition that game balls remain in the game area. As a result, it is possible to prevent a game ball that should have been shot under a certain set value from entering the ball entry section or the like under a different set value.

Feature A12. a door body (inner frame 13) that can be opened and closed;
an operation unit (setting change switch 166) arranged at a position that can be operated by opening the door and operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means;
Position detection means (open detection sensor 706) for detecting opening of the door body,
Characteristic A1 to Characteristic A1, wherein the change restricting means has means for restricting the change when the position detecting means detects that the door body is arranged in the closed position. The gaming machine according to any one of A11.

According to feature A12, it is necessary to open the door when changing the settings. Since such an action is conspicuous, it is possible to suppress the action of illegally changing the set value and contribute to the improvement of the security function of the gaming machine.

Feature A13. It is provided separately from the main control means (main control device 162) having the information acquisition means, the acquired information storage means and the determination means, and determines the game situation based on the game information input from the main control means. A game situation monitoring means (monitoring device 600) for monitoring is provided,
The game situation monitoring means has game information storage means (storage section 604) for storing the game information from the main control means in association with the set value set by the main control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, characterized by:

For example, if there is a time lag between the timing when the special information is acquired and the timing when it is stored in the game information storage means, there is a possibility that the corresponding setting will be different due to the setting change. In this respect, by applying the technical ideas shown in feature A1 and the like to the configuration shown in this feature, the influence of such a timing shift can be suitably suppressed.

<Characteristic group B>
The characteristic group B below is defined as "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays patterns on the display screen. Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a win state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Various efforts have been made to improve the reliability.However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the construction of the game machine in order to improve the reliability." is.

Feature B1. Main control means (main controller 162) for outputting payout instruction information (prize ball command) based on the ball entry into a ball entry section (for example, general winning hole 81) provided in the game area (game area PE);
A gaming machine comprising payout control means (payout control device 242) for controlling the payout means (payout device 224) so that game balls are paid out based on the input of the payout command information,
The main control means is
A set value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining one set value from among the set values (set 1 to set 3) provided in a plurality of stages corresponding to the expected value of the game ball to be obtained. function to execute change processing) and
setting value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main controller 162) operated to change the setting value determined by the setting value determining means;
A gaming machine, wherein the payout command information output from the main control means includes specific information (code) indicating the set value determined by the set value determining means.

According to feature B1, the payout command information output from the main control means includes information indicating the set value determined by the main control means. In the payout control means, the setting value set by the main control means can be specified from the payout command information (more specifically, the specific information). In this way, by sharing the set value between the main control means and the payout control means, cooperation between the two control means can be strengthened. The payout command information is information that is frequently output to the payout control means as the game progresses. You can increase your chances. This is a preferable configuration for improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "main control for outputting payout command information (prize ball command) based on the ball entering the ball entering portion (for example, general winning hole 81) provided in the game area (game area PE) Means (main control device 162) and payout control means (payout control device 242) for controlling the payout means (payout device 224) so that game balls are paid out based on the input of the payout command information. In the gaming machine, a set value determination means (main controller 162 function of executing setting change processing in the MPU 402 of the above), and set value change means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main controller 162) operated to change the set value determined by the set value determination means and wherein the payout command information output from the main control means includes information corresponding to the set value determined by the set value determining means." It is possible.

Feature B2. When the setting value is changed by the setting value changing means, the main control means issues the setting value information (code included in the setting change command) indicating the setting value determined by the setting value determining means. having means for outputting to the control means;
The payout control means is
setting value information storage means for storing the setting value information input with the change of the setting value;
When the payout command information is input, whether or not the payout command information is normal is determined based on the specific information included in the payout command information and the set value information stored in the set value information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature B1, further comprising information determining means for determining (a function of executing comparison processing by the MPU of the payout control device 242).

According to the configuration shown in feature B2, when the setting is changed, the set value information corresponding to the set value determined by the set value determination means is input to the payout control means, and the payout control means determines the set value Store information. After that, when the payout command information is input from the main control means, whether the set value specified from the payout command information (specified information) and the set value stored at the time of setting change have a corresponding relationship (for example, do not match) is determined). As a result, even if an illegal act such as replacing the main control means with an illegal one is performed, it is possible to see through it.

Feature B3. The payout control means pays out game balls based on the payout command information when the determination result by the information determination means is normal, and when the determination result by the information determination means is not normal. The gaming machine according to feature B2, further comprising means for regulating the payout of game balls based on the payout command information when the determination result is that the game ball is to be played.

When the set value stored in advance and the set value specified this time do not match, etc., an abnormality occurs and the payout of the game ball is avoided. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally acquire game balls, and to strengthen the crime prevention function of the game machine.

Feature B4. The payout control means, when the payout command information is input under the condition that the set value information is not stored in the set value information storage means, puts out game balls based on the payout command information. The gaming machine according to feature B2 or feature B3, characterized in that it has restricting means.

In a configuration in which it is determined whether or not game balls are to be paid out based on the comparison result of the set values, there is a possibility that fraud such as clearing the set value information will be performed. In such a case, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by adopting a configuration in which the payout of game balls is restricted even if the payout command information is input.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B4, wherein the main control means is configured to prioritize the output of the set value information over the output of the payout command information.

In a configuration that determines whether or not to dispense by comparing the set values, by outputting the set value information preferentially when the settings are changed, it is possible to determine that the dispense command information is abnormal even though it is normal. can be avoided. As a result, the reliability of the gaming machine can be favorably improved.

Feature B6. The payout control means is
a first storage means for storing, as payout number information, information on the number of game balls to be paid out corresponding to the payout command information when the information determination means determines that the payout command information is normal;
payout drive control means for driving and controlling the payout means to pay out the number of game media corresponding to the payout amount information stored in the first storage means;
has
When the information determination means determines that it is not normal, the game balls that have been stored in the first storage means until then are put out, and the payout command information that is the target of the determination is put out. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B5, wherein a payout is regulated.

There is a certain amount of time lag between the input of payout command information to the payout control means and the actual payout. Such a time lag becomes large when the payout command information is input continuously and the payout of the game balls does not catch up. Here, when it is confirmed that an abnormality has occurred based on the set value, while continuing to pay out items that have already been determined to be paid out, new payout command information determined to be abnormal Payments are regulated for With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably avoid the inconvenience that the player cannot even receive a payout that should have been originally obtained due to the enhancement of the crime prevention function or the like.

Feature B7. The payout control means is
a first storage means for storing, as payout number information, information on the number of game balls to be paid out corresponding to the payout command information when the information determination means determines that the payout command information is normal;
payout drive control means for driving and controlling the payout means to pay out the number of game media corresponding to the payout amount information stored in the first storage means;
a second storage means for storing information on the number of game balls to be paid out corresponding to the payout command information when the information determination means determines that the payout command information is abnormal;
When the information determining means determines that the payout command information is normal under the condition that the information on the number of game balls to be paid out is stored in the second storing means, The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B6, further comprising information transfer means for transferring the stored information on the number of payouts to the first storage means.

According to the feature B7, when the payout command information is determined to be abnormal, the payout of the game balls based on the payout command information is reserved, and when the subsequent payout command information is determined to be normal, the payout is reserved. will be canceled. For example, the possibility of accidental occurrence of the above abnormality due to noise etc. cannot be denied, so if it is confirmed that there is no abnormality in the subsequent payout command information as shown in this feature, By performing a payout, it is possible to suitably prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the strengthening of the crime prevention function or the like.

Feature B8. Main control means (main controller 162) for outputting payout instruction information (prize ball command) based on the ball entry into a ball entry section (for example, general winning hole 81) provided in the game area (game area PE);
A gaming machine comprising payout control means (payout control device 242) for controlling the payout means (payout device 224) so that game balls are paid out based on the input of the payout command information,
The main control means is
A set value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining one set value from among the set values (set 1 to set 3) provided in a plurality of stages corresponding to the expected value of the game ball to be obtained. function to execute change processing) and
Setting value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to main controller 162) operated to change the setting value determined by the setting value determining means;
a first output means for outputting set value information indicating the set value determined by the set value determination means to the payout control means when the set value is changed by the set value change means;
a second output means for outputting set value information indicating the set value determined by the set value determination means to the payout control means at a preset cycle;
The payout control means is
setting value information storage means for storing the setting value information output by the first output means;
information determination means for determining whether or not the setting value information output by the second output means matches the setting value information stored in the setting value information storage means;
When the information determination means determines that the set value information output by the second output means does not match the set value information stored in the set value information storage means, the payout of game balls is restricted. A game machine characterized by comprising a payout regulation means for controlling a payout.

According to the feature B8, the set value determined by the main control means along with the setting change operation or the like is transmitted to the payout control means and stored in the set value information storage section of the payout control means. After that, the set value information is periodically output from the main control means to the payout control means, and it is determined whether or not the set value stored when the setting is changed matches the newly acquired set value. When the set value information does not match, the payout of game balls is restricted. With such a configuration, the cooperation between the main control means and the payout control means can be strengthened, contributing to the improvement of the security function and the reliability of the gaming machine.

Feature B9. If the set value information that should be output by the second output means is not input even after the elapse of the period, the payout regulation means continues the game until at least the set value information is received from the second output means. The game machine according to feature B8, characterized in that the game machine is configured to regulate the putting out of balls.

According to the characteristic B9, when the set value information is not input from the main control means even though the preset period has passed, the payout of game balls is restricted until the set value information is received. becomes. With such a configuration, the crime prevention function shown in feature B8 can be enhanced favorably.

Feature B10. A first control means (main controller 162) that outputs ball entry information (a prize command) based on a ball entry into a ball entry section (for example, a general prize winning port 81) provided in the game area (game area PE); ,
a second control means (payout control device 242) for executing a predetermined control process based on the ball entry information output from the first control means;
a game situation monitoring means (monitoring device 600) for monitoring the game situation based on information from the first control means and the second control means;
The first control means is
A set value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162) for determining one set value from among a plurality of stages (setting 1 to setting 3) of setting values corresponding to the acquisition expected value of the game ball. function to perform change processing) and
setting value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to main controller 162) operated to change the setting value determined by the setting value determining means;
The first control means is
a first output means for outputting specific information indicating the set value determined by the set value determination means to the second control means;
a second output means for outputting specific information indicating the set value determined by the set value determination means to the game situation monitoring means;
The second control means is
specific information storage means for storing the specific information input from the first control means;
a third output means for outputting the specific information stored in the specific information storage means to the game situation monitoring means;
The gaming machine, wherein the game situation monitoring means has comparing means for comparing the specific information input by the second output means and the specific information input by the third output means.

In a game machine having a setting change function, setting values may be changed illegally for the purpose of illegal acquisition of benefits. At this time, if the information input to the monitoring device is tampered with, there is a concern that the fact of fraud will be concealed and it will be difficult to find it. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the specific information indicating the set value is not only input directly from the first control means to the game situation monitoring means, but also sent to the game situation monitoring means via the second control means. is entered. By comparing these pieces of specific information, the game situation monitoring means can detect whether or not the specific information has been tampered with. As a result, the defense function against the fraudulent act described above can be strengthened, and the security function of the gaming machine can be improved.

Feature B11. The first control means is configured to output game ball payout command information as the entering ball information,
The second control means is configured to control the payout means (payout device 224) so that game balls are paid out based on the input of the payout command information,
The first control means outputs specific information to the second control means and the gaming situation monitoring means when outputting the payout command information,
The gaming machine according to feature B10, wherein the second control means outputs specific information to the game status monitoring means when the game balls are put out based on the payout command information.

When the specific information is compared, if the timing is greatly deviated, an erroneous determination may occur when the setting is changed normally. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by adopting a configuration in which specific information is input and output in accordance with a series of movements from ball entry to ball payout, the above timing deviation is suppressed and the certainty of determination results is favorably improved. can be made

It is also possible to apply each technical concept shown in the characteristic group A to the characteristic group B detailed above.

<Characteristic group C>
The following characteristic group C is defined as "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays patterns on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, a Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Various efforts have been made to improve the reliability.However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the construction of the game machine in order to improve the reliability." is.

Feature C1. Main control means (main controller 162) for outputting payout instruction information (prize ball command) based on the ball entry into a ball entry section (for example, general winning hole 81) provided in the game area (game area PE);
A gaming machine comprising payout control means (payout control device 242) for controlling the payout means (payout device 224) so that game balls are paid out based on the input of the payout command information,
The main control means is
A set value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining one set value from among the set values (set 1 to set 3) provided in a plurality of stages corresponding to the expected value of the game ball to be obtained. function to execute processing for modification), and
setting value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main controller 162) operated to change the setting value determined by the setting value determining means;
Equipped with monitoring means (notification/production control device 140 and monitoring device 600) for monitoring the game situation,
The monitoring means
game information storage means (storage unit 604) for storing game information (number of prizes and probability of winning);
Determination means for determining whether or not the game information stored in the game information storage means corresponds to preset reference information (for example, a threshold) function to perform processing) and
Predetermined processing execution means (function for executing abnormality notification start processing in step S1908 in notification/production control device 140) for executing predetermined processing (for example, processing for abnormality notification) based on the determination result by the determination unit have
A gaming machine, wherein the reference information is provided for each of the set values.

A game machine having a setting change function may behave differently depending on the set value due to its characteristics. For this reason, in a configuration in which a game situation is monitored and a predetermined process (for example, abnormality notification) is performed based on the monitoring result (judgment result), when an attempt is made to make a unique judgment for any set value, the judgment It becomes difficult to improve the certainty of the result. For example, when setting common reference information corresponding to all setting values, the range of the reference information becomes large, and it is assumed that it becomes difficult to improve the certainty of the determination result. In this respect, as shown in this feature, if the reference information is provided for each set value, the certainty of the determination result can be improved, and the reliability of the game machine (especially the monitoring device) can be preferably improved. can.

In addition, "predetermined processing execution means (for example, abnormality notification processing) for executing predetermined processing (for example, abnormality notification processing) based on the determination result by the determination device (notification / effect control device 140 abnormality notification start processing in step S1908 function)", for "notification control means (notification/ It is also possible to perform the function of executing the abnormality notification start process of step S1908 in the effect control device 140).

Feature C2. Main control means (main controller 162) for outputting payout instruction information (prize ball command) based on the ball entry into a ball entry section (for example, general winning hole 81) provided in the game area (game area PE);
A gaming machine comprising payout control means (payout control device 242) for controlling the payout means (payout device 224) so that game balls are paid out based on the input of the payout command information,
The main control means is
A set value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining one set value from among the set values (set 1 to set 3) provided in a plurality of stages corresponding to the expected value of the game ball to be obtained. function to execute processing for modification), and
setting value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main controller 162) operated to change the setting value determined by the setting value determining means;
Provided with monitoring means (notification/production control device 140 and monitoring device 600) for monitoring the state of ball entry into the ball entry section,
The monitoring means
a ball entry information storage means (storage unit 604) for storing ball entry information (number of winnings) corresponding to the number of balls entered into the ball entry portion;
Determination means for determining whether or not the ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage means corresponds to preset reference information (e.g., threshold) a function to execute the determination processing of S1904);
Predetermined processing execution means (function for executing abnormality notification start processing in step S1908 in notification/production control device 140) for executing predetermined processing (for example, processing for abnormality notification) based on the determination result by the determination unit have
A gaming machine, wherein the reference information is provided for each of the set values.

In a gaming machine having a setting change function, the behavior of a game ball may differ for each set value, and the probability of a ball entering a ball entry section may vary depending on the set value. For this reason, in a configuration in which a game situation is monitored and a predetermined process (for example, abnormality notification) is performed based on the monitoring result (judgment result), when an attempt is made to make a unique judgment for any set value, the judgment It becomes difficult to improve the certainty of the result. For example, when setting common reference information corresponding to all setting values, the range of the reference information becomes large, and it is assumed that it becomes difficult to improve the certainty of the determination result. In this respect, as shown in this feature, if the reference information is provided for each set value, the certainty of the determination result can be improved, and the reliability of the game machine (especially the monitoring device) can be preferably improved. can.

In addition, "predetermined processing execution means (for example, abnormality notification processing) for executing predetermined processing (for example, abnormality notification processing) based on the determination result by the determination device (notification / effect control device 140 abnormality notification start processing in step S1908 function)", for "notification control means (notification/ It is also possible to perform the function of executing the abnormality notification start process of step S1908 in the effect control device 140).

Feature C3. The monitoring means
Setting value specifying means for specifying the setting value determined by the setting value determining means (for example, a function of specifying the setting value by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140);
According to the setting value specified by the setting value specifying means, reference information switching means for switching the reference information to be referenced (function of executing the threshold setting process of step S1804 in the MPU442 of the notification / effect control device 140) and The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, characterized by having

Simplification of the determination process can be realized by adopting a configuration in which the determination is performed only for the current set value, instead of performing the determination for all the set values given to the gaming machine. This is a preferred configuration for reducing the control load accompanying the addition of the monitoring function.

Feature C4. The game area is provided with, as the ball entry section, a first ball entry section (for example, variable winning device 82) capable of switching between an acceptance state in which game balls can enter and a non-acceptance state in which game balls cannot enter. and
A difference is provided in the frequency at which the first ball-entering portion is switched to the receiving state depending on the set value,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the reference information is provided according to the frequency.

As shown in feature C4, when a variable ball-entering unit is provided with a difference in the frequency of switching to the receiving state depending on the set value, the movement of the ball-entering unit causes the ball to enter the ball-entering unit. There is a difference in the frequency of entering the ball and the frequency of entering the other ball. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by setting the reference information in consideration of the movement of the variable ball entry portion, the technical ideas shown in feature C1 and the like can be preferably embodied.

Feature C5. As the ball-entering portion, the first ball-entering portion and a second ball-entering portion different from the first ball-entering portion (for example, a general winning port 81d) are provided,
The first ball-entering portion is arranged on a predetermined path (right route) along which game balls flow down toward the second ball-entering portion,
The monitoring means has a storage unit that stores ball entry information (number of winnings) corresponding to the number of balls entered into the second ball entry unit,
The determination means has means for determining whether or not the entry information stored in the storage unit corresponds to the reference information,
The gaming machine according to feature C4, wherein the reference information is determined according to the frequency of ball-entering the second ball-entering portion, which differs for each of the set values.

As shown in feature C5, in the configuration in which the variable first ball-entering portion is arranged upstream of the second ball-entering portion, the movement of the first ball-entering portion causes the ball to enter the second ball-entering portion. Differences in ball frequency can occur. Therefore, in monitoring the state of ball entry into the second ball entry section, as shown in this feature, by determining the reference information according to the frequency of ball entry into the second ball entry section, ball entry monitoring→judgment can be suitably improved.

Feature C6. As game states, a first game state and a second game state in which switching to the receiving state of the first ball-entering portion is more likely to occur than the first game state are provided,
the reference information is a threshold value indicating the range of the ball-entering frequency;
The lower limit of the threshold value is determined according to the frequency of ball entry into the second ball-entering portion in the first gaming state, and the upper limit of the threshold value is the second ball-entering portion in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature C5, characterized in that it is determined according to the frequency of entering a ball into.

As shown in feature C6, a first game state in which the first ball-entering portion is relatively unlikely to enter the receiving state and a second game state in which the first ball-entering portion is relatively likely to enter the accepting state are provided. If so, by setting the upper limit/lower limit of the threshold according to the frequency of ball entry into the second ball entry portion in each game state, the certainty of the determination result can be improved.

Feature C7. The set values include a first set value and a second set value that makes it easier for the first ball-entering portion to switch to the receiving state than the first set value,
The reference information is information corresponding to the frequency of ball-entering the first ball-entering portion. 2 criteria information is provided,
Characteristic feature C5, characterized in that the ball-entering frequency associated with the first reference information is set to be higher than the ball-entering frequency associated with the second reference information; or The gaming machine described in C6.

As shown in feature C7, when there is a difference in the frequency of ball-entering the first ball-entering portion depending on the set value, the first reference information is set so as to correspond to the first set value with the low ball-entering frequency. By setting the second reference information so as to correspond to the second set value with a high ball frequency, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

It is also possible to apply each technical idea shown in the feature group A to the feature group B to the feature group C detailed above.

<Characteristic group D>
The feature group D below is defined as "Some game machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays patterns on the display screen. In this type of game machine, for example, Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a win state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Various efforts have been made to improve the reliability.However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the construction of the game machine in order to improve the reliability." is.

Feature D1. Main control means (main controller 162) for outputting payout instruction information (prize ball command) based on the ball entry into a ball entry section (for example, general winning hole 81) provided in the game area (game area PE);
A gaming machine comprising payout control means (payout control device 242) for controlling the payout means (payout device 224) so that game balls are paid out based on the input of the payout command information,
The main control means is
A set value determination means (step by MPU 402 of main controller 162) for determining one set value from among set values having a plurality of stages (set 1 to set 3) corresponding to the expected value of game ball acquisition a function of executing the setting change process of S1313);
setting value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main controller 162) operated to change the setting value determined by the setting value determining means;
A ball entry status monitoring means (notification/production control device 140 and monitoring device 600) for monitoring the ball entry status to the ball entry section,
The ball entry status monitoring means includes:
a ball entry information storage means (storage unit 604) for storing ball entry information (number of winnings) corresponding to the number of balls entered into the ball entry portion;
Determination means for determining whether or not the ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage means corresponds to preset reference information (threshold value) function to execute judgment processing, etc.) and
Predetermined processing execution means (for example, processing for abnormality notification) that executes predetermined processing (for example, processing for abnormality notification) based on the determination result by the determination unit (function for executing abnormality notification start processing etc. in step S2010 )When,
It has a set value storage means (a function of storing the set value in the notification / effect control device 140) for storing the set value determined by the set value determination means,
The gaming machine, wherein the entering ball information storage means stores the entering ball information in a state of being associated with the set value stored in the set value storage means.

If the configuration is such that the ball-entering situation monitoring means monitors the ball-entering situation, for example, when an event occurs in which the ball-entering frequency greatly deviates from the design value due to deformation of a game nail or the like, it can be detected at an early stage. be able to. This is preferable in terms of suppressing disadvantages for the game hall and the players and improving the reliability of the game machine. Here, in a gaming machine having a setting change function, there is a possibility that the behavior of a game ball may differ depending on the set value, and the probability of entering a ball entering section may also differ. In the configuration shown in this feature, the ball entry information is stored in association with the set value. In such a configuration, the entering ball information can be sorted according to the set value, so that it is possible to improve the judgment accuracy when judging whether or not the information corresponds to the reference information. Therefore, it is possible to increase the certainty of the monitoring result in ball entry monitoring and contribute to improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

Feature D2. The determination means has selection means for selecting the entry information associated with the setting value stored in the setting value storage means from among the entry information stored in the entry information storage means. , the gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the determination is made based on the selected entering ball information.

It is important to handle temporary variations in ball entry when monitoring ball entry situations. For example, if the bias in ball entry increases temporarily, it is difficult to identify whether it is due to an accidental factor, but it is possible to calculate the average, etc., using past information. can reduce variability. In other words, it is preferable to secure a certain amount of data to be referred to when performing determination. However, as shown in feature D1, the stored data includes different corresponding set values, so if they are collectively referred to, the certainty of the data is reduced. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that the information corresponding to the same set value as the current set value is selected from the past stored ball entry information and used for determination, the feature D1 The shown effects can be exhibited favorably.

Feature D3. The ball entry information storage means stores the number of game balls entering the ball entry section when a predetermined number of game balls are supplied to the game area as the ball entry information,
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, further comprising means for regulating storage of winning ball information when the set value is changed before reaching the predetermined number.

In a game machine having a setting change function, the timing at which the setting is changed varies. Therefore, it cannot be denied that the setting may be changed in the process of accumulating information (before reaching the predetermined number). In the configuration in which the entry information is stored in association with the set value, even if the data is stored incompletely, the usefulness of the data is low and the storage capacity is compressed. Therefore, as shown in this feature, it is possible to implement a configuration that is practically preferable by restricting the storage of the entering ball information when the setting is changed in the middle.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the entry information storage means defines an upper limit number of pieces of entry information that can be stored for each of the set values.

Even in a gaming machine having a setting change function, setting changes are not always made frequently, and the same setting values may be maintained for a certain period of time. In such a case, there is a concern that if the stored ball entry information is biased due to the set values, the effects shown in the feature D1 and the like will not be exhibited well. For example, even though setting 1 to setting 3 are provided as setting values, if the information in setting 1 is excessively small, when the determination in setting 1 is executed under the situation It is assumed that there will be a shortage of referable data, and the certainty of judgment results will decrease. In this regard, if an upper limit is defined for the number of pieces of entering ball information that can be stored for each set value as shown in the present feature, it is possible to preferably prevent a decrease in certainty of determination due to lack of data.

Feature D5. The entering-ball information storage means has a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the entering-ball information, and when the number of stored entering-ball information reaches an upper limit, It is configured to overwrite the acquired entry information,
Characteristic D1 characterized by having means for determining a storage area to be overwritten according to the number of set values associated with each piece of entry information stored in the entry information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D3.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, for example, when there is insufficient ball entry information at a certain set value and there is too much ball entry information at another set value, the overwrite target is excessive ball entry information. It can be assumed that As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in bias in the number of stored ball entry information for each set value.

Feature D6. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the reference information is provided for each set value.

A game machine having a setting change function may behave differently depending on the set value due to its characteristics. For this reason, in a configuration in which the game situation is monitored and a predetermined process (for example, an abnormality notification process) is performed based on the monitoring result (judgment result), if any set value is to be unambiguously judged, In addition, it becomes difficult to improve the certainty of the determination result. If the reference information is set so as to correspond to all set values, the range of the reference information becomes large, and it is assumed that it becomes difficult to improve the certainty. In this respect, as shown in this feature, if the reference information is provided for each set value, the certainty of the determination result can be improved, and the reliability of the game machine (especially the monitoring device) can be preferably improved. can.

Feature D7. When the setting value corresponding to the entering-ball information stored in the entering-ball information storage means is different from the current setting value, the determination means corrects the stored entering-ball information using the correction value. and means for making the determination based on the entry information corresponding to the current set value and the entry information converted by the information conversion means. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, characterized in that

In a gaming machine having a setting change function, there are various types of setting values to be selected, and the setting values used when making the determination do not necessarily match the setting values of the previously stored ball entry information. Here, according to the configuration shown in this feature, even if a setting value different from the current setting value is associated with the stored samples, the correction is performed so as to match the current setting value. Therefore, it is possible to secure winning information that can be used as a sample for determination regardless of differences in set values. This can contribute to improving the certainty of the determination result.

Feature D8. In the game area, as the ball entering portion, a first ball entering portion (for example, a variable winning device 82) capable of switching between a receiving state in which a game ball can enter and a non-receiving state in which a game ball cannot enter, and the first A second ball entry section (for example, a general winning opening 81d) different from the first ball entry section is provided,
The first ball-entering portion is arranged on a predetermined path (right route) along which game balls flow down toward the second ball-entering portion,
The ball-entering information storage means has a storage unit that stores the ball-entering information (the number of prizes won) corresponding to the number of balls entering the second ball-entering unit,
The determination means has means for determining whether or not the entry information stored in the storage unit corresponds to the reference information,
The gaming machine according to feature D7, wherein the correction value is determined according to the frequency of ball-entering the second ball-entering portion, which differs for each of the set values.

As shown in feature D8, in the configuration in which the variable first ball-entering portion is arranged upstream of the second ball-entering portion, the movement of the first ball-entering portion causes the ball to enter the second ball-entering portion. Differences in ball frequency can occur. Therefore, in monitoring the state of ball entry into the second ball entry section, as shown in this feature, by determining a correction value according to the frequency of ball entry into the second ball entry section, the stored entry It is possible to preferably improve the conversion accuracy when converting the sphere information into information corresponding to the current set value using the correction value.

It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to C to the feature group D detailed above.

<Characteristic group E>
The characteristic group E below is defined as "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays patterns on the display screen. Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a win state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Various efforts have been made to improve the reliability.However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the construction of the game machine in order to improve the reliability." is.

Feature E1. A starting ball entry portion (operation openings 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE),
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section (function for acquiring holding information by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162);
Acquired information storage means (function for storing pending information in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A lottery means (main controller 162) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A gaming machine equipped with a function of executing a win-or-fail judgment process, etc. in the MPU 402 of
Set value determination means for providing a plurality of stages of set values corresponding to expected values of acquisition of game balls, and determining one set value from among these set values (function for executing setting change processing by MPU 402 of main control device 162) When,
Setting value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to main controller 162) operated to change the setting value determined by the setting value determining means;
monitoring information storage means (first storage area 605 in storage unit 604 of monitoring device 600) for storing monitoring information about a game;
Judgment means (MPU 442 of notification/production control device 140) for judging whether or not an abnormality, which is a specific event, has occurred based on the monitoring information stored by the monitoring information storage means and predetermined judgment reference information (threshold value) function to execute judgment processing in ),
When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred by the determination means, a notification means for performing a predetermined notification (for example, abnormality notification) (a function of executing abnormality notification start processing by the MPU 442 of the notification / production control device 140);
Cancellation means for canceling the predetermined notification by the notification means based on the cancellation operation (function for executing abnormality notification end processing in MPU 442 of notification / effect control device 140);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a release count storage means (second storage area 606 in the storage unit 604 of the monitoring device 600) for storing the number of times the predetermined notification is released by the release means.

According to the feature E1, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring information, a predetermined notification is executed in response to the occurrence of the abnormality. As a result, it is possible to quickly take measures against the abnormality and prevent the player, the game hall, and the like from being disadvantaged. Here, if the cause of the abnormality is not resolved, the predetermined notification will be repeated. If the replacement of players, hall managers, etc. is taken into account, it becomes difficult to specify how often the abnormality is repeated. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the predetermined notification is canceled based on the canceling operation, and the number of times the canceling operation has been performed is stored. Therefore, it is possible to know after the fact how many release operations have been performed. As a result, for example, repeated failures (for example, inadequate handling of failures) can be prevented from being overlooked, and the reliability of the gaming machine can be improved.

It should be noted that even if the fraudulent act intentionally cancels the anomaly notification to conceal the fraud, the number of cancellations is stored. As a result, it can be estimated from the number of cancellations stored that there is a possibility that an intentional attempt was made to conceal fraud. Incidentally, for example, in a configuration that stores the number of times an abnormality has occurred or the number of notifications, although it is possible to identify the fact that an abnormality has occurred, it is difficult to identify whether it is due to an accidental factor or an artificial factor. Become. In view of such circumstances, storing the number of cancellations has clear technical significance.

Feature E2. a state specifying means for specifying a state of the gaming machine when the release operation is performed;
a state determination means for determining whether the state of the gaming machine identified by the state identification means is a predetermined state;
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the release count storage means has means for storing the release count when at least the release operation is performed in the predetermined state.

If the state of the gaming machine is taken into consideration when storing the number of cancellations, it is possible to improve the accuracy of estimating whether or not the cancellation operation is fraudulent. For example, when a release operation is being performed in a situation where the release operation is difficult or impossible, it is possible to see that the release operation is likely to be illegal. .

Feature E3. setting value identification means for identifying a setting value before the release operation is performed and a setting value after the release operation is performed;
The game according to feature E1 or feature E2, wherein the release count storage means has means for storing the release count at least when a set value is changed before and after the release operation. machine.

For example, assuming a configuration in which abnormality determination criteria and the like differ depending on set values, it is undeniable that such a difference may be used to cheat the occurrence of an abnormality. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when the set value is changed in accordance with the release operation, the release count is stored. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a release operation suspected of being fraudulent from being mixed with other release operations. This is a preferable configuration for improving the security function of the gaming machine.

Feature E4. a reference information switching means for switching the determination reference information referred to by the determination means based on a predetermined release that is the release operation;
1. Any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the release count storage means has means for storing the release count when the determination reference information is changed in accordance with the predetermined release operation. The gaming machine described in 1.

In a configuration in which the determination criterion information is changed by a predetermined release operation, there is a possibility that the predetermined release operation will be executed in order to suppress fraudulence from becoming conspicuous due to the notification associated with the occurrence of an abnormality. Therefore, by adopting a configuration that stores the number of such release operations, it is possible to prevent a release operation that is suspected of being fraudulent from being mixed with other release operations. This is a preferable configuration for improving the security function of the gaming machine.

Feature E5. According to the setting value determined by the setting value determination means, the reference information switching means for switching the determination reference information (the function of executing the threshold setting process of step S1804 in the MPU442 of the notification / effect control device 140) prepared,
The frequency of entering the ball into the ball entering section is different depending on the set value,
The monitoring information storage means is configured to store, as the monitoring information, ball entry information indicating the number of balls entered into a ball entry section provided in the game area,
The method according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the release count storage means has means for storing the release count when a set value is changed in accordance with a predetermined release operation. game machine.

In a configuration in which the frequency of ball-entering the ball-entering portion differs depending on the set value, the certainty of the determination result can be improved by adopting a configuration in which the determination reference information is switched for each set value. However, in such a configuration, even though it should actually be determined that an abnormality has occurred, by exploiting the switching function of the determination reference information, the act of deceiving the fact is performed. I cannot deny the possibility. Therefore, if the technical idea shown in feature E1 etc. is applied to the configuration shown in this feature, and the setting value (criterion information) is switched in accordance with the cancellation of the notification, it is preferably overlooked. can be suppressed.

Feature E6. Having a first set value and a second set value as the set values,
As the judgment reference information, the first judgment reference information that defines the judgment reference range corresponding to the first set value, and the range that is shifted from the reference range prescribed by the first judgment reference information and second criterion information that defines a criterion range corresponding to the second set value,
The cancellation count storage means generates an abnormality by the judgment means when the entering ball information deviates from the first judgment reference information toward the second judgment reference information under the condition of the first set value. When the judgment reference information is switched from the first judgment reference information to the second judgment reference information in accordance with the cancellation of the predetermined notification based on the predetermined cancellation operation , and the number of times of cancellation is stored.

When the notification is made with the first set value, even if the release operation is simply performed, the abnormality determination→notification is executed immediately upon resuming the game. Assuming a case in which a fraudulent acter considering such circumstances changes the setting value to shift the judgment reference range to the side where it is difficult to be judged to be abnormal, to avoid being notified of an abnormality. It is not preferable that the release operation is mixed with other release operations. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, by configuring to store the number of times of cancellation in such a case, it is possible to suppress the oversight of the cancellation operation that is likely to be for fraudulent purposes, and further improve the crime prevention function. can contribute to

It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature group A to feature group D to the feature group E described in detail above.

<Feature group F>
The following feature group F is defined as "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, a Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a win state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Various efforts have been made to improve the reliability.However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the construction of the game machine in order to improve the reliability." is.

Feature F1. A starting ball entry portion (operation openings 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE),
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section (function for acquiring holding information by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162);
Acquired information storage means (function for storing pending information in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A lottery means (main controller 162) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A gaming machine equipped with a function of executing a win-or-fail judgment process, etc. in the MPU 402 of
A set value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining one set value from among the set values (set 1 to set 3) provided in a plurality of stages corresponding to the expected value of the game ball to be obtained. function to perform change processing) and
Setting value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to main controller 162) operated to change the setting value determined by the setting value determining means;
monitoring information storage means (storage unit 604 of monitoring device 600) for storing monitoring information about games;
Judgment means (MPU 442 of notification/production control device 140) for judging whether or not an abnormality, which is a specific event, has occurred based on the monitoring information stored by the monitoring information storage means and predetermined judgment reference information (threshold value) function to execute judgment processing in ),
When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred by the determination means, a notification means for performing a predetermined notification (for example, abnormality notification) (a function of executing abnormality notification start processing by the MPU 442 of the notification / production control device 140);
Cancellation means for canceling the predetermined notification by the notification means based on a predetermined cancellation operation (function for executing abnormality notification cancellation processing in MPU 402 of main control unit 162);
Initial setting means for setting a predetermined set value as an initial set value when the set value is changed by the set value changing means when the predetermined notification is canceled by the canceling means (main controller 162 A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing setting change processing in an MPU 402.

If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring results of the monitoring information, that effect is notified. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prompt the manager of the game hall or the like to take measures against the abnormality. It is preferable to be able to perform a release operation without eliminating the cause of the abnormality, in order to improve convenience in the game hall. However, with such a configuration, there is a possibility that the player or the game hall may suffer an unexpected disadvantage if the game is played again with the notification canceled without resolving the cause of the occurrence of the abnormality. This is not preferable because it becomes a factor that reduces the reliability of the game machine. The set value is managed in the game hall, and since it is a configuration directly linked to profit, it is easy for the hall manager to pay attention to it. Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the cancellation operation is performed, the initial set value at the time of setting change is forced to the predetermined set value. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the hall manager that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cause of the abnormality from being left as it is, thereby contributing to the improvement of the reliability of the gaming machine.

Feature F2. A starting ball entry portion (operation openings 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE),
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section (function for acquiring holding information by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162);
Acquired information storage means (function for storing pending information in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A lottery means (main controller 162) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A gaming machine equipped with a function of executing a win-or-fail judgment process, etc. in the MPU 402 of
A set value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining one set value from among the set values (set 1 to set 3) provided in a plurality of stages corresponding to the expected value of the game ball to be obtained. function to execute change processing) and
Setting value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to main controller 162) operated to change the setting value determined by the setting value determining means;
monitoring information storage means (storage unit 604 of monitoring device 600) for storing monitoring information about games;
Judgment means (MPU 442 of notification/production control device 140) for judging whether or not an abnormality, which is a specific event, has occurred based on the monitoring information stored by the monitoring information storage means and predetermined judgment reference information (threshold value) function to execute judgment processing in ),
When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred by the determination means, a notification means for performing a predetermined notification (for example, abnormality notification) (a function of executing abnormality notification start processing by the MPU 442 of the notification / production control device 140);
Cancellation means for canceling the predetermined notification by the notification means based on a predetermined cancellation operation (function for executing abnormality notification cancellation processing in MPU 402 of main control unit 162);
Initial setting means for setting an initial setting value when the setting value is changed by the setting value changing means (function for executing setting change processing by MPU 402 of main control device 162);
The initial setting means sets, as the initial setting value, a setting value before the change operation is performed as the initial setting value when the predetermined releasing operation is not performed, and the predetermined releasing operation is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that it has means for setting a predetermined set value as the initial set value when the player has mastered the game.

If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring results of the monitoring information, that effect is notified. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prompt the manager of the game hall or the like to take measures against the abnormality. It is preferable to be able to perform a release operation without eliminating the cause of the abnormality, in order to improve convenience in the game hall. However, with such a configuration, there is a possibility that the player or the game hall may suffer an unexpected disadvantage if the game is played again with the notification canceled without resolving the cause of the occurrence of the abnormality. This is not preferable because it becomes a factor that reduces the reliability of the game machine. The set value is directly linked to profit and is managed in the game hall. Therefore, it is easy for the hall manager to watch. Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the cancel operation is not performed, the setting value before the change operation is taken over as the initial setting value, but if the cancel operation is performed, the initial setting at the time of setting change is taken over. A value is forced to a predetermined set value. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the hall manager that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cause of the abnormality from being left as it is, thereby contributing to the improvement of the reliability of the gaming machine.

Feature F3. having a first set value as the set value and a second set value having the expected acquisition value larger than the first set value;
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the initial setting means is configured to set the second set value as the predetermined set value.

If the predetermined set value in the case of forced change is a set value that is frequently used in the game hall, there is concern that confusion will easily occur in identifying whether or not the forced change has occurred. . Here, in the game hall, the chances of using the set values advantageous to the player are less than the chances of using the set values unfavorable to the player. In the configuration shown in this feature, the second set value, which is relatively advantageous, is set as the predetermined set value in consideration of such circumstances. Thereby, the confusion mentioned above can be suppressed.

Feature F4. The set values include a first set value that is advantageous to the game hall and a second set value that is advantageous to the player,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the initial setting means is configured to set the second set value as the predetermined set value.

If the predetermined set value in the case of forced change is a set value that is frequently used in the game hall, there is concern that confusion will easily occur in identifying whether or not the forced change has occurred. . Here, in the game hall, the chances of using the set values advantageous to the player are less than the chances of using the set values unfavorable to the player. In the configuration shown in this characteristic, the second set value that is advantageous to the player is set as the predetermined set value in consideration of such circumstances. Thereby, the confusion mentioned above can be suppressed.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the initial setting means is configured to set, as the predetermined set value, a setting with the largest expected acquisition value among a plurality of set values. .

If the predetermined set value in the case of forced change is a set value that is frequently used in the game hall, there is concern that confusion will easily occur in identifying whether or not the forced change has occurred. . Here, in the game hall, the chances of using the set values advantageous to the player are less than the chances of using the set values unfavorable to the player. In the configuration shown in this characteristic, the second set value that is most advantageous to the player is set as the predetermined set value in consideration of such circumstances. Thereby, the confusion mentioned above can be suppressed.

Feature F6. According to the setting value determined by the setting value determination means, the reference information switching means for switching the determination reference information (the function of executing the threshold setting process of step S1804 in the MPU442 of the notification / effect control device 140) prepared,
The frequency of entering the ball into the ball entering portion is different depending on the set value,
The monitoring information storage means stores, as the monitoring information, ball entry information indicating the number of balls entered into a ball entry section provided in the game area. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

2. Description of the Related Art In a game machine in which a game ball flows down a game area, there is a possibility that the game nail or the like disposed in the game area is deformed or the like by coming into contact with the game nail or the like during cleaning or maintenance. When the flow path of the game ball changes due to such deformation, ball entry occurs at a frequency higher than the original design value, or ball entry occurs at a frequency lower than the original design value. This causes a disadvantage to the game hall and the players. Therefore, by configuring the monitoring information storage means to store the incoming ball information, it is possible to identify the occurrence of the inconvenience (abnormality) as described above. However, ball entry does not always occur at a constant frequency, and a certain amount of variation occurs when the monitoring period is short. On the other hand, if the monitoring period is set long, it is possible to suppress the variation, but it takes time to identify the occurrence of the inconvenience. In view of such circumstances, a configuration in which notification based on the result of abnormality determination can be arbitrarily canceled has the advantage of being able to take into consideration the certainty of the determination result and the improvement of responsiveness. However, in such a configuration, since it is difficult to visually identify the abnormality itself, there is a possibility that the fact may be forgotten after a certain amount of time has passed since the notification was cancelled. By applying the technical concept shown in feature F1 to such a configuration, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

Feature F7. Having a first set value and a second set value as the set values,
As the judgment reference information, the first judgment reference information that defines the judgment reference range corresponding to the first set value, and the range that is shifted from the reference range prescribed by the first judgment reference information and second criterion information that defines a criterion range corresponding to the second set value,
the predetermined release operation is a setting change operation by the setting value changing means;
The initial setting means determines that an abnormality has occurred by the determination means because the entering ball information deviates from the first determination standard information toward the second determination standard information under the condition of the first set value. When the determination criterion information is switched from the first determination criterion information to the second determination criterion information in accordance with the cancellation of the predetermined notification based on the predetermined cancellation operation, The gaming machine according to feature F6, wherein the predetermined set value is set as the initial set value.

When the notification is made with the first set value, even if the release operation is simply performed, the abnormality determination→notification is immediately executed. In consideration of such circumstances, if a fraudulent person tries to avoid anomaly notification by also changing the setting value to shift the judgment reference range to the side where it is difficult to judge as an abnormality, the initial setting value is set to is set. As a result, it is possible to suppress oversight of a release operation that is likely to be performed for fraudulent purposes, thereby contributing to further improvement of the crime prevention function.

Feature F8. The setting value determination means has start-up determination means for determining the setting value based on power-on of the game machine,
When the predetermined release operation is not performed, the start-up determining means determines the set value before the power shutdown as a new set value, and when the predetermined release operation is performed, The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, further comprising means for determining the predetermined set value as a new set value.

Settings are not necessarily changed every day, and the set values once determined may be maintained for a certain number of days. If such circumstances are taken into consideration, such circumstances can be suitably dealt with by carrying out inheritance/forcible change of the set values when determining the set values at power-on as shown in this feature.

Feature F9. A starting ball entry portion (operation openings 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE),
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section (function for acquiring holding information by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162);
Acquired information storage means (function for storing pending information in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A lottery means (main controller 162) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A gaming machine equipped with a function of executing a win-or-fail judgment process, etc. in the MPU 402 of
A set value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining one set value from among the set values (set 1 to set 3) provided in a plurality of stages corresponding to the expected value of the game ball to be obtained. function to execute change processing) and
Setting value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to main controller 162) operated to change the setting value determined by the setting value determining means;
monitoring information storage means (storage unit 604 of monitoring device 600) for storing monitoring information about games;
Determining means for determining whether or not an abnormality, which is a specific event, has occurred based on the monitoring information stored by the monitoring information storage means (function for executing determination processing by the MPU 442 of the notification/production control device 140);
When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred by the determination means, a notification means for performing a predetermined notification (for example, abnormality notification) (a function of executing abnormality notification start processing by the MPU 442 of the notification / production control device 140);
Cancellation means for canceling the predetermined notification by the notification means based on a predetermined cancellation operation (function for executing abnormality notification cancellation processing in MPU 402 of main control unit 162);
Initial setting means for setting an initial setting value when the setting value is changed by the setting value changing means (function for executing setting change processing by MPU 402 of main control device 162);
The initial setting means sets, as the initial setting value, a setting value before the change operation is performed as the initial setting value when the predetermined releasing operation is not performed, and the predetermined releasing operation is performed. A game machine characterized by comprising means for setting a setting value as the initial setting value different from the setting value before the change operation is performed as the initial setting value when the change operation is performed.

If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring results of the monitoring information, that effect is notified. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prompt the manager of the game hall or the like to take measures against the abnormality. It is preferable to be able to perform a release operation without eliminating the cause of the abnormality, in order to improve convenience in the game hall. However, with such a configuration, there is a possibility that the player or the game hall may suffer an unexpected disadvantage if the game is played again with the notification canceled without resolving the cause of the occurrence of the abnormality. This is not preferable because it becomes a factor that reduces the reliability of the game machine. The set value is directly linked to profit and is managed in the game hall. Therefore, it is easy for the hall manager to watch. Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the cancel operation is not performed, the setting value before the change operation is taken over as the initial setting value, but if the cancel operation is performed, the initial setting at the time of setting change is taken over. A value is forced to a predetermined set value. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the hall manager that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cause of the abnormality from being left as it is, thereby contributing to the improvement of the reliability of the gaming machine.

It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to E to the feature group F described in detail above.

<Characteristic group G>
The feature group G below is defined as "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays patterns on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, a Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a special game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1). However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention to games." It was done with a task.

Feature G1. A starting ball entry portion (operation openings 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE),
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section (function for acquiring holding information by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162);
Acquired information storage means (function for storing pending information in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A lottery means (main controller) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (e.g. opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. 162 of the MPU 402 to execute the acceptance/rejection determination process, etc.);
a pattern display device (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and capable of displaying a plurality of patterns (symbol rows Z1 to Z3) on the display screen;
Display control means (annunciation/effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for stopping and displaying the patterns so as to form a pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means after the patterns are variably displayed;
A game state in which the game state is shifted to the special game state after the pattern is stopped and displayed by the display control means when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the special game state. Transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in MPU 402 of main control device 162);
A set value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining one set value from among the set values (set 1 to set 3) provided in a plurality of stages corresponding to the expected value of the game ball to be obtained. function to execute change processing) and
A set value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main controller 162) operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means,
The display control means is
When the winning result is obtained in the lottery by the lottery means, after starting the variable display of the symbols, the final stop design among the designs with the possibility of establishing the first combination of symbols corresponding to the winning result. In the situation where the other symbols are stopped and displayed, the change to the special game state is notified by stop-displaying the first symbol combination through reach-variation display for variably displaying the final stop symbol. 1st notification means (function to execute hit reach in MPU 442 of notification / production control device 140),
When the lottery by the lottery results in a non-winning result that does not correspond to the transition to the special game state, after starting the fluctuation display of the pattern, a second game corresponding to the non-winning result is performed through the reach fluctuation display. A second notification means for notifying that the special game state will not be entered by stopping and displaying the pattern combination (function for executing out-reach by the MPU 442 of the notification/production control device 140),
Suggestion means for suggesting the set value determined by the set value determination means when the notification is executed by the second notification means (function for executing setting suggestion by the notification/production control device 140) A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In a game machine having a setting change function, the degree of advantage changes depending on the set value, so playing a game while guessing the set value is one of the pleasures. Here, when the reach variation display is executed, the player's attention to the game tends to be high. By adopting a configuration in which a setting value is suggested (setting suggestion) when the player's attention is high, it is possible to reduce the chances that the setting suggestion is overlooked.

In addition, when the reach variation display is executed, there is a possibility that the winning result will be announced through the reach variation display, so the degree of attention to the effect increases. However, if a non-winning result is announced in a state in which the degree of attention is high in this way, there is a possibility that the degree of attention to the game will greatly decrease as the sense of expectation decreases. In this regard, by adopting a configuration in which setting suggestion is performed along with the reach variation display as shown in this feature, it is possible to suppress a large decrease in the degree of attention at the time of a non-winning result.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the suggestion means makes the suggestion on the display screen of the picture display device.

As shown in feature G2, in the configuration in which the result of the lottery is clearly indicated by the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display screen, when the reach variation display is executed, the player's attention is focused on the game area (specifically, the game area flows down). It is easy to move from the game ball) to the display screen. Therefore, if the setting suggestion described above is executed on the display screen, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the setting suggestion is overlooked. As a result, the effect shown in feature G1 can be favorably exhibited.

Feature G3. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2, wherein the suggestion means makes the suggestion after the reach fluctuation display is displayed.

In a configuration in which the winning result is notified via the reach variation display, the shift to the reach variation display increases the degree of attention to the pattern variation display. In this way, if the configuration is such that setting suggestions are made under a situation where the degree of attention is high, it is possible to suitably reduce the above-mentioned chances of overlooking.

Feature G4. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, wherein the suggestion means makes the suggestion along with the stop display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the lottery.

In a configuration in which the lottery result is clearly indicated by the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display screen, there is a possibility that the degree of attention will suddenly decrease when it becomes clear that the lottery result has not been won. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which setting suggestions can occur at such timings, it is possible to suitably suppress such a decrease in the degree of attention.

Feature G5. After stop-displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the lottery result, the display control means performs a fixed display (final stop display) in which the picture combination is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (fixed display period). It is configured to run
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein the suggestion means makes the suggestion during the predetermined period.

In a configuration in which the lottery result is clearly indicated by the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display screen, there is a possibility that the degree of attention will suddenly decrease when it becomes clear that the lottery result has not been won. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which setting suggestions can occur at such timings, it is possible to suitably suppress such a decrease in the degree of attention.

Feature G6. Any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that the suggestion means has a continuation means for continuing the suggestion started in the previous game round across the next game round. The game machine described.

It is feared that the possibility of overlooking the setting suggestion described above increases due to the shortening of the execution period. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the setting suggestion started in the previous game round can be continued across the next game round, so that such an overlooked opportunity can be reduced. For example, when it is assumed that the game rounds progress one after another, it is preferable to improve the operation rate of the gaming machine. However, the player's inability to stop the game round at any desired timing can be a factor in missing setting suggestions. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed appropriately.

Feature G7. The obtained information storage means can store a plurality of the special information,
The lottery means sequentially performs the lottery for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
The continuation means is configured to continue the suggestion across the next game round when the special information corresponding to the next game round is stored before the previous game round ends. The gaming machine according to feature G6, characterized in that

According to the feature G7, since the setting suggestion period is extended by accumulating the special information, it is possible to encourage the shooting of game balls and contribute to the improvement of the operation rate of the gaming machine.

Feature G8. The obtained information storage means can store a plurality of the special information,
The lottery means sequentially performs the lottery for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
The suggestion means has execution period determination means for determining the execution period of the suggestion based on the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the feature G8, it is assumed that the player who wants to confirm the setting suggestions will play the game expecting that the setting suggestions will be made as long as possible. Here, if the configuration is such that the setting suggestion execution period is determined by the number of stored special information, the number of the stored special information is set to a number that is advantageous to the user as much as possible so that the setting suggestion will continue for a long time. Since the game is played aiming at such, it can contribute to the suppression of the monotony of the game.

Feature G9. The suggesting means, when the symbol combination corresponding to the non-winning result is stop-displayed through the reach variation display by the second notification means, sets the symbol combination to the symbol combination corresponding to the suggestion. A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G8, characterized by having means for suggesting a set value.

As shown in feature G9, if setting suggestions are executed using a non-winning result picture combination, information on setting suggestions may be included when a non-winning result is indicated. It is assumed that the player will pay attention to the symbol combination. According to this configuration, it is possible to preferably exhibit the effect of improving the attention level described above.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "the suggesting means, when the symbol combination corresponding to the non-winning result is stopped and displayed through the reach variation display by the second reporting means, The game machine according to any one of features G1 to G8, characterized by having a means for making a combination of patterns corresponding to the result and the suggestion."

Feature G10. The obtained information storage means can store a plurality of the special information,
The lottery means sequentially performs the lottery for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
After stop-displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the lottery result, the display control means performs a fixed display (final stop display) in which the picture combination is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (fixed display period). It is configured to run
The suggesting means, when the symbol combination corresponding to the non-winning result is stop-displayed through the reach variation display by the second notification means, sets the symbol combination to the symbol combination corresponding to the suggestion. has a means of suggesting a set value,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, wherein the suggestion means ends the suggestion when the predetermined period of time has elapsed.

In the case where setting suggestions are made according to the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed, there is a possibility that a player who does not want to miss the setting suggestions may perform irregular beating such that the game progresses one by one. It is assumed that this will hinder the smooth progress of the game and the improvement of the operation rate of the game machine. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, setting suggestion ends when the fixed period elapses. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that the game is unnecessarily delayed due to fear of missing.

Feature G11. As the normal game state, the first normal game state (normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode) and the first normal game state are set so that the frequency of ball entry into the starting ball entry portion is higher than that of the first normal game state. A second normal game state (normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode) is provided,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G10, wherein the suggestion means is configured to make the suggestion in the first normal game state.

In the configuration shown in feature G11, the game progresses more smoothly in the second normal game state than in the first normal game state. In a situation where the game is rapidly progressing in the second normal game state, it is assumed that the player's attention is likely to immediately turn to the next game round when the winning result is non-winning. Even if setting suggestions are made in such a situation, it is feared that the chances of them being overlooked increase. In view of such circumstances, it is said that the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suppressed by adopting a configuration in which setting suggestions are made in the first normal game state in which the game progresses relatively slowly, as shown in this feature. It makes technical sense.

Feature G12. As the lottery results by the lottery means, a first winning result (for example, a normal jackpot result) and a second winning result (for example, a probability variable jackpot result) more advantageous to the player than the first winning result are provided,
The display control means stop-displays the pattern combination corresponding to the first winning result when the winning result is the first winning result, and displays the pattern combination corresponding to the second winning result when the winning result is the second winning result. Having a means for stopping display,
Characteristic features G1 through G1, characterized in that said suggesting means has means for executing said suggesting when a reach variation display is executed in which there is a possibility that a pattern combination corresponding to said second winning result will be established. The gaming machine according to any one of features G11.

The more the player's expectation increases, the greater the disappointment when the player is notified of the non-winning result. This is not preferable because it causes a decrease in motivation to play. In view of such circumstances, as shown in this feature, setting suggestion is executed by the reach fluctuation display in which there is a possibility that the pattern combination corresponding to the second winning result may be established. It is preferable in terms of alleviating the decrease in the desire to play when it becomes.

Feature G13. As the reach variation display, a first reach variation display and a second reach variation display with a higher expectation of winning results than the first reach variation display are provided,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G12, wherein the suggesting means has means for performing the suggesting in the second reach fluctuation display.

The higher the degree of expectation for the winning result, the higher the reach fluctuation display, the greater the disappointment when the notification of the non-winning result is made (so-called intense heat removal). This is not preferable because it causes a decrease in motivation to play. In view of such circumstances, as shown in this feature, the configuration of executing the setting suggestion in the second reach fluctuation display is effective in alleviating the decline in the gaming motivation when the result is a non-winning result. preferable.

It should be noted that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to F to the feature group G described in detail above.

<Characteristic group H>
The following characteristic group H is defined as "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, a Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a win state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a special game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1). However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention to games." It was done with a task.

Feature H1. A starting ball entry portion (operation openings 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE),
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section (function for acquiring holding information by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162);
Acquired information storage means (function for storing pending information in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A lottery means (main controller 162) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A function of executing the success/failure determination process, etc. at the MPU 402 of the
A pattern display device (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and capable of displaying a plurality of patterns on the display screen;
Display control means (annunciation/effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for stopping and displaying the patterns so as to form a pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means after the patterns are variably displayed;
A game state in which the game state is shifted to the special game state after the pattern is stopped and displayed by the display control means when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the special game state. Transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in MPU 402 of main control device 162);
A set value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining one set value from among the set values (set 1 to set 3) provided in a plurality of stages corresponding to the expected value of the game ball to be obtained. function to execute change processing) and
A set value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main controller 162) operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means,
The display control means is
When the winning result is obtained in the lottery by the lottery means, the final stop design among the designs with the possibility of establishing the first combination of symbols corresponding to the winning result after starting the variable display of the designs. In the situation where the other symbols are stopped and displayed, the first symbol combination is stopped and displayed through the reach fluctuation display that variably displays the final stop symbol, and the second indicating that the special game state will be entered. a first notification means for performing 1 notification;
When the lottery by the lottery results in a non-winning result that does not correspond to the transition to the special game state, after starting the fluctuation display of the pattern, the second game corresponding to the non-winning result is performed through the reach fluctuation display. a second notification means for executing a second notification indicating that the special game state is not to be entered by stop-displaying the combination of symbols;
Suggestion means for suggesting the set value determined by the set value determination means (function for executing setting suggestion by notification/production control device 140),
The suggesting means is
Execution number storage means for storing the number of times the second notification is executed by the second notification means (function for storing the number of times of execution of the outreach reach in the notification / effect control device 140);
decision means for deciding whether or not to execute the suggestion based on the number of execution times stored by the number-of-execution storage means (a function of executing setting suggestion decision processing by the MPU 442 of the notification/production control device 140); A game machine characterized by having:

In the gaming machine of the type described above, expectations for a special game state increase due to execution of the reach variation display. However, even if the reach variation display is executed, it does not necessarily shift to the special game state, and there are cases where the transition to the special game state does not occur. The continuation of such an event becomes a factor that lowers the player's willingness to play. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, it is determined whether or not the setting value suggestion (setting suggestion) is executed based on the number of times the non-winning result is notified through the reach fluctuation display (the number of times the second notification is performed). is determined. Therefore, even if the reach fluctuation display fails, it is possible to give the player the impression that the suggestion of setting is approaching, thereby suppressing a decrease in motivation for playing the game. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature H2. Lottery number storage means for storing the number of times the lottery is executed by the lottery means,
When the number of lotteries by the lottery means is a predetermined number of times, the propriety determining means has a higher possibility of determining to execute the suggestion than when the number of lotteries is less than the predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to feature H1, which is configured to be taller.

According to the characteristic H2, when the reach fluctuation display is not achieved, the setting suggestion is likely to be executed as the number increases. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play even when the normal game state continues.

Feature H3. The gaming machine according to feature H2, wherein the acceptance/rejection determining means is configured such that the predetermined number of times decreases as the number of times of lottery increases.

In a configuration in which expectations for setting suggestions increase due to reach fluctuation display→non-winning result, the player's motivation to play may decrease as the game progresses without the reach fluctuation display being executed. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the setting suggestion threshold becomes lower as the number of lottery→non-winning results increases, it is possible to alleviate the decrease in the willingness to play when the reach fluctuation display does not occur.

Feature H4. Characteristic feature H3, wherein the suggesting means has erasing means for erasing the information stored in the execution frequency storage means when the first notification is executed by the first notification means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature H4, the number of times of execution is reset by executing the first notification (that is, by obtaining a winning result). As a result, it is possible to suppress frequent setting suggestions.

Feature H5. The predetermined number of times is provided for each of the set values,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H2 to H4, wherein a difference is provided so that the predetermined number of times increases as the expected value of acquisition of the game ball increases.

The fact that the setting suggestions are not executed for a long time can be a factor in lowering the player's desire to play. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is provided in which a difference is provided so that the setting value that is advantageous to the player increases the predetermined number of times, which is the reference for the setting suggestion, the setting value is advantageous to the player when the setting suggestion does not occur. It is possible to increase the expectation for the set value, which can contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

Feature H6. As the reach variation display, a first reach variation display and a second reach variation display that is more likely to be the first notification than the first reach variation display are provided,
Any of feature H1 to feature H5, wherein the execution count storage means is configured to store the number of times the second notification corresponding to the second reach variation display is executed by the second notification means. or the game machine according to one.

According to the feature H6, it is possible to suitably alleviate the feeling of loss when the reach fluctuation display, which is highly expected, is not performed.

Feature H7. A first state in which the decision to execute the suggestion is made by the propriety decision means with a relatively low probability, and a second state in which the probability of deciding to execute the suggestion is relatively high are provided. and
lottery number storage means for storing the number of times the lottery is executed by the lottery means;
A switching unit for switching between the first state and the second state based on the number of lotteries stored in the lottery number storage unit. game machine.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, depending on the number of lotteries, there are sections in which setting suggestions are likely to occur and sections in which setting suggestions are unlikely to occur. As a result, it is possible to enhance the sharpness when the game is played in anticipation of setting suggestions.

It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to G to the feature group H detailed above.

<Characteristic group I>
The following characteristic group I is defined as "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays patterns on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, a Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a win state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (see, for example, Patent Document 1). However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the construction of the game machine in order to improve the crime prevention performance.” .

Features I1. A main control device (main control device 162) that executes the main control related to the game,
A pattern display device (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display screen;
A display control device (notification / production control device 140 and display control device 410) that controls display of the pattern display device under the control of the main control device,
The main controller is
Information acquisition means (by MPU 402 of main controller 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry portion (operation openings 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE) function to obtain pending information), and
Acquired information storage means (function for storing pending information in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Transition determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information (a function of executing a correctness determination process or the like by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162);
The game state is changed to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the fact that the result of the determination by the transition determination means corresponds to the transition information. ) to shift to the game state transition means (function to execute the game state transition processing in the MPU402 of the main control device 162),
It is assumed that one game cycle is when the game cycle motion is terminated by a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means after the game cycle motion is started. A game turn control means (a function of executing display control by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display portion for the operation port of the main display unit 87) so that the
execution period setting means for determining the execution period of the game cycle action based on the determination result of the transition determination means (function for determining the variable display time by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
transmitting means for transmitting execution period information corresponding to the execution period set by the execution period setting means to the display control device (a function of outputting a variation start command by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
The display control device includes variable display period setting means for setting the variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display device based on the execution period information received from the main control device. function to set the variable display time),
A set value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162) for determining one set value from among a plurality of stages (setting 1 to setting 3) of setting values corresponding to the acquisition expected value of the game ball. function to execute fluctuation processing) and
A set value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main controller 162) operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means,
As the execution period, a common execution period that is common to each of the set values and a unique execution period that is specific to each of the set values are provided;
The display control device is provided with a suggesting means (a function of executing the setting suggestion by the notification/effect control device 140) for suggesting the setting value when execution period information indicating the inherent execution period is received. A game machine characterized by

According to the feature I1, the execution period information transmitted from the main control device with the start of the game rotation operation includes information indicating the set value. According to this configuration, it is possible to instruct whether or not to suggest a set value (suggestion of setting) by the main controller. Unauthorized execution of setting suggestions can be suppressed.

In addition, since the execution period information transmitted from the main controller serves as the basis for setting suggestions, there is no need for the display control device to store and hold information indicating setting values. A display control device with a low defense function that does not need to store setting values is advantageous in suppressing leakage of information indicating setting values.

Furthermore, since the execution period information periodically transmitted from the main control unit also serves as information indicating the setting value, compared with a configuration in which information indicating the setting value is separately transmitted, it is possible to target the information. It is possible to make it difficult to illegally acquire information.

Feature I2. The suggesting means is characterized in that, when the peculiar execution period is set as the execution period, the suggestion is executed in a game round executed in the peculiar execution period. The gaming machine described in I1.

According to feature I2, when the execution period information indicating the peculiar execution period is received from the main control device, the suggestion is executed in the game round executed in the peculiar execution period. In such a configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult to illegally read the set values from the display control device, compared to the configuration in which suggestions are carried over to later game rounds.

Feature I3. When the display control device receives the execution period information indicating the unique execution period, the display control device provides the execution period information and information indicating a current set value based on the execution period information until the corresponding game cycle ends. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2, characterized in that it has means for erasing .

According to feature I3, when the execution period information indicating the inherent execution period is received from the main controller, the execution period information and the information indicating the current set value specified therefrom are erased before the next game round. It will happen. That is, the information indicating the setting value is not carried over to other game rounds. By limiting the handling period of the information indicating the setting value in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally read the setting value from the display control device.

Feature I4. each of the common execution period and the unique execution period corresponds to a predetermined variable display executed by the picture display device;
Characteristic features I1 to I1, characterized in that a period corresponding to the predetermined variable display in the unique execution period is set to be longer than a period corresponding to the predetermined variable display in the common execution period. The gaming machine according to any one of features I3.

According to feature I4, since the variable display related to the common execution period and the variable display related to the unique execution period are common, it becomes difficult to specify the set value from the difference in the appearance of the variable display.

In addition, especially in combination with the feature I3, since a difference is provided so that the specific execution period is longer, the execution period of the setting suggestion is limited to the configuration in which the setting suggestion is executed only for the corresponding game round. easier to earn.

Feature I5. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, wherein the display control device has regulation means for regulating the suggestion by the suggestion means when a predetermined regulation condition is satisfied. .

According to the feature I5, for example, depending on the game situation or the like, the suggestion can be restricted by the judgment of the display control device side. As a result, excessive suggestion can be suppressed.

Feature I6. each of the common execution period and the unique execution period corresponds to a predetermined variable display executed by the picture display device;
The period corresponding to the predetermined variable display in the common execution period is configured to be a period recognized by the player as being the same as the period corresponding to the predetermined variable display in the unique execution period. The game machine according to feature I5, characterized in that

In the case where the characteristic execution period is received as shown in feature I5 and the suggestion can be avoided, the setting value cannot be estimated from a slight difference in period when the predetermined variable display is executed. I don't like it. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the common execution period and the specific execution period are configured to be recognized as the same, the occurrence of such a problem can be preferably suppressed.

Feature I7. Feature I5 characterized in that the beginning portion of the variable display corresponding to the common execution period and the beginning portion of the variable display corresponding to the unique execution period are configured so that the overview of the variable display is common. Or the gaming machine according to feature I6.

In the configuration having the feature I5 or the like, it is possible to specify the presence or absence of setting suggestions, etc., by counting the variable display time in the pattern display device. However, as shown in this feature, if the beginning of the variable display is made common, it is possible to make it difficult to count the execution period aiming at the game round in which setting suggestions may occur. As a result, it is possible to suppress the presence or absence of the setting suggestion from being specified even in the case where the setting suggestion is partially restricted on the display control device side.

Feature I8. A first execution period and a second execution period longer than the first execution period are provided as the common execution period,
Characteristic feature I5 to characteristic feature I5 characterized in that the unique execution period is configured to be a period recognized by the player as being the same as when the variable display corresponding to the second execution period is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of I7.

When the common execution period includes the first execution period and the second execution period, the difference between the common execution period and the unique execution period is reduced by setting the unique execution period based on the relatively long second execution period. can be made difficult to identify by visual observation or the like.

Feature I9. The obtained information storage means can store a plurality of the special information,
The transition determination means is configured to sequentially perform transition determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information,
The display control device has means for notifying the judgment result by stop-displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the judgment result by the transition judging means, and maintaining the pattern combination until the start of the next game round,
The suggesting means, when execution period information indicating the peculiar execution period is received, executes the suggestion by assuming that the symbol combination to be stopped and displayed corresponds to the peculiar execution period,
Even if execution period information indicating the inherent execution period is received from the main control device, the regulation means, when no subsequent special information is stored, suggests that the predetermined regulation condition is met. The gaming machine according to any one of features I5 to I8, characterized in that it is configured to regulate the

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the unique execution period is specified, if the subsequent special information is not stored, the pattern combination corresponding to the setting suggestion is excluded from the target of the stop display. . As a result, it is possible to encourage the player who expects the setting suggestion to refrain from the act of wastefully delaying the game (for example, irregular beating), which contributes to the improvement of the operation rate of the gaming machine. Also, for example, by avoiding the symbol combination corresponding to the suggested setting from being left undisplayed, it is possible to suppress excessive reliance on the suggested setting and contribute to making the game sounder.

Feature I10. As one of the variable displays, a reach variable display is provided,
The unique execution period is a period corresponding to the reach fluctuation display,
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I9, wherein the suggestion means has means for executing the suggestion on the display screen.

When the reach variation display is executed, expectations for transition to the special game state increase, so the player's attention tends to turn to the reach variation display. By executing the suggestion in a situation where the player's degree of attention is high, it is possible to reduce the chances of the suggestion being overlooked.

Feature I11. The obtained information storage means can store a plurality of the special information,
The transition determination means is configured to sequentially perform transition determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information,
Any one of characteristics I1 to I10, characterized in that the possibility of setting the unique execution period increases as the number of pending information stored in the obtained information storage means increases. or the game machine according to one.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, it is assumed that a player playing the game expecting setting suggestions will play the game with the number of stored special information as large as possible. As a result, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the operation rate of the gaming machine.

In addition, as shown in feature I1, in a configuration in which the execution period includes information on setting suggestions, setting suggestions can be ascertained by counting the execution periods. In this case, since it is difficult to count when the game rounds progress continuously, there is concern that a delaying action may be performed so that the game rounds do not progress continuously. This hinders efforts to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by increasing the probability that the unique execution period is set when the number of pending information increases (that is, when the game cycle progresses continuously), the delay action can be avoided. It is possible to suppress the decline in the operating rate of the game machine.

Feature I12. A main control device (main control device 162) that executes the main control related to the game,
A pattern display device (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display screen;
A display control device (notification / production control device 140 and display control device 410) that controls display of the pattern display device under the control of the main control device,
The main controller is
Information acquisition means (by MPU 402 of main controller 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry portion (operation openings 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE) function to obtain pending information), and
Acquired information storage means (function for storing pending information in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Transition determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information (a function of executing a correctness determination process or the like by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162);
The game state is changed to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the fact that the result of the determination by the transition determination means corresponds to the transition information. ) to shift to the game state transition means (function to execute the game state transition processing in the MPU402 of the main control device 162),
It is assumed that one game cycle is when the game cycle motion is terminated by a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means after the game cycle motion is started. A game turn control means (a function of executing display control by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display portion for the operation port of the main display unit 87) so that the
execution period setting means for determining the execution period of the game cycle action based on the determination result of the transition determination means (function for determining the variable display time by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
transmitting means for transmitting execution period information corresponding to the execution period set by the execution period setting means to the display control device (a function of outputting a variation start command by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
The display control device includes variable display period setting means for setting the variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display device based on the execution period information received from the main control device. function to set the variable display time),
A set value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining one set value from among the set values (set 1 to set 3) provided in a plurality of stages corresponding to the expected value of the game ball to be obtained. function to execute fluctuation processing) and
A set value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main controller 162) operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means,
The set values include a first set value and a second set value that is smaller than the first set value, and
As the execution period, a common execution period that is common to each of the set values and a unique execution period that is specific to each of the set values are provided;
The first execution period is set as the execution period when the first set value is set as the set value, and the first execution period is set as the execution period when the second set value is set as the set value. means for setting one execution period or a second execution period;
The display control device includes a suggesting means (a function of executing the setting suggestion by the notification/production control device 140) for suggesting the setting value when execution period information indicating the second execution period is received. A game machine characterized by

According to the feature I12, the execution period information transmitted from the main controller with the start of the game rotation operation includes information indicating the set value. According to this configuration, it is possible to instruct whether or not to suggest a set value (suggestion of setting) by the main controller. Unauthorized execution of setting suggestions can be suppressed.

In addition, since the execution period information transmitted from the main controller serves as the basis for setting suggestions, there is no need for the display control device to store and hold information indicating setting values. A display control device with a low defense function that does not need to store setting values is advantageous in suppressing leakage of information indicating setting values.

Furthermore, since the execution period information periodically transmitted from the main control unit also serves as information indicating the setting value, compared with a configuration in which information indicating the setting value is separately transmitted, it is possible to target the information. It is possible to make it difficult to illegally acquire information.

It is also possible to apply each technical idea shown in the feature group A to the feature group H to the feature group I described in detail above.

<Characteristic group J>
The following characteristic group J is defined as "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays patterns on the display screen. A lottery is executed to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, with the winning of a prize in the ball entry section, and if the lottery is won, a specific pattern combination etc. The final stop display is displayed, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (see, for example, Patent Document 1). , there is still room for improvement in terms of improving the reliability of the configuration of the game machine."

Feature J1. A set value setting means (main controller 162 and a function of executing various processes for changing settings in the monitoring device 600);
A change operation means (for example, a setting key switch 608 attached to the monitoring device 600, a setting change switch 609, etc.) operated to change the setting value set by the setting value setting means,
The change operation means has a first operation section (setting key switch 608) and a second operation section (setting change switch 609) that can be switched between a non-operating state and an operating state,
The setting value setting means is
means for switching a control state of the game machine from a prohibition state for prohibiting change of the set value to a permission state (setting change mode) for permitting change of the set value when the first operation unit is in the operation state; ,
means for changing the setting value based on the fact that the second operation unit is operated under the condition of the permission state;
Switching to the second state when the first operation unit is switched from a first state that is one of the operated state and the non-operated state to a second state that is the other of the operated state and the non-operated state Determination means for determining whether the state at the timing after a predetermined period has elapsed from is the second state;
When the determining means determines that the second state is established, a predetermined process corresponding to the operation of the first operation unit is permitted, and when the determining means determines that the second state is not the state, and means for prohibiting the predetermined processing.

In a game machine having a setting value changing function, diversification of the behavior of the game machine can contribute to an increase in attention to the game. However, in this type of game machine, an event (so-called chattering) may occur in which the operating state/non-operating state is finely switched at the time of operation due to rattling of the change operation means. It is feared that such an event will reduce the operational stability of the game machine and reduce the reliability of the game machine. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the first operation unit is switched from the first state to the second state, the first operation unit is operated at the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the switching to the second state. status is checked. Normally, when the predetermined period has elapsed, the state is determined to be the second state and the predetermined process is permitted, but when the second state is not established, the predetermined process is prohibited. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress malfunction of the gaming machine and contribute to improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the predetermined processing is prohibited until the determination is made by the determination means after the first operation unit is operated.

As shown in this feature, the occurrence of malfunction is suitably suppressed by prohibiting a predetermined process until a predetermined period elapses after switching to the second state (until determination is made by the determination means). can.

Feature J3. wherein the first state is the operated state and the second state is the non-operated state;
The determining means determines, when the first operation unit is switched from the operating state to the non-operating state, whether the state is the non-operating state at a timing after the predetermined period has passed since the switching to the non-operating state. having means for determining
A configuration in which the predetermined processing is permitted when the determination means determines that the state is the non-operation state, and the predetermined processing is prohibited when the determination device determines that the non-operation state is not the state. The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, characterized by:

According to the configuration shown in this feature, at the time of switching from the permission state to the prohibition state, predetermined processing is avoided regardless of the state of the first operation unit until at least a predetermined period has elapsed after switching to the non-operation state. Therefore, even if the above-described chattering occurs when the first operation unit is switched to the non-operating state, it is possible to avoid executing the predetermined process under the condition where the chattering occurs. As a result, it is possible to prevent chattering that occurs when switching to the non-operating state from becoming a cause of malfunction.

Feature J4. A power supply device (power supply/launch control device 243) and a power operation unit (power switch 247) operated to start power supply from the power supply device,
The setting value setting means changes the control state of the game machine to the permission state (setting change mode) when the power operation unit is turned on while the first operation unit is in the operation state. It is configured to switch to
The control state of the game machine is changed by switching the first operation unit from the non-operation state to the operation state under the condition that the power supply operation unit is in the ON state and the control state is the prohibition state. means for switching to a notification control state (for example, setting confirmation mode) for notifying the setting value set by the setting value setting means (for example, a function for executing setting confirmation processing);
wherein the first state is the operated state and the second state is the non-operated state;
The determining means determines, when the first operation unit is switched from the operating state to the non-operating state, whether the state is the non-operating state at a timing after the predetermined period has passed since the switching to the non-operating state. having means for determining
When the determining means determines that the state is the non-operating state, transition processing to the notification control state, which is the predetermined processing, is permitted, and when the determining means determines that the non-operating state is not the state. , the game machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, characterized in that the transition process to the notification control state, which is the predetermined process, is prohibited.

In a game machine having two functions of changing a set value (setting change) and confirming a set value (setting confirmation), by unifying the operation system to change operation means (especially the first operation unit), the game machine It is possible to suppress the complication of the configuration. However, in such a configuration, the switching from the permission state to the prohibition state should be performed due to the occurrence of the above-described chattering in the first operation unit, but there is an inconvenience that the switch is made to the notification control state contrary to the operator's intention. can occur. Occurrence of such a malfunction is undesirable because it causes confusion for the operator. In this regard, even if the first operation unit is switched from the permitted state to the non-operated state, the prohibited state is maintained until a predetermined period elapses instead of immediately shifting to the prohibited state. By doing so, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature J5. Characteristic feature J4, further comprising: notification means for notifying the setting value set by the setting value setting means when the first operation unit is switched from the operation state to the non-operation state. game machine.

When the switching operation to the non-operating state is performed, the set value is informed accordingly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the switching operation has not been accepted normally even though the switching operation has been performed.

Feature J6. wherein the first state is the non-operating state and the second state is the operating state;
The determining means determines, when the first operation unit is switched from the non-operating state to the operating state, whether or not the state is the operating state at a timing after the predetermined period has passed since the switching to the operating state. have means to
The predetermined processing is permitted when the determining means determines that the operating state is present, and the predetermined processing is prohibited when the determining means determines that the operating state is not the operating state. The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, characterized in that

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when switching from the prohibited state to the permitted state, predetermined processing (for example, switching to the prohibited state) is performed regardless of the state of the first operation unit until at least a predetermined period has elapsed after switching to the operation state. return processing) is avoided. Therefore, even if the above-described chattering occurs when the first operation unit is switched to the operating state, it is possible to avoid termination of the permission state due to the chattering. As a result, it is possible to prevent chattering that occurs when switching to the operating state from becoming a factor of malfunction.

Feature J7. A power supply device (power supply/launch control device 243) and a power operation unit (power switch 247) operated to start power supply from the power supply device,
The setting value setting means changes the control state of the game machine to the permission state (setting change mode) when the power operation unit is turned on while the first operation unit is in the operation state. It is configured to switch to
The control state of the game machine is changed by switching the first operation unit from the non-operation state to the operation state under the condition that the power supply operation unit is in the ON state and the control state is the prohibition state. means for switching to a notification control state (for example, setting confirmation mode) for notifying the setting value determined by the setting value setting means (for example, a function for executing setting confirmation processing);
wherein the first state is the non-operating state and the second state is the operating state;
The determining means determines, when the first operation unit is switched from the non-operating state to the operating state, whether or not the state is the operating state at a timing after the predetermined period has passed since the switching to the operating state. have means to
When the determination means determines that the operation state is present, the switching process to the prohibited state, which is the predetermined process, is permitted, and when the determination means determines that the operation state is not the predetermined The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, wherein the switching process to the prohibited state, which is the process of (1), is prohibited.

In a game machine having two functions of changing a set value (setting change) and confirming a set value (setting confirmation), by unifying the operation system to change operation means (especially the first operation unit), the game machine It is possible to suppress the complication of the configuration. However, in such a configuration, the above-described chattering occurs in the first operation unit, which should switch from the prohibited state to the permitted state. state) may occur. Occurrence of such a malfunction is undesirable because it causes confusion for the operator. In this respect, even if the first operation unit is switched to the operation state in the prohibition state, the permission state should be maintained until a predetermined period elapses instead of returning to the prohibition state immediately. Therefore, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature J8. 1st periodic processing (for example, timer interrupt processing and normal processing in the main control device 162) is repeatedly executed at a preset first cycle, and provided in the game area (game area PE) in the first periodic processing Main control means (main controller 162) for executing processing for outputting payout command information based on the ball entering the ball entry portion (for example, the actuation openings 83a and 83b);
A gaming machine comprising payout control means (payout control device 242) for controlling the payout means (payout device 224) so that game balls are paid out based on the input of the payout command information,
a ball entry state monitoring means (monitoring device 600) for monitoring the state of ball entry into the ball entry section by repeatedly executing the second periodic processing at a preset second cycle;
The ball entry status monitoring means includes:
A set value setting means (lottery by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162) for setting one set value out of the set values (set 1 to set 3) provided in a plurality of stages (set 1 to set 3) corresponding to the acquisition expected value of the game ball. function to switch tables) and
a change operation means (for example, a setting key switch 608 or a setting change switch 609 attached to the monitoring device 600) operated to change the setting value set by the setting value setting means;
Determination means (determination function in the MPU 602 of the monitoring device 600) for determining the operation of the change operation means in the second periodic processing,
The main control means is configured to execute the first periodic processing based on the set value determined by the set value setting means,
The gaming machine, wherein the second cycle in which the second periodic processing is executed is longer than the first cycle in which the first periodic processing is executed.

In a game machine having a setting value changing function, diversification of the behavior of the game machine can contribute to an increase in attention to the game. However, in this type of game machine, an event (so-called chattering) may occur in which the operating state/non-operating state is finely switched at the time of operation due to rattling of the change operation means. It is feared that such an event will reduce the operational stability of the game machine and reduce the reliability of the game machine. In particular, shortening the cycle of the first periodic processing is effective in realizing smooth progress of the game and improvement of responsiveness, etc. However, chattering occurs in a configuration in which operation determination is performed in a periodic processing with a short execution cycle. easier to pick up. In other words, when the execution cycle is long, there is concern that an event that is not so problematic may become a cause of malfunction. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, various configurations related to setting changes are provided in the ball entry state monitoring means set so that the execution cycle of the regular processing is longer than that of the main control means. Therefore, it is possible to suitably reduce the occurrence of malfunction due to the influence of chattering. This can contribute to improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

It should be noted that the "first periodical processing (for example, timer interrupt processing and normal processing in the main control device 162) is repeatedly executed at a preset first cycle shown in this feature, and the game area ( Main control means for executing output processing of payout command information based on ball entry into ball entry portions (for example, actuation openings 83a and 83b) provided in game area PE); "Ball-entering state monitoring means for monitoring the state of ball-entering into the ball-entering section by repeatedly executing the second periodic processing at a predetermined cycle" is replaced with "the first periodic processing (for example, the main controller 162 (timer interrupt processing and normal processing) are repeatedly executed, and in the first periodical processing, based on the ball entering the ball entering portion (for example, operation openings 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE) Main control means for executing processing for outputting payout command information”; It is also possible to use it as "situation monitoring means".

Feature J9. The first regular process is a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to feature J8, further comprising means for regulating the first periodical processing in the main control means when the change operation means is operated by the ball entry status monitoring means.

When the main configuration related to the setting change is arranged in the ball entry state monitoring means, the setting value is changed by the ball entry monitoring means while the game is in progress, and the change is reflected in the main control means. A time lag occurs. Therefore, by regulating the first periodic processing when the change operation means is being operated, it is possible to avoid the influence of such timing deviation.

It should be noted that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the characteristic groups A to I to the characteristic group J detailed above.

<Characteristic group K>
The following feature group K is defined as "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays patterns on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, a A lottery is executed to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, with the winning of a prize in the ball entry section, and if the lottery is won, a specific pattern combination etc. With respect to the background art that the final stop display is displayed and the game state shifts to a specific game state (see, for example, Patent Document 1), "In recent years, various ideas have been made to improve the security of game machines. However, There is still room for improvement in the construction of game machines in order to improve crime prevention performance."

Features K1. Periodic processing execution means (function for executing periodic processing by MPU 402 of main control unit 162) that controls the progress of the game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (for example, normal processing and timer interrupt processing) at a predetermined cycle. In a game machine equipped with
The periodic processing execution means is
First updating means (counter updating function in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) for updating first numerical information (for example, winning random number counter C1) in the periodic processing;
When a ball is entered into a ball entry portion (for example, operation openings 83a and 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE), the first numerical information at the timing when the ball is entered is acquired, Numerical information acquiring means (a function of acquiring and storing the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for storing the acquired first numerical information in the first storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404); ,
A lottery means (for example, a lottery lottery) that performs a lottery (for example, a lottery lottery) using the first numerical information stored in the first storage means and a lottery information group (a lottery table) in which the lottery information is determined. a function to perform a lottery for winners),
As the lottery information group, a plurality of lottery information groups (for example, winning/failure tables corresponding to setting 1 to setting 3) configured so that the number of pieces of winning information to be a winning result in the lottery are different, and the lottery means performs the lottery by referring to one winning information group among the plurality of winning information groups,
Operation means (main control unit) operated to change the winning information group to be referred to by the lottery means or to confirm which winning information group is to be referred to by the lottery means a setting key switch 167 attached to the device 162, a setting change switch 166, etc.);
Second updating means for updating second numerical information (for example, a winning random number counter CX) different from the first numerical information at a predetermined period asynchronous with updating of the first numerical information by the first updating means. (update circuit 651);
a second storage means (hit random number register 654) for storing the second numerical information updated by the second updating means;
A numerical value for setting the first numerical information based on the second numerical information stored in the second storage means when the reference object is changed by the operation means or the reference object is confirmed. A game machine characterized by comprising information setting means (a function of executing an initial value setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162).

If the manager of the gaming hall changes the numerical information group to be referenced (setting change) or confirms the numerical information group to be referenced (setting confirmation), for example, the periodic processing may be temporarily suspended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress malfunction of the game machine. However, considering that the first numerical information is updated in regular processing, updating of the first numerical information is stopped during setting change or setting confirmation. In this case, there is a concern that the update pattern of the first numerical information is likely to be predicted from the timing of the setting change operation and setting confirmation operation. In other words, when the update function of the first numerical information is incorporated into the update process, the update pattern can be diversified if the regular process is progressing as usual, but if the regular process stops progressing, the above-mentioned inconvenience can occur. As described above, there is still room for improvement in the configuration related to the update of numerical information in order to improve the security function of the gaming machine.

Here, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when a setting change operation or a setting confirmation operation is performed, based on the second numerical information (for example, the same numerical information as the first numerical information) is set. That is, by using the second numerical information provided separately from the first numerical information, it is possible to make the update pattern of the first numerical information difficult to understand. Therefore, even if the periodical processing stops and the updating of the first numerical information is stopped as described above, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the crime prevention function caused by that.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "regular processing executing means for controlling the progress of the game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (for example, normal processing and timer interrupt processing) at a predetermined cycle (the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 function to execute periodic processing), the periodic processing executing means includes first updating means (main controller 162 counter update function in the MPU 402), and when a ball is entered into a ball entry portion (for example, operation openings 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE), at the timing when the ball is entered Numerical information acquiring means (the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 hits the random number counter C1 A lottery (for example, a lottery) is performed using the first numerical information stored in the first storage means and the winning information group (winning/failure table) in which the winning information is determined. lottery means (a function of performing a lottery by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162), and as the lottery information group, a plurality of pieces of lottery information that are different in the number of lottery results. a winning information group (for example, a success/failure table corresponding to settings 1 to 3) is provided, and the lottery means refers to one winning information group among the plurality of winning information groups to perform the lottery; Operation means (main control unit) operated to change the winning information group to be referred to by the lottery means or to confirm which winning information group is to be referred to by the lottery means 162 (setting key switch 167, setting change switch 166, etc.) and the updating of the first numerical information by the first updating means are asynchronous with each other at a predetermined cycle. Second update means (update circuit 651) for updating binary numerical information (for example, winning random number counter CX), and second storage means (winning random number register 654) for storing the second numerical information updated by the second updating means. ), and when the reference object is changed by the operation means or when the reference object is confirmed, the numerical information is the same as the second numerical information stored in the second storage means. Numerical information setting means for setting the first numerical information (function for executing initial value setting processing in MPU 402 of main controller 162) A gaming machine characterized by comprising: ', or 'regular processing execution means for controlling the progress of the game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (for example, normal processing or timer interrupt processing) at a predetermined cycle (regular processing by MPU 402 of main control device 162 function of executing processing), the periodic processing executing means includes first updating means (MPU 402 of main controller 162) for updating first numerical information (for example, winning random number counter C1) in the periodic processing. counter update function), and when a ball enters a ball entry portion (for example, operation openings 83a and 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE), the above-mentioned second 1 Numerical information is acquired, and the acquired first numerical information is stored in the first storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 of RAM 404). A lottery (for example, a lottery lottery) using the first numerical information stored in the first storage means and the winning information group (winning information table) in which the winning information is determined. means (a function of performing a winning lottery by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162), and as the winning information group, a plurality of winning information configured so that the number of winning information that becomes a winning result in the lottery is different. wherein the lottery means performs the lottery by referring to one winning information group among the plurality of winning information groups, and changing the winning information group to be referred to by the lottery means; Operation means (setting key switch 167 attached to main control unit 162, setting change switch 166, etc.) operated to confirm which winning information group is to be referred to by the lottery means. and second numerical information different from the first numerical information (for example, a winning random number counter CX) is updated at a predetermined period asynchronous with the updating of the first numerical information by the first updating means. updating means (update circuit 651), when the reference object is changed or confirmed by the operation means, the second numerical information is acquired, and the same numerical value as the acquired second numerical information; A game machine characterized by comprising numerical information setting means (a function of executing initial value setting processing by an MPU 402 of a main control unit 162) for setting the first numerical information so as to be information." good too.

Feature K2. It is characterized by comprising means for regulating progress of the periodic processing by the periodic processing execution means when the reference target is changed or the reference target is confirmed by the operation of the operation device. The gaming machine described in K1.

In a configuration in which the first numerical information is updated as part of the periodic processing, stopping the periodic processing also interrupts the update of the first numerical information. The updating of the first numerical value information is restarted, for example, upon completion of the setting change or setting confirmation. With such a configuration, there is a concern that it is easy to predict the random number update period or the like from the end timing of the change operation. This is not preferable in terms of suppressing cheating, such as playing a game aiming at a predetermined random number value. By applying the technical ideas shown in the feature K1 and the like to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value and preferably improve the security function of the game.

Feature K3. The second updating means has an oscillating means capable of outputting a pulse signal that is switched on and off at a predetermined cycle when power is supplied, and updates the second numerical information based on the pulse signal from the oscillating means. The game machine according to feature K1 or feature K2, which is configured to be updated.

According to the configuration shown in feature K3, the second numerical information can be updated while power is being supplied. In other words, the second numerical information can be updated by the second update means independent of the periodic processing even while the change work or confirmation work is being performed. This makes it difficult to specify or predict the second numerical information to be applied when applying the second numerical information to the first numerical information during or at the end of change work or confirmation work, for example.

In addition, even if the setting is changed at the start of power supply, the second numerical information can be updated without various processes such as startup. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as not being able to update information in time.

Feature K4. The numerical information setting means is configured to acquire the second numerical information stored in the second storage means when the change of the reference target or the confirmation of the reference target is completed,
1. Any one of features K1 to K3, wherein the second update means is configured to update the second numerical information even while the reference target is changed or the reference target is confirmed. The gaming machine described in 1.

When performing change work or confirmation work, the work time varies to some extent. In the configuration shown in this feature, the period is used to update the second numerical information, so it is possible to make it difficult to predict the acquired second numerical information.

Feature K5. The gaming machine according to feature K4, wherein the update period of the second numerical information by the second update means is shorter than the update period of the first numerical information by the first update means.

As indicated by feature K4, updating the second numerical information during change work or confirmation work has technical significance. By updating the second numerical information at short intervals, it becomes more difficult to predict the second numerical information. Therefore, in the configuration in which the second numerical information is updated separately from the regular processing as shown in the feature K1, etc., updating at a shorter cycle than the regular processing can contribute to further improvement of the crime prevention function. . It should be noted that shortening the update period in the regular processing relating to the progress of the game causes an increase in the processing load of the regular processing. The configuration shown in this characteristic can suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience.

Feature K6. The periodic processing execution means is
Third updating means (counter updating function in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) for updating third numerical information (for example, winning random number counter C1) in the periodic processing;
When the first numerical information is updated by the first updating means and the first numerical information becomes predetermined numerical information, the first numerical information is updated so as to become the same numerical information as the third numerical information. and means for setting
The numerical information setting means sets the numerical information to be the same as the second numerical information stored in the second storage means when the reference target is changed by the operation means or the reference target is confirmed. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, further comprising means for setting the third numerical information as follows.

When the first numerical information becomes predetermined numerical information, resetting the first numerical information (setting the initial value) using the third numerical information diversifies the update pattern of the first numerical information and This is advantageous in making prediction of the first numerical information difficult. Here, when the setting change or setting confirmation described above is performed, not only the first numerical value information but also the third numerical value information is changed according to the second numerical value information. This makes it difficult to predict the third numerical information itself, and contributes to further improvement of the crime prevention function.

Feature K7. a main control means (main control device 162) having the periodic processing execution means;
ball entry status monitoring means (monitoring device 600) for monitoring the ball entry status to the ball entry section based on information from the main control means;
The ball entry status monitoring means sends second numerical information stored in the second storage means to the main control means based on a request from the second update means and the second storage means, and the main control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, further comprising transmitting means for transmitting the .

As shown in feature K7, in a configuration in which the ball entry state monitoring means provided separately from the main control means monitors the ball entry state into the ball entry section, the second update means and the By providing the second storage means and transmitting the second numerical information from the entering state monitoring means to the main control means, it is possible to suppress an increase in the control load on the main control means. This is a preferable configuration in terms of smoothing the progress of the game. Since the ball entry monitoring means does not execute processing related to the progress of the game, even if the processing load increases, it will not hinder the progress of the game.

Feature K8. A main control means (main controller 162) that controls the progress of the game by repeatedly executing regular processing (for example, normal processing and timer interrupt processing) at a predetermined cycle,
The main control means is
First updating means (counter updating function in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) for updating first numerical information (for example, winning random number counter C1) in the periodic processing;
When a ball is entered into a ball entry portion (for example, operation openings 83a and 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE), the first numerical information at the timing when the ball is entered is acquired, Numerical information acquiring means (a function of acquiring and storing the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for storing the acquired first numerical information in the first storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404); ,
A lottery means (for example, a lottery lottery) that performs a lottery (for example, a lottery lottery) using the first numerical information stored in the first storage means and a lottery information group (a lottery table) in which the lottery information is determined. and a function to perform a lottery for winners),
As the winning information group, there are a plurality of winning information groups configured so that the number of winning information as a winning result in the lottery is different, and the lottery means selects one winning information among the plurality of winning information groups. The lottery is performed with reference to the group,
Operation means (main control unit) operated to change the winning information group to be referred to by the lottery means or to confirm which winning information group is to be referred to by the lottery means a setting key switch 167 attached to the device 162, a setting change switch 166, etc.);
a ball entry status monitoring means (monitoring device 600) for monitoring the ball entry status to the ball entry section based on information from the main control means;
The entering-ball situation monitoring means updates second numerical information (for example, a hit random number counter CX ), and a second storage means (hit random number register 654) for storing the second numerical information updated by the second update means,
The main control means acquires the second numerical information stored in the second storage means when the reference target is changed by the operation means or when the reference target is confirmed, and It is characterized by having numerical information setting means (a function of executing initial value setting processing by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for setting the first numerical information so as to be the same numerical information as the numerical information. game machine.

If the manager of the gaming hall changes the numerical information group to be referenced (setting change) or confirms the numerical information group to be referenced (setting confirmation), for example, the periodic processing may be temporarily suspended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress malfunction of the game machine. However, considering that the first numerical information is updated in regular processing, updating of the first numerical information is stopped during setting change or setting confirmation. In this case, there is a concern that the update pattern of the first numerical information is likely to be predicted depending on the timing of setting change operation and setting confirmation operation. In other words, when the update function of the first numerical information is incorporated into the update process, the update pattern can be diversified if the regular process is progressing as usual, but if the regular process stops progressing, the above-mentioned inconvenience can occur. As described above, there is still room for improvement in the configuration related to the update of numerical information in order to improve the security function of the gaming machine.

Here, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when a setting change operation or a setting confirmation operation is performed, the first numerical information is set so as to be the same numerical information as the second numerical information. That is, by using the second numerical information provided separately from the first numerical information, it is possible to make the update pattern of the first numerical information difficult to understand. Therefore, even if the periodical processing stops and the updating of the first numerical information is stopped as described above, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the crime prevention function caused by that.

In addition, in a configuration in which the ball entering state monitoring means provided separately from the main control means monitors the ball entering state, the second updating means and the second storing means is provided, and the second numerical information is transmitted from the entering state monitoring means to the main control means, an increase in the control load on the main control means can be suppressed. This is a preferable configuration in terms of smoothing the progress of the game. Since the ball entry monitoring means does not execute processing related to the progress of the game, even if the processing load increases, it will not hinder the progress of the game.

Feature K9. The ball entry status monitoring means has means for confirming a request from the main control means at a predetermined period, and the update period of the second numerical information by the second update means is longer than the predetermined period. A gaming machine according to feature K7 or feature K8, characterized in that it is shortened.

According to this feature, the actual request timing from the main control means and the acquisition timing of the second numerical information are shifted. This makes it difficult to target the desired second numerical information.

Feature K10. A power supply device (power supply/launch control device 243) that supplies power to the main control means and the ball entry status monitoring means, respectively;
Characteristic feature K7, further comprising means for delaying progress of processing in the main control means when power supply from the power supply device to the main control means and the ball-entering situation monitoring means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features K9.

According to feature K10, when the main control means requests the second numerical information to the ball entry situation monitoring means at the start of power supply, the opportunity to update the second numerical information is ensured by the ball entry situation monitoring means. be able to. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to change the setting, check the setting, etc., while aiming at the specific second numerical information.

Feature K11. Characteristic K7 to Characteristic K10, wherein the ball entry status monitoring means has means for monitoring whether or not the second numerical information is normally updated by the second update means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

For example, shortening the update cycle of the second numerical information has technical significance in making it difficult to target specific second numerical information. However, shortening the update cycle increases the control load for checking whether or not numerical information is being updated normally. An increase in the control load is not preferable because it hinders the smooth progress of the game. Therefore, in the configuration in which the ball entry situation monitoring means updates the second numerical information as shown in the feature K8, etc., the ball entry situation monitoring means should monitor whether or not the update is normally performed. Thus, it is possible to suitably avoid impairing the smoothness of the progress of the game due to the improvement of the crime prevention function.

Feature K12. Periodic processing execution means (function for executing periodic processing by MPU 402 of main control unit 162) that controls the progress of the game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (for example, normal processing and timer interrupt processing) at a predetermined cycle. In a game machine equipped with
The periodic processing execution means is
First updating means (counter updating function in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) for updating first numerical information (for example, winning random number counter C1) in the periodic processing;
When a ball is entered into a ball entry portion (for example, operation openings 83a and 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE), the first numerical information at the timing when the ball is entered is acquired, Numerical information acquiring means (a function of acquiring and storing the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for storing the acquired first numerical information in the first storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404); ,
A lottery means (for example, a lottery lottery) that performs a lottery (for example, a lottery lottery) using the first numerical information stored in the first storage means and a lottery information group (a lottery table) in which the lottery information is determined. and a function to perform a lottery for winners),
As the winning information group, there are a plurality of winning information groups configured so that the number of winning information as a winning result in the lottery is different, and the lottery means selects one winning information among the plurality of winning information groups. The lottery is performed with reference to the group,
Operation means (setting key switch 167, setting change switch 166, etc. attached to the main controller 162) operated to change the winning information group to be referred to by the lottery means;
Second updating means for updating second numerical information (for example, a winning random number counter CX) different from the first numerical information at a predetermined period asynchronous with updating of the first numerical information by the first updating means. (update circuit 651);
a second storage means (hit random number register 654) for storing the second numerical information updated by the second updating means;
Numerical information setting means ( a function of executing initial value setting processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162).

When the manager of the gaming hall changes the numerical information group to be referred to (setting change), for example, by suspending the regular processing, malfunction of the gaming machine can be suppressed. However, considering that the first numerical information is updated in regular processing, updating of the first numerical information is stopped during the setting change. In this case, there is a concern that the update pattern of the first numerical information is likely to be predicted depending on the timing of the setting change operation. In other words, when the update function of the first numerical information is incorporated into the update process, the update pattern can be diversified if the regular process is progressing as usual, but if the regular process stops progressing, the above-mentioned inconvenience can occur. As described above, there is still room for improvement in the configuration related to the update of numerical information in order to improve the security function of the gaming machine.

Here, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when a setting change operation or a setting confirmation operation is performed, the first numerical information is set so as to be the same numerical information as the second numerical information. That is, by using the second numerical information provided separately from the first numerical information, it is possible to make the update pattern of the first numerical information difficult to understand. Therefore, even if the periodical processing stops and the updating of the first numerical information is stopped as described above, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the crime prevention function caused by that.

Feature K13. Periodic processing execution means (function for executing periodic processing by MPU 402 of main control unit 162) that controls the progress of the game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (for example, normal processing and timer interrupt processing) at a predetermined cycle. In a game machine equipped with
The periodic processing execution means is
First updating means (counter updating function in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) for updating first numerical information (for example, winning random number counter C1) in the periodic processing;
When a predetermined event (for example, a ball entering the operation openings 83a and 83b) occurs, the first numerical information is acquired at the timing when the predetermined event occurs, and the acquired first numerical information is stored in the first storage means ( Numerical information acquisition means (function for acquiring and storing the value of the hit random number counter C1 in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) stored in the reserved ball storage area 432) of the RAM 404;
A lottery means (for example, a lottery lottery) that performs a lottery (for example, a lottery lottery) using the first numerical information stored in the first storage means and a lottery information group (a lottery table) in which the lottery information is determined. and a function to perform a lottery for winners),
As the winning information group, there are a plurality of winning information groups configured so that the number of winning information as a winning result in the lottery is different, and the lottery means selects one winning information among the plurality of winning information groups. The lottery is performed with reference to the group,
Operation means (main control unit) operated to change the winning information group to be referred to by the lottery means or to confirm which winning information group is to be referred to by the lottery means a setting key switch 167 attached to the device 162, a setting change switch 166, etc.);
Second updating means for updating second numerical information (for example, a winning random number counter CX) different from the first numerical information at a predetermined period asynchronous with updating of the first numerical information by the first updating means. (update circuit 651);
a second storage means (hit random number register 654) for storing the second numerical information updated by the second updating means;
The first numerical value is set so as to be the same numerical information as the second numerical information stored in the second storage means when the reference object is changed by the operation means or when the reference object is confirmed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising numerical information setting means for setting information (a function for executing initial value setting processing by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162).

If the manager of the gaming hall changes the numerical information group to be referenced (setting change) or confirms the numerical information group to be referenced (setting confirmation), for example, the periodic processing may be temporarily suspended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress malfunction of the game machine. However, considering that the first numerical information is updated in periodic processing, updating of the first numerical information is stopped during setting change or setting confirmation. In this case, there is a concern that the update pattern of the first numerical information is likely to be predicted depending on the timing of setting change operation and setting confirmation operation. In other words, when the update function of the first numerical information is incorporated into the update process, the update pattern can be diversified if the regular process is progressing as usual, but if the regular process stops progressing, the above-mentioned inconvenience can occur. As described above, there is still room for improvement in the configuration related to the update of numerical information in order to improve the security function of the gaming machine.

Here, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when a setting change operation or a setting confirmation operation is performed, the first numerical information is set so as to be the same numerical information as the second numerical information. That is, by using the second numerical information provided separately from the first numerical information, it is possible to make the update pattern of the first numerical information difficult to understand. Therefore, even if the periodical processing stops and the updating of the first numerical information is stopped as described above, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the crime prevention function caused by that.

It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to J to the feature group K detailed above.

<Characteristic group L>
The feature group L below is defined as "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays patterns on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, the Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a special game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1). However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention to games." It was done with a task.

Feature L1. A starting ball entry portion (operation openings 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE),
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section (function for acquiring holding information by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162);
Acquired information storage means (function for storing pending information in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A lottery means (main controller) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (e.g. opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. 162 of the MPU 402 to execute the suitability determination process, etc.);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the special game state, game state transition means for shifting the game state to the special game state (game state by MPU 402 of main control device 162) function to execute the migration process) and
A set value setting means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for setting one set value among the set values (set 1 to set 3) provided in a plurality of stages (set 1 to set 3) corresponding to the acquisition expected value of the game ball. function to perform change processing) and
setting value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main controller 162, etc.) operated to change the setting value set by the setting value setting means;
an operating means (game ball shooting handle 41) operated by a player;
Set value suggesting means (air blower 750 and MPU 442 of notification/production control device 140) suggesting the set value set by the set value setting means by changing the tactile sensation to the player touching the operation means. A game machine characterized by comprising a setting suggestion function in ).

According to the feature L1, the set value is suggested by transmitting a tactile change to the player's hand or the like touching the operation means. According to such a configuration, a game is played on the gaming machine, compared to the case where a visual change is caused on the display screen or an auditory change is caused by a speaker or the like. It is possible to reduce the chances that the presence or absence of suggestions and the contents thereof are known to players other than players. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to encourage a player who is trying to guess the setting value to play the game, thereby contributing to an improvement in the operation rate of the gaming machine.

Feature L2. A starting ball entry portion (operation openings 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE),
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section (function for acquiring holding information by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162);
Acquired information storage means (function for storing pending information in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A lottery means (main controller) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (e.g. opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. 162 of the MPU 402 to execute the acceptance/rejection determination process, etc.);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the special game state, game state transition means for shifting the game state to the special game state (game state by MPU 402 of main control device 162) function to execute the migration process) and
A set value setting means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for setting one set value among the set values (set 1 to set 3) provided in a plurality of stages (set 1 to set 3) corresponding to the acquisition expected value of the game ball. function to perform change processing) and
setting value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main controller 162, etc.) operated to change the setting value set by the setting value setting means;
an operation means (game ball shooting handle 41) operated by a player;
Set value suggesting means (air blower 750) for suggesting the set value set by the set value setting means to the player by switching the operating means from the first state to a second state having a different tactile sensation from the first state. and a setting suggestion function in the MPU 442 of the notification/production control device 140).

According to the feature L2, the set value is suggested by transmitting a tactile change to the player's hand or the like touching the operation means. According to such a configuration, a game is played on the gaming machine, compared to the case where a visual change is caused on the display screen or an auditory change is caused by a speaker or the like. It is possible to reduce the chances that the presence or absence of suggestions and the contents thereof are known to players other than players. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to encourage a player who is trying to guess the setting value to play the game, thereby contributing to an improvement in the operation rate of the gaming machine.

In particular, when the operation means is operated by the player, at least part of the operation means is covered by the player's hand or the like. As a result, the above-described concealing effect can be favorably exhibited.

Note that the setting value suggesting means shown in features L1 and L2 may have any specific configuration for generating a tactile change. It may be configured to send the temperature, or may be configured to change the temperature by a heating unit or a cooling unit.

Feature L3. Characteristic L2, characterized in that the operation means is configured such that it is difficult or impossible for a player to distinguish between the first state and the second state from the appearance of the operation means. The game machine described.

As shown in feature L3, if the state of the operating means is made difficult or impossible to identify from the appearance of the operating means, it is possible to preferably reduce the chances that other players will know whether or not setting values are suggested. can.

Feature L4. By switching the operating means from the first state to the second state, an expectation indicating means for suggesting the degree of expectation that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the winning result (a chance-up effect by blowing device 750, etc.) A gaming machine according to feature L2 or feature L3, characterized by comprising a function of executing

By suggesting the set value shown in the feature L2, etc., by using the configuration that suggests the degree of expectation for the winning result by switching the state of the operation means, the degree of expectation is suggested when the state of the operation means is switched. and the game of guessing which of the set value suggestion is added. As a result, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "informing means (blower device) for informing the degree of expectation that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the winning result by switching the operation means from the first state to the second state. 750, etc.), the game machine described in feature L2 or feature L3.

Feature L5. a pattern display device (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and capable of displaying a plurality of patterns (symbol rows Z1 to Z3) on the display screen;
display control means (annunciation/effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for stopping and displaying the patterns so as to form a combination of patterns corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means after the patterns are variably displayed. ,
The setting value suggesting means and the expectation level suggesting means switch the operation means from the first state to the second state when the display control means performs the variable display and the stop display of the pattern. In the period during which the variable display and the stop display are performed, the timing at which the setting value suggesting means switches to the second state and the expected degree suggesting means switches to the second state. The gaming machine according to feature L4, characterized in that it is configured to be different from .

As shown in the feature L4, in the configuration in which the operating means suggests the degree of expectation and the set value, a game is added to guess which suggestion is made when the operating means switches to the second state. Here, if such a guess becomes substantially difficult, there is a concern that the player will be confused and the effect of improving the degree of attention described above will not be exhibited satisfactorily. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the timing of switching to the second state is changed depending on which suggestion is performed while the pattern is being displayed from the variable display to the stop display (during the game). By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature L6. a pattern display device (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and capable of displaying a plurality of patterns (symbol rows Z1 to Z3) on the display screen;
display control means (annunciation/effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for stopping and displaying the patterns so as to form a combination of patterns corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means after the patterns are variably displayed. ,
The display control means includes a first display effect (operation corresponding effect) and a second display effect (special effect) as display effects in the pattern display device,
The expectation degree suggesting means has means for switching the operating means to the second state when the first display effect is executed,
The gaming machine according to feature L4, wherein the set value suggesting means has means for switching the operating means to the second state when the second display effect is executed.

As shown in the feature L4, in the configuration in which the operating means suggests the degree of expectation and the set value, a game is added to guess which suggestion is made when the operating means switches to the second state. Here, if such a guess becomes substantially difficult, there is a concern that the player will be confused and the effect of improving the degree of attention described above will not be exhibited satisfactorily. Therefore, as shown in the present feature, by adopting a configuration in which the flow of the display effect that causes the switching to the second state is made different, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature L7. The first display effect and the second display effect are a common portion common to the first display effect and the second display effect, and a unique portion unique to the first display effect and the second display effect. The gaming machine according to feature L6, characterized by having:

In a configuration in which the degree of expectation is suggested by switching to the second state in the first display effect and the degree of expectation is suggested by switching to the second state in the second display effect, By providing a common portion and a unique portion for each display effect, the suggestion can be guessed by looking at the entire display effect (especially the unique portion). With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably exhibit the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game by the configuration in which the display effect and the suggestion by switching to the second state are integrated.

Feature L8. a first prompting means for prompting a player to operate the operating means when the operating means is switched from the first state to the second state by the set value suggesting means;
and a second prompting means for prompting the player to operate the operating means when the operating means cannot be switched from the first state to the second state. or the game machine according to one.

As shown in the characteristic L2, etc., in the configuration in which the set value is suggested by a tactile change, the suggestion is less likely to be overlooked than in the case of suggesting the set value by means of a pattern display means, etc., which tends to attract the player's attention. more likely to be Therefore, when suggesting a set value, by prompting the user to operate the operating means, it is possible to reduce the chance of overlooking. In such a configuration, setting values of the game machine can be prevented from being easily specified by providing a case where no suggestion occurs as a configuration for prompting an operation even when the setting value is not suggested.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "means for prompting the player to operate the operation means in part when the operation means is switched from the first state to the second state by the set value suggesting means; Any one of features L2 to L7, further comprising means for urging a player to operate the operation means when the operation means cannot be switched from the first state to the second state. The gaming machine described in ." is also possible.

Feature L9. Characteristic feature L2 or feature L2 characterized in that the set value suggesting means switches the operating means from the first state to the second state based on a predetermined operation being performed on the operating means. The gaming machine according to any one of L8.

A configuration in which the operation means is switched to the second state when a predetermined operation is performed is preferable in terms of encouraging active participation in the game. In particular, in the configuration shown in this feature, since the operation target and the target for which the setting value is suggested are the same, it is necessary to move the hand or the like greatly in order to check whether there is a setting suggestion after performing a predetermined operation. There is no As a result, even if a predetermined operation is used as a condition for executing setting suggestion, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have the impression that it is troublesome.

Feature L10. a pattern display device (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and capable of displaying a plurality of patterns (symbol rows Z1 to Z3) on the display screen;
display control means (annunciation/effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for stopping and displaying the patterns so as to form a combination of patterns corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means after the patterns are variably displayed. ,
The display control means includes a ready-to-win display effect as a display effect in the pattern display device,
The set value suggesting means provides both a ready-to-win display effect executed when the lottery result by the lottery means is a non-winning result and a ready-to-win display effect executed when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result. The gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L9, further comprising means for switching the operation means to the second state.

In a game machine having a setting change function, the degree of advantage changes depending on the set value, so playing a game while guessing the set value is one of the pleasures. Here, when the ready-to-win display effect is executed, the player's attention to the game tends to increase. By adopting a configuration in which a setting value is suggested (setting suggestion) when the player's attention is high, it is possible to reduce the chances that the setting suggestion is overlooked.

In addition, when the ready-to-win display effect is executed, there is a possibility that the winning result will be notified through the ready-to-win display effect, so the degree of attention to the effect increases. However, if a non-winning result is announced in a state in which the degree of attention is high in this way, there is a possibility that the degree of attention to the game will greatly decrease as the sense of expectation decreases. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by adopting a configuration in which the setting suggestion can be executed in the ready-to-win display effect corresponding to the result of non-winning, it is possible to suppress a large decrease in the degree of attention when the result is non-winning.

Incidentally, for example, it is preferable to switch to the second state at the timing when the pattern is stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win display effect or after that.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the features L3 to L10 described in detail above to the feature L1.

Feature L11. The operation means is a first operation means (game ball shooting handle 41) operated to shoot a game ball by the game ball shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 110). The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

As shown in the feature L1 and the like, in a configuration in which a set value is suggested by a tactile change, there is a high possibility that the suggestion will be overlooked if the player is not touching the target. In this respect, as shown in the present feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be preferably suppressed by using a configuration in which suggestions are made by means of the operation means for shooting, which the player has many opportunities to touch during the course of the game.

Feature L12. The operation means is a first operation means (game ball shooting handle 41) operated to shoot a game ball by a game ball shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 110),
a second operating means (operation button 35) provided separately from the first operating means;
Means for executing an operation corresponding effect corresponding to the predetermined operation when a predetermined operation is executed by the second operating means (execution of the operation corresponding effect by the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 410) The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L10, characterized by comprising:

As shown in the feature L12, when the second operation means for effect is provided, there is a possibility that the hand is released from the first operation means when the second operation means is operated. This is not preferable because it becomes a factor that lowers the actual operating rate of the game machine. In this respect, with the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to prompt the player who expects the setting suggestion and the operation corresponding performance to operate with a hand different from the hand operating the operation means for shooting the game ball. . As a result, the occurrence of the inconvenience described above can be suppressed.

It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to I to the feature group L detailed above.

<Characteristic group M>
The following feature group M is defined as "Some game machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays patterns on the display screen. In this type of game machine, for example, a Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a win state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a special game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1). However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention to games." It was done with a task.

Feature M1. A starting ball entry portion (operation openings 83a, 83b) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PE) can enter;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section (function for acquiring holding information by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162);
Obtained information storage means (function for storing pending information in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information obtained by the information obtaining means;
A lottery means (main controller) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (e.g. opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. 162 of the MPU 402 to execute the suitability determination process, etc.);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the special game state, game state transition means for shifting the game state to the special game state (game state by MPU 402 of main control device 162) function to execute the migration process) and
A set value setting means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for setting one set value among the set values (set 1 to set 3) provided in a plurality of stages (set 1 to set 3) corresponding to the acquisition expected value of the game ball. function to perform change processing) and
setting value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main controller 162) operated to change the setting value set by the setting value setting means;
Suggestion setting means for setting the suggestion by the set value suggestion means according to the state of ball entry into the starting ball entry section (function for setting suggestion by the MPU 442 of the notification/production control device 140);
setting value suggesting means for suggesting the setting value set by the setting value setting means based on the setting by the suggestion setting means (a function of executing setting suggestion by the notification/production control device 140 and the display control device 410); A game machine characterized by comprising:

Generally, a flow path is formed by arranging game parts such as game pegs in the game area. Variation may occur in ball frequency and the like. For example, if the number of balls entering the game is constant to some extent, the game progresses smoothly and dissatisfaction with the game is reduced. There is a concern that dissatisfaction will increase and the willingness to play will likely decrease. A decrease in the player's desire to play in this way is not preferable because it hinders efforts to improve the operation rate of the gaming machine. Here, as shown in this feature, in a gaming machine having a setting change function, it is expected that the degree of attention to the game will be improved by suggesting the setting value. If such a configuration is used and a suggestion is set according to the ball-entering situation (for example, the ball-entering probability, the ball-entering frequency, the number of ball-entering per unit time), for example, the ball-entering does not occur well. In some cases, the suggestion probability can be raised and adjusted. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play, and to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Note that the "suggestion setting means" shown in this feature includes not only a configuration for changing the occurrence probability of suggestion but also a configuration for changing reliability of suggestion.

Feature M2. A starting ball entry portion (operation openings 83a, 83b) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PE) can enter;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section (function for acquiring holding information by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162);
Obtained information storage means (function for storing pending information in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information obtained by the information obtaining means;
A lottery means (main controller) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (e.g. opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. 162 of the MPU 402 to execute the suitability determination process, etc.);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the special game state, game state transition means for shifting the game state to the special game state (game state by MPU 402 of main control device 162) function to execute the migration process) and
A set value setting means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for setting one set value among the set values (set 1 to set 3) provided in a plurality of stages (set 1 to set 3) corresponding to the acquisition expected value of the game ball. function to execute change processing) and
setting value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main controller 162) operated to change the setting value set by the setting value setting means;
Setting value suggesting means for suggesting the setting value set by the setting value setting means (function for executing setting suggestion by the notification/production control device 140 and the display control device 410);
Probability changing means (probability changing function in MPU 442 of notification/production control device 140) for changing the occurrence probability of the suggestion by the set value suggesting means according to the state of ball entry into the starting ball entering section. A game machine characterized by

Generally, a flow path is formed by arranging game parts such as game pegs in the game area. Variation may occur in ball frequency and the like. For example, if the number of balls entering the game is constant to some extent, the game progresses smoothly and dissatisfaction with the game is reduced. There is a concern that dissatisfaction will increase and the willingness to play will likely decrease. A decrease in the player's desire to play in this way is not preferable because it hinders efforts to improve the operation rate of the gaming machine. Here, as shown in this feature, in a gaming machine having a setting change function, it is expected that the degree of attention to the game will be improved by suggesting the setting value. If such a configuration is used and a suggestion is set according to the ball-entering situation (for example, the ball-entering probability, the ball-entering frequency, the number of ball-entering per unit time), for example, the ball-entering does not occur well. In some cases, the suggestion probability can be raised and adjusted. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play, and to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature M3. The probability changing means identifies the ball-entering situation based on the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and changes the occurrence probability of the suggestion by the set value suggesting means based on the identification result. The gaming machine according to feature M2, wherein the gaming machine is configured as follows.

It is preferable to appropriately suggest the set value according to the state of ball entry by the function of changing the suggestion probability shown in the feature M2 in order to suppress the player's desire to play. However, if the suggestion probability is changed according to the state of ball entry, there is a concern that the increased control load in monitoring the state of ball entry may hinder the smooth progress of the game. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is adopted in which the ball entry situation is specified based on the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the ball entry situation can be easily monitored. The occurrence of inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature M4. The setting values include a first setting value (for example, setting 3) and a second setting value (for example, setting 1) that is more advantageous to the player than the first setting value;
When the setting value set by the setting value setting means is the second setting value, the probability changing means sets the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means to a preset reference value. The gaming machine according to feature M3, characterized by having means for changing the occurrence probability of the suggestion to be higher based on the fact that it is lower.

When the number of balls entering the starting ball entering section is less than the assumption (reference value) under the condition that the second set value is relatively advantageous to the player, the set value suggestion probability is high. adjusted to be In this way, by increasing the chances that the set value is suggested in a situation where the player's willingness to play tends to decline, the effect of suppressing the decline in the willingness to play shown in feature M2 can be favorably exhibited.

It should be noted that the description "includes a first setting value (for example, setting 3) and a second setting value (for example, setting 1) that is more advantageous to the player than the first setting value" shown in this feature is replaced with "relatively A first set value that is unfavorable to the player (eg, setting 3) and a second set value that is relatively advantageous to the player (eg, setting 1).

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a first setting that is disadvantageous to the player when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means as the set value is included in a predetermined reference value. A value (for example, setting 3) and a second setting value (for example, setting 1) that is disadvantageous to the player when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is included in the reference value, When the set value set by the set value setting means is the second set value, the probability change means determines that the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is less than the reference value. The game machine according to feature M3 is characterized by having a means for changing the occurrence probability of the suggestion to be higher based on the fact.".

Feature M5. When the set value set by the set value setting means is the first set value, the probability change means determines that the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is less than the reference value. The gaming machine according to feature M4, wherein the probability of occurrence of the suggestion is not changed even in such a case.

Actively informing the player that the set value is unfavorable is a factor in lowering the player's willingness to play. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the set value is the first set value, the correction of the occurrence probability is avoided even if the ball entry situation is below the standard. By doing so, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

Feature M6. The setting values include a first setting value (for example, setting 3) and a second setting value (for example, setting 1) that is more advantageous to the player than the first setting value;
When the setting value set by the setting value setting unit is the second setting value, the probability changing unit sets the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage unit to a preset reference value. The gaming machine according to any one of features M3 to M5, characterized in that it has means for changing the occurrence probability of the suggestion to be lower based on the fact that it exceeds.

When the number of balls entered into the starting ball entry section is higher than expected (standard) under the condition that the second set value is relatively advantageous to the player, the probability of suggesting the set value is lowered. adjusted to In this way, by reducing the chances of setting values being suggested in a situation where the player's desire to play is unlikely to decline, setting values can be set even when the chances of setting values being suggested increase due to the configuration shown in feature M4, for example. Excessive value suggestions can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the description "includes a first setting value (for example, setting 3) and a second setting value (for example, setting 1) that is more advantageous to the player than the first setting value" shown in this feature is replaced with "relatively A first set value that is unfavorable to the player (eg, setting 3) and a second set value that is relatively advantageous to the player (eg, setting 1).

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a first setting that is disadvantageous to the player when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means as the set value is included in a predetermined reference value. A value (for example, setting 3) and a second setting value (for example, setting 1) that is disadvantageous to the player when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is included in the reference value, When the setting value set by the setting value setting unit is the second setting value, the probability changing unit determines that the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage unit exceeds the reference value. The game machine according to any one of features M3 to M5, characterized in that it has means for changing the probability of occurrence of the suggestion to be low based on the fact." be.

Feature M7. When the set value set by the set value setting means is the first set value, the probability change means determines that the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means exceeds the reference value. The gaming machine according to feature M6, wherein the probability of occurrence of the suggestion is not changed even in such a case.

When balls are constantly entered to some extent, the game progresses smoothly, and the player's motivation to play is less likely to decrease. Therefore, in such a situation, it is meaningful to have a configuration that does not increase the occurrence probability of suggestions. Further, if it is possible to quickly detect that the set value is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to avoid an increase in investment due to the continuation of the game in a disadvantageous state. Therefore, by adopting a configuration that does not lower the occurrence probability of suggestions, it is possible to suppress the decrease in such chances of finding out.

Feature M8. The gaming machine according to any one of features M4 to M7, wherein the reference value is provided for each set value.

Considering the variation in ball entry described in the feature M2, etc., it is preferable to provide a certain amount of latitude in the reference value. However, if this width becomes excessively large, the probability adjustment function will not work well. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is adopted in which a reference value is provided in accordance with a set value, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be preferably suppressed.

Feature M9. The probability changing means includes first changing means for changing the probability of occurrence of the suggestion based on the ball entering situation during the first monitoring period, and based on the ball entering situation during the second monitoring period longer than the first monitoring period. A gaming machine according to any one of features M2 to M8, further comprising second changing means for changing the occurrence probability of the suggestion.

Variation in ball entry is roughly divided into variation due to constant factors such as individual differences and aging, and variation due to temporary bias. Therefore, appropriate probability adjustment (correction) can be achieved by using the two changing means shown in this feature.

Feature M10. Information corresponding to a lottery result when the predetermined special information obtained by the information obtaining means is targeted for the lottery by the lottery means is obtained at a timing before the predetermined special information is targeted for the lottery. Equipped with destination identification means to identify in
The probability changing means performs the change based on the fact that the special information stored in the acquired information storage means does not include the special information corresponding to the transition to the special game state, and stores the Features M2 to M9 characterized in that when the stored special information includes a winning result corresponding to the transition to the special game state, the change is not made. The game machine according to any one of.

When the obtained information storage means contains information corresponding to the winning result, the player's desire to play is preferably suppressed without changing the setting suggestion probability. Therefore, as shown in this feature, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by specifying the lottery result in advance and determining whether or not to change the probability of occurrence based on the result.

Feature M11. The probability changing means performs the change based on the fact that the special information stored in the acquired information storage means does not include the special information corresponding to the predetermined effect, and the probability change means is stored in the acquired information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features M2 to M10, wherein the change is not made when special information includes information corresponding to a predetermined effect.

For example, when an effect (predetermined effect) that can be expected to shift to the special game state is executed, the degree of attention to the game increases. Under such circumstances, it is assumed that the decline in motivation to play can be suppressed without intentionally changing the occurrence probability. Therefore, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by adopting a configuration in which the suggestion generation probability is not changed when a predetermined effect is coming up.

Feature M12. As the normal game state, the first normal game state (normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode) and the second normal game state (high Normal game state corresponding to frequency support mode) is provided,
The probability changing means performs the change based on the fact that the game state is the first normal game state, and does not perform the change when the game state is the second normal game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features M2 to M11, characterized in that:

In the second normal game state in which the frequency of ball entry is high as shown in feature M12, ball entry into the starting ball entry portion occurs at a certain frequency. For this reason, even if the frequency of hitting the ball decreases due to individual differences, bias, etc., it is assumed that this is unlikely to be a factor that causes a decrease in motivation to play. Therefore, it is possible to realize a practically preferable configuration by adopting a configuration in which the occurrence probability can be changed in the first normal game state, and a configuration in which the occurrence probability is not changed in the second normal game state.

It should be noted that each of the technical ideas shown in features M3 to M12 may be applied to feature M1.

Incidentally, it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature group A to feature group L to the feature group M described in detail above.

<Characteristic N group>
The following feature group N is defined as "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays patterns on the display screen. Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a special game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1). However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention to games." It was done with a task.

Feature N1. A starting ball entry portion (for example, an operation port 83a) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section (function for acquiring holding information by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162);
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Judgment means for sequentially judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information (hit information) )When,
It has a display section (display sections 843 and 844 for the ball entering section of the main display section D) that can variably display a picture, and a picture display that can stop and display a picture corresponding to the judgment result by the judgment means on the display section. means (main display unit 87);
Game state transition means for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information (game state transition by MPU 402 of main controller 162) function to perform processing) and
Suspension display control means (notification/effect control) for displaying a number of suspension images (suspension icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a suspension display area (suspension number display area Da) A function of executing pending display processing in the device 140 and the display control device 410),
The reserved display area has a plurality of unit display areas (unit reserved display areas Da1 to Da8) each capable of displaying the reserved image,
As a change display mode for changing the number of reserved images displayed in the reserved display area in accordance with a change in the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means, a first change display mode (for example, setting suggestion A special change pattern in which a corresponding picture is not formed) and the first change display mode are a second change display mode (for example, a special change pattern in which a setting suggestion corresponding picture is formed) in which the object on which the pending image is displayed in the unit display area is different. change pattern) is provided,
The pending display control means may change the display mode to any one of the first changed display mode and the second changed display mode when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means changes. A gaming machine characterized by having change display mode setting means for setting a mode.

In the arrangement for displaying pending images, its main function is to clearly indicate to the player the number of special information stored, ie, the number of remaining pending items. In recent years, there has been proposed a technique of suggesting the degree of expectation of privilege provision by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of the reserved image. As a result, the degree of attention to the reserved image (for example, a game to be executed later) is improved.

Here, it is common knowledge that these reserved images move in the same manner each time the game round progresses, and the movement manner (operation manner or shift manner) is extremely monotonous. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by diversifying the additional display pattern when additionally displaying the reserved image in the reserved display area and the shift display pattern when shifting the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area. , it is possible to suppress monotonous movement of the retained image. By devising the display of the reserved image in this way, it is possible to realize a completely novel display performance using the reserved image, which contributes to a further increase in attention to the game.

In addition, "holding display for displaying the number of pending images (holding icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the holding display area (holding number display area Da)" The description of "control means (function for executing pending display processing in notification/production control device 140 and display control device 410)" is changed to "corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means The number of pending images (holding icon MP) to be displayed in the holding display area (holding number display area Da), and displayed in the holding display area according to the change in the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means It is also possible to use a pending display control means for changing the number of pending images to be displayed (a function of executing pending display processing in the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 410).

Feature N2. The changed display mode setting means sets the first changed display mode as a changed display mode when the number of special information changes from a situation in which a specified number (for example, seven) of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature N1, characterized in that it is configured to set any one of the change display modes including the mode and the second change display mode.

According to feature N2, even if the number of pending images is changed from the same number (specified number), the pattern is different between the first changed display mode and the second changed display mode, so the display becomes monotonous. can be suitably suppressed.

Feature N3. The first change display mode and the second change display mode are configured such that the patterns formed by the plurality of reserved images are different in at least a part of the process of changing the number of reserved images. The gaming machine according to feature N1 or feature N2.

As shown in feature N3, if patterns (numbers, letters, patterns, etc.) formed by a plurality of reserved images are different when adding or shifting (decreasing) reserved images, the configuration shown in feature N1 etc. The effect of improving the degree of attention can be exhibited more preferably.

Feature N4. In the second change display mode, a predetermined pattern indicating any one of letters, numbers, and symbols is formed in the process of changing the number of the reserved images, and in the first change display mode, the number of the reserved images is changed. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N3, wherein the predetermined pattern is not formed in the process.

As shown in feature N4, if there is a difference in whether or not the predetermined pattern becomes visible in the process of changing the number of reserved images, a game for checking the presence or absence of the predetermined pattern is added. As a result, the player who expects the predetermined pattern can be encouraged to pay attention to the pending display. Thereby, the technical idea shown in the characteristic N3 can be suitably embodied.

Feature N5. Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the determination. is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game cycle, and the variable display of the pattern is performed in each game cycle according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the pattern display means is provided,
The pattern variable display period by the game cycle control means is set to be shorter as the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means increases,
The changed display mode setting means sets the first changed display mode as a changed display mode when the number of special information changes from a situation in which a specified number (for example, seven) of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. It is configured to set any change display mode including the mode and the second change display mode,
In the second change display mode, the predetermined pattern is formed when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) smaller than the predetermined number. The gaming machine according to feature N4, characterized in that:

As shown in feature N5, it is preferable to shorten the pattern variable display period according to the number of stored special information in order to speed up the progress of the game. However, as shown in feature N4 and the like, when a predetermined pattern such as numbers, letters, and patterns is displayed by combining reserved images, the display period of the predetermined pattern depends on the variable display period. Become. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which a predetermined pattern is formed when a predetermined number, which is a number smaller than the specified number, is formed, for example, a configuration in which a predetermined pattern is formed when the number is greater than the specified number. It is possible to prevent the period in which a predetermined pattern is maintained (visible period) from becoming extremely short compared to , and to suitably realize coexistence with the period shortening function.

Feature N6. In the first change display mode, when a plurality of the reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area are reduced in a first order,
In the second change display mode, when a plurality of the reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area are reduced in a second order different from the first order. , the predetermined pattern is formed when the number of special information stored in the obtained information storage means becomes a predetermined number smaller than the predetermined number,
It is difficult or impossible to distinguish between the first changed display mode and the second changed display mode until the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means reaches the predetermined number. The gaming machine according to feature N4 or feature N5, characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to feature N6, it is difficult or impossible to predict in advance which of the first change display mode and the second change display mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect of improving the interest by devising the display indicated by the feature N2 and the like from becoming unsatisfactory.

Feature N7. Information corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to determination by the determination means is stored before the predetermined special information is subject to the determination. Equipped with destination specifying means (function for specifying the destination of the pending information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) that is specified at the timing,
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N6, wherein the change display mode setting means performs the setting based on a result of specifying by the destination specifying means.

As shown in the feature N7, by specifying the special information in advance, it is possible to preferably prevent the function of performing the predetermined display by combining the pending images from interfering with the progress of the game.

Feature N8. In the second change display mode, a predetermined pattern indicating any one of letters, numbers, and symbols is formed in the process of changing the number of the reserved images, and in the first change display mode, the number of the reserved images is changed. It is configured so that the predetermined pattern is not formed in the process,
The holding display control means adds special information corresponding to transition to the special game state to the special information to be determined before the predetermined pattern is formed based on the result of the destination identification by the destination identification means. is included, and when it is determined that the special information corresponding to the transition to the special game state is included, the second change display mode is not set. The gaming machine according to feature N7, characterized in that:

For example, for a player who is playing a game in anticipation of the formation of a predetermined pattern, it leaves an impression that he missed an opportunity to check the predetermined pattern by shifting to a special game state immediately before that. easier. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the setting of the second change display mode is not performed in such a situation, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a problem.

Feature N9. The first change display mode is a first special change display mode, the second change display mode is a second special change display mode, and as the change display mode set by the change display mode setting means, the first special change In addition to the display mode and the second special change display mode, it has a normal change display mode,
The holding display control means, when the first special change display mode or the second special change display mode is set by the change display mode setting means, the unit display area and the unit display areas are displayed having means for changing the arrangement of the pending images;
In the second special change display mode, a predetermined pattern indicating any one of letters, numbers and symbols is formed in the process of changing the number of the reserved images, and in the first special change display mode, the number of the reserved images is changed. The predetermined pattern is not formed in the process of changing,
The pending display control means is a display mode changing means for changing the display mode (for example, color) of the pending image based on the identification result by the destination specifying means (notification/production control device 140 and display control device 410 function to execute production),
The changed display mode setting means is capable of setting the first special changed display mode and the second special changed display mode when the display mode of each reserved image being displayed in the reserved display area is common. The gaming machine according to feature N7 or feature N8, wherein:

According to the feature N9, it is suggested that the predetermined pattern can be formed due to the rearrangement of the unit pending display area and the pending image. In this case, since the display mode of the reserved images is common, it is difficult to predict, for example, the order in which the reserved images will decrease from the state immediately after the arrangement change.

Feature N10. Characteristic N9, characterized in that the first special change display mode and the second special change display mode are configured so that at least the position of the pending image at the time when switching of the change display mode occurs is common. The game machine described.

As shown in the configuration shown in this feature, since the arrangement of the pending images at the time of switching the changed display mode is common, it becomes obvious which special changed display mode is when the switching of the changed display mode occurs. can be avoided.

Feature N11. A starting ball entry portion (for example, an operation port 83a) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section (function for acquiring holding information by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162);
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Judgment means for sequentially judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information (hit information) )When,
A pattern display means (symbol display device 253) having a display portion (display screen 253a) capable of variably displaying a pattern, and stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the determination result of the determination means on the display portion;
Game state transition means for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information (game state transition by MPU 402 of main controller 162) function to perform processing) and
Display a number of pending images (holding icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means in a pending display area (holding number display area Da), and display the pending images as the pending display. With a pending display control means (function for executing pending display processing in the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410) that moves from the area to the determination target display region (execution target display region Db),
The reserved display area has a plurality of unit display areas (unit reserved display areas Da1 to Da8) each capable of displaying the reserved image,
As an additional display mode when additionally displaying the reserved image based on the acquisition of the special information,
A first additional display mode in which the reserved images are additionally displayed in the unit display area in a first order, and a second additional display mode in which the reserved images are additionally displayed in the unit display area in a second order different from the first order. An additional display mode is provided,
The pending display control means has means for setting any one of the additional display modes including the first additional display mode and the second additional display mode as an additional display mode when additionally displaying the suspended image. A gaming machine characterized by:

In the arrangement for displaying pending images, its main function is to clearly indicate to the player the number of special information stored, ie, the number of remaining pending items. In recent years, there has been proposed a technique of suggesting the degree of expectation of privilege provision by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of the reserved image. As a result, the degree of attention to the reserved image (for example, a game to be executed later) is improved.

Here, it is common knowledge that these reserved images move in the same manner each time the game round progresses, and the movement manner (operation manner or shift manner) is extremely monotonous. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by diversifying the additional display pattern when additionally displaying the reserved image in the reserved display area, it is possible to prevent the movement of the reserved image from becoming monotonous. By devising the display of the reserved image in this way, it is possible to realize a completely novel display performance using the reserved image, which contributes to a further increase in attention to the game.

It should be noted that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in features N2 to N10 to this feature.

Feature N12. A starting ball entry portion (for example, an operation port 83a) provided in the game area (game area PE),
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section (function for acquiring holding information by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162);
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Judgment means for sequentially judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information (hit information) )When,
A pattern display means (symbol display device 253) having a display portion (display screen 253a) capable of variably displaying a pattern, and stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the determination result of the determination means on the display portion;
Game state transition means for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information (game state transition by MPU 402 of main controller 162) function to perform processing) and
Display a number of pending images (holding icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means in a pending display area (holding number display area Da), and display the pending images as the pending display. With a pending display control means (function for executing pending display processing in the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410) that moves from the area to the determination target display region (execution target display region Db),
moving the reserved images to the judgment target display area in a first order as a movement mode of moving the reserved images to the judgment target display area when a plurality of the reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area; 1 movement mode and a second movement mode for moving the reserved images to the determination target display area in a second order different from the first order,
The game machine, wherein the holding display control means has means for setting either the first moving mode or the second moving mode as a moving mode when moving the held image.

In the arrangement for displaying pending images, its main function is to clearly indicate to the player the number of special information stored, ie, the number of remaining pending items. In recent years, there has been proposed a technique of suggesting the degree of expectation of privilege provision by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of the reserved image. As a result, the degree of attention to the reserved image (for example, a game to be executed later) is improved.

Here, it is common knowledge that these reserved images move in the same manner each time the game round progresses, and the movement manner (operation manner or shift manner) is extremely monotonous. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by diversifying shift display patterns when shift-displaying the pending image displayed in the pending display area, monotonous movement of the pending image can be suppressed. By devising the display of the reserved image in this way, it is possible to realize a completely novel display performance using the reserved image, which contributes to a further increase in attention to the game.

It should be noted that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in features N2 to N10 to this feature.

Feature N13. A starting ball entry portion (for example, an operation port 83a) provided in the game area (game area PE),
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section (function for acquiring holding information by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162);
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Judgment means for sequentially judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information (hit information) )When,
It has a display section (display sections 843 and 844 for the ball entering section of the main display section D) that can variably display a picture, and a picture display that can stop and display a picture corresponding to the judgment result by the judgment means on the display section. means (main display unit 87);
Game state transition means for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information (game state transition by MPU 402 of main controller 162) function to perform processing) and
Display control means (notification/effect control) for displaying a number of predetermined images (holding icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined image display area (holding number display area Da) A function of executing pending display processing in the device 140 and the display control device 410),
The predetermined image display area has a plurality of unit display areas (unit reserved display areas Da1 to Da8) each capable of displaying the predetermined image,
A first change display mode (for example, setting A special change pattern in which no suggestion corresponding picture is formed) and the first change display mode are a second change display mode in which the target on which the predetermined image is displayed in the unit display area is different (for example, a setting suggestion corresponding picture is formed). Special change pattern) is provided,
The display control means selects one of the changed display modes including the first changed display mode and the second changed display mode as a changed display mode when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means changes. A gaming machine characterized by having a change display mode setting means for setting a.

In the configuration for displaying the predetermined image, its main function is to clearly indicate to the player the number of special information stored, that is, the number of remaining reservations. In recent years, there has been proposed a technique of suggesting the degree of expectation of privilege provision by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of a predetermined image. As a result, the degree of attention to a predetermined image (for example, a game to be executed later) is improved.

Here, it is common knowledge that these predetermined images move in the same manner each time the game round progresses, and the movement manner (operation manner or shift manner) is extremely monotonous. Therefore, as shown in the present feature, an additional display pattern when a predetermined image is additionally displayed in a predetermined image display area and a shift display pattern when a predetermined image displayed in the predetermined image display area is shift-displayed are diversified. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the motion of the predetermined image from becoming monotonous. By devising the display of the predetermined image in this manner, it is possible to realize a novel display performance using the predetermined image, which contributes to further increasing attention to the game.

Incidentally, it is also possible to set the "predetermined image" shown in this feature as the "holding related image" and the "predetermined image display area" as the "holding related image display area".

It is also possible to apply each technical concept shown in the feature group A to the feature group M to the feature group N detailed above.

<Characteristic P group>
The following feature P group is defined as "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, a Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a win state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a special game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1). However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention to games." It was done with a task.

Feature P1. A starting ball entry portion (for example, an operation port 83a) provided in the game area (game area PE),
Information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 provided in RAM 404 of main controller 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Judgment means for sequentially judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information (a function of executing a correctness judgment process in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162);
It has a display unit (symbol display device 253) capable of variably displaying a pattern, and pattern display means (notification/effect control device 140 and display control) for stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the determination result of the determination means on the display unit. a function of executing a pattern display process in the device 410);
Game state transition means for shifting the game state to a special game state when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information. )When,
Displaying a number of pending images (holding icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means in a pending display area (a pending number display area Da), and displaying them in the pending display area. a pending display control means (notification/effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for moving the pending image to the determination target display area (execution target display area Db) as the game progresses,
The holding display control means sets the display form of the holding display area to a first display form (single horizontal arrangement) indicating the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and Display form switching means ( A game machine characterized by having a function of changing the arrangement pattern of the unit reservation display area in the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410).

In the arrangement for displaying pending images, its main function is to clearly indicate to the player the number of special information stored, ie, the number of remaining pending items. In recent years, there has been proposed a technique of suggesting the degree of expectation of privilege provision by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of the reserved image. As a result, the degree of attention to the reserved image (for example, a game to be executed later) is improved.

In the configuration shown in this feature, the display form of the reserved display area is switched between the first display form and the second display form. In the first display form, the number of stored special information can be displayed, and in the second display form, in addition to the number of stored special information, different game information (for example, set value) is displayed. becomes. By adopting a configuration in which information displayed by changing the display form of the reserved display area is added, it is possible to contribute to a further improvement in attention to the game.

Feature P2. The reserved display area is a combination of a plurality of display units (unit reserved display areas Da1 to Da8) capable of displaying reserved images,
The gaming machine according to feature P1, wherein the first display mode and the second display mode have different layout patterns of the display units.

According to the feature P2, each display mode can be clearly differentiated by making the arrangement pattern of the display sections in the first display mode different from the arrangement pattern of the display sections in the second display mode. For example, in the first display mode, the arrangement (arrangement pattern) is arranged so that the number of pieces of special information can be easily grasped, and in the second display form, the arrangement (arrangement pattern) is arranged so that the predetermined game information can be displayed.

Feature P3. The reserved display area is composed of a combination of a plurality of display units (unit reserved display areas Da1 to Da8) each capable of displaying a reserved image,
In the first display mode and the second display mode, the number of display sections in the first display mode and the number of display sections in the second display mode match, while the arrangement of the display sections in the first display mode The gaming machine according to feature P1, wherein the pattern is different from the layout pattern of the display units in the second display mode.

According to feature P3, if the number of display sections in the first display mode and the number of display sections in the second display mode are configured to match, the display modes of the reserved display area can be diversified and the game can be played. It can be suppressed from becoming a factor that confuses people.

Feature P4. The holding display control means has information display means for displaying the predetermined game information by combining the holding images displayed on the display section in the second display mode. The gaming machine according to any one of P3.

According to the feature P4, the predetermined game information is displayed by combining the pending images in the state switched to the second display mode. Even information that cannot be displayed with individual reserved images can be displayed by using a combination of a plurality of reserved images, and the expressiveness of the information can be dramatically improved.

Feature P5. The gaming machine according to feature P4, wherein the information display means is configured to display any of numbers, characters, or symbols as the predetermined game information by combining a plurality of reserved images.

For various reasons, an upper limit is often set on the number of pieces of special information stored in the acquired information storage means. In addition, the number of acquired special information may vary to some extent due to individual differences among game machines. In view of these circumstances, even if the function shown in feature P1 is applied, there is a concern that the function may not work well. Therefore, if the predetermined game information is displayed in numbers, characters, and symbols as shown in this feature, the number of necessary special information is suppressed from becoming excessively large, and the above-mentioned circumstances etc. allow the function to be exhibited well. You can prevent it from being lost.

Feature P6. Any one of features P1 to P5, wherein the reserved display area in the second display form is configured such that at least part of the reserved display area overlaps the reserved display area in the first display form. or the game machine according to one.

If the display position of the pending image changes significantly due to the switching of the display mode, it is assumed that the player will likely lose sight of the pending image. This is not preferable because it causes confusion for the player. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by configuring at least a part of the reserved display area to overlap in each display form, even when the display form is switched, the above inconvenience can be made less likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to preferably exhibit the effects shown in the feature P1 and the like.

Feature P7. The pending image displayed in the pending display area in the first display mode and the pending image displayed in the pending display area in the second display mode are configured to be the same. The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P6.

In a configuration in which the shape of the reserved display area is changed by switching the display mode, the impact can be enhanced by increasing the difference between before and after switching. However, if the difference in appearance becomes large, it becomes difficult to understand the relationship between the first display mode and the second display mode, increasing the possibility of confusing the player. Therefore, as shown in this feature, even when the display form is switched, if the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is the same, both are the same reserved display area even if the display form is different from the reserved image. can be easily predicted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-described inconveniences and preferably exhibit the effects shown in the feature P1 and the like.

Feature P8. The display form switching means has means for switching the display form of the reserved display area from the first display form to the second display form when the special information is newly stored in the acquired information storage means. In the case of performing the switching, first, after performing additional display of the reserved image corresponding to the newly acquired special information, the switching to the second display mode is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P7.

According to feature P8, the display mode of the reserved display area is switched when new special information is stored. At this time, the reserved image corresponding to the special information is additionally displayed first, and then the display form is switched, so that the addition of the special information can be prevented from being overlooked due to the switching of the display form. Further, for example, in order to diversify the order of erasing reserved images, it is technically difficult to avoid additional display of reserved images corresponding to newly acquired special information after switching to the second display mode. it makes sense.

Feature P9. When the number of special information stored in the obtained information storage means reaches a first predetermined number, which is the number required to display the predetermined information in the second display mode, the display mode switching means The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P8, characterized in that the switching from the first display mode to the second display mode is performed based on the presence of the player.

It is feared that the change in form in a situation in which information is not displayed is a factor that gives an impression that it is troublesome, and that repeated occurrence of such a phenomenon may easily lead to oversight when predetermined game information is displayed. According to the configuration shown in this feature, such inconvenience can be suppressed.

In addition, it is possible to urge a player who wants to check predetermined game information to actively play a game so as to earn special information, thereby contributing to an improvement in the operation rate of the gaming machine.

Feature P10. A first period and a second period longer than the first period are provided as a variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display means,
The display mode switching means is configured to switch between the first display mode and the second display mode while the pattern is being variably displayed such that the variable display period is the second period. The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P9, characterized in that

In order to make it easy to understand that both the first display form and the second display form are reserved display areas, or to increase the difference between the first display form and the second display form, it is necessary to switch the display forms. It can take longer. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which switching to the second display mode is performed when a relatively long second period is set as the pattern variable display period, the period necessary for switching the display mode can be earned. .

Note that it is assumed that the player's attention is more likely to be directed to the second display mode, which increases the amount of information, compared to the first display mode. When such circumstances are taken into consideration, the configuration shown in the present feature may be modified such that a first period and a second period longer than the first period are provided as the variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display means. wherein the display mode switching means switches from the first display mode to the second display mode while the pattern is being variably displayed such that the variable display period is the second period; The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P9 characterized by:

Feature P11. A starting ball entry portion (for example, an operation port 83a) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 provided in RAM 404 of main controller 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Judgment means for sequentially judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information (a function of executing a correctness judgment process in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162);
It has a display unit (symbol display device 253) capable of variably displaying a pattern, and pattern display means (notification/effect control device 140 and display control) for stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the determination result of the determination means on the display unit. a function of executing a pattern display process in the device 410);
Game state transition means for shifting the game state to a special game state when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information. )When,
Displaying a number of predetermined images (holding icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined image display area (holding number display area Da), and displaying in the predetermined image display area Display control means (notification/effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for moving the displayed predetermined image to a determination target display region (execution target display region Db) as the game progresses,
The display control means sets the display form of the predetermined image display area to a first display form (single horizontal arrangement) indicating the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and Display form switching means ( A game machine characterized by having a function of changing the arrangement pattern of the unit reservation display area in the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410).

In the configuration for displaying the predetermined image, its main function is to clearly indicate to the player the number of special information stored, that is, the number of remaining reservations. In recent years, there has been proposed a technique of suggesting the degree of expectation of privilege provision by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of a predetermined image. As a result, the degree of attention to a predetermined image (for example, a game to be executed later) is improved.

In the configuration shown in this feature, the display form of the predetermined image display area is switched between the first display form and the second display form. In the first display form, the number of stored special information can be displayed, and in the second display form, in addition to the number of stored special information, different game information (for example, set value) is displayed. becomes. By adopting a configuration in which information displayed by changing the display form of the predetermined image display area is added, it is possible to contribute to a further increase in attention to the game.

Incidentally, it is also possible to set the "predetermined image" shown in this feature as the "holding related image" and the "predetermined image display area" as the "holding related image display area".

Further, it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in features P1 to Q10 to this feature.

It is also possible to apply each technical idea shown in the feature group A to the feature group N to the feature group P detailed above.

<Characteristic Q group>
The following feature Q group is defined as "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, a Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a special game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1). However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention to games." It was done with a task.

Feature Q1. A starting ball entry portion (for example, an operation port 83a) provided in the game area (game area PE),
Information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 provided in RAM 404 of main controller 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Judgment means for sequentially judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information (a function of executing a correctness judgment process in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162);
It has a display unit (symbol display device 253) capable of variably displaying a pattern, and pattern display means (notification/effect control device 140 and display control) for stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the determination result of the determination means on the display unit. a function of executing a pattern display control process in the device 410;
Game state transition means for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information (game state transition by MPU 402 of main controller 162) function to perform processing) and
Displaying a number of pending images (holding icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means in a pending display area (a pending number display area Da), and displaying them in the pending display area. a pending display control means (notification/effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for moving the pending image to the determination target display area (execution target display area Db) as the game progresses,
The holding display control means is
When a plurality of reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, first moving means for moving the reserved images from the reserved display area to the determination target display area in a first order in which the reserved images are additionally displayed. When,
Second moving means for moving the reserved images from the reserved display area to the determination target display area in a second order different from the first order when a plurality of reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area. A game machine characterized by having

In the arrangement for displaying pending images, its main function is to clearly indicate to the player the number of special information stored, ie, the number of remaining pending items. In recent years, there has been proposed a technique of suggesting the degree of expectation of privilege provision by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of the reserved image. As a result, the degree of attention to the reserved image (for example, a game to be executed later) is improved.

Here, it is common knowledge that these reserved images move in the same manner each time the game round progresses, and the movement manner (operation manner or shift manner) is extremely monotonous. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when a plurality of reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, a movement mode in which the reserved images are moved to the determination target display area in the order of additional display (order of acquisition of special information), By using together with a movement mode of moving to the determination target display area in a different order, for example, by suddenly overtaking the preceding suspension image and causing the subsequent suspension information to move to the determination target display area. , it is possible to suppress monotonous movement of the retained image. Such diversification of the movement mode of the pending image enables novel display effects that have never existed before, and contributes to a further increase in attention to the game.

Feature Q2. A starting ball entry portion (for example, an operation port 83a) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 provided in RAM 404 of main controller 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Judgment means for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the prescribed judgment information in a prescribed order (a function of executing the propriety judgment processing by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) )When,
It has a display unit (symbol display device 253) capable of variably displaying a pattern, and pattern display means (notification/effect control device 140 and display control) for stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the determination result of the determination means on the display unit. a function of executing a symbol display control process in the device 410;
Game state transition means for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information (game state transition by MPU 402 of main controller 162) function to perform processing) and
Displaying a number of pending images (holding icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means in a pending display area (a pending number display area Da), and displaying them in the pending display area. a pending display control means (notification/effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for moving the pending image to the determination target display area (execution target display area Db) as the game progresses,
The holding display control means is
Under the condition that a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the obtained information storage means and a plurality of reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, the pieces of special information are subject to judgment by the judgment means in the predetermined order. a first moving means for moving the pending images being displayed from the pending display area to the determination target display area in the same order as the predetermined order,
Under the condition that a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the obtained information storage means and a plurality of reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, the pieces of special information are subject to judgment by the judgment means in the predetermined order. and second moving means for moving the pending images being displayed from the pending display area to the determination target display area in an order different from the predetermined order. .

In the arrangement for displaying pending images, its main function is to clearly indicate to the player the number of special information stored, ie, the number of remaining pending items. In recent years, there has been proposed a technique of suggesting the degree of expectation of privilege provision by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of the reserved image. As a result, the degree of attention to the reserved image (for example, a game to be executed later) is improved.

Here, it is common knowledge that these reserved images move in the same manner each time the game round progresses, and the movement manner (operation manner or shift manner) is extremely monotonous. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when a plurality of reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, a movement mode in which the reserved images are moved to the determination target display area in the order of additional display (order of acquisition of special information), By using a movement mode of moving to the determination target display area in a different order, for example, by suddenly overtaking the preceding pending image and causing the subsequent pending image to move toward the determination target display area. , it is possible to suppress monotonous movement of the retained image. Such diversification of the movement mode of the pending image enables novel display effects that have never existed before, and contributes to a further increase in attention to the game.

Feature Q3. The second moving means determines the special information in the predetermined order under the condition that a plurality of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means and a plurality of reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area. display in the holding display area when predetermined special information among a plurality of pieces of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to determination by the determination means. of the reserved images, the reserved image additionally displayed after the reserved image corresponding to the predetermined special information is moved from the reserved display area to the determination target display area. The gaming machine according to feature Q2.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when predetermined special information is determined, the pending image that should have been additionally displayed after that is determined instead of the pending image corresponding to the predetermined special information. Move to the target display area. With such a special movement mode, a pending image different from the pending image expected to move to the determination target display area moves to the determination target display area. By diversifying the movement mode by such overtaking, the effect of improving the degree of attention shown in the characteristic Q2 can be favorably exhibited.

Feature Q4. The holding display control means is
Determination means for determining whether to change the display mode (for example, color) of the pending image based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
and change means for changing the display mode of another pending image that follows the pending image corresponding to the special information that triggered the determination, when the determination means determines to change the display mode. ,
The game according to feature Q2 or feature Q3, wherein the pending image whose display mode has been changed by the changing means is configured to be moved to the determination target display area by the second moving means. machine.

According to the configuration of changing the display mode of the pending image as shown in the feature Q4, even when a plurality of pending images are displayed, it is possible to create a difference in the degree of expectation and the like for each pending image. . Here, the player's attention is more likely to be directed to the reserved image whose display mode has been changed, as compared with the other reserved images. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which a pending image whose display mode is changed jumps over other pending images and moves to the determination target display area, it is possible to reduce the chance that the movement is overlooked.

Further, when there is a difference in expectations, attention is more likely to be directed to the reserved image with a relatively high degree of expectation, and less attention is paid to other reserved images preceding the relevant reserved image. In this case, a certain kind of waiting occurs until the game turn related to the reserved image with a relatively high degree of expectation. In this regard, when a pending image with a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed, by adopting a configuration in which the pending image can move to the determination target display area at once, not only the above waiting can be alleviated, but also the waiting can be minimized. It is possible to preferably maintain the degree of attention by fueling the expectation that overtaking will occur suddenly even in the middle of the road.

Feature Q5. As the display mode of the pending image, a first display mode (for example, "white"), and a second display mode that is set so that the expectation that the determination result by the determination means is a winning result is higher than the first display mode Display modes (e.g., "blue", "yellow", "red") are provided,
The holding display control means is
Determination means for determining whether to change the display mode (for example, color) of the pending image based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
and changing means for changing the display mode of the pending image when the determination means determines to change the display mode,
The changing means is
Normal changing means for changing the display mode of the pending image corresponding to the special information that triggered the determination by the determining means to the second display mode;
a special changing means for changing the display mode of another pending image that follows the pending image corresponding to the special information that triggered the determination by the determining means;
The first moving means is configured to move the reserved image to the determination target display area in the predetermined order regardless of whether or not the change is made by the normal changing means,
When there is a change by the special changing means, the second moving means moves the pending image, whose display mode has been changed to the second display mode by the special changing means, to the determination object prior to other pending images. The gaming machine according to feature Q3 or feature Q4, characterized in that it is configured to move to the display area.

According to the configuration of changing the display mode of the pending image as shown in the feature Q5, even when a plurality of pending images are displayed, it is possible to create a difference in the degree of expectation and the like for each pending image. . Here, the player's attention is more likely to be directed to the reserved image whose display mode has been changed, as compared with the other reserved images. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which a pending image whose display mode is changed jumps over other pending images and moves to the determination target display area, it is possible to reduce the chance that the movement is overlooked.

Further, when there is a difference in expectations, attention is more likely to be directed to the reserved image with a relatively high degree of expectation, and less attention is paid to other reserved images preceding the relevant reserved image. In this case, a certain kind of waiting occurs until the game turn related to the reserved image with a relatively high degree of expectation. In this regard, when a pending image with a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed, by adopting a configuration in which the pending image can move to the determination target display area at once, not only the above waiting can be alleviated, but also the waiting can be minimized. It is possible to preferably maintain the degree of attention by fueling the expectation that overtaking will occur suddenly even in the middle of the road.

Feature Q6. When the display mode of the other subsequent pending image is changed to the second display mode by the changing means, the display of the additionally displayed pending image accompanying the acquisition of the special information that triggered the change The gaming machine according to feature Q5, characterized in that it is configured so as to avoid changes in mode.

According to the feature Q6, since the change of the display mode of the reserved image corresponding to the special information that triggered the special movement is restricted, it is possible to prevent the special movement from being buried. In addition, it is possible to suppress the influence of the display mode change remaining after returning to the normal movement mode after the special movement (occurrence of deviation between the expectation set for each display mode and reality).

Feature Q7. When the second moving means moves a predetermined pending image to pass another preceding pending image to the determination target display area, the display mode of the pending image is maintained at least during the movement. The gaming machine according to any one of features Q2 to Q5, wherein:

When performing the special movement shown in the feature Q2 or the like, the player's confusion can be suppressed by maintaining (not changing) the display mode of the pending image at least during the movement.

Further, for example, in a configuration in which the degree of expectation for the winning result is suggested by the display mode of the pending image, the player's attention is likely to be directed to the change in the display mode. Therefore, by avoiding a change in the display mode of the pending image during the special movement, it is possible to suppress a decrease in attention to the special movement.

Feature Q8. A movement process display area (variable display area ME) capable of displaying a moving process of the reserved image when the reserved image is moved to the determination target display area by the second moving means is arranged in parallel with the reserved display area. The gaming machine according to any one of features Q2 to Q7, characterized in that

As shown in feature Q8, if a movement of the pending image is shown when special movement occurs in the movement process display area provided side by side with the pending display area, it is possible to visually recognize that the pending image has overtaken. becomes easier to grasp.

Feature Q9. The gaming machine according to feature Q8, wherein the movement process display area is a part of the area in which the pattern is variably displayed.

In a gaming machine of the type in which the lottery result is notified by the pattern, the player's attention tends to be directed to the variable display area of the pattern. When the special movement occurs while the player is paying attention to the pattern, the reserved image passes through the variable display area, so that the special movement can be prevented from being overlooked.

Characteristics Q10. The second moving means moves the pending image to be moved by the second moving means to the determination target display area, and stops the other pending images at the same position. The gaming machine according to any one of features Q2 to Q9.

According to the feature Q10, when special movement (overtaking) occurs, the pending images other than the target pending image remain stationary. In this way, with a configuration in which a moving pending image and a stationary pending image are displayed together, it is possible to make the moving pending image stand out.

Feature Q11. The held display control means, when there is a held image additionally displayed after the held image to be moved by the second moving means, the display that has become vacant due to the movement by the second moving means. The gaming machine according to any one of features Q2 to Q10, further comprising means for maintaining the state of the area for a predetermined period of time.

When a special move by the second moving means occurs, the source of the move is prevented from being filled up until a predetermined period elapses, so even if the special move itself is overlooked, it can be grasped after the fact. It becomes possible.

It should be noted that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in features Q3 to Q11 to feature Q1.

Feature Q12. A starting ball entry portion (for example, an operation port 83a) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 provided in RAM 404 of main controller 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Judgment means for sequentially judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information (a function of executing a correctness judgment process in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162);
It has a display unit (symbol display device 253) capable of variably displaying a pattern, and pattern display means (notification/effect control device 140 and display control) for stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the determination result of the determination means on the display unit. a function of executing a symbol display control process in the device 410;
Game state transition means for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information (game state transition by MPU 402 of main controller 162) function to perform processing) and
Displaying a number of predetermined images (holding icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined image display area (holding number display area Da), and displaying in the predetermined image display area Display control means (notification/effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for moving the displayed predetermined image to a determination target display region (execution target display region Db) as the game progresses,
The display control means is
When a plurality of predetermined images are displayed in the predetermined image display area, a first sequence for moving the predetermined images from the predetermined image display area to the determination target display area in a first order in which the predetermined images are additionally displayed. means of transportation;
a second order for moving the predetermined images from the predetermined image display area to the determination target display area in a second order different from the first order when a plurality of predetermined images are displayed in the predetermined image display area; A game machine characterized by having a moving means.

In the configuration for displaying the predetermined image, its main function is to clearly indicate to the player the number of special information stored, that is, the number of remaining reservations. In recent years, there has been proposed a technique of suggesting the degree of expectation of privilege provision by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of a predetermined image. As a result, the degree of attention to a predetermined image (for example, a game to be executed later) is improved.

Here, it is common knowledge that these predetermined images move in the same manner each time the game round progresses, and the movement manner (operation manner or shift manner) is extremely monotonous. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when a plurality of predetermined images are displayed in the predetermined image display area, the predetermined images are moved to the determination target display area in the order of additional display (order of acquisition of special information). , and a moving mode of moving to the determination target display area in a different order, for example, to generate an event in which the subsequent predetermined information suddenly overtakes the preceding predetermined image and moves to the determination target display area. Therefore, monotonous movement of the predetermined image can be suppressed. Such diversification of the moving modes of the predetermined image makes it possible to create novel display effects that have never existed before, which contributes to further increasing the level of attention paid to the game.

Incidentally, it is also possible to set the "predetermined image" shown in this feature as the "holding related image" and the "predetermined image display area" as the "holding related image display area".

It is also possible to apply each technical idea shown in features Q2 to Q11 to this feature.

It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature group A to feature group P to the feature group Q detailed above.

<Characteristic group R>
The following feature group R is defined as "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, a Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a special game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1). However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention to games." It was done with a task.

Feature R1. A starting ball entry portion (for example, an operation port 83a) provided in the game area (game area PE),
Information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section;
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area in RAM 404 of main controller 162) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Judgment means for sequentially judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information (a function of executing a correctness judgment process in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162);
It has a display unit (symbol display device 253) capable of variably displaying a pattern, and pattern display means (notification/effect control device 140 and display control) for stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the determination result of the determination means on the display unit. a function of executing a pattern display control process in the device 410;
Game state transition means for shifting the game state to a special game state when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information. )When,
Displaying a number of pending images (holding icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means in a pending display area (a pending number display area Da), and displaying them in the pending display area. a pending display control means (notification/effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for moving the pending image to the determination target display area (execution target display area Db) as the game progresses,
The holding display control means is
Additional means for adding the reserved image to the reserved display area when new special information is acquired by entering the starting ball entering section (reservation icon ) and
moving means for sequentially moving the pending images displayed in the order in which they were additionally displayed in the pending display area to the determination target display area;
A game machine characterized by comprising an exchange means for exchanging a preceding reserved image and a succeeding reserved image when a plurality of reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area.

In the arrangement for displaying pending images, its main function is to clearly indicate to the player the number of special information stored, ie, the number of remaining pending items. In recent years, there has been proposed a technique of suggesting the degree of expectation of privilege provision by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of the reserved image. As a result, the degree of attention to the reserved image (for example, a game to be executed later) is improved.

Here, it is common knowledge that these reserved images move in the same manner each time the game round progresses, and the movement manner (operation manner or shift manner) is extremely monotonous. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when a plurality of pending images are displayed in the pending display area, if a configuration is adopted in which the preceding pending image and the subsequent pending image are switched, not only the appearance of the pending image but also its Movement becomes characteristic. Therefore, by diversifying the movement mode of the reserved image, it is possible to achieve a novel display effect that has never existed before, which can contribute to a further increase in the degree of attention to the game.

It should be noted that the description of "replacement means for exchanging the preceding pending image and the subsequent pending image when a plurality of pending images are displayed in the pending display area" shown in this feature is replaced with "a plurality of pending images in the pending display area. It is also possible to replace the display positions of the preceding pending image and the subsequent pending image when the pending image is displayed.

Feature R2. The moving means is configured to move the pending image displayed in the pending display area so as to gradually approach the determination target display area,
The replacement means performs the replacement of the preceding pending image and the pending image displayed at a position farther from the determination target display area than the preceding pending image as the subsequent pending image. The gaming machine described in R1.

When moving toward the display area to be determined, a pending image that is closer to the display area to be determined (preceding pending image) and a pending image that is farther from the display area to be determined (subsequent pending image) By changing the positional relationship between the display area to be judged and each reserved image, it is easy to give the player an impression as if the digestion order has been changed.

Feature R3. As the display mode of the pending image, a plurality of display modes (for example, four colors of "white", "blue", "yellow", and "red") with different expectations that the determination result by the determination means is the winning result are provided and
Display mode changing means (notification/production control device 140 and display control device) for changing the display mode of the pending image in the process in which the pending image moves within the pending display area so as to approach the determination target display area 410, the gaming machine according to feature R1 or feature R2, further comprising: a function of executing step-up display of the pending icon at 410;

As shown in the feature R3, if the display mode of the pending image changes (steps up) in the process of moving toward the display area to be determined, the process of moving to the display area to be determined is extended, and it is as if stepping up. You can make it look like you have more opportunities to upgrade.

Feature R4. As the display mode of the pending image, a plurality of display modes (for example, four colors of "white", "blue", "yellow", and "red") with different expectations that the determination result by the determination means is the winning result are provided and
Characteristic R1 to Characteristic characterized in that the replacement means is configured to perform the replacement under a situation in which the display mode of the preceding pending image and the display mode of the subsequent pending image are different. The gaming machine according to any one of R3.

As shown in feature R4, if a configuration is adopted in which held images with different display modes are exchanged, the change in appearance at the time of exchange can be favorably emphasized. In addition, even if the player misses the moment when the reserved image is replaced, the player can grasp the fact that the reserved image has been replaced after the fact, and the effect of improving the degree of attention shown in the feature R1 etc. is suitable. It is possible to demonstrate

Feature R5. As the display mode of the pending image, a first display mode (for example, "white"), and a second display mode that is set so that the expectation that the determination result by the determination means is a winning result is higher than the first display mode Including a display mode (e.g. "yellow"),
The feature R3 or the feature characterized in that the replacement means is configured to perform the replacement under a situation where the display mode of the preceding reserved image is changed to the second display mode The gaming machine described in R4.

As shown in the feature R3 and the like, in the configuration in which the degree of expectation is suggested by the display mode (for example, color) of the pending image, it is assumed that the player's attention will increase when the display mode changes. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which the pending image whose display mode is the second display mode as shown in the present feature is shifted to a later stage, it is possible to preferably maintain the state in which the degree of attention is high.

In addition, in combination with the feature R3, further changes are likely to be expected especially for those whose display mode has changed once, and the player's attention is more likely to be directed. Therefore, if the one whose display mode is changed is passed later, it is possible to prompt the player to expect a further change (step-up) in the display mode. As a result, the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game can be further enhanced.

Feature R6. The replacement means has means for performing the replacement under a situation in which the display mode of the preceding pending image to be replaced has a higher degree of expectation than the display mode of the subsequent pending image. The gaming machine according to any one of features R3 to R5.

According to the configuration shown in feature R6, it is possible to make it look as if the step-up has been restarted from the state of stepping-up to some extent, so it is possible to dramatically increase the player's attention.

Feature R7. As the display mode of the pending image, a first display mode (for example, "white"), and a second display mode that is set so that the expectation that the determination result by the determination means is a winning result is higher than the first display mode A display mode (e.g., "yellow") and a third display mode (e.g., "red") set so that the expectation that the determination result by the determination means is the winning result is the highest,
The game according to any one of features R3 to R6, wherein the replacement means is configured not to use the pending image in the third display mode as the preceding pending image. machine.

The third display mode shown in feature R7 is the display mode with the highest degree of expectation, and there is no room for step-up or the like. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the reserved image in the third display mode is not used as the preceding reserved image, it is possible to leave room for a step-up.

Feature R8. The pending display control means is configured to maintain the display mode of the pending images to be replaced over a predetermined period when the replacement is performed by the replacement means. The gaming machine according to any one of features R3 to R7.

As shown in feature R8, if the display mode of the pending image is maintained for a predetermined period after the replacement, it is possible to prevent the special movement of the pending image from causing confusion for the player.

Feature R9. Any one of features R1 to R8, characterized in that the holding display area is provided with a passing display area (variable display area ME) through which each holding image passes when the holding image is replaced by the replacing means. or the game machine according to one.

As shown in the feature R9, if a passage display area is also provided to display the replacement process of the pending images, the impression that the display modes of the pending images to be replaced are changed at the same time (that is, the replacement It is possible to make it difficult to give the impression that there is no As a result, the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game can be favorably exhibited by the special movement mode.

Feature R10. As the display mode of the pending image, a plurality of display modes (for example, four colors of "white", "blue", "yellow", and "red") with different expectations that the determination result by the determination means is the winning result are provided and
When there is special information stored at a timing prior to the special information that triggered the change of the display mode in the acquired information storage means, the special information that triggered the change corresponds to the special information. having special changing means for changing the display mode of the reserved image corresponding to the special information stored at the previous timing instead of the reserved image;
The replacement means has means for replacing the pending image corresponding to the predetermined special information and the pending image whose display mode is changed by the special changing means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the feature R10, instead of the pending image corresponding to the special information that triggered the change of the display mode, the display mode of the pending image corresponding to the special information stored at the timing before that is changed, After that, the held images will be replaced. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a novel display that has never existed before, and it is possible to more preferably exhibit the effect of improving the degree of attention shown in the feature R1 and the like.

Feature R11. The replacement means includes means for performing the replacement when the pending image whose display mode has been changed is arranged in the pending display area immediately before the determination target display area. The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R10.

In the configuration in which the pending images displayed in the pending display area are sequentially moved to the determination target display area, the player's attention is likely to be directed to the determination target display area and the area immediately before it (adjacent area). Therefore, if a pending image whose display mode has been changed is arranged in the immediately preceding region, the effect of the replacement can be strengthened by performing replacement with the subsequent pending image.

Feature R12. The switching means according to any one of features R1 to R11, characterized in that the replacement means has means for performing the replacement under a condition in which the pattern is variably displayed on the display unit. game machine.

As shown in the feature R12, by performing the replacement of the pending image during the variable display of the pattern, that is, during the stationary display in which the pending image is not moved (shifted), the replacement of the pending image is not mixed with the shift movement. It is possible to suitably suppress the difficulty of understanding.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "the replacement means includes means for moving the reserved image after the pattern is stopped and displayed by the pattern display means, and means for performing the replacement after moving by the means. The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R11, characterized by having

Feature R13. A starting ball entry portion (for example, an operation port 83a) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section;
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area in RAM 404 of main controller 162) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Judgment means for sequentially judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information (a function of executing a correctness judgment process in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162);
It has a display unit (symbol display device 253) capable of variably displaying a pattern, and pattern display means (notification/effect control device 140 and display control) for stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the determination result of the determination means on the display unit. a function of executing a symbol display control process in the device 410;
Game state transition means for shifting the game state to a special game state when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information. )When,
Displaying a number of predetermined images (holding icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined image display area (holding number display area Da), and displaying in the predetermined image display area Display control means (notification/effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for moving the displayed predetermined image to a determination target display region (execution target display region Db) as the game progresses,
The display control means is
Additional means for adding the predetermined image to the predetermined image display area when the special information is newly acquired by the ball entering the starting ball entering section function to display additional icons) and
moving means for sequentially moving the predetermined images displayed in the order in which they were additionally displayed in the predetermined image display area to the determination target display area;
A gaming machine, comprising a switching means for switching a preceding predetermined image and a succeeding predetermined image when a plurality of predetermined images are displayed in the predetermined image display area.

In the configuration for displaying a predetermined image corresponding to the number of pieces of special information, the main function is to clearly indicate to the player the number of pieces of special information stored, that is, the number of remaining reservations. In recent years, there has been proposed a technique of suggesting the degree of expectation of privilege provision by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of a predetermined image. As a result, the degree of attention to a predetermined image (for example, a game to be executed later) is improved.

Here, it is common knowledge that these predetermined images move in the same manner each time the game round progresses, and the movement manner (operation manner or shift manner) is extremely monotonous. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when a plurality of predetermined images are displayed in the predetermined image display area, if the preceding predetermined image and the following predetermined image are configured to be switched, not only the appearance of the predetermined image but also The movement is characteristic. Therefore, by diversifying the movement modes of the predetermined image, it is possible to create novel display effects that have never existed before, which can contribute to further increasing the degree of attention to the game.

Incidentally, it is also possible to set the "predetermined image" shown in this feature as the "holding related image" and the "predetermined image display area" as the "holding related image display area".

Further, it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in features R2 to R12 to this feature.

It is also possible to apply each technical concept shown in the feature group A to the feature group R to the feature group R detailed above.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: operation means (game ball shooting handle 41) operated by a player, game ball shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 110) for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, and A ball passage (guidance passage 103) that guides a game ball to a predetermined game area, and each game part (game nail 93, etc.) arranged in the game area (game area PE). A game machine that gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a passing part (general prize winning port 81, etc.).

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine as a game machine 14... Front door frame 29... Speaker part 35... Operation button 41... Game ball shooting handle 80... Game board unit 80a... Game area formation body 81... General prize-winning opening , 82... Variable prize winning device 83a...Upper operation opening 83b...Lower operation opening 87...Main display unit 91...Electric accessory 140...Notification/performance control device 162...Main control device 253...Design display device , 391a to 391f detection sensor 401 MPU 403 ROM 404 RAM 410 display control device 442 MPU 500 game information display device 600 monitoring device 602 MPU 603 information acquisition Section 604 Storage unit 750 Blower D Main display Da Hold number display area Db Execution target display area ME Fluctuation display area NE Hold display area PE Game area.

Claims (1)

A starting ball entry section provided in the game area;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section;
Acquired information storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the obtained information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information in a predetermined order;
a pattern display unit having a display unit capable of variably displaying a pattern, the display unit stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the result of determination by the determination unit;
a game state transition means for shifting a game state to a special game state when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information;
A number of pending images corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means are displayed in a pending display area, and the pending images displayed in the pending display area are displayed in accordance with the progress of the game. and holding display control means for moving to the judgment target display area,
The holding display control means is
Under the condition that a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the obtained information storage means and a plurality of reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, the pieces of special information are subject to judgment by the judgment means in the predetermined order. a first moving means for moving the pending images being displayed from the pending display area to the determination target display area in the same order as the predetermined order,
Under the condition that a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the obtained information storage means and a plurality of reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, the pieces of special information are subject to judgment by the judgment means in the predetermined order. and second moving means for moving the pending images being displayed from the pending display area to the determination target display area in an order different from the predetermined order. .

Images